Category Archives: Teachers’ Resources

GRADE 10 HOME SCIENCE SCHEMES OF WORK FOR TERM 1

GRADE 10HOME SCIENCE SCHEMES OF WORK FOR TERM 1

NAME OF THE TEACHER:………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

SCHOOL:……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. YEAR:………………………………………….

Week Lesson Strand Sub-strand Specific Learning Outcomes Key Inquiry Questions Learning Experiences Learning Resources Assessment Reflection
1 1 1.0 Foods and Nutrition 1.1 Overview By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to explain the importance of foods and nutrition. How can the knowledge of foods and nutrition inform career opportunities? Learner guided to discuss the importance of foods and nutrition as an area of study. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 1; Textbooks Oral questions
2 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to identify careers related to foods and nutrition. Learner guided to search for information on various career opportunities. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 1; Digital devices Observation
3 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to appreciate the role of foods and nutrition. Learner guided to design a career wheel and mount it on the classroom wall. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 1; Charts Project
4 1.2 Kitchen Layouts and Equipment By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to analyze kitchen layouts (L-shaped). How does a good kitchen layout enhance efficiency? Learner guided to illustrate L-shaped kitchen layouts. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 2; Layout diagrams Written quiz
5 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to analyze kitchen layouts (U-shaped/Corridor). Learner guided to illustrate U-shaped and Corridor kitchen layouts. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 2; Layout diagrams Written quiz
6 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to analyze kitchen layouts (One wall/Island). Learner guided to illustrate One wall and Island kitchen layouts. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 2; Layout diagrams Written quiz
2 1 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to describe tools used in the kitchen. How do kitchen tools enhance effectiveness? Learner guided to observe pictures or realia to identify kitchen tools. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 2; Realia/Pictures Identification
2 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to describe equipment used in the kitchen. Learner guided to observe pictures or realia to identify kitchen equipment. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 2; Realia/Pictures Identification
3 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to classify kitchen tools based on material. Learner guided to classify tools (glass, wood, plastic, metal). Curriculum Design (2024) pg 2; Kitchen tools Classification task
4 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to care for wooden/plastic tools. Learner guided to clean and store wooden and plastic tools. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 2; Cleaning agents Practical
5 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to care for metallic/glass tools. Learner guided to clean and store metallic and glass tools. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 2; Cleaning agents Practical
6 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to improvise kitchen tools. Learner guided to improvise kitchen tools using safe and locally available materials. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 2; Local materials Project
3 1 1.3 Food Hygiene and Safety By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to explain the importance of food hygiene. Why is food spoilage a concern? Learner guided to discuss the importance of food hygiene and safety. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 4; Textbooks Oral questions
2 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to differentiate food spoilage and poisoning. Learner guided to search for differences between food spoilage and poisoning. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 4; Digital devices Written table
3 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to identify signs of food spoilage. Learner guided to observe spoilt food and identify signs of spoilage. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 4; Spoilt food samples Observation
4 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to identify causes of food poisoning. Learner guided to discuss causes like chemicals and micro-organisms. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 4; Charts Discussion
5 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to apply hygiene practices (Personal). How can we adopt safe habits? Learner guided to practice personal hygiene when handling food. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 4; Soap/Water Practical
6 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to apply hygiene practices (Kitchen). Learner guided to practice hygiene in the kitchen environment. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 4; Cleaning tools Practical
4 1 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to adopt high hygiene standards. Learner guided to demonstrate high hygiene standards during food preparation. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 4; Food items Practical
2 1.4 Methods of Cooking By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to classify methods of cooking. Why is knowledge on cooking methods important? Learner guided to search on categories of cooking methods (moist vs dry). Curriculum Design (2024) pg 6; Chart Classification task
3 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to prepare food for cooking (Cutting). Learner guided to prepare food using cutting, chopping, slicing. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 6; Knives/Vegetables Practical
4 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to prepare food for cooking (Mixing). Learner guided to prepare food using blending, kneading, mixing. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 6; Bowls/Flour Practical
5 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to cook food using boiling. Learner guided to cook food using boiling method observing safety. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 6; Pot/Water/Food Practical
6 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to cook food using stewing. Learner guided to cook food using stewing method observing safety. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 6; Pot/Ingredients Practical
5 1 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to cook food using steaming. Learner guided to cook food using steaming method observing safety. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 6; Steamer/Food Practical
2 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to cook food using frying (Shallow/Deep). Learner guided to cook food using frying method observing safety. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 6; Pan/Oil/Food Practical
3 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to cook food using roasting. Learner guided to cook food using roasting method observing safety. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 6; Oven/Fire Practical
4 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to cook food using baking. Learner guided to cook food using baking method observing safety. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 6; Oven/Baking tray Practical
5 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to adopt different cooking methods. Learner guided to select appropriate methods for different foods. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 6; Various foods Menu planning
6 1.5 Nutritive Value of Foods By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to classify food nutrients. How does knowledge on nutrients promote health? Learner guided to discuss classification (carbohydrates, proteins, etc.). Curriculum Design (2024) pg 8; Food charts Classification task
6 1 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to analyse the role of nutrients. Learner guided to discuss functions of nutrients in the body. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 8; Textbooks Oral questions
2 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to group nutrients by function. Learner guided to group nutrients (energy giving, protective, body building). Curriculum Design (2024) pg 8; Food samples Grouping task
3 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to explain fortification of foods. Learner guided to discuss fortification and enrichment of foods. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 8; Resource person Report writing
4 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to identify nutritional deficiencies. Why does food choice affect health? Learner guided to search for info on nutritional deficiencies and disorders. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 8; Digital devices Research notes
5 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to plan meals for proper nutrition. Learner guided to formulate meal plans to address deficiencies. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 8; Meal plan template Practical Planning
6 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to appreciate local foods. Learner guided to use locally available foods in meal planning. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 8; Local food items Exhibition
7 MID-TERM MID-TERM BREAK MID-TERM BREAK MID-TERM BREAK MID-TERM BREAK MID-TERM BREAK MID-TERM BREAK MID-TERM BREAK MID-TERM
8 1 2.0 Home Management 2.1 Hygiene During Puberty By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to explain personal hygiene practices. How can we maintain hygiene during puberty? Learner guided to search for information on personal hygiene practices (boys/girls). Curriculum Design (2024) pg 12; Textbooks Oral discussion
2 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to review changes during puberty. Learner guided to review physical, hormonal, and emotional changes. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 12; Charts Written quiz
3 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to apply hygiene practices. Learner guided to maintain a log on personal hygiene practices. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 12; Logbook Self-assessment
4 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to discuss menstrual hygiene. Learner guided to discuss measures for managing menstrual hygiene (kits, disposal). Curriculum Design (2024) pg 12; Samples Discussion
5 2.2 Safety in the Home By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to explain causes of accidents. How can we ensure safety in the home? Learner guided to share experiences on causes of accidents at home. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 14; Pictures of hazards Oral sharing
6 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to describe the First Aid kit. Learner guided to search for information on contents of the First Aid kit. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 14; First Aid Kit Identification
9 1 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to carry out First Aid (Burns/Scalds). Learner guided to simulate First Aid for burns and scalds. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 14; Simulation props Practical simulation
2 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to carry out First Aid (Cuts/Bruises). Learner guided to simulate First Aid for cuts and bruises. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 14; Bandages Practical simulation
3 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to carry out First Aid (Fractures/Sprains). Learner guided to simulate First Aid for fractures and sprains. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 14; Splints Practical simulation
4 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to carry out First Aid (Fainting/Chocking). Learner guided to simulate First Aid for fainting and chocking. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 14; Simulation props Practical simulation
5 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to safely dispose of First Aid materials. Learner guided to safely dispose of used first aid materials. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 14; Waste bins Observation
6 By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to appreciate safety measures. Learner guided to discuss importance of observing safety measures at home. Curriculum Design (2024) pg 14; Safety posters Discussion
10 REVISION Revision Term 1 Revision Revision of Strand 1.0 concepts. Review of past papers and notes. Past papers Written Practice
11 REVISION Revision Term 1 Revision Revision of Strand 2.0 concepts. Review of practicals and theory. Past papers Practical Practice
12 ALL END TERM ASSESSMENT END TERM ONE ASSESSMENT END TERM ONE ASSESSMENT EXAMS ASSESSMENT

 

Home Science KCSE Mock Exams and Answers {Latest Best Collections}

Name: ………………………………………            Index no ……..………………………………..

School: ………………………………………         Candidate’s sign …………………….         

Date: …………………………        

441/1

HOMESCIENCE THEORY

TIME: 2 ½ HOURS

 

MOCKS 1 2023

Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (K.C.S.E.) TRAIL

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES:

  • Write your name and index number in the spaces provided.
  • This paper consists of three section A,B and C
  • Answer all the questions in section A and B
  • Answer only two questions in section
  • Answers should be written in proper English and in the spaces provided in this booklet.

 

 

 

For Examiner’s Use Only:

QUESTIONS MAXIMUM SCORE CANDIDATES SCORE
1-20 40  
21 20  
22 20  
23 20  
24 20  
Total 100  

This paper consists of 15 printed pages. Candidates should check to ascertain that all papers are printed as indicated and that no questions are missing.

SECTION A (COMPULSORY) 40 MARKS

Answer all the questions in this section in the spaces provided.

 

  1. State two methods of cooking using dry heat.             (2marks)

­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­________________________________________________________________________

 

________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

  1. Name two types of tacking stitches. (2 marks)

 

­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­___________________________________________________________________________

 

___________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

  1. List two types of hand sewing needles. (2 marks)

 

________________________________________________________________________

 

________________________________________________________________________

 

 

  1. Highlight two ways of enhancing personal health. (2 marks)           ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­

 

______________________________________________________________________

 

_____________________________________________________________________

 

  1. Give two advantages of baking as a cooking method. (2 marks)

 

­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­

 

________________________________________________________________________

 

_______________________________________________________________________

 

  1. Give two methods of ventilation.(2 marks) ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­

 

­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­______________________________________________________________________

 

______________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

  1. Mention two ways of reducing a bulk in a seam.(2 marks)

 

_____________________________________________________________________

 

______________________________________________________________________

 

 

  1. List four items in the house that can be recycled(2 marks)

 

________________________________________________________________

 

________________________________________________________________

 

 

  1. Mention two general functions of minerals in the body. (2 marks)           ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­

 

_______________________________________________________________________

 

________________________________________________________________________

 

  1. Give the meaning of Kitchen hygiene.(2 marks)

 

______________________________________________________________________

 

______________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

  1. Mention the twocolour schemes that are used for interior decoration.(2 marks)

 

______________________________________________________________________

 

_____________________________________________________________________

 

  1. State two functions of sebaceous glands in the skin. (2 marks)         ­­­­­­­­­­­­

 

______________________________________________________________________

 

______________________________________________________________________

  1. Give two uses of a seam ripper. (2 marks)

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

 

  1. Give two agents used in coating food during deep frying. (2 marks)

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

 

  1. Give two factors that determine size of a patch pocket. (2 marks)

 

­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

 

  1. State two points to be observed when washing articles with non-fast colour.(2 marks)

 

­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­

______________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________

  1. Mention two ways to identifying silk using burning test.   (2 marks

­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­

_____________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

 

  1. Mention two ways of enriching leftover foods.                             (2 marks)

­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­

_____________________________________________________________________________

 

______________________________________________________________________________

 

  1. Give two disadvantages of using candles for lighting.(2 marks)

 

______________________________________________________________________________

 

______________________________________________________________________________

 

  1. Mention twouses charcoal as fuel.(2 marks)

 

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

SECTION B (COMPULSORY) 20 MARKS

Give your answers in the space provided after the question

21.) You have been left alone at home and you have decided to do some cleaning,

a)Describe how you would wash a neglected aluminum pan                                   (4marks)

b)Explain how to thorough clean an enamel plate. (7marks)

  1. c) Give the procedure of cleaning a hurricane lamp (omitting the glass)                    (9 marks)

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

———————————————————————————————————–

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

———————————————————————————————————–

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

———————————————————————————————————–

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

SECTION C (40 MARKS)

Answer only two questions from this section and use the spaces provided below.  Each question carries equal marks

 

22 a ) Give five  points on conservation of energy in lighting.                                  (5 marks)

  1. b) Explain three suitable conditions for the growth of yeast. (6 marks).

c ) Describe how to prepare  and attacha shaped round  patch pocket .        (9 marks)

 

 

23 a )  Explain four  advantages of stewing as a method of cooking.                       (8 marks)

b ) Draw and name three different symbols likely to be found on care label of a woolen garment.(6 marks)

  1. c) Describe how to prepare a front and back facing using one well labeled diagram.

(6 marks)

 

24 a) Explain four reasons why hospitals would not use silk fabric for their bed sheets.

(8 marks)

  1. b) Give fourprecautions to observe when using a micro – wave oven.  (6 marks)
  2. c) Explain three good qualities of a kitchen plan. (6 marks)

 

 

 

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

———————————————————————————————————–

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

———————————————————————————————————–

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

———————————————————————————————————–

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

———————————————————————————————————–

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

———————————————————————————————————–

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

———————————————————————————————————–

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

———————————————————————————————————–

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

———————————————————————————————————–

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

———————————————————————————————————–

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

————————————————————————————————————

 

———————————————————————————————————–

441/2   

(CLOTHING CONSTRUCTION)

PAPER 2                                                                    

(PRACTICAL)                                                          

TIME: 2½ HOURS

 

MOCKS 1 2023

Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (K.C.S.E.) TRAIL

                                                                                      

Instructions

A pattern of a pair of shorts is provided.

You are advised to study the sketches, instructions, and the layout carefully before you begin the test

Materials Provided

  1. Pattern pieces
  2. Short front
  3. Short back
  4. Motif
  5. Waist band
  6. Plain light weight cotton fabric 50cm long by 90cm wide.
  7. Cotton sewing thread to match the fabric.
  8. Embroidery thread 125 cm long.
  9. One button 1.3 cm with two holes.
  10. One large envelope.

 

 

 

THE TEST

Using the materials provided, cut out and make the LEFT LEG of the shorts to show the following processes:

  1. Cutting of the pattern pieces. (13 ½marks)
  2. Making of the back dart. (7 ½ marks)
  3. Placement of the motif using satin stitches. (14 marks)
  4. Working on the side seam using an open seam. (12 marks)
  5. Working of the inner leg seam using a French seam. (10 ½ marks)
  6. Preparing and attaching the waistband. (14 marks)
  7. Fixing the button. (5 ½ marks)
  8. Managing half of the slip hemming stitches (include both seams). (6 marks)
  9. Presentation of the work. (7 marks)

 

 

At the end of the examination, firmly sew on your work, on a single fabric, a label bearing your name and index number. Remove the needle and pins from your work, then fold your work neatly and place it in the envelope provided. Do not put scraps of fabric in the envelope.

 

441/3

HOMESCIENCE

(FOOD AND NUTRITION PRACTICAL)

PAPER 3

TIME: 1 ¼ HOURS

 

MOCKS 1 2023

Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (K.C.S.E.) TRAIL

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES

 

  • Read the test carefully
  • Write your name and index number on every sheet of paper.
  • Textbooks and recipes books may be used during planning session as reference materials.
  • You will be expected to keep to your order  of work during the practical session
  • You are only allowed t o take away your reference materials at the end of the planning
  • You are not allowed to bring additional notes to the practical session.

 

 

 

 

 

 

THE TEST

You are expecting your former school mate at around 4 o’clock. Using the ingredients listed below prepare, cook and serve two items and a beverage   for the two of you.

 

Ingredients.

  • Wheat flour.
  • Bread
  • Cooking oil.
  • Eggs/sausage
  • Sugar
  • Beverage
  • Milk
  • Lettuce/cabbage
  • Baking powder
  • Essence.

 

PLANNING SESSION: 30 MINUTES

Use separate sheets of paper for each task listed below and a carbon paper to make duplicate copies.

Then proceed as follows:

  1. Identify the dishes and then write down their recipes
  2. Write down your order of work.
  3. Make a list of the foodstuffs and equipment you will require.

              

441/1

HOMESCIENCE THEORY

PAPER 1

Marking Scheme

 

MOCKS 1 2023

Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (K.C.S.E.) TRAIL

 

SECTION A

 

  1. Methods of cooking using dry heat (Any 2X1=2 MARKS)

– Baking

  • Roasting

 

 

 

  1. Types of tacking stitches. (2 marks)
  • Even tacking
  • Tailors tacking
  • Long and short tacking
  • Basting/ Diagonal tacking (Any 2X1=2 MARKS)

 

 

3.Types of hand sewing needles

  • Betweens
  • Crewels
  • Darners
  • Embroidery
  • Sharps(Any 2X1=2 MARKS)

 

 

 

  1. Ways of enhancing personal health.
  • Give body proper cleaning
  • Take balanced diet
  • Take proper rest
  • Do enough exercises
  • Dress well(Any 2X1=2 MARKS)

 

 

 

 

  1. Advantages of baking as a cooking method
  • If temperature is properly set it does not require a lot of attention.
  • Foods are light and easy to digest.
  • Baking saves on fuel since several dishes can be cooked at the same time.
  • Foods baked are attractive and appeasing.(Any 2X1=2 MARKS)

 

 

 

  1. Methods of ventilation
  • Adjacent method.
  • Cross method. (Any 2X1=2 MARKS)

 

 

 

  1. Ways of reducing a bulk in a seam.
  • Trimming
  • Layering
  • Pressing flat (Any 2X1=2 MARKS)

 

 

  1. Items in the house that can be recycled
  • Plastic papers can be used for lining surfaces
  • Old tins can be used as utensils
  • Plastic containers can be washed then used to store ingredients

Carton box can be used keeping clothes, or some stuff in the house.

  • Old clothes can be used as dusters,Any 2X1=2 MARKS)

 

  1. General functions of minerals in the body

–  Building of bones and teeth

– Maintaining all cells in the body e.g. muscles, nerves, brain and blood cells

– Controlling body processes and enabling them to run smoothly  (Any 2X1=2 MARKS)

 

  1. Kitchen hygiene – refers to cleanliness of surfaces, equipment and proper disposal of refuse. (Any 2X1=2 MARKS)

 

 

11.Colour schemes that are used for interior decoration.

– Monochromatic colour schemes (one colour plan)

– Complementary scheme.

– Triad harmonies

– Analogous(Any 2X1=2 MARKS)

 

 

  1. Functions of sebaceous glands in the skin.

– Production of sebum which keeps the skin supple.

–   Produce sebum which makes the skin water proof.

– Produce sebum which destroys disease causing micro-organism.

(Any 2X1=2 MARKS)

 

  1. Uses of a seam ripper

– Cutting button-holes

– For picking out stitches.(Any 2X1=2 MARKS)

 

  1. Agents used in coating food during deep frying.

– Bread crumbs

– Egg white

– Thin batter(Any 2X1=2 MARKS)

 

  1. Factors that determine size of a patch pocket.

– Purpose of the patch pocket

– Position of the pocket

– Size of the garment

– Age of the wearer.(Any 2X1=2 MARKS)

 

  1. Points to be observed when washing articles with non-fast colour

– The garments should be washed using the kneading and squeezing method

– The garment should be hanged under shade

– Use moderate iron when ironing  (Any 2X1=2 MARKS)

 

  1. How to identify silk using burning test

– Burns with spluttering noise and is self extinguishing.

-Gives the smell of burnt feathers or hair.(Any 2X1=2 MARKS)

 

  1. 18. Ways of enriching leftover foods
  • Adding vegetables
  • Using species
  • Serving together with vegetables / salads
  • Garnishing
  • Adding stock
  • Coating some food (Any 2X1=2 MARKS)

 

 

19.Disadvantages of using candles for lighting

  • Get finished quickly
  • No sufficient light
  • Easily put off by wind
  • Can cause accidents easily (Any 2X1=2 MARKS)

 

 

  1. Uses charcoal as fuel
  • For cooling in a charcoal coder
  • For cooking
  • Ironing (Any 2X1=2 MARKS)

SECTION B (20 MARKS)

21.)

  1. a) Description of washing a neglected aluminum pan

–  Collect equipment and material needed ( ½ )

–  Wash (½) in hot ½ soapy ½ water using scouring pad ½

–  Rinse ½ severally ½ using hot ½ water.

–  Wipe dry ½ with a kitchen cloth  ½

– Clean equipment used (½ )

(any 8×1/2 = 4 marks)

 

b)Explanation of thorough cleaning an enamel plate.

                       – Collect equipment and material needed (½) to save on time (½ )

– Removal of loose dirt/dispose scrapes of food (½) to keep water clean (½)

– Use a sponge (½) and warm soapy (½) water to remove dirt and prevent scratches (½) and remove dirt (½)

– Rinse thoroughly in warm (½) water to remove dirt and soap (½)

– Final rinse in cold (½) water to freshen (½)

– Drip dry/upside down on a rack (½) to remove water (½).

– Store (½) in a clean cool dry place to maintain (½)

– Clean (½) equipment used to maintain (½)  (any 14 x ½ = 7 marks)

 

  1. c) Procedure of cleaning a hurricane lamp (omitting the glass)

 

  • Collect equipment and materials (½) necessary for the work.
  • Protect (½)  the surface using old newspapers(½)
  • Dismantle the lamp (½)and place the glass chimney on a clean dry place
  • Empty the kerosene into a clean dry container (½)
  • Put hot soapy water(½) inside the reservoir close the opening and shake the lamp(½)
  • Rinse (½) thoroughly using warm (½) water
  • Shake (½) off excess water
  • Wipe off soot (½) using a newspaper especially the chimney
  • Clean the frame chimney and handle using warm (½) soapy (½) waterand a soft cloth/sponge(½)
  • Rinse (½) thoroughly
  • Drain off excess water by placing it upside down (½)on a clean surface
  • Trim (½)  the wick
  • Reassemble (½) the lamp
  • Refill (½) with kerosene
  • Clean equipment and materials (½) used           ( any 18 x ½ = 9 marks )

 

 

 

 

SECTION C (40 MARKS)

22 a)Points on conservation of energy in lighting.

– Lighting in various parts of the house should be designed to suit a particular area

– Use lightly colored surfaces as they reflect light and distribute it better than dark ones

– Daily light should be used as much as possible. Artificial light should be used only for dark hours

– Ensure that all light fittings e.g. shades, covers etc are clean and in working order

– Turn off lights when not in use even for short periods

– Avoid using bulbs with high voltage than really required (any 5 x 1 = 5 marks)

 

b)Suitable conditions for the growth of yeast.

(i)        Food, this is provided by the sugar in the flour / Limited amounts should be used since too much of it will rupture the yeast cells retarding the fermentation process.

  • Warmth , the working conditions must be warm 25°C / Hot temperatures will

kill the yeast and cold temperature will retard the growth of the yeast.

  • Liquid , this is provided by the water or milk used in the mixture/  It is used for the formation of the solution in which fermentation process takes place.
  • Time, this is provided by allowing yeast mixture to ferment and proof.

(any 3×2 = 6 marks)

 

c ) Preparation of a shaped round  patch pocket and  attachment.           

– Neaten ½ the top edge ½ of the pocket

–  Snip / notch ½ the turnings ½  of the curves (½),

– Fold ½ the allowance ( ½ ) along the SL ( ½ ) to the W.S ( ½ ) of the pocket.

– Pin ½ and tack ½ in place ½

– Stitch (½ ) the pocket along the S.L ½  and re enforce ½  the mouth .

– Trim ½ the corners ( ½ ) of the pocket  ½ .

– Press ( ½ ) the pocket flat ½ .

(any  18 x ½  = 9 marks )

           

23 a ) Advantages of stewing as a method of cooking.

-Economical method of providing a meat dish from a cheap cut of meat through slow

prolonged cooking

-The gravy (liquid part) of the food is served with the food therefore the nutrients which are in the gravy are not lost

-Does not require close attention during cooking except for occasional stirring therefore other tasks can be performed while the stew is cooking

-With the long slow cooking, natural flavour of food are developed which make the food more enjoyable

-It does not require special cooking facilities therefore can be carried out successfully even on three stones

-The water soluble nutrients are conserved because the evaporation is minimized through the use of a pan with a lid

-Consumes little fuel therefore economical on fuel

-Prolonged slow cooking tenderizes tough foods       (Any 4 pointsx2= 8 marks)

 

 

b ) Different symbols likely to be found on care labels of a woolen garment.

 

 

c ) Description of how to prepare a front and back facing using one well labeled diagram.

– Place the two ½ facings R.S ½ facing matching½ the fitting line.

– Pin ½ and tack ½ along the fitting line ½

– Remove pins ½ and machine ½ stitch

– Remove tacking ½  and press ½ seam open  ½

– Neaten  ½ the free edge ½ .

(Description any  10 points x ½  = 5 marks and diagram 1 mark = 6 marks)

 

 

 

24 a) Reasons why hospitals would not use silk fabric for their bed sheets.

  • Easily damaged by high temperatures, hospital bed sheets must be frequently sterilized.
  • Easily damaged by alkalis and acids – hospital bed sheets are usually stained with medicines and other stains hence require strong fabrics.
  • Weakened by long exposure to sunlight – hospital linens are exposed to the sunlight

for further sterilization.

  • Silk is weak when wet-hospital linen require frequent washing which silk cannot stand ( any 4 x 2 = 8 marks)

 

b ) Precautions  to  observe when using a micro – wave oven.

            (i)        Do not overload

(ii)       Do not use metal object to warm food

(iii)      Follow manufactures instructions

(iv)      Do not start micro – wave without food inside.

(v)       Switch off when not in use.

(vi)Don’t let it get too dirty

(vii)Don’t keep the microwave near heating appliance      (any 6 x 1 = 6 marks)

 

  1. C) Good qualities of a kitchen plan.
  • Working surfaces should be of comfortable height to avoid straining.
  • Has sufficient working space for easy movement.
  • Working surfaces should be close to each other to avoid too much movement.
  • Should be well ventilated and to avoid fatigue.
  • Should be well lit to avoid fatigue
  • Work centers should allow work to flow from one surface to another to avoid retracing steps. (any 6 x 1 = 6 marks )

441/2   

(CLOTHING CONSTRUCTION)

PAPER 2

 MARKING SCHEME

 

 

MOCKS 1 2023

Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (K.C.S.E.) TRAIL

 

  PROCESS MAX

 SCORE

SCORE REMARKS
1

a

 

b

 

 

c

 

 

d

PRESENTATION

–        Work well pressed (1) and folded (1/2)

–        Label (1) well fixed (1/2) on a single layer of fabric (1/2) without concealing details (1/2)

–        Pins (1/2) needles (1/2) unnecessary tacking (1/2) and hanging threads (1/2) removed.

–        Made for the left half (1)

 

11/2

 

21/2

 

2

1

   
  Sub – Total 7    
2

a

 

b

 

 

c

 

 

d

CUTTING OUT

–        All the 5 pieces cut out (21/2)

–        Smooth cutting of the skirt CF (2) and short front cut on grain (2)

–        Smooth cutting of the skirt CB (2) and short back cut on grain (2)

–        Smooth cutting of waistband CB (1) and on grain (2)

 

21/2

 

4

 

4

3

   
  Sub – Total 131/2    
3

 

a

 

 

 

b

c

 

 

 

d

 

e

MAKING OF THE BACK DART

–        Dart made by straight stitchery (1) tapering (1/2) to a point (1/2) on the fold line

–        Dart secured at the end (1/2)

–        Correct length of the dart 6cm to within 2mm (5.8cm – 6.2cm) (1) and correct width of dart 0.8cm to within 2mm (0.6cm – 1.00cm) (1)

–        Dart flat on WS (1) and RS (1)

–        Dart pressed towards CB (1)

 

 

2

1/2

 

 

2

2

1

   
  Sub – Total 7 (1/2)    
5

a

 

b

 

c

d

e

 

 

 

f

g

PLACING OF THE  MOTIF ON THE SHORT

–        Motif correctly positioned on the pocket (1).

–        Raw edges fully enclosed (2)

–        Good stitchery on  the edge (2)

–        Lies flat (1) and neatly finished (1)

–        Use of satin stitch (2) if not satin stitches award zero.

–        Neat (1) even (2) stitches correct spacing (2)

–        Correctly secure stitches (1).

 

1

2

2

2

2

 

5

1

   
    14    
6

 

 

 

 

a

 

b

 

c

 

 

d

 

e

 

 

f

WORKING OF THE SIDE SEAM USING AN OPEN SEAM

(Award zero if not open seam)

–        Seam joined with straight stitchery (2)

–        Seam neatened (1) well with straight stitchery (2)

–        Correct size of the seam 1cm to within 2mm (0.8cm – 1.2cm) (1)

–        Evenness of the seam (1)

–        Seam open (1) and flat at the waistband (1) and hem (1)

–        Seam flat on RS (1) and WS (1)

 

 

 

2

 

3

 

1

1

 

3

2

   
  Sub – Total 12    
7

 

 

 

 

a

b

 

 

c

 

 

d

e

 

f

MAKING INNER LEG SEAM USING FRENCH SEAM

–        (Award zero if not French seam)

–        First row made with straight stitchery (1)

–        Second row made with straight stitchery (2) and raw edges concealed (2)

–        Correct size of the seam 6mm to within 2mm (4mm – 8mm) (1)

–        Evenness of the seam (2)

–        Seam well knife edged (2)

–        Seam  pressed (1/2) and turned to the back  (1) of the garment

 

 

 

1

 

3

 

1

2

2

2

   
  Sub – Total 10 1/2    
8

 

 

a

 

b

 

c

 

 

d

 

 

 

 

e

f

PREPARATION AND ATTACHING OF THE WAISTBAND

–        Waistband joined with straight stitchery (1)

–        Seam trimmed (1) knife edged (2) and waistband pointed at the corner (1)

–        Waistband joined with straight stitchery (1) seam trimmed (1)

–        The underside well tucked under (1) and hemmed (1) with stitches not showing on the RS (1)

–        Flatness of the waistband RS (1) WS (1)

–        Correct size of the waistband 3.5cm to within 5mm (3cm – 4cm) (2)

 

 

1

 

4

 

2

 

 

3

2

 

2

   
  Sub – Total 14    
9

a

b

 

 

 

c

d

 

e

FIXING A BUTTON

–        Neat stitches used to fix the button (1)

–        Stitches finished on the wrong side with button hole stitches (1)

– Button fixed on double fabric (1/2)

– Shank  present (1) , good quality (1)

– Stitches neatly fastened off (1)

 

1

 

1

1/2

2

1

   
  Sub – Total 5 ½    
10

 

 

 

 

a

b

 

c

d

e

 

f

g

MANAGING HALF OF THE LOWER HEM WITH SLIP HEMMING

–        (Award zero if not slip hemming from (a – d)

–        Uniformity of stitches in length (1)

–        Correct tension (1)

–        Stitches not visible on RS (1)

–        Stitches secured at both ends (1)

–        Flatness of the hem (1/2)

–        Evenness of the hem (1/2)

–        Correct size of the hem 3cm to within 5mm (2.5cm – 3.5cm) (1)

 

 

 

1

1

1

1

1/2

1/2

 

1

   
  Sub – Total 6    
  Total 90    
  To get final score divide by 2 (90 ÷ 2)      

 

 

 

MOCKS 1 2023

Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (K.C.S.E.) TRAIL

Candidate’s name …………………………………………………………..…Index No…………………

Examiner’s name…………………………………………………………………      Date……………..

  PLAN MAX SCORE SCORE REMARKS
1 RECIPE

–        Availability

–        Correct quantities

–        Suitability

Order of work

–        Availability

–        Correct sequencing

List of foodstuffs and equipment

–        Availability

–        Adequacy

–        Appropriateness

1

1

1

½

½

 

½

½

½

   
    5 ½    
2 PREPARATION

Correct procedure

–        Snack 1

–        Snack 2

–        Beverage

Methods of cooking  (at least 2)

Quality of results

–        Snack 1

–        Snack 2

–        Drink

 

 

1

1

1

2

 

1

1

1

   
    8    
3 PRESENTATION

–        Utensils

–        -Appropriate

–        -Clean

–        -Centre piece

–        -Decorations /garnishing

–        -Method of service (Tray service)

–        -General impression

 

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

   
    7    
4 GENERALLY

Hygiene

–        Personal ( ½ ) food ( ½ )

Economy of resources

– Water ( ½ ) food (½) fuel ( ½)

Material

Cleaning up

–        During work

–        After work

 

 

1

 

1 ½

 

 

1

1

   
     4 ½    
   

Total

 

25

 

   

 

 

FORM 1-4 FASIHI SIMULIZI NOTES FREE

FASIHI SIMULIZI

Fasihi ni sanaa inayotumia lugha kuwasilisha ujumbe unaomhusu binadamu.

Sanaa ni ufundi wa kuwasilisha fikra na hisia za binadamu kama vile maneno, maandishi, uchoraji, uchongaji, ufinyanzi n.k.

DOWNLOAD FREE PDF NOTES HERE; Free Kiswahili Fasihi notes, Ushairi notes, isimu Jamii notes and Many More: Mwongozo wa kigogo, Kidagaa, Tumbo lisiloshiba, Chozi..

Fasihi simulizi ni sanaa kwa vile:

  1. Huwasilisha ujumbe kuhusu binadamu kuhusu utamaduni na uchumi.
  2. Huwa na umbo mahsusi k.m. hadithi huwa na mwanzo, kati na mwisho na mashairi huwa na beti, mishororo, n.k.
  3. Hutumia lugha kwa ufundi k.v. ya kitamathali.
  4. Husawiri mandhari/mazingira mahsusi kwa ufundi mkubwa.
  5. Hujenga wahusika kwa ustadi mkuu ili kusawiri tabia za watu katika jamii.

Tofauti Kati ya Fasihi na Sanaa Nyingine

fasihi sanaa nyingine
ü  Kutumia lugha

ü  Sanaa tendi

ü  Kutumia wahusika kuwasilisha maudhui

ü  Kutumia maudhui na fani kuwasilisha ujumbe

ü  Kujikita katika mazingira na wakati maalum

ü  Kutotumia lugha

ü  Si tendi

ü  Hutumia maumbo kumithilisha watu

ü  Kutumia maumbo na sura za vitu

 

 

ü  Hazijikiti katika muktadha na wakati maalum.

Aina/makundi ya fasihi

  1. Fasihi simulizi
  • Fasihi inayowasiolishwa kwa njia ya mdomo.
  1. Fasihi andishi
  • Fasihi inayowasilishwa kwa njia ya maandishi.

Tofauti kati ya fasihi simulizi na fasihi andishi/sifa za fasihi simulizi/zinazofanya utanzu uwe wa fasihi simulizi

  1. Fasihi simulizi huwasilishwa kwa njia ya mdomo ilhali fasihi andishi huwasilishwa kwa njia ya maandishi.
  2. Fasihi simulizi huhifadhiwa akilini ilhali fasihi aandishi huhifadhiwa kwa maandishi.
  3. Fasihi simulizi ni mali ya jamii ilhali fasihi andishi ni mali ya mtu binafsi/mwandishi.
  4. Fasihi simulizi ina wahusika wa kila aina k.v binadamu, wanyama na ndege, mazimwi na majitu, miungu, mizimu, mashetani na vitu visivyo na uhai k.v. mawe na miti ilhali fasihi andishi ina wahusika binadamu kwa kiasi kikubwa.
  5. Fasihi simulizi ina tanzu nyingi kuliko fasihi andishi.
  6. Uwasilishaji wa fasihi simulizi huweza kuandamana na utendaji k.v matumizi ya ishara, nyimbo, makofi, kuimba, kubeba zana katika majigambo n.k ilhali ule wa fasihi andishi hauandamani na utendaji isipokuwa inapowasilishwa mbele ya hadhira.
  7. Fasihi simulizi huwasilishwa mbele ya hadhira ilhali fasihi andishi si lazima iwasilishwe mbele ya hadhira.
  8. Fasihi simulizi huwasilishwa mahali maalum k.v jandoni, matangani, arusini, n.k ilhali fasihi andishi haina mahali maalum.
  9. Fasihi simulizi huandamana na shughuli fulani ya kitamaduni ilhali fasihi andishi haiandamani na shughuli ya kitamaduni.
  10. Fasihi andishi huhitaji muda kutunga ilhali baadhi ya fasihi simulizi huzuka papo hapo k.m. semi, maigambo.
  11. Fasihi simulizi ina uwezo mkubwa wa kubadilishwa na fanani anapowasilisha ufaraguzi) bali fasihi andishi haibadiliki isipokuwa mwandishi aiandike upya.
  12. Fasihi simulizi ina historia ndefu kuliko fasihi andishi kwa kuwepo tangu mwanzo wa maisha ya binadamu
  13. Fasihi simulizi huwasilishwa wakati maalum k.v. usiku, kipindi fulani cha mwaka ilhali andishi haina wakati maalum.
    • Tofauti kati ya hadhira
  14. Hadhira ya fasihi simulizi huweza kuwasiliana moja kwa moja na mwasilishaji ilhali ile ya fasihi simulizi sio lazima iwasiliane na mwandishi.
  15. Hadhira huchangia katika uwasilishaji wa fasihi simulizi k.v kwa kuimba, kupiga makofi n.k (hadhira tendi/hai) ilhali hadhira ya fasihi andishi haichangii katika uandishi.
  16. Hadhira ya fasihi simulizi huonana na mwasilishaji ilhali ile ya fasihi andishi si lazima ionane na mwandishi.
  17. Hadhira ya fasihi simulizi ni kubwa kuliko ile ya fasihi andishi kwani huhusisha hata wasiojua kusoma na kuandika.
  18. Hadhira ya fasihi simulizi ni hai yaani inajulikana na fanani ilhali ile ya fasihi simulizi si hai yaani haijulikani na mwandishi.
  19. Hadhira ya fasihi simulizi hainunui kazi ilhali ile ya fasihi andishi hununua kazi.
  20. Hadhira ya fasihi simulizi yaweza kumiliki kazi ya fanani lakini ile ya fasihi andishi haiwezi kumiliki kazi ya mwandishi.
  21. Hadhira ya fasihi simulizi huchagua kwa kulenga watu wa rika fulani lakini ile ya fasihi andishi hailengi watu wa rika yoyote.

Jinsi Fasihi Simulizi na Andishi Zinavyofanana

  1. Zote mbili hushughulikia masuala yanayohusu maisha maisha ya binadamu.
  2. Zote mbili Huhumia lugha kwa ubunifu kuwasilisha maudhui.
  3. Zote mbili huwa na vipengele viwili vikuu, maudhui na fani (jumla ya mbinu msanii alizotumia kuwasilisha maudhui).
  4. Zote mbili majukumu sawa k.v. kuburudisha, kuadilisha, kuhifadhi na kuendeleza utamaduni, n.k.
  5. Zote mbili zina utendaji-pale tamthilia na riwaya zinapoigizwa.
  6. Zote mbili huzaliwa, hukua na hufa kutegemea mabadiliko ya wakati.
  7. Zote mbili huwa na wawasilishaji-fanani k.m. mtambaji/mganaji au manju/yeli katika fasihi simulizi na mwandishi upande wa fasihi andishi .
  8. Fasihi simulizi imekopa tanzu za fasihi simulizi k.v. methali, mashairi, n.k.

Majukumu ya Fasihi Simulizi/Umuhimu wa Kufunza Fasihi Simulizi Katika          Shule za Upili

  1. Kuburudisha-kustarehesha, kufurahisha, kuchangamsha, kutuliza, kusisimua na kupumbaza akili na kiwiliwili – nyimbo, hadithi, vitendawili
  2. Kufunza maadili kwa wanajamii kwa kuwahimiza kuiga sifa chanya na kukataa sifa hasi za wahusika.
  3. Kukuza uwezo wa kufikiri/kudadisi k.m vitendawili na chemshabongo.
  4. Kufariji k.m mbolezi na methali k.m. ‘Baada ya dhiki faraja’.
  5. Vipengele vya fasihi simulizi k.v mashairi, nyimbo, nahau, hutumiwa katika uandishi wa fasihi andishi.
  6. Kuhifadhi historia ya jamii k.m. mighani, visaviini, mapisi, tarihi n.k.
  7. Kukejeli tabia zinazokiuka matarajio ya jamii k.v soga, methali, n.k.
  8. Kuendeleza tamaduni za jamii kwani husawiri imani na desturi za jamii. k.v kitendawili ‘Nyumbani mwetu mna papai lililoiva lakini siwezi kulichuma.’ – Mtu hawezi kumwoa dadake.
  9. Kuunganisha watu pamoja kwa kuwajumuisha pamoja wakati wa ngoma, kuimba, utambaji, n.k.
  10. Kukuza lugha k.v. misimu inapokita kimatumizi na kujumuishwa katika lugha sanifu.
  11. Kukuza uwezo wa kutumia lugha kadiri mtu anapoendelea kuwasilisha k.v. hotuba, vitanza ndimi husaidia kuboresha matamshi na kutofautisha maana za maneno.
  12. Kuza uwezo wa kubuni k.v. malumano ya utani, vitanza, ndimi ngonjera, n.k.
  13. Kukuza uzalendo kwa kufanya wanajamii kuonea fahari jamii zao na kuiga mashujaa au watu waliotendea jamii makuu.
  14. Kuonya na kutahadharisha wanajamii dhidi ya tabia hasi k.v. ulafi, uchoyo, n.k.

Sababu za Ufaraguzi/Kubadilika kwa Fasihi Simulizi

  1. Kuwasilishwa vibaya.
  2. Fanani kusahau na kubadilisha yaliyomo na mtiririko.
  3. Kubadilisha ili kukidhi mahitaji ya hadhira k.m. umri na uelewa wao- kutumia lugha nyepesi kwa watoto na pevu kwa watu wazima.
  4. Mabadiliko ya mandhari/mazingira-vitu vilivyo katika mazingira halisi kukosekana katika mazingira ya usimulizi na msimulizi kutumia vitu katika mazingira yake vinavyokaribiana navyo.
  5. Kutoeleweka na hivyo kuhifadhiwa vibaya.
  6. Mabadiliko ya wakati k.m kitendawili cha wakati wa mkoloni kutumia mzungu na cha wakati wa mwarabu kutumia mwarabu na maana ni ile ile-Mzungu/mwarabu amesimama kwa mguu mmoja-mwavuli.
  7. Mabadiliko ya falsafa ya vizazi na maingiliano katika jamii kusababisha kurithisha tu yale ambayo ni muhimu na kuacha mengine.
  8. Kila fanani huwa na mtindo wake wa kuwasilisha/kisanii.
  9. Ubunifu wa fanani ili uwasilishaji uweze kuvutia saidi na uwezo wake wa lugha.
  10. Teknolojia kusababisha kuhifadhiwa na hivyo kuiua.

Wahusika katika Fasihi Simulizi

  • Wahusika ni viumbe wa sanaa ambao hutumiwa katika kazi ya fasihi kuwasilisha maswala mbalimbali.
  1. Fanani-anayetunga na kuwasilisha fasihi simulizi.
  2. Hadhira-kusikiliza, kutazama, kushiriki wa kuimba, kuuliza maswali, kutegua vitendawili, kupiga makofi, n.k. kuna aina mbili za hadhira: (i) hadhira tendi/hai na (ii) hadhira tuli.
  3. Wanyama-wanaofanya kama binadamu na kuwakilisha sifa kama vile ujanja, ulaghai, tamaa na ujinga na wanaobakia wanyama tu.
  4. Binadamu
  5. Mazimwi na majitu-viumbe vyenye matendo na maumbile ya kutisha kama vile jicho moja, vichwa viwili au zaidi, nusu mtu na nusu myama, wenye tamaa iliyokithiri ya kuweza kumeza kila kitu, kuhifadhi na kutunza binadamu ananyoyapendeza.
  6. Wahusika vitu (visivyo na uhai) mawe, miti, vijaluba, vibuyu-hutumiwa kuibua imani za kidini.
  7. Mizimu-roho za waliokufa-hutembea, hula na huathiri binadamu.
  8. Miungu-viumbe vyenye uwezo mkubwa dhidi ya binadamu k.m. katika mighani na visasili.

Njia za Kukusanya Fasihi Simulizi

  1. Kuchunza/utazamaji
  • Kutazama kwa makini yanayotokea na kuandika.

Umuhimu/ubora/uzuri

  1. Kupata habari za kutegemewa na kuaminika.
  2. Ni rahisi kurekodi k.v. kwa vinasa sauti, video, n.k.
  3. Ni njia bora kwa wasiojua kusoma na kuandika
  4. Kuweza kupata sifa za uwasilishaji k.v. toni/kiimbo, ishara n.k.
  5. Kuweza kupata hisia halisi za uwasilishaji

Udhaifu

  1. Shida ya mawasiliano.
  2. Ugeni wa mtafiti kusababisha washiriki kumshuku na kusitisha uwasilishaji
  3. Ghali kwa kumbidi mtafiti kusafiri
  4. huhitaji muda mrefu
  1. Kusikiliza wasanii wakiwasilisha tungo zao.

Umuhimu

  1. Kuweza kupata sifa za uwasilishaji k.v. toni/kiimbo, ishara n.k.
  2. Kupata habari za kutegemewa na kuaminika.
  3. Ni rahisi kurekodi k.v. kwa vinasa sauti, video, n.k.
  4. Kikwazo cha mawasiliano-Si njia bora kwa wasiojua kusoma na kuandika.
  5. Kuweza kupata hisia halisi za uwasilishaji.

Udhaifu

  1. Shida ya mawasiliano-Si njia bora kwa wasiojua kusoma na kuandika.
  2. Huhitaji muda mrefu-kusafiri na kusikiliza.
  3. Ugeni wa mtafiti kusababisha washiriki kutowasilisha ipasavyo.
  4. Ghali kwa gharama ya usafiri.
  1. Mahojiano
    • Kuhoji wanaofahamu mengi kuhusu fasihi simulizi.

Umuhimu                                                                                          

  1. Kuweza kung’amua wakati mhojiwa anatoa habari zisizo za kweli.
  2. Kuweza kufafanulia mhojiwa maswali ili kuweza kupata habari sahihi zaidi.
  3. Kuweza kupata sifa za uwasilishaji k.v. toni/kiimbo, ishara n.k.
  4. Ni rahisi kurekodi k.v. kwa vinasa sauti, video, n.k.
  5. Kupata habari za kutegewa na kuaminika

Udhaifu

  1. Huhitaji muda mrefu.
  2. Mhojiwa kutotoa habari kwa kutomwamini mtafiti kwa ugeni wake.
  3. Kikwazo cha mawasiliano-si njia bora kwa wasiojua kusoma na kuandika.
  4. Ghali kwa gharama ya usafiri.
  1. Kurekodi katika kanda za sauti/tepurekoda

Umuhimu

  1. Kuweza kudumu na kufikia vizazi vingi.
  2. Sifa za uwasilishaji/uhai kama vile toni na kiimbo kuhifadhiwa.
  3. Mkusunyanyaji aweza kurudia uwasilishaji ikiwa hakuelewa.
  4. Kupata habari za kutegewa na kuaminika
  5. Kuweza kupata hisia halisi za uwasilishaji

Udhaifu

  1. Chaweza kukosa nguvu za umeme na utafiti kuathirika.
  2. Hakiwezi kunasa uigizaji.
  3. Fanani huenda asiwasilishe vyema akijua anarekodiwa.
  4. Ghali kwa kuhitaji kununua kifaa na kumbidi mtafiti kusafiri.
  1. Kurekodi kwa filamu na video
    • Hunasa picha zenye miondoko na sauti.

Umuhimu

  1. Video huhifadhi uigizaji, ishara na kiimbo/toni.
  2. Kuonyesha uhalisi wa mandhari
  3. Mkusunyanyaji aweza kurudia uwasilishaji ikiwa hakuelewa
  4. Kazi iliyokusanywa hivi hudumu kwa muda mrefu.
  5. Njia bora kwa wasiojua kusoma na kuandika
  6. Kupata habari za kutegewa na kuaminika

Udhaifu

  1. Chombo chaweza kukosa nguvu za umeme na utafiti kuathirika.
  2. Fanani huenda asiwasilishe vyema akijua anarekodiwa.
  3. Njia ghali.
  4. Fanani huenda asiwasilishe vyema akijua anarekodiwa.
  5. Ghali kwa gharama ya ya usafiri na kununua filamu na kamera ya video.
  6. Data yaweza kufisidiwa na hivyo kutowafikia walengwa.
  7. f) Kupiga picha kwa kamera
    • Hunasa picha zisizo na miondoko na sauti

Umuhimu

  1. Huonyesha uhalisi wa mandhari.
  2. Huweza kuhifadhi ishara.
  3. Mkusunyanyaji aweza kurudia uwasilishaji ikiwa hakuelewa.
  4. Kupata habari za kuaminiwa na kutegemeka.

Udhaifu

  1. Ghali kwa gharama ya ya usafiri na kununua kamera.
  2. Sifa za uhai kama vile kiimbo haziwezi kuhifadhiwa.
  3. Yaweza kukosa nguvu za umeme na utafiti kuathirika.
  4. Data yaweza kufisidiwa na hivyo kutowafikia walengwa
  1. Kushiriki katika kazi ya fasihi simulizi k.v. ngoma, soga, n.k.

Umuhimu

  1. Kuweza kupata hisia halisi za uwasilishaji.
  2. Kupata habari za kutegewa na kuaminika.
  3. Njia bora kwa wasiojua kusoma na kuandika.
  4. Kukuza utangamano wa mtafiti na wanajamii.
  5. Kuweza kunasa na kuhifadhi sifa za kiimbo, toni na ishara.

Udhaifu

  1. Kuchukua muda mrefu.
  2. Ugeni wa msanii kusababisha washiriki kuwa na wasiwasi na kutotenda kama kawaida.
  3. Njia ghali kwa kuhitaji mtafiti kusafiri mbali.
  4. Mtafiti aweza kusahau kwa kuhifadhi akilini.
  1. Kutumia hojaji
  • Fomu yenye maswali funge au wazi.

Umuhimu

  1. Gharama ya chini.
  2. Yaweza kutumika katika mahojiano.
  3. Huokoa muda kwani mtafiti aweza kuituma na kuachia mhojiwa kujaza.
  4. Hupatia habari za kuaminika na kutegemeka.

Udhaifu

  1. Utata wa maswali kusababisha majibu yasiyo sahihi.
  2. Si nzuri kwa wasiojua kusoma na kuandika.
  3. Kutopata sifa za uwasilishaji kama vile kiimbo, toni na ishara.
  4. Wahojiwa kukataa kuijaza kutokana na mwelekeo hasi dhidhi ya hojaji na hivyo kukwamiza utafiti.

Vifaa vya Kukusanya Fasihi Simulizi na Udhaifu Wake

  1. Vinasa sauti/tepu rekoda
  2. Kamera
  3. Filamu na video
  4. Diski za kompyuta
  5. Kalamu na karatasi

Umuhimu

  1. Kuweza kudumu na kufikia vizazi vingi.
  2. Si rahisi kusahaulika-hubakia vile vile.
  3. Si njia ghali kama vile video

Udhaifu

  1. Sifa za uwasilishaji kama vile toni, kiimbo/toni na ishara haziwezi kuhifadhika hivyo kupotea.
  2. Hupunguza hadhira kwa kulenga tu wanaojua kusoma na kuandika na hivyo kuathiri usambazaji wake.

Mbinu za Kuhifadhi Fasihi Simulizi

  1. Huhifadhiwa na binadamu akilini k.m. ngano hupokewa kutoka kizazi kimoja hadi kingine.
  2. Katika maumbile au mazingira k.m. fisi daima huchechemea , kinyonga naye hutembea pole pole.
  3. Katika vifaa meme k.m. nyimbo, hadithi, maigizo n.k. huweza kuhifadhiwa katika kanda za sauti, video, sidi na diski za kompyuta.
  4. Katika michoro k.m. picha huhifadhi matukio maalum k.v. za kabila fulani likiwinda au likisherehekea.

Umuhimu wa Kukusanya/Kuhifadhi Fasihi Simulizi

  1. Ili isipotee k.m. kwa kusahaulika.
  2. Kuirekodi ili kuiendeleza kwa kuirithisha kwa vizazi vijavyo.
  3. Ili kulinganisha fasihi simulizi za jamii mbalimbali na kuonyesha tofauti zake.
  4. Ili kuhakikisha mtiririko katika uwasilishaji.
  5. Kutunza historia ya jamii ili vizazi vijavyo viijue.
  6. Ili kuziba mapengo ya utafiti yaliyomo kwa vile kuna tungo ambazo hazijatafitiwa kwa kina.
  7. Kuendeleza elimu ya jadi ya jamii.
  8. Kuingiliana na jamii iliyo chanzo cha fasihi humwezesha kuelewa na utamaduni na fasihi yake kwa ujumla
  9. Humwezesha mwanafunzi kuona vipengele hai vya fasihi k.v. uigizaji, toni na kiimbo ambavyo husaidia kuielewa kwa kina.
  10. Husaidia kuhifadhi tamaduni za jamii kwa nia ya kuzipitisha kwa vizazi vijavyo.
  11. Husaidia kuelewa utamaduni wa jamii nyingine.
  12. Humwezesha mwanafunzi kupata maarifa ya kufanya utafiti katika taaluma nyingine k.v. sosholojia.
  13. Kujua fasihi simulizi za jamii nyingine humfanya mtafiti kuzielewa na kuzikubali jamii hizo na hivyo kuendeleza amani katika nchi.
  14. Ili kusahihisha mawazo mapotovu kuhusu baadhi ya tanzu na vipera vya fasihi simulizi.

Matatizo Yanayomkabili Mkusanyaji wa Fasihi Simulizi

  1. Gharama ya utafiti kuwa kubwa kiasi cha mtafiti kutoimudu k.v. kusafiria, kununulia vifaa.
  2. Kutojaziwa hojaji kutokana na mtazamo hasi wa jamii dhidi ya ujazaji wake.
  3. Wanajamii kukataa kutoa habari wakishuku mtafiti anawapeleleza au kwa kuona haya.
  4. Wanajamii wengine kudai walipwe kabla ya kutoa habari na hivyo kukwamiza utafiti.
  5. Mbinu nyingine k.v. hojaji huhitaji watu wanaojua kusoma na kuandika na ikiwa mhojiwa hajui utafiti utakwamizwa.
  6. Uchache wa wazee na wataalamu wa fasihi simulizi kusababisha kukosekana au kupatikana kwa data isiyo ya kutegemewa.
  7. Utawala kukataa kutoa idhini ya kufanya utafiti.
  8. Kukosa ufadhili na utafiti kutofanywa kwa kutomudu gharama.
  9. Muda wa utafiti kutotosha na hivyo kutopata habari za kutosha kuhusiana na mada yake.
  10. Kikwazo cha mawasiliano ikiwa mtafiti na mhojiwa hawatumii lugha moja na mhojiwa hajui lugha nyingine na kumbidi mtafiti kukodi mkalimani na gharama kuongezeka.
  11. Ukosefu wa vyombo vya usafiri kunakochelewesha utafiti na kutomalizika katika muda uliopangwa.
  12. Ukosefu wa usalama k.v. kuvamiwa kwa kushukiwa anapeleleza na kuibiwa vifaa.

Changamoto Zinazokabili Ukusanyaji wa Fasihi Simulizi

  1. Ukosefu wa utafiti wa kutosha kwani kuna vipera ambavyo bado havijaandikwa.
  2. Uchache wa wataalamu wa kutafitia na kuendeleza utafiti.
  3. Watu kuhamia mijini na kuingiliana na wa jamii nyingine na kufanya uhifadhi na urithishaji wa fasihi kutowezekana.
  4. Mtaala wa elimu kupuuza lugha ya kiasili inayotumiwa kuhifadhia na kurithisha fasihi simulizi na hivyo kukatiza ukuaji wake.
  5. Fasihi simulizi kuhusishwa na ukale na hivyo kutoona haja ya kuirithisha na kuihifadhi.
  6. Kuhifadhiwa kwa fasihi simulizi akilini kusababisha kusahaulika, kubadilika hata kufa kwake.

Jinsi Jamii ya Sasa Inavyojaribu Kuhifadhi Fasihi Simulizi

  1. Tamasha za muziziki kunakokaririwa na kuimbwa mashairi.
  2. Sherehe za arusi, jando, mazishi mawaida.
  3. Utegaji na uteguaji wa vitendawili kupitia redio na runinga.
  4. Sarakasi za wasanii huhifadhi kipera cha vichekesho.
  5. Ngoma za kienyeji kama isukuti katika hafla za kisiasa na harusi.
  6. Utambaji wa hadithi hasa katika sehemu za mashambani.

Tanzu za Fasihi Simulizi

  • Tanzu ni aina za tungo zenye muundo uliokaribia kufanana.
  1. hadithi
  2. semi
  3. ushairi
  4. mazungumzo
  5. maigizo
  • Kipera ni utungo wa fasihi simulizi unaowasilishwa mbele ya watu.

HADITHI

  • Masimulizi yanayotumia lugha ya mtiririko au nathari.

Sifa

  1. Hutumia ya lugha ya mtiririko au nathari-kueleza matukio moja kwa moja.
  2. Hurithishwa jamii kutoka kizazi kimoja hadi kingine.
  3. Huwasilishwa mbele ya hadhira
  4. Hutambwa mahali maalum k.v. ndani ya nyumba, chini ya mti, uwanjani, n.k.
  5. Huweza kutokana na matukio halisi (kihistoria) au ya kubuni.
  6. Huwa na mafunzo fulani kwa jamii/hadhira.
  7. Hutumia wahusika wa aina tofauti k.v. nyumbani, wanyama, ndege, mazimwi, n.k.
  8. Hutumia aina nyingine za sanaa k.v nyimbo, methali, ushairi, n.k.
  9. Huwa na utendaji k.v. mtambaji kuiga fisi anavyokula.
  10. Aghalabu hutambwa jioni.

Sababu za Ngano Kutambwa Jioni/Usiku

  1. Ndio wakati watu walikuwa wamejumuika nyumbani baada ya kazi.
  2. Utambaji ulikuwa njia ya kupitisha wakati chakula kikingojewa.
  3. Wakati huu ulihakikisha mwanajamii hapotezi wakati wa kazi.

Majukumu ya Hadithi

  1. Kufunza maadili yaliyo nguzo kuu kwa wanajamii.
  2. Kukuza ujasiri wa kuzungumza hadharani.
  3. Kuburudisha baada ya kazi ya kutwa.
  4. Kukuza uwezo wa watoto wa kukumbuka ili kutamba baadaye.
  5. Kueleza asili ya mambo k.m visaviini, visasili na ngano za usuli.
  6. Kutahadharisha wanajamii dhidi ya kufanya mambo yasitofaa.
  7. Kuunganisha watu katika jamii wanapojumuika pamoja kusikiliza utambaji.
  8. Ngano za mtanziko hukuza uwezo wa kutathmini na kutoa uamuzi ufaao.
  9. Kukuza lugha hasa kwa hadhira ya watoto.
  10. Kuhifadhi na kuendeleza historia ya jamii k.v. mighani, tarihi, n.k.
  11. Kuelimisha hadhira kuhusu utamaduni wao.
  12. Njia ya kupokeza kizazi historia na utamaduni wa jamii.

Sifa za Mtambaji/Mganaji Bora

  1. Asiwe mwoga ili kuweza kuzungumza hadharani.
  2. Asiwe na haya ili kuweza kuzungumzia mambo ya aibu inapobidi.
  3. Awe na uelewa wa mazingira na masuala ibuka katika jamii ili kuweza kuwasilisha dhana zisizopatikana katika mazingira yake k.m. kutumia rais kuelezea dhana ya mfalme.
  4. Awe na ufahamu mpana wa lugha ili aweze kuitumia kwa uhodari na kuwasilisha kwa wepesi.
  5. Awe mchanganfu na mcheshi ili kunasa makini ya hadhira na kuzuia isikinai.
  6. Awe na ufahamu mpana wa utamaduni husika ili kuzuia kutumia maneno na ishara zinazoweza kuwaudhi au kupingana na imani za hadhira.
  7. Awe na uwezo wa kushirikisha hadhira k.v. kuimba, maswali ya balagha ili isikinai, n.k.
  8. Aweze kujua, matarajio, kiwango cha elimu na tajriba ya hadhira ili kuweza kubadilisha kwa kiwango kinachofaa.
  9. Awe na uwezo wa kuingiliana vizuri na hadhira ili aivutie.
  10. Awe na kumbukumbu nzuri ili usimulizi wake utiririke vizuri.
  11. Awe na uwezo wa kudramatisha ili kuonyesha picha fulani k.v. kuiga toni, sauti, na kiimbo kulingana na swala analowasilisha.
  12. Kubadilisha toni au kiimbo ili hadhira isikinai.
  13. Awe na ujuzi wa kutumia ishara za uso, mwili na miondoko kulingana na hali anayoigiza.
  14. Awe na ujuzi na ufasaha wa lugha ili kuwasilisha mawazo kwa njia mwafaka na inayovutia.
  15. Aweze kubadilisha toni na kiimbo kulingana na hali tofauti anazoigiza k.v. huzuni
  16. Awe na uwezo wa kushirikisha hadhira kwa nyimbo na maswali ya balagha ili kuondoa uchovu wa kutazama na kusikiliza.
  17. Awe na uwezo wa ufaraguzi/ kubadilisha utambaji wake papo hapo kutegemea hadhira yake na kutoa mifano inayofahamika kutoka katika mazingira ya hadhira.
  18. Awe na uwezo wa kutumia mtuo wa kidrama ili kuongeza taharuki, kusisitiza ujumbe na kuteka makini ya hadhira.

Aina za Hadithi

  1. Hadithi za Kubuni
  • Hazisimulii matukio ya kweli bali ya kutungwa
    1. Hadithi za Kisalua/Kihistoria
      • Zinazosimulia matukio yaliyowahi kutendwa na wahusika waliowahi kuishi.
      • Huongezewa ubunifu ili kuvutia zaidi.
        1. Hadithi za Kubuni

Ngano

  • Hadithi zinazosimulia kisa chenye funzo na zenye wahusika aina ya binadamu, viumbe na vitu visivyo na uhai.

Sifa za Ngano

  1. Zina fomyula ya kuanzia/mwanzo maalum.
  2. Zina fomyula ya kumalizia/mwisho maalum.
  3. Zina wahusika aina mbalimbali.
  4. Zina matumizi ya nyimbo.
  5. Hutumia takriri (usambamba) ili kusisitiza k.m. zimwi likakimbia, likakimbia.
  6. Huwa na na maadili/mafunzo
  7. Hutumia maswali ya balagha kuongeza taharuki.
  8. Hutumia tanakali za sauti.
  9. Zina matumizi ya fantasia au matukio yanayokiuka uhalisi/mambo ya ajabu k.v. binadamu kuruka kama ndege, zimwi kumeza watu na baadaye kutapika wote, n.k.
  • Kutambua mbinu zilizotumiwa katika hadithi/ngano
  • Kutambua wahusika

Aina za Fomyula za Kuanzia/Mianzo Maalum

  1. Paukwa, Pakawa. Sahani. Ya mchele. Giza. La mwizi. Na kiboko je? Cha mtoto mrorofi…
  2. Hapo zamani za kale/za kongamawe…
  • Ilitokea…
  1. Hadithi! Hadithi! Hadithi njoo…
  2. Kaondokea chenjangaa, kajenga nyumba kakaa, mwanangu mwanasiti, kijino kama chikichi, cha kujengea kikuta, na vilango vya kupita…
  3. Hapo jadi na jadudi…

Umuhimu wa Fomyula ya Kuanzia/Mwanzo maalum

  1. Kuvuta makini ya hadhira.
  2. Kumtambulisha mtambaji kwa hadhira.
  • Kuashiria mwanzo wa hadithi.
  1. Kutoa hadhira kutoka ulimwengu halisi hadi ule wa hadithi.

Aina za Fomyula za Kumalizia/Miishio Maalum

  1. Hadithi inaishia hapo.
  • Tangu siku hiyo…
  1. Wakaishi raha mustarehe.
  2. Maadili

Umuhimu wa Fomyula ya Kumalizia/Mwisho Maalum

  1. Kuashiria mwisho wa hadithi.
  2. Kutoa hadhira katika ulimwengu wa hadithi hadi ule halisi.
  • Kumpisha/kumpa fursa mtambaji anayefuata.
  1. Kupisha shughuli inayofuata.
  2. Kutoa funzo la hadithi kwa muhtasari.
  3. Kupa hadhira nafasi ya kupumzika baada ya kuwa makini kwa muda.

Umuhimu wa Nyimbo katika Ngano

  1. Kushirikisha hadhira.
  2. Kusisimua hadhira na kuondoa ukinaifu
  • Kuteka makini yao.
  1. Kuwasilisha mafunzo/maadili.
  2. Kutenganisha matukio katika hadithi.
  3. Kuburudisha hadhira.
  • Kupunguzia hadhira mwemeo.

Umuhimu wa Tanakali za Sauti/Onomatopeya katika Ngano

  1. Kuongeza utamu.
  2. Kusaidia msomaji kupata picha kamili.
  • Kusaidia kupata hisia halisi

Aina za Ngano

  1. Hurafa
  • Hadithi zenye wahusika wanyama na ndege.
  • Hurafa za kijanja ni hadithi ambapo wanyama wadogo hutumia ujanja wa hali ya juu ili kujinasua na hali ngumu au mitego wanayotegewa.

Sifa

  1. Wahusika ni wanyama au na au ndege.
  2. Wanyama na ndege hupewa sifa za binadamu
  3. Ni kazi ya ubunifu.
  4. Hutoa mafunzo kwa njia ya kuchekesha na isiyoumiza.
  5. Huwa na ucheshi mwingi.
  6. Hutumia mbinu ya uhuishi.
  7. Huwa na sifa zinazohimizwa na zinazoshutumiwa.
  8. Ujanja au uongo hujitokeza katika hurafa za kijanja.
  9. Ushindi hujitokeza katika hurafa za kijanja.

Umuhimu

  1. Kutahadharisha watu dhidi ya kuwa wa danganyifu/kudanganyika kwa urahisi.
  2. Kuonyesha jinsi tabia ya udanganyifu inavyoweza kujitokeza na kuathiri watu.
  3. Hurafa za kijanja hufunza jinsi ya kupampana na hali ngumu.
    1. Hekaya/Ngano za Kiayari
  • Hadithi zinazomsawiri mhusika anayetumia ulaghai kupata matilaba yake kutoka kwa wengine (Abunuwasi).

Sifa

  1. Wahusika wakuu ni binadamu.
  2. Huwa na ubunifu mkubwa.
  3. Hustaajabisha na kuchekesha.
  4. Ujanja na uongo hujitokeza.
  5. Ushindi hujitokeza.
  6. Ni za kubuni.

Umuhimu

  1. Hutahadharisha watu dhidi ya kuhadaika kwa wepesi.
  2. Huonya dhidi ya matokeo yanayoweza kuwapata wanaojinyakulia mali kwa udanganyifu.
  3. Kuonya dhidi ya usaliti.
  4. Kukashifu viongozi dhalimu na matendo maovu.
  5. Kukejeli wanaotumia nguvu badala ya akili/hekima.
    • Visasili
  • Hadithi zinazoeleza asili ya matukio fulani katika jamii k.m. kifo, jua, lugha, zilizala n.k.

Sifa

  1. Husimulia mambo ya kiimani na kidini.
  2. Huwa na misingi ya kihistoria.
  3. Hueleza asili ya matukio katika jamii.
  4. Wahusika ni wanyama na binadamu.
  5. Huwa na maadili.
  6. Hurithishwa kizazi hadi kingine.

Umuhimu

  1. Kueleza asili ya mambo kama vile kifo, utamaduni n.k.
  2. Kueleza utaratibu wa kutekeleza desturi k.v. mahari.
  3. Kuhalalisha baadhi ya mila na desturi za jamii k.v. ulipaji mahari, uabudu miti, n.k.
  4. Kukitisha mizizi imani fulani ya watu.
  5. Kupunguza athari za majanga kama vile kuhalalisha kifo.
  6. Kutambulisha jamii kwani kila jamii ina aina yake ya visasili.
  7. Kuhifadhi historia na utamaduni wa jamii
    1. Ngano za usuli
  • Hadithi zinazoeleza asili ya hali, tabia, mahusiano au wasifu. k.v. asili ya kuku kuchakura, asili ya kinyonga kwenda kwa tahadhari, n.k.

Sifa

  1. Wahusika ni wanyama na binadamu
  2. Ni kazi ya kubuni.
  3. Hueleza kuhusu asili ya sifa, tabia au hali.
  4. Hutumia mbinu ya uhuishi.
  5. Huwa na maadili.

Umuhimu

  1. Kueleza sababu ya tabia, hali au sifa Fulani.
  2. Kuonya dhidi ya tabia hasi kama vile ulafi.
    1. Ngano za mazimwi
  • Hadithi ambazo wahusika ni mazimwi.

Sifa

  1. Wahusika ni mazimwi
  2. Mazimwi huwakilisha sifa hasi za binadamu k.m ulafi, ukatili, uovu n.k.
  3. Hujaa uharibifu.
  4. Huwa na matumizi mengi ya fantasia.
  5. Kipengele cha safari hujitokeza k.v. kwenda nchi za mbali kutafuta suluhisho.
  6. Ushindi hujitokeza (mazimwi hushindwa).
  7. Ni kazi ya kubuni.
  8. Huwa na maadili.
  9. Mazimwi huwa na sifa zinazokiuka mipaka ya binadamu k.m. kinywa kisogoni, jicho moja kubwa, n.k.

Umuhimu

  1. Kukashifu tabia ya uovu, ulafi, na ukatili.
  2. Kutahadharisha dhidi ya kuwa na ulafi, ukatili n.k.
  3. Kutia moyo waliodhulumiwa kuwa waliowanyanyasa wataadhibiwa siku moja.
    1. Ngano za Mashujaa
  • Ambazo zinazohusu watu waliotenda matendo ya kishujaa katika jamii zao kama vile kuokoa jamii.

Sifa

  1. Kipengele cha motifu au kusafiri nchi za mbali, kupigana na mazimwi kuokoa jamii.
  2. Husawiri mapigano kati ya wema (lila) na ubaya (fira).
  3. Uovu huwakilishwa na mazimwi au viongozi dhalimu
  4. Hatimaye wema hushinda uovu kwa juhudi za mashujaa
    • Ngano za mashujaa ni za kubuni ilhali katika mighani, mashujaa wanaaminiwa waliishi.

Umuhimu

  1. Kuhimiza uzalendo na ujasiri miongoni mwa vijana.
  2. Kuhimiza ujasiri miongoni mwa vijana.
  3. Kusifu mashujaa katika jamii
  4. Kuelimisha jamii kwa kuwapa maarifa ya kukabiliana na changamoto, inda na ila.
  5. Kuhimiza uzalendo kwa kuhimiza watu kuiga mashujaa na kupigania jamii.
  6. Kuonya dhidi ya matendo hasi k.v. ukatili.
  7. Kuhimiza watu kutokata tamaa
    • Ngano za mtanziko
  • Hadithi ambapo mhusika hukabiliwa hali ngumu ya kuamua baina ya mambo wawili au zaidi yanayomkabili.

Sifa

  1. Wahusika ni wanyama au binadamu.
  2. Ni kazi ya kubuni.
  3. Mhusika hulazimika kufanya uteuzi mgumu.
  4. Hali mbili au zaidi zinazotatanisha huwepo.

Umuhimu

  1. Hutuerevusha jinsi ya kupambana na hali ngumu.
  2. Kuonya/kutahadharisha dhidi ya kujiponza.
  3. Kukuza uwezo wa kupima mambo na kuteua lililo muhimu.
  4. Kuonya dhidi ya kutenda bila kuwaza kwa kina.

viii)   Ngano za Kimafumbo

  • Ambazo huwa na maana ya ndani/iliyofichika.
    1. Istiara
  • Hadithi ambayo maana yake huwakilisha maana nyingine iliyofichika k.v. hurafa ambapo wanyama huwakilisha binadamu.
  1. Mbazi
  • Hadithi fupi inayotolewa inayotolewa kama mfano kumkanya au kumwelekeza mtu k.v. katika biblia.
    1. Hadithi za Kisalua/Kihistoria
  1. Mighani
  • Hadithi za mashujaa/majagina wa jamii fulani k.m. Rwanda Magere wa Waluo, Fumo Liyongo wa Wapate, Koome Njue wa Wameru, Wangu wa Makeri wa Wakikuyu na Syokimau wa Wsakamba.

Sifa

  1. Huhusu mashujaa wa jamii fulani.
  2. Wahusika hupambana na hali ngumu inayosababishwa na maadui.
  3. Wahusika hupewa sifa na uwezo usiokuwa wa kawaida k.v. ukubwa wa ajabu, nguvu katika kivuli, nguvu katika nywele, kutoulika n.k.
  4. Wahusika hupigania haki za wanyonge.
  5. Mhusika hukomboa jamii yake dhidi ya maadui.
  6. Mhusika hufa kifo cha huzuni (tanzia) kwa kusalitiwa na mtu wa karibu k.v. mwanamke au jamaa zao.
  7. Mashujaa huuliwa kwa njia ya ajabu kama vile kunyolewa nywele, kivuli kuchomwa mkuki, kuchomwa shindano ya shaba kitovuni
  8. Mighani huzungumzia matukio ya kihistoria.
  9. Kuna tabia ya kupiga chuku matukio yaliyo hadithini.
  10. Mighani hurithishwa jamii kutoka kizazi kimoja hadi kingine.
  11. Huchukuliwa na jamii kama hadithi zenye ukweli na jamii hujinasibisha na mighani hiyo.
  1. Husimulia mambo ya kiimani na kidini.

Umuhimu

  1. Kutambulisha jamii kwani kila jamii ina aina yake ya mighani.
  2. Kuhifadhi na kumbusha historia yajamii.
  3. Kusifu mashujaa katika jamii.
  4. Kuhimiza ujasiri miongoni mwa vijana.
  5. Kuelimisha jamii kwa kuwapa maarifa ya kukabiliana na adui au changamoto.
  6. Kukuza uzalendo kwa kuhimiza watu kuiga mashujaa na kupigania jamii.
  7. Kuonya dhidi ya matendo hasi kama vile usaliti.
  8. Kuhimiza watu kutokata tama.

Tofauti Kati ya Mighani na Visasili

mighani visasili
Þ    Husimulia kuhusu mashujaa.

Þ    Husimulia historia ya jamii.

Þ    Wahusika wakuu ni majagina.

 

Þ    Hueleza sifa za majagina.

Þ    Husimulia asili ya vitu.

 

Þ    Husimulia mianzo ya vitu au mambo.

Þ    Wahusika ni k.v. binadamu, miungu, wanyama, n.k.

Þ    Hueleza mianzo ya desturi.

 

  1. Visakale
    • Masimulizi ya matukio yaliyotendeka zamani k.v. vita, majanga kama njaa na magonjwa na hamahama za jamii k.v. waisraeli kutoka misri.
  • Visaviini
    • Hadithi zinazoeleza chimbuko la jamii Fulani
  1. Mapisi
    • Maelezo ya kihistoria yasiyo na ubunifu wowote k.v. chimbuko la kundi la wabantu kutoka Afrika ya Kati na kuenea sehemu mbalimbali za Afrika.
  2. Tarihi
    • Maelezo kuhusu matukio ya kihistoria kulingana na yalivyofuatana ki wakati
  3. Kumbukumbu
    • Maelezo ya kitawasifu kuhusu mtu au jamii inayotambulika kwa kutoa mchango fulani mkubwa.
      1. Vipera Vingine vya Hadithi
  1. Soga
  • Hadithi fupi za kuchekesha zinazolenga kutania au kudhihaki.

Sifa

  1. Wahusika ni wa kubuni.
  2. Hutaja ukweli unaoumiza.
  3. Hutumia vichekesho kupunguza ukali wa dhihaka.
  4. Hutumia chuku kupita kiasi.
  5. Huhusu tukio moja.
  6. Ni fupi.

Umuhimu

  1. Kukashifu matendo hasi kwa njia ya ucheshi
  2. Kuonya na kutahadharisha dhidi ya matendo hasi k.v. ulaghai.
  3. Kufunza maadili.
  4. Kuburudisha kwa kuchekesha.
    1. Vigano
  • Hadithi fupi zinazosimulia kuhusu matendo mabaya katika jamii na wakati uo huo kuonya na kuelekeza dhidi yayo.
  • Aghalabu huandamana na methali kwa lengo la kufafanua linalokusudiwa au kudhibitisha funzo la methali fulani.

Sifa

  1. Huwa vifupi.
  2. Husimulia kisa kimoja tu.
  3. Wahusika ni binadamu na wanyama.
  4. Hufunza maadili kutokana na methali.
    • Kisa
  • Masimulizi mafupi yenye tukio moja lenye funzo kwa njia ya kufurahisha.

Mambo ya Kuzingatia katika Uchambuzi wa Hadithi/Ngano

  1. Kueleza aina ya ngano kwa kuzingatia wahusika na maudhui
    • Ngano yaweza kuwa ya mazimwi na ya mashujaa kwa wakati mmoja.
    • Ngano yaweza kuwa hurafa, ya usuli na ya kiayari.
  2. Kutaja wahusika
  3. Kufafanua sifa za wahusika wakuu
  4. Maadili/mafunzo yanayojitokeza katika hadithi
  5. Kubainisha sifa za ngano/hurafa/hekaya, n.k. zinazojitokeza katika hadithi.
  6. Kueleza umuhimu wa fomyula ya kuanzia/wimbo uliotumiwa katika hadithi.
  7. Kubainisha tamathali za usemi zilizotumiwa katika hadithi fulani
  8. Kuonyesha jinsi ngano inavyoshughulikia maudhui fulani.
  9. Kufafanua ufaafu wa methali fulani zilizotumiwa katika hadithi.
  10. Katika ngano ya mtanziko, ungekuwa mhusika mkuu ungefanya nini?
  11. Kubainisha matumizi ya mbinu ya fantasia
  12. Kufafanua maswala ibuka/maudhui yaliyoshughulikiwa k.m. usaliti, ujinga, ulaghai, n.k.
  13. Kuchanganua utungo kifani-ploti, wahusika, mbinu za lugha, fantasia, nyimbo, n.k.
  14. Kueleza majukumu ya hadithi.

SEMI

  • Tungo fupi zinazowasilisha ujumbe kwa kufumba au kuchora picha.

Sifa

  1. Huwa fupi kwa kuwasilisha ujumbe mrefu kwa maneno machache.
  2. Ni tanzu tegemezi kwa hutegemea tanzu nyingine kama vile hadithi, mazungumzo, n.k.
  3. Hazibadiliki vivi hivi.
  4. Baadhi ni kielelezo cha maadili k.v. methali.
  5. Hutumia lugha ya kimafumbo.
  6. Huibua taswira.
  7. Huwa na mchezo wa maneno.
  8. Baadhi huwa na muundo maalum k.v. methali na vitendawili.
  9. Nyingine ikikosa kutumika hutoweka k.v. misimu.

Umuhimu

  1. Kuonya k.m methali, ‘Asiyesikia la mkuu huvunjika guu.’
  2. Kukuza uwezo wa kufikiri k.m. vitendawili na chemsha bongo.
  3. Kutafsidi lugha au kupunguza ukali wa maneno k.m. nahau ‘jifungua’ badala ya ‘zaa’.
  4. Kuburudisha k.m. vitendawili, chemsha bongo na vitanza ndimi.
  5. Kuhifadhi siri k.m. nahau, misemo, misimu.
  6. Kuelimisha k.m. kutofanya mambo kwa pupa-mla kwa pupa hadiriki kula tamu.
  7. Kuongeza utamu katika lugha.
  8. Kuboresha matamshi k.m. vitanza ndimi.
  9. Kukuza lugha k.m misimu.
  10. Kukuza utangamano katika jamii kwa kuleta watu pamoja wakati zinawasilishwa.

Vipera vya Semi

  1. Methali
  • Semi fupi ambazo hueleza kwa muhtasari au mafumbo ukweli fulani wa kimaisha.

Sifa

  1. Huwa fupi k.m. ‘Msafiri kafiri.’
  2. Hutumia tamathali za usemi.
  3. Hutumkia lugha ya kimafumbo.
  4. Huwa na maana ya ndani na nje.
  5. Kunazo hufanana kimaana k.m. ‘Haraka haraka haina baraka’ na ‘Polepole ndio mwendo.’
  6. Hupingana zenyewe k.m ‘Polepole ndio mwendo’ na ‘Chelewa chelewa utamkuta mwana si wako.’
  7. Huwa na sifa za kishairi k.v. ukwapi, utao na vina -Haba na haba, hujaza kiba
  8. Sifa za utegemezi kwa kuingiliana na tanzu nyingine za fasihi.
  9. Huwa na muundo maalum wa sehemu mbili:
  1. m ‘Haba na haba…’
  2. Kukamilisha wazo ‘…hujaza kibaba.’

Umuhimu

  1. Kukuza uwezo wa kufikiri kwani mpokezi hufikiri ili kupata maana ya ndani.
  2. Kuonya dhidi ya matendo yasiyofaa k.m. ‘Mchimba kisima huingia mwenyewe’na ‘Ukiambiwa jiambie usijeishia kumbe.’
  3. Kufariji walio katika hali ngumu, Baada ya dhiki faraja, Hakuna marefu yasiyo na ncha, Liandikwalo ndilo liwalo, Ajaliwalo ndilo apatalo.
  4. Kuhimiza watu kujitahidi maishani/kuonyesha jambo jema huja kwa kufanyiwa kazi k.m. ‘Mtaka cha mvunguni sharti ainame,’ ‘Chumia juani ulie kivulini.’
  5. Kupamba lugha iwe na mvuto kwani huwa na usanii mkubwa.
  6. Kuhimiza ushirikiano, ‘Umoja ni nguvu utengano ni udhaifu, ‘Jifya moja haliijiki chungu.’
  7. Kuelimisha mtu ajue jambo muhimu k.m. ‘Usione kwenda mbele kurudi nyuma si kazi’, ‘Pema usijapo pema ukipema si pema tena.’
  8. Kushauri k.m. ‘Enga kabla ya kujenga’ na ‘Mchama ago hanyeli.’
  9. Kufupisha maadili katika ngano.
  10. Kubuni lakabu k.m. ‘kikulacho.’
  11. Kufunza maadili k.m. kuwa na subira-‘Subira huvuta heri.’
  12. Kuhimiza kutokata tama k.m. ‘Bandu bandu huisha gogo’ ‘Papo kwa papo kamba hukata njiwe.’
  13. Kuonyesha umuhimu wa kuthamini jamaa zako kuliko marafiki k.m. ‘Damu ni nzito kuliko maji’ ‘Mla nawe hafi nawe ila mzaliwa nawe.’
  14. Kuonyesha umuhimu wa kuthamini vitu vyako-‘Usiache mbachao kwa msala upitao’ ‘Afadhali dooteni kama ambari kutanda,’
  15. Kukashifu ubinafsi k.m. ‘Mwamba ngoma huvutia kwake’ ‘Kila mchukuzi husifu mzigo wake.’
  16. Kukashifu kiburi k.m. ‘Maskini akipata matako hulia mbwata’ ‘Zingwi zingwi lipe nguo utaona mashauo.’

Mbinu za Lugha/Fani /Tamathali za Usemi katika Fasihi

  • Maneno au vifungu vya maneno vinavyotumiwa kutia fasihi urembo ili kufanya ujumbe ueleweke vyema zaidi.

Aina

  1. Tashbihi
  • Ulinganishi kwa kutumia viunganishi kama, mithili, mfano na sawa.
  1. Sitiari/ Istiara
  • Ulinganishi usio wa moja kwa moja.
  1. Tashhisi/Uhaishaji
  • Kukipa kitu sifa ya uhai.
  1. Taashira/ Ishara
  • Kitu kuwakilisha kingine.
  1. Chuku/udamisi
  • Kutia chumvi au kufanya kitu kionekane kikubwa sana au kidogo sana.
  1. Takriri
  • Urudiaji wa neno au mafungu ya maneno.
  1. Tanakuzi
  • Maneno yaliyo kinyume
  1. Tabaini
  • Msisitizo kwa njia ya kinyume kwa kutumia kikanushio si.
  1. Ritifaa
  • Kusemesha asiyekuwapo kama yupo.
  1. Taharuki
  • Kuacha msomaji akiwa na hamu ya kutaka kujua kipi kitakachojiri halafu.
  1. Majazi
  • Majina yanayooana na sifa za wahusika, vitu au mahali.
  1. Mbinu rejeshi
  • Kukumbusha mambo yaliyopita.
  1. Methali
  • Semi fupi ambazo hueleza kwa muhtasari au mafumbo ukweli fulani wa kimaisha.
  1. Nahau
  • Fungu la maneno lenye maana tofauti na maana ya kawaida ya maneno hayo.
  1. Misemo
  • Semi zinazobeba ukweli wa kujumla Mifano:
  1. Mdokezo
  • Mambo kuachwa bila kumalizwa.
  1. Balagha
  • Maswali yasiyohitaji majibu.
  1. Taswira
  • Ujenzi wa picha akilini.
  1. Kinaya
  • Mhusika kutumia maneno au matendo yaliyo kinyume cha inavyotarajiwa.
  1. Koja
  • Kuorodhesha maneno na vitenzi kwa kutumia koma.
  1. Kejeli
  • Kudharau au kubeza.
  1. Jazanda
  • Kufananisha vitu kwa mafumbo k.m. katika biblia.
  1. Nidaha/ Siyahi
  • Maneno ya kuonyesha hisia za moyoni.
  1. Tanakali/onomatopeya
  • Miigo ya sauti zinazotokea baada ya kitendo.
  1. Uzungumzi nafsia
  • Kujisemesha mwenyewe.
  1. Dayalojia
  2. Utohozi/ Uswahilishaji
  3. Kuchanganya ndimi
  • Kutumia lugha ngeni.
  1. Tafsida/usafidi
  • Kutumia lugha ya adabu au kupunguza ukali wa maneno.
  1. Mkengeuko
  • Kwenda kinyume na matakwa ya jamii k.v. usenge, ndoa ya watu wasio wa rika rika moja, mapenzi nje ya ndoa.
  1. ulinganuzi
  • Kuweka pamoja mambo yanayopingana ili kulinganisha
  1. Kweli kinzani
  • Hoja mbili zinazopingana/kutowezekana.

Matumizi ya Lugha Katika Methali

Sitiari

  1. Mgeni ni kuku mweupe.
  2. Ahadi ni deni.
  3. Upweke ni uvundo.
  4. Mgeni ni kuku mweupe.
  5. Ujana ni moshi.
  6. Mapenzi ni kikohozi.
  7. Kukopa arusi kulipa matanga.

Tashbihi

  1. Kawaida ni kama sheria.
  2. Riziki kama ajali ijapo huitambui.
  3. Usilolijua ni kama usiku wa giza.
  4. Ufalme kama mvua hupiga na kupita.

Tashhisi

  1. Siri ya mtungi muulize kata.
  2. Paka akiondoka panya hutawala.
  3. Jembe halimtupi mkulima.
  4. Ukupigao ndio ukufunzao.
  5. Adhabu ya kaburi aijuaye maiti.

Takriri

  1. Haba na haba hujaza kibaba.
  2. Chovya chovya humaliza buyu la asali.
  3. Hauchi hauchi unakucha.
  4. Hayawi hayawi huwa.
  5. Mtoto wa nyoka ni nyoka.
  6. Bandu bandu huisha gogo.

Balagha

  1. Pilipili usiyoila yakuwashiani?
  2. Angurumapo samba mcheza ni nani?
  3. Wameshindwa wenye pembe seuze wewe kipara?
  4. Simba mla watu akiliwa huwani?
  5. Mzigo uko kichwani, kwapa lakutokeani jasho?
  6. Mavi usiyoyala wayawingiani kuku?
  7. Mla ni mla leo mla jana kalani?

Taswira

  1. Mpanda farasi wawili hupasuka msamba.
  2. Mti mkuu ukigwa wana wa ndege huyumba.
  3. Mtupa jongoo hutupa na ung`ong`o wake.
  4. Angeenda juu kipungu hafikii mbingu.

Chuku

  1. Mzigo wa mwenzio ni kanda la sufi.
  2. Maji ya kifuu bahari ya chungu.
  3. Usipoziba ufa utajenga ukuta.

Tanakali za sauti

  1. Chururu si ndondondo!
  2. Ndo! Ndo! Hujaza ndoo.
  3. Kiliacho pa kijutie.

Kinaya

  1. Bara Hindi ndiko kwenye nguo na waendao uchi wapo.
  2. Kwenye miti hakuna wajenzi.
  3. Asante ya punda ni mateke.
  4. Kigumba kwa nguruwe kwa binadamu ki uchungu.
  5. Kikiharibika cha fundi kikiongoka cha bwana Sudi.

Kejeli/dhihaka/stihizai

  1. Umekuwa mung`unye waharibikia ukubwani.
  2. Hawi Musa kwa kubeba fimbo.
  3. Ucha Mungu si kilemba cheupe.
  4. Kichwa cha kuku hakistahili kilemba.
  5. Kichwa cha nyoka hakibandikwi mtungi.

Jazanda

  1. Joka la mdimu hulinda watundao
  • Mtu mwovu huwanyima wengine vitu asivyovihitaji.
    1. Kupanda mchongoma kushuka ndio ngoma
  • Ni rahisi kujitia katika matata kuliko kujitoa.

Taashira

  1. Kimya kingi kina mshindo mkubwa.
  2. Kuku mgeni hakosi kamba mguuni.

Kweli kinzani

  1. Wagombanao ndio wapatanao.
  2. Ukupigao ndio ukufunzao.
  3. Kuinamako ndiko kuinukako.
  4. Mwenye kelele hana neno.
  5. Kimya kingi kina mshindo mkubwa.

Tanakuzi

  1. Tamaa mbele mauti nyuma.
  2. Mpanda ngazi hushuka.
  3. Usione kwenda mbele kurudi nyuma si kazi.
  • Kuainisha methali kutokana na matumizi ya lugha ni kusema mbinu ambazo imetumia.

Vigezo vya Kuainishia Methali/Kuziweka Pamoja na kuzichambua

  1. Mandhari/mazingira k.m. kilimo.
  • Ukipanda pantosha utavuna pankwisha.
  • Jembe halimtupi mkulima.
    1. Maudhui k.m. ulezi
  • Samaki mkunje angali mbichi.
  • Mcha mwana kulia hulia yeye
  1. c) fani/tamathali k.m. takriri
  • Haba na haba hujaza kibaba
  • Mtoto wa nyoka ni nyoka.
  1. d) Jukumu k.m. kuonye
  • Asiyesikia la mkuu huvunjika guu.
  • Ukiambiwa jiambie usijeishia kumbe.
    1. Maana k.m. sawa
      • Haraka haraka haina baraka.
      • Polepole ndio mwendo.

Vigezo zaidi vya kuchambua methali

  1. Inarejelea vitu gani? K.m. Hindi ndiko kwenye nguo na waendao uchi wapo.
  • Nchi-Hindi
  • Vitu-nguo
  • Watu-waendao uchi
    1. Inakupa wazo gani kuhusu jamii husika?
  • Utamaduni na njia za kiuchumi.
    1. Vitendawili
  • Semi ambazo hutolewa kwa mtu kwa mfano wa swali ili azifumbue.

Sifa

  1. Huwa vifupi kimaelezo.
  2. Hutumia lugha ya kimafumbo.
  3. Hutolewa mbele ya hadhira.
  4. Hutumia ufananisho wa kijazanda.
  5. Kunazo huhusiana na methali k.m. mzee amekufa vyombo vimevunjikavunjika.
  6. Huwa na wakati maalum wa kutolewa yaani jioni.
  7. Huwa na mchezo wa maneno k.m. Ukiona njigi utadhani njege.
  • Maziwa na tui
  1. Hujisimamia vyenyewe.
  2. Kunavyo huwa na jibu zaidi ya moja k.v. Gari la kila mtu
  • miguu, kifo au jeneza
  1. Hutumia tamathali za lugha kwa ufanifu mkubwa
  2. Huweza kuwa na fomyula/muundo maalum
    1. Mteguaji: Kitendawili
    2. Mteguaji: Tega
  • Mteguaji: Kitendawili chenyewe- Popoo mbili zavuka mto
  1. Mteguaji : Mlango
  2. Mtegaji: Umenoa. Nipe mji.
  3. Mteguaji: Ninakupa Nairobi.
  • Mteguaji: Nilienda Nairobi watu wa Nairobi wakaniambia nije niwasalimu. Jibu ni macho.

Umuhimu

  1. Kuburudisha jioni baada ya kazi.
  2. Kukuza ubunifu wa kuvitunga kwa kulinganisha vitu katika mazingira ili kuviunda.
  3. Kuimarisha uwezo wa kukumbuka.
  4. Kukuza uwezo wa kufikiri kwani mfumbiwa huhitaji kufikiri sana ili kupata jibu.
  5. Kuleta umoja na ushirikiano katika jamii kwa kuleta watu pamoja wakati vinategwa.
  6. Kuimarisha ujuzi wa kujieleza kwa lugha.
  7. Kupanua ujuzi wa mazingira wa mtoto.
  8. Kuendeleza utamaduni wa jamii k.m. Nyumbani mwetu mna papai lililoiva lakini. siwezi kulichuma
  • Ndugu wa kiume asimuoe nduguye wa kike.
  1. Kukejeli au kudharau tabia mbaya k.m. Wazungu wawili wanachungulia dirishani
  • makamasi

Aina za vitendawili

  1. Sahili
    • Vina muundo rahisi/maneno machache k.m Akiona mwangaza wa jua hufa-samaki.
  2. Tata
  • Vyenye majibu tofauti
    1. Kisimulizi
  • Masimulizi k.m. Kulikuwa na baba ng’ambo moja ya mto na binti zake wawili ng’ambo ya pili. Alikuwa na maembe mawili aliyopaswa kuyavukisha pamoja apelekee binti zake. Angefanya nini?
    1. Vya tanakali k.m. Parrrr! Mpaka Makka-utelezi.
    2. Mkufu
  • Vyenye sehemu zinazochangizana kimaana k.m. Nikitembea yuko lakini nikiingia nyumbani hupotea-kivuli.

Matumizi ya Lugha Katika Vitendawili

Tashhisi

  1. Amefunika kote kwa blanketi lake jeusi-giza.
  2. Akivaa nguo hapendezi, akiwa uchi hupendeza mno-ndizi.
  3. Anakula lakini hashibi-kifo/mauti.
  4. Amchukuapo hamrudishi-kaburi.
  5. Akizungumza kila mtu hubabaika-radi.
  6. Daima nasababisha mafarakano-uke wenza.
    • Tashbihi
  7. Boi wangu kazama kaibuka kama mzungu-mwiko wa ugali.

Sitiari

  1. Bibi hatui mzigo-konokono.
  2. Mamangu hachoki kunibeba-kitanda.
  3. Fatuma mchafu-ufagio.
  4. Saa yetu kadiri inavyotembea ndivyo inavyopunguza nguvu-moyo.
  5. Mzungu kujishika kiuno- kikombe.
  6. Nina mapapai yangu mawili ambayo siwezi kuyala- matiti ya mwanamke.
  7. Ng`ombe wangu nisipomshika mkia hali nyasi-jembe.
  8. Kitu changu kitumiwacho na wengine kuliko mimi-jina.
  9. Popoo mbili zavuka mto-macho.
  10. Gari la kila mtu-miguu.
  11. Dada ni mrembo lakini akiguzwa analia-papai.

Takriri

  1. Huku ng`o na kule ng`o-giza.
  2. Amezaliwa Ali, amekufa Ali, amerudi Ali-nywele.
  3. Huku fungu katikati bahari-naz.i

Tanakali

  1. Parrr! Mpaka Makka-utelezi.
  2. Huku pi kule pi-mkia wa kondoo atembeapo.
  3. Ba funika ba funua (Bak bandika, bak bandua)-nyayo.
  4. Tang! Yaanguka-sarafu.

Kweli kinzani

  1. Ana meno lakini hayaumi-kitana.
  2. Ajenga ingawa hana mikono-ndege.
  3. Hukopa lakini halipi-kifo.
  4. Nina shamba langu kubwa lakini nikivuna halijai hata kofi-nywele.
  5. Hufa akifufuka-bahari kupwa.
  6. Nameza lakini sishibi-mate.

Taswira

  1. Adui tumemzingira lakini hatumwezi-moto.
  2. Nyama nje, ngozi ndani, mchanga ndani-firgisi ya kuku.
  3. Wanatazamana tu lakini hawaamkiani-ardhi na bingu.
  4. Askari wangu wote wamevaa kofia upande-mahindi shambani.
  5. Samaki wangu aelea kimgongomgongo-merikebu.
  6. Babu amebeba machicha meupe kichwani- mvi.

Stihizai/dhihaka/kejeli

  1. Akivaa miwani hafanyi kazi vizuri-mlevi.
  2. Mzungu anachungulia dirishani-makamasi.
  3. Uzi mwembamba umefunga dume-usingizi.
  4. Mtani wangu hata akiishi majini hatakati-chura.
  5. Kisiki chetu hakikui-mbilikimo.
  6. Nimemuona bi kizee amejitwika machicha-mvi.

Jazanda

  1. Mungu alinipa shilingi mbili, moja nitumie nyingine niweke-ardhi na mbingu.
  • Kuchambua kitendawili kwa kueleza mbinu za lugha zilizokiunda.

Kulinganisha vitendawili na methali

Kufanana

  • Zote mbili ni tungo fupi.
  • Zote mbili huwa na maana fiche.
  • Zote mbili hutumia lugha inayojenga taswira.
  • Zote mbili hupata maana kulingana na jamii.
  • Zote mbili Huwa na muundo maalum.
  • Zote mbili hufumbata ukweli fulani wa kijamii.

Tofauti

Vitendawili Methali
ü  Vina fomyula maalum ya uwasilishaji.

ü  Fumbo lazima lifumbuliwe papo hapo.

ü  Maarufu zaidi miongoni mwa watoto/vijana.

 

 

ü  Hutolewa katika vikao maalum.

ü  Hadhira tendi inayotoa maana

ü  Hutumia lugha ya majibizano.

ü  Hazina fomyula.

 

 

ü  Fumbo halifumbuliwi papo hapo.

ü  Kuonyesha hekima hasa miongoni mwa watu wazima na wazee.

ü  Si lazima zitengewe vikao.

ü  Hadhira si tendi.

 

ü  Kauli moja ya msemaji

  • Chemsha Bongo
  • Maswali ambayo huhitaji mtu kutumia akili na ujuzi kuyajibu.
  • Mafumbo ni kauli zenye maana iliyofichika na hujumuisha vitendawili na chemshabongo.

Mifano

  1. Kilo moja ya chuma na kilo moja ya nyama ipi nzito?
  2. Amada ana wafanyikazi saba, wanne hufanya kazi vizuri, wawili ni kama wamekufa, mmoja ni kama mwenda wazimu- miguu, pembe na mkia wa ng’ombe.
  3. Kipungu alipita juu, mama na ndege wawili wakamwangalia. Je macho mangapi yalimuona kipungu?- manne.
  4. Nina watu wangu watatu, wawili ni watoto na wawili ni baba- mtoto, baba na babu.
  5. Chura alitumbukia katika shimo la futi 30 na anaruka futi 10. Aruke mara ngapi ili atoke?- Hawezi.
  6. Watu watatu wanavuka mto. Mmoja aliyaona maji na kuyakanyaga. Wapili aliyaona lakini hakuyakanyaga. Watatu hakuyaona wala kuyakanyaga. Watu hao ni kina nani?

Sifa

  1. Ni kauli fupi au ndefu.
  2. Hutuia lugha ya kimafumbo.
  3. Hutumia ufananisho wa kijazanda.
  4. Huhitaji mtu kuwaza ili kupata jibu.
  5. Hujengwa na vitu vinavyotokana na mazingira.
  6. Hazina muundo maalum kama methali, nahau na vitendawili
  7. Hupima uwezo wa msikilizaji wa kutambua jambo lililofichwa.

Umuhimu

  1. Kuimarisha stadi ya kusikiliza.
  2. Kunoa uwezo wa kufahamu.
  3. Kutoa mawaidha.
  4. Kufunza kuhusu maumbile.
  5. Kuimarisha uwezo wa kukumbuka.
  6. Kufunza mambo kuhusu mazingira na maumbile.
  7. Kukuza uwezo wa kutumia lugha.
  8. Kukuza uwezo wa kufikiri.
  9. Kuburudisha na kuchekesha.
  10. Kukuza uwezo wa kubuni.
    • Vitanza Ndimi
  • Sentensi zenye mfuatano wa sauti zinazotatanisha kimatamshi zinapotamkwa kwa haraka.

Mifano

  1. Wataita wataita Wataita wa Taita.
  2. Waite wale wana wa liwali wale wali wa liwalii
  3. Kupa mpe akupao kumpa asokupa si kupa ni kutupa.
  4. Shirika la Reli la Rwanda limefungwa.
  5. Hilo lililoliwa ndilo nililolitaka.
  6. Mchuuzi wa mchuzi hana ujuzi wa mjusi wa juzi.
  7. Cha mkufuu mwanafuu ha akila hu cha mwanafuu mkufuu hu akila ha
  8. Pema usijapo pema ukipema si pema tena
  9. Nguo zisizotakikana zitachomwa zote.

Sifa

  1. Ni kauli fupi.
  2. Huwa na mchezo wa maneno.
  3. Huundwa kwa sauti zinazokaribiana kimatamshi.
  4. Hutumia maneno yenye maana zaidi ya moja au yenye sauti sawa.
  5. Hutanza/hutatiza ndimi za wengi wakalemewa kutamka.
  6. Hukanganya kimatamshi.

Umuhimu

  1. Kukuza matamshi bora mtu anapoendelea kutamka.
  2. Kukuza uwezo wa kufikiri haraka ili kujua maana za maneno ili kutamka ipasavyo.
  3. Kupanua ujuzi wa msamiati.
  4. Kuburudisha kwa kufurahisha na kuchangamsha.
  5. Husaidia kutofautisha maana za maneno.
  6. Kujenga stadi ya kusikiliza.
  7. Kukuza ubunifu kwa kuteua maneno yanayotatanisha kisauti na kimaana.
  8. Kujenga uhusiano bora kwa ucheshi.
    1. Lakabu
  • Jina la msimbo/kupanga/ambalo mtu hupewa au hujipa kutokana na sifa zake.

Asili ya Lakabu

  1. Tabia
  2. Sifa za kimaumbile
  3. Matendo
  4. Nasaba atokayo mtu.
  5. Tabaka
  6. Jinsi mtu anavyotamka maneno k.m. ung’eng’e.

Mifano

  1. Nyayo
    • Moi
  2. Simba wa Yuda
  • Haille Selassie
  1. Mkuki uwakao
  • Kenyatta
  1. Nyundo/Tingatinga
  • Raila
  1. Baba wa taifa
  • Rais
  1. Mama wa Taifa
  • Mke wa Rais

Sifa

  1. Huwa neno au fungu la maneno kadha.
  2. Huwa na maana iliyofumbwa.
  3. Huoana na sifa hasi au chanya za aliyepewa.
  4. Huwa za kusifu au kudhihaki.
  5. Huweza kudumu hata kusahaulisha jina halisi la mtu.
  6. Hutumia sitiari k.m. chui kumaanisha mkali.
  7. Hutumia taswira.
  8. Hushika sana kimatumizi miongoni mwa watu.

Umuhimu

  1. Kufahamisha sifa za mtu kwa kifupi.
  2. Huwa njia ya washairi ya kujitangaza bila kujisifu moja kwa moja.
  3. Hutumiwa kama ishara ya heshima kwa anayestahili heshima k.m. kiongozi.
  4. Kuficha utambulisho au jina halisi la mtu.
  5. Hutumiwa katika majigambo na mhusika kuonyesha ubingwa wake.
  6. Kuficha siri ili anayemrejelewa asijulikane k.m. kikulacho.
  7. Kukuza uhusiano bora miongoni mwa watani wanaporejeleana kwa lakabu.
  8. Kusifu tabia njema kwa kumpa mtu lakabu nzuri.
  9. Kudhihaki au kukashifu tabia mbaya kwa kumpa mtu lakabu mbaya
  10. Kutambulisha asili ya mtu.
    • Misemo
  • Semi zinazobeba ukweli wa kijumla.

Mifano

  1. Binadamu ni udongo.
  2. Mwili haujengwi kwa mbao.
  3. Umaskini si kilema.
  4. Lila na fira havitangamani.
  5. Ndio kwanza mkoko ualike maua.
    • Mambo kuzidi kushika kasi.
  6. Mgomba haupandwi changaraweni ukamea
  • Jambo halifanywi mahali pasipofaa likapendeza.

Sifa

  1. Hutumia lugha ya muhtasari.
  2. Hutoa ukweli kwa jumla.
  3. Hazina muundo maalum.

Umuhimu

  1. Kusisitiza ujumbe.
  2. Kuongeza utamu katika lugha.
  3. Kusisitiza jambo fulani.
  4. Kufunza maadili au kuhimiza.
  5. Kuchochea hisi fulani.
    • Nahau

Fungu la maneno lenye maana tofauti na maana ya kawaida ya maneno hayo.

Mifano

 

  1. Kuasi ukapera
    • kuoa
  2. Kupiga vijembe
  • sema kwa mafumbo
  1. Ndege mbaya
  • bahati mbaya
  1. Kidudu mtu
  • mfitini
  1. Paka mafuta kwa mgongo wa chupa
  • Danganya au hadaa mtu
  1. Visha kilemba cha ukoka
  • Mpa mtu sifa za uongo ili umpumbaze
  1. Kubali shingo upande
  2. Kuyavulia maji ngu
  • kumaliza jambo fulani ulilolianzia
  1. Arusi ya ndovu kumla mwanawe
  • kubwa

 

Sifa

  1. Hutumia lugha ya kimkato.
  2. Maneno huwa na maana tofauti na ya kawaida.
  3. Kunazo huwa na maana zaidi ya moja k.v. kuja jamvi-kumaliza shughuli au kuondoka.
  4. Huundwa kwa neno moja, mawili au zaidi.
  5. Huibua taswira.
  6. Zina muundo maalum/huundwa kwa aina mbalimbali za maneno.

 

  1. T+T
  • kufa kupona
  • kufumba na kufumbua
    1. T+N
  • kupiga domo
  • kata kamba
    • T+E
  • Kujikaza kisabuni
  • kufa kiofisa
    1. N+N
  • donda dugu
  • domo kaya
    1. N+V
  • nyota njema
  • dege mbaya
  1. N+T
  • damu kumkauka
  • akili kumruka

 

Umuhimu

  1. Kukuza na kuendeleza msamiati wa maneno.
  2. Kupunguza ukali wa maneno (tafsida).
  3. Kuongeza utamu/ladha katika lugha.
  4. Kuhifadhi siri kwani sio wote wanajua maana.
  5. Kujaribu uwezo wa msikilizaji kufichua maana iliyofichika.
    • Misimu/simo
  • Semi ambazo huzuka katika mazingira na kipindi fulani.

Aina za Mizimu

  1. Inayotumika na kutoweka
  2. Inayokita kimatumizi kuingizwa katika Kiswahili sanifu k.m. toa chai, chokora, n.k.

Asili

 

  1. Ufupishaji maneno
    • komp
  2. Utohozi
  • Fathee
  • hepi
  1. Sitiari/jazanda
  • nyani-mlinda lango
  • fisi- mlafi
  1. Tanakali
  • mtutu- bunduki
  • ndala- malapulapu
  1. Uundaji maneno mapya
  • hanya
  1. Kupa maneno maana mpya
  • chuma-gari
  • toboa- faulu
  1. Kugeuza maneno
  • risto-stori
  1. Kuboronga lugha
  • ashu-ashara/kumi

Mifano

  • Jisikia sukari
    • kuringa
  1. Kaa ngumu
  • kutotishika/kuvumilia
  1. Chongoa mtu
  • mfanyia mzaha
  1. Kula njaro
  • kupuuza kazi
  1. Piga nduthe
  • kimbia/toroka
  1. Piga ngeta
  • kukaba koo
  1. Leta diambo
  • zozana/lalamika
  1. Ingia baridi
  • kuogopa
  1. Pewa msomo
  • gombezwa
  1. Kusota
  • kuishiwa na pesa
  1. Ingia mitini
  • toweka/toroka
  1. Kung`ara
  • kuvaa vizuri
  1. Marehemu George
  • nguo za mitumba
  1. Vaa chupa
  • vaa suruari nyembamba
  1. Kujisikia poa
  • kuwa na furaha
  1. Kula hepi
  • kuburudika
  1. Lala kibahasha
  • tulia tuli baada ya kushindwa katika jambo

 

Sifa

  1. Ni kauli fupi.
  2. Hutumiwa na kundi dogo la watu.
  3. Huzuka katika mazingira na kipindi maalum.
  4. Ni lugha ya kimafumbo.
  5. Hutumiwa na kundi dogo la watu katika jamii.
  6. Huzuka na kutoweka baada ya muda.
  7. Kunazo hudumu na kukubaliwa kama lugha sanifu k.v. matatu, bodaboda, chai, chokora, daladala, n.k.
  8. Huwa na maana nyingi k.m. ‘mahewa’ humaanisha mziki, uongo au ulevi wa dawa za kulevya.
  9. Maneno yana maana tofauti na ya kawaida.
  10. Si lugha sanifu na hivyo haipaswi kutumiwa katika mazungumzo rasmi.
  11. Hupendeza miongoni mwa watumizi.
  12. Hutoweka baada ya matumizi kwa muda.
  13. Hubadilika k.m. mbuyu na buda humaanisha baba.

Umuhimu

  1. Kuficha siri ya wanaoitumia.
  2. Kupanua lugha kimsamiati ikikubalika.
  3. Kurahisisha mawasiliano kwa kuondoa uchovu wa urasmi.
  4. Kuonyesha ubingwa wa lugha kwa kuhisi huonyesha umaarufu wa lugha
  5. Kutenga wasio wana kikundi.
  6. Kutafsidi/kupunguza ukali wa maneno k.m. Amepata bol-mimba.
  7. Kupamba lugha na kuifanya ivutie
  8. Kufanya wanakikundi wajihisi kuwa pamoja.
  9. Kujitambulisha na watu wa kikundi fulani.
    1. Shirikina
  • Semi ambazo huonyesha imani fulani ya kundi ya watu

Mifano

  1. Ukijikuna kiganja cha mikono utapata pesa.
  2. Ukila chakula gizani utakula na shetani.
  3. Kuzaliwa ukiwa na vidole sita ni kuwa na bahati.
  4. Bundi akilia karibu na nyumba mtu mmoja wa nyumba ile atafariki.

Umuhimu

  1. Kukataza maovu.
  2. Kuhifadhi utamaduni.
  3. Kuchangia umoja wa kitaifa kwa aina moja ya itikadi kupatikana katika jamii nyingi.
  4. Kutujulisha kuhusu itikadi za watu.
    1. Tanakali za Sauti (Onomatopeya)
  • Maneno ambayo huiga sauti ya jambo, tendo au tukio fulani

Mifano

  1. Boboka bobobo!
  • payuka ovyo ovyo
  1. Bwakia bwaku
  • akia upesi upesi
  1. Bwatika bwata
  • enda chini kwa mshindo
  1. Bweka bwebwebwe!
  • lia kama mbwa
  1. Chaga ngungundu
  • shikilia jambo
  1. Ng’o!
  • kutoambulia chochote
  1. Legalega lege
  • kosa kuwa imara
  1. Chakua nyakunyaku
  • tafuna kwa kutoa sauti ya kuudhi
  1. Bingirika bingiribingiri!
  • pinduka
  1. Birua biru!
  • angusha na kupindua
  1. Shindilia ndi!

       Mianguko

  1. Pu/kacha
  • tawi
  1. Pu, pu, pu
  • mfululizo
  1. Pukupuku!
  • mvua
  1. Pwa!
  • kwa matope
  1. Pwata!
  • kitu kinene
  1. Tang’!
  • sarafu pagumu
  1. Tapwi
  • matopeni
  1. Tifu
  • mchangani
  1. Tubwi/ chubwi
  • majini

 

Sifa

  1. Ni kauli fupi.
  2. Ni miigo ya sauti zinazotokea baada ya tendo fulani.
  3. Hazina muundo maalum.
  4. Hujumuishwa katika fani nyingine.
  5. Hutumia takriri.

Umuhimu

  1. Kuwezesha kuunda taswira ya jinsi mambo yanavyotokea.
  2. Kuonyesha hisia fulani.
  3. Kuongeza uzito kwa maneno.
  4. Kuongeza utamu katika mazungumzo.
  5. Kusisitiza jambo.
  6. Kuipa lugha ladha na mvuto.
  7. Kujenga tabia ya kusikiliza kwa makini ili kutambua mlio.
  8. Kukuza ustadi wa kuiga na kuigiza.
  9. Ni mbinu mojawapo ya mawasiliano.
    1. Takriri za maana
  • Mafungu ya maneno yanayosisitiza na kueleza maana zaidi ya kitendo.

Mifano

  1. Haambiliki hasemezeki
  2. Siku nenda siku rudi
  3. Tilia huku ukitolea kule
  4. Hasikii la mwadhini wala la mteka maji msikitini

Umuhimu

  1. Kutia ladha katika lugha na kuifanya iwe na mnato.
  2. Kusisitiza jambo.
  3. Kuonyesha ukwasi wa lugha ya mnenaji.
    • Tashbihi
  • Misemo ya ulinganisho

Sifa

  1. Ni fupi.
  2. Hutumia viungio kama, mithili ya, n.k.
  3. Huwa na ujumbe wa kina.
  4. Hutoa taswira ambayo husaidia keleza hulka kikamilifu.

Umuhimu

  1. Kueleza sifa za kinazozungumziwa
  2. Kuongeza lugha utamu
  3. Kuonyesha umilisi wa lugha wa mtumizi

USHAIRI

  • Utanzu wa fasihi unaotumia lugha ya mkato inayoeleza maudhui yake kwa ufupi.

Sifa

  1. Hutumia lugha ya kimkato.
  2. Huwasilishwa mbele ya hadhira.
  3. Huwasilishwa na mtu mmoja au kundi la watu.
  4. Huwa na muundo maalum k.v. beti, vipande na vina.
  5. Hutegemea sauti iliyo kipengele muhimu.
  6. Huandamana na ishara za mikono, uso n.k.
  7. Una mpangilio maalum wa maneno.
  8. Una uteuzi maalum wa maneno.
  9. Uwasilishaji wake huandamana na vitendo/uigizaji.
  10. Hurithishwa kutoka kizazi kimoja hadi kingine kwa mdomo.
  11. Huandamana na shughuli maalum k.v. matanga, kazi, n.k.
  12. Huwa na mapigo ya kimziki au huweza kuimbika.
  13. Huweza kuambatana na ala za mziki.
  14. Hadhira hushiriki katika uwasilishaji wa ushairi simulizi.

Majukumu

  1. Kuburudisha watu katika sherehe au shughuli fulani ya kijamii.
  2. Kutakasa hisia au kutoa hisia zinazomsumbua mtu.
  3. Kufunza maadili au tabia zinazokubalika na jamii.
  4. Kufariji watu kutokana na maafa, kifo au kushindwa.
  5. Kukuza uzalendo kwa kuhimiza watu kuiga waliotendea jamii mambo makuu k.v. mashujaa.
  6. Kuhifadhi historia ya jamii k.m. maghani simulizi na tenzi.
  7. Kuhifadhi na kudumisha utamaduni wa jamii.
  8. Kuelimisha kuhusu suala fulani.
  9. Kukashifu/kukejeli sifa mbaya za wabaya.
  10. Kukuza umoja na ushirikiano katika jamii kwa kujumuisha watu pamoja.
  11. Kusifu na kutukuza mashujaa katika jamii (tenzi).
  12. Kukanya/kutahadharisha dhidi ya matendo maovu.
  13. Kukuza urembo au usanii wa lugha kwa kuwa una ufundi mkubwa wa matumizi ya lugha.
  14. Kuhamasisha jamii k.v. kisiasa.
  15. Kukuza ubunifu kwa mtunzi na mwasilishaji
  16. Kukuza ubunifu kwa kutunga kwa kuzingatia beti, mizani, vina na uteuzi maalum wa maneno.

Vipera vya Ushairi

  1. wimbo
  2. maghani
  3. mashairi mepesi (utungo unaokaririwa)
  4. ngojera (kwa majibizano)
  5. tendi au rara (husimuliwa kwa mapigo ya kishairi)
    1. Wimbo
  • Uungo wenye mahadhi ya kupanda na kushuka

Sifa

  1. Huwasilishwa kwa njia ya mdomo.
  2. Hutolewa kwa mahadhi ya kupanda na kushuka kwa sauti.
  3. Hutumia lugha ya mkato.
  4. Hadhira yaweza kuwepo au isiwepo.
  5. Huwa na mwimbaji au waimbaji wanaoimba.
  6. Waimbaji wanaweza kujivika maleba.
  7. Huweza kuambatana na ala k.v. ngoma, zeze, kayamba n.k.
  8. Huwa na urudiaji wa mstari au kifungu.
  9. Aghalabu huimbwa na kupokezanwa baina ya kiongozi na waimbaji
  10. Huimbwa tu au huambatana na kucheza.
  11. Huweza kuandamana na shughuli fulani k.v. arusi, kazi, matanga, n.k.
  12. Huwa na muundo maalum wa beti, mistari, vina, k.

Majukumu

  1. Kuburudisha k.m. tumbuizo.
  2. Nyenzo ya kiuchumi kwa baadhi ya watu.
  3. Kuliwaza k.m. mbolezi.
  4. Kuhimiza watu wakiwa kazini k.m. hodiya.
  5. Kuelimisha kuhusu suala fulani k.m. ukimwi, ufisadi, n.k.
  6. Kuhimiza uzalendo k.m. za siasa na taifa.
  7. Kumbembeleza mtoto aache kulia au alale k.m. bembelezi.
  8. Kukashifu/kukejeli mwenendo mbaya k.v. uchoyo, vivu, n.k.
  9. Kufunza maadili au tabia inayokubaliwa na jamii k.v. ukarimu, uaminifu, n.k.

Ubaya wa nyimbo

  1. Kutumiwa kueneza hisia za kikabila.
  2. Kutia watu kasumba.
  3. Hutumiwa kueneza propaganda ili kushawishi watu.
  4. Kupotosha kimaadili k.v. kuhimiza zinaa.
  5. Mtu akizizoea humlevya.

Aina za nyimbo

  1. Bembelezi/bembea
  • Nyimbo zilizoimbwa kumbembeleza/kumwongoa mtoto aache kulia au alale.

Sifa

  1. Huimbwa na mama au walezi.
  2. Aghalabu huwa fupi.
  3. Huimbwa kwa sauti ya chini.
  4. Huimbwa kwa sauti nyororo.
  5. Zina mapigo ya polepolena taratibu.
  6. Huwa na mahadhi mazuri.
  7. Huimbwa aghalabu mtoto akiwa amebebwa kwa mbeleko na mwimbaji akimpapasapapasa.
  8. Zina urudiaji wa maneno ya kibwagizo.
  9. Huwa na lugha ya kushawishi k.v. kutoa ahadi ya kununulia mtoto zawadi.

Majukumu

  1. Kumnyamazisha mtoto anapolia.
  2. Kuwaongoa watoto walale.
  3. Kutumbuiza watoto.
  4. Kusuta wasiowapa watoto malezi mema.
  5. Kuonya mtoto dhidi ya tabia hasi k.v. kulia ovyo.
  6. Kusifu mtoto.
  7. Kuonyesha msimamo wa jamii kuhusu mtoto.
  8. Kumfariji mtoto k.m. kutokana na kuumia akicheza.
    1. Nyimbo za watoto/chekechea
  • Zilizoimbwa na watoto wakati wa kucheza/shughuli zao

Majukumu

  1. Kuburudisha watoto.
  2. Kuwaelimisha watoto kuhusu jamii.
  3. Kukuza umoja na ushirikiano baina ya watoto kwa kuwajumuisha pamoja na kucheza bila kujali kabila, tabaka, n.k.
  4. Kukashifu tabia hasi miongoni mwa watoto k.v. uchoyo.
  5. Kukuza ubunifu miongoni mwa watoto wanapobuni nyimbo zinazooana na michezo yao.
  6. Kuifanya michezo ya watoto ipendeze.
  • Nyimbo za sifa/sifo
  • Za kujisifu au kusifu mtu kwa mchango wake katika jamii.

Sifa

  1. Zaweza kuwa nyiso, za arusi za kutawazwa n.k.
  2. Huimbwa katika muktadha maalum k.v. arusini, jandoni, n.k.
  3. Hutumia sitiari au kufananisha na mnyama, mkuki, n.k.
  4. Hupiga chuku sifa za anayesifiwa.

Majukumu

  1. Kusifu mtu kutokana na matendo yake mazuri.
  2. Kutangaza mchango na mafanikio ya anayesifiwa.
  3. Kukuza uzalendo kwa kuhimiza watu kuiga matendo mazuri ya anayesifiwa.
  4. Kuburudisha watu katika sherehe fulani.
  5. Kuangazia matendo ya wahusika.
    1. Hodiya/yimbo za Kazi
  • Zilizoimbwa wakati wa kazi.

Sifa

  1. Huimwa watu wakifanya kazi k.v. uwindaji, ukulima, uvuvi, ubaharia, n.k.
  2. Huimbwa na mfanyakazi mmoja au kundi lao.
  3. Zina maneno ya kuhimiza.
  4. Urefu wake hutegemea kazi.
  5. Mdundo hutegemea kasi ya kazi ikama inafanywa kwa kasi mdundo ni wa kasi, kama polepole mdundo ni wa polepole.

Majukumu

  1. Kuburudisha watu wakifanya kazi.
  2. Kurahisisha kazi kwa kupunguza fikra za uchovu.
  3. Kuhimiza bidii kazini.
  4. Kuhimiza watu wapende kazi zao.
  5. Kuondoa uchovu na ukinaifu wakati wa kazi.
  6. Kuwatia moyo wafanyakazi wasikate tamaa.
  7. Kutambulisha jamii kwa kuonyesha shughuli zake za kazi.
  8. Kusifu kazi.
  9. Kukashifu uvivu.
  10. Kuonyesha matatizo na changamoto za wafanyikazi.
  11. Kujenga umoja na ushirikiano baina ya wafanyakazi wanapoziimba pamoja. Aina za hodiya
    1. Wawe/vave
  • Zinazoimbwa wakati wa kulima.
    1. Nyimbo za uwindaji
  • Zilizoimbwa watu wakienda au kutoka katika uwindaji.

Majukumu

  1. Kumburudisha mwindaji.
  2. Kumtoa mwindaji upweke.
  3. Kusifu mnyama.
  4. Kujasirisha wawindaji.
  5. Kimai
    • Zinazoimbwa katika shughuli za majini k.v. uvuvi na ubaharia.

Majukumu

  1. Kuburudisha wavuvi na mabaharia.
  2. Kuwajasirisha ili kukabili adha za baharini.
  3. Kuwatoa upweke.
    1. Nyimbo za mapenzi
      • Zilizoimbwa kutoa hisia za mapenzi.

Sifa

  1. Huwa na ujumbe wa kimapenzi.
  2. Maneno matamu yenye hisia nzito.
  3. Matumizi ya chuku k.m. sili wala silali.
  4. Huwa zina sifa au kashfa.

Mjukumu

  1. Kuburudisha anayezisikiliza.
  2. Kuomba uchumba au mapenzi.
  3. Kusifu tabia au urembo/umbo la mpenzi.
  4. Kusifu wapenzi.
  5. Kukashifu mpenzi asiye na sifa nzuri.
  6. Kusuta waliodhani penzi lisingefaulu.
  7. Kupunguza uzito wa hisia k.v. huzuni au udhia baada ya kusalitiwa na mpenzi.
  1. Nyimbo za arusi
    • Zinazoimbwa wakati wa kufunga ndoa.

Sifa

  1. Huimbwa kuonyesha hisia za wazazi, jamaa na marafiki
  2. Hushauri maharusi na waliohudhuria kuhusu majukumu ya ndoa
  3. Wakati mwingine husifia maharusi.

Majukumu

  1. Kutumbuiza maharusu na waliohudhuria.
  2. Kusifu maharusi.
  3. Kutoa pongezi kwa Bw. na Bi. arusi kwa kujihifadhi vyema.
  4. Kufunza majukumu ya ndoa.
  5. Kutoa mwongozo wa kupambana na vikwazo ndoani
  6. Kusuta mahasidi waliodhani ndoa isingefaulu.
  7. Kukanya na kutahadharisha watu wanaoingilia ndoa za watu kuziharibu.
    • Nyimbo za Dini
      • Zilizoandamana na shughuli za kidini.

Majukumu

  1. Kuabudu Mungu ama miungu.
  2. Kusifu mungu/miungu.
  3. Kutoa shukrani kwa mungu.
  4. Kuomba mema kutoka kwa Mungu au miungu.
  5. Kutoa mafunzo ya kidini.
  • Tumbuizo
    • Nyimbo za kujipa burudani
    • Huimbwa wakati wa mapumziko

Majukumu

  1. Kutumbuiza watu k.v. ngomani, arusini, n.k.
  2. Kuwapa vijana mwongozo/kuadilisha.
  1. Nyiso/Nyimbo za Tohara
  • Zinazohusiana na tohara.

Mfano

Ewe kilizi

Ulozowea kujificha

Nyuma ya mama kujikinga, dhidi ya milio

ya radi ilo juu mbinguni

Jua kesho ni siku ya siku

Siku ya kujua mbichi na mbivu

Kutofautisha jogoo na vipora,

            Ngariba taposhika, chake kijembe

Ndipo utakapojua bayani

Ukoo wetu si wa kunguru

Ikiwa hu tayari

Kisu kukidhihaki

Sithubutu kamwe, wanjani kuingia

sije kuniaibisha miye, amiyo na akraba nzima!

Sifa

  1. Huambatana na shughuli za jando (wavulana) na unyago (wasichana).
  2. Huimbwa faraghani katika mazingira ya tohara pekee.
  3. Huimbwa usiku wa kuamkia siku ya tohara.
  4. Zilitoa sifa kwa waliotahiriwa, wazazi na wasimamizi wao.
  5. Ziliimbwa kuwapa wavulana ujasiri wa kukabili kisu cha ngariba.
  6. Zilitoa mafunzo kuhusu majukumu mapya baada ya kutahiriwa.
  7. Hujumuisha watu maalum walioteuliwa kushiriki katika sherehe.
  8. Huhusisha watu wa jinsia na umri fulani.
  9. Maudhui yake hutegemea jinsia.
  • Majukumu
  1. Kuonyesha vijana wamevuka kutoka utotoni hadi utu uzima.
  2. Kuwaandaa vijana kwa uchungu watakaouhisi kupitia kijembe.
  3. Kuhimiza ujasiri na ukejeli uoga.
  4. Kusifu wahusika kwa ujasiri wa kukabili kisu na kuingia katika utu uzima.
  5. Kuburudisha waliohudhuria shughuli ya jando au unyago.
  6. Kuelekeza vijana kwenye matarajio mapya ya jamii.
  7. Kufunza majukumu katika utu uzima.
  8. Kukuza umoja na ushirikiano katika jamii kwa kuwaleta wanajamii pamoja.
    1. Mbolezo/Mbolezi
  • Nyimbo za kuomboleza.

Mfano

Nalitazama jua likichwa,

Matumaini yangu yakizama pamoja

na miale miekundu

Nalidhani lilikuwa jinamizi tu

Kwamba ulikuwa kesha n’acha

Walikuwa wameisha n’ambia

Walimwengu

Ela nilikataa katakata walosema

Nikajitia kuamini waloamba yalikuwa

Uzushi

Hadi siku hii nilopokea waraka,

Waraka ambao ulikuwajeneza ka kuzikia

Pendo letu la miongo miwili.

Sifa

  1. Huimbwa wakati wa maafa, kifo, makumbusho ya mtu au kushindwa katika jambo k.v. vita.
  2. Huimbwa kwa sauti ya chini.
  3. Hutofautiana kutoka jamii moja hadi nyingine.
  4. Huwa na mapigo ya polepole au taratibu.
  5. Huimbwa kwa toni ya huzuni/uchungu kuibua hisia za ndani za mwombolezaji.
  6. Aghalabu haziandamani na ala.

Majukumu

  1. Kuwafariji au kuwasaidia waliofiwa kukabiliana na uchungu wa kupoteza mpendwa wao.
  2. Kusifu aliyekufa kwa kutoa sifa zake chanya au michango yao.
  3. Kubembeleza roho za wafu(mizimu) ili kusitokee maafa mengine.
  4. Kuonyesha msimamo wa jamii kuhusu matokeo ya kifo k.v. husababishwa na pepo, maovu, njia ya kuingia mbinguni.
  5. Kutakaswa hisia za huzuni za aliyefiwa kumpunguzia uzito wa kumpotezea mpendwa wake.
  6. Kueleza kutoepukika kwa kifo.
  7. Kukejeli kifo.
    1. Nyimbo za Taifa
  • Nyimbo zinazoimbwa na watu wa taifa fulani.

Majukumu

  1. Kutambulisha taifa fulani.
  2. Kuonyesha utaifa.
  3. Kuonyesha uzalendo (mapenzi kwa nchi).
  4. Kuhimiza uzalendo.
  5. Kukashifu wasio wazalendo.
  6. Kusifu taifa fulani.
  • Nyimbo za Siasa
  • Zinazoimbwa katika shughuli za kisiasa.

Mfano

Ewe mainga wa Ndumi

Siwe uloambia akina mama

Siku tulopiga foleni

Chakula cha msaada kupata

Turudishe vifaranga kwenye miji

Wageuke vijusi tena

Njaa isiwaangamize?

 

Siwe ulopita

Matusi ukitema

Chumvi na sukari kuturushia ja samadi?

Ukatununua vihela uloturushia

Ukatununua kura ukapata?

Sasa miaka mitano imetimia

Waja tulaghai tena

Huna lolote safari hii

Ubunge umekudondoka ukitazama

Wanyonge tumea/mua

Kwingine kujaribu

Majukumu

  1. Kuburudisha watu katika shughuli za kisiasa.
  2. Kupinga dhuluma za viongozi.
  3. Kusifu viongozi na sera zao.
  4. Kukashifu/kukejeli wanasiasa wabaya.
  5. Kuonyesha matarajio ya watawaliwa kwa viongozi.
  6. Kusambaza elimu ya kisiasa.
  7. Kuwatia wananchi kasumba.
  8. Kueneza propaganda za kisiasa.
  9. Kuzindua au kuhamasisha jamii kisiasa.
  10. Kuliwaza wahasiriwa wa migogoro ya kisiasa.
  11. Kutia watu ari ya kufanya jambo fulani k.v. kupigania haki zao.
  • Nyimbo za Vita
    • Zinazoimbwa na askari vitani au baada ya vita.

Majukumu

  1. Kuburudisha washiriki.
  2. Kufunza namna ya kukabiliana na adui.
  3. Kujasirisha washiriki.
  4. Kusifu askari vitani.
  5. Kukejeli uoga.
  6. Kusifu mashujaa wa zamani.
  7. Kukuza uzalendo kwa kuhimiza watu kuiga masujaa.
    • Kongozi
      • Za kuaga mwaka katika jamii za waswahili.
  1. Jadiiya
    • Nyimbo za jadi ambazo hupokezwa kutoka kizazi kimoja hadi kingine.
    • Huhusu matukio ya kihistoria k.v. shujaa, mateso, njaa, n.k.
  • Nyimbo za Kuzaliwa kwa Mtoto
  • Za kuonyesha au kuadhimisha kuzaliwa kwa mtoto.
    1. Maghani
  • Ushairi ambao hutolewa kwa kalima.

Sifa

  1. Husimulia matukio kwa kirefu hasa yanapotambwa.
  2. Hutolewa kwa kalima.
  3. Hutungwa papo hapo.
  4. Hutongolewa mbele ya hadhira
  5. Hutungwa kwa ufundi mkubwa.
  6. Hutolewa na mtu mmoja au kundi la watu.

Aina za Maghani

  1. Maghani ya kawaida
  • Ambayo hugusia maswala ya kawaida kama mapenzi, siasa, harusi, kazi, maombolezo n.k.
  • Husemwa/huganwa tu bila kusimuliwa.
  1. Maghani Simulizi
  • Maghani ambayo husimulia hadithi kuhusu tukio la kihistoria.
  • Huhusu, mtu, tukio, kitu, mnyama, n.k.

Sifa

  1. Hutokea kama hadithi.
  2. Husimulia tukio la kihistoria.
  3. Ni ndefu.
  4. Waimbaji wake huitwa manju/yeli.
  5. Huandamana na ala kama zeze, marimba, n.k.

Tofauti kati ya maghani ya kawaida na maghani simulizi

Maghani ya kawaida Maghani simulizi
ü  Ni fupi.

ü  Haitumii ala.

ü  Huhusu maswala ya kawaida.

ü  Husemwa.

ü  Ni ndefu .

ü  Hutumia ala.

ü  Kihistoria.

 

 

ü  Huimbwa.

Maghani ya Kawaida

  1. Vivugo/majigambo
  • Utungo wa kujisifu au kujigamba.

Sifa

  1. Hutungwa baada ya ushindi wa harakati ngumu k.v. kesi, kumuua simba, kuoa msichana aliyependwa na wengi n.k.
  2. Fanani ni mwanamme.
  3. Hutungwa papo hapo.
  4. Hutungwa na kughanwa na mhusika mwenyewe.
  5. Hutumia chuku k.m. kujisifu kupita kiasi.
  6. Anayejigamba hujipa jina la kiistiari k.m. mnyama.
  7. Mhusika huvaa maleba yanayooana na tukio analojisifia.
  8. Kuna kutaja jina na ukoo wa baba na mama.
  9. Anayejisifu huahidi kutenda maajabu zaidi.
    1. Pembezi/pembejezi
  • Aina ya tondozi inayokusudiwa kusifu watu aina fulani katika jamii kutokana na matendo au mchango wao.
  • v. watawala, walezi wazuri, mashujaa wa vita, waganga mashuhuri hata wapenzi waliopigania pendo lao.

Mfano

Nani kama wewe mama?

Nani anokufana ‘mwaitu’

Subira uliumbiwa

Bidii nd’o jina lako la pili

Moyo wenye heba

Msimamo usoyumba

Anoelekeza kwa imani

Anoadhibu kwa mapenzi makuu

Mzazi, mlezi na rafiki wa dhati

Tangu siku za kusimama dede.

  • Tondozi
  • Utungo wa kutukuza watu, wanyama na vitu.
  • v. watu mashuhuri, wapenzi, mifugo, miti mikubwa.

Mfano

Kipungu kipungu

Nani kama yeye?

Hashindiki kwa nia

Hashindiki kwa shabaha

Hulenga binguni

Hutia ghera kufikiwa peo

Peo zisofikika kwa wanokata tama

Kipungu, kipungu, hachi tufani za anga.

Maghani Simulizi

  1. Sifo
  • Tungo za kusifu watu kutokana na matendo yao ya kishujaa.
  • Sifa zake hukaribiana na za tenzi hasa ikiwa ni shujaa anasifiwa.
  1. Tendi/tenzi
  • Ushairi mrefu unaoelezea maisha ya mashujaa tangu kuzaliwa hadi kufa kwao.
  • v. Utenzi wa Fumo Liyongo, Sundiata, Shaka Zulu, Wang`ombe waihura n.k.

Mfano

Asiyemjua mjua aliongwe atamjua

Namjuza kwa sifa zake alizokuwa nazo

Alisimika ufalme uliosifiwa

Akawa shujaa asiyetishwa

  • Utungo huu waweza kuwa wimbo wa sifa au utendi!

Sifa

  1. Huwa masimulizi yanayotolewa kishairi.
  2. Hutoa wasifu wa shujaa.
  3. Huwa na matumizi ya chuku.
  4. Wahusika hupewa sifa zisizo kawaida (kiungu).
  5. Ni masimulizi mrefu.
  6. Matumizi ya sitiari k.v. kulinganisha wasifiwa na wanyama wakali.
  7. Huangazia matendo ya mashujaa.
  8. Husimulia matukio ya kihistoria.
  9. Huimbwa pamoja na ala ya kimziki.
  10. Hutungwa papo kwa papo na kuhifadhiwa katika ubongo.
  11. Hujumuisha mbolezi zinazoonyesha anguko la shujaa.

Lengo

  1. Kuburudisha wanajamii.
  2. Kusifu mashujaa wa jamii.
  3. Kukuza uzalendo kwa kuhimiza wengine kuwaiga mashujaa.
  4. Kukuza ubunifu kwa kutunga papo hapo.
  5. Kuimarisha uwezo wa kukumbuka kwa kutungwa na kuhifadhiwa akilini.
  6. Kuburudisha waliohudhuria sherehe ampapo yanatolewa.
  7. Kuhifadhi na kuendeleza tamaduni za jamii
  8. Kukuza ufasaha wa lugha kwa fanani.
  9. Kufunza maadili.
  • Rara
  • Hadithi fupi na nyepesi za kishairi zenye visa vya kusisimua.

Mfano

Alichukua mkoba wake

Akanipa kisogo

Kana kwamba hakunijua

Kana kwamba hakusema, “Hadi mauko”.

 

Hakujali penzi letu

Hakujali wana

Ambao ndiye alowapa uhai

Alijua nilimpenda

Ila hata hilo alijipa kujipurukusha

Akayoyomea

Akamezwa na ulimwengu.

Sifa

  1. Huhusu mambo ya kubuni au ya kweli k.v. sherehe ya uhuru, kesi ya mauaji, n.k.
  2. Huhusu maswala ibuka na ya kawaida.
  3. Hadithi huwasilishwa katika beti.
  4. Huandamana na ala za mziki.
  5. Hutolewa kwa toni ya kitanzia.
  6. Huwa na visa vya kusisimua.
  7. Huwa na ucheshi wenye kinaya.
  8. Maswala hayatoleai kwa uwazi bali hufumbwa na kudokezwa.
  9. Huwa na uigizaji/utendaji.
  10. Mambo yanayosimuliwa hupigwa chuku.
  • Rara nafsi
  • Ushairi ambao hutungwa na mtu kuelezea hisia, matatizo na fikra zake mwenyewe.

Mfano

Muda umefika wa pingu kutiwa

Kutiwa silisili, kwani si utashi wangu

Ukoo waniuza, mithili ya kondoo sokoni

Mwambieni shangazi kwaheri nampigia

Hata angataka kuniopoa hawezi

Kwani mahari imetolewa

Mifugo kikwi nduguye amepokea

Kwaheri mama, kwaheri dada.

Sifa

  1. Hugusia maswala yanayoathiri hisia za mtu binafsi kama vile mapenzi, usaliti, talaka, kifo.
  2. Huwasilishwa kwa njia ya uimbaji unaoandamana na ala ya mziki.
  3. Mzungumzaji huzungumza moja kwa moja na hadhira au aliyeandikiwa rara hii-mkewe, mpenziwe, mwanawe, Mungu, miungu.
  4. Hutolewa katika miktadha k.v. mazishi kusifu aliyekufa, harusi na Bi. Arusi kama ameshinikizwa kuolewa.
    1. Ngonjera
  • Mashairi ya kujibizana/kulumbana-yenye muundo wa kimazungumzo.

Sifa

  1. Huwa na wahusika wawili au zaidi.
  2. Mhusika mmoja huuliza jambo na mwingine hujibu.
  3. Huendelezwa kwa njia ya wimbo.
  4. Wahusika kupingana mwanzoni.
  5. Wahusika huafikiana kufikiwa mwisho.

Umuhimu

  1. Majibizano hukuza ubunifu kwa kila mmoja kuonyesha umaarufu.
  2. Kukuza ujasiri wa kuzungumza hadharani.
  3. Kuimarisha stadi ya kuongea.
  4. Kuburudisha hadhira.
    1. Mashairi Mepesi.
  5. Mashairi ya kawaida ambayo hupatikana katika ushairi simulizi.
  6. Hujumuisha mashairi mafupi ya kihisia, kimapenzi, kusifu na kukosoa watu.

Vigezo vya Uchanganuzi wa Tungo za Ushairi Simulizi

  1. Kuainisha utungo kimaudhui/aina
  2. Kuthibitisha ni aina fulani ya utungo wa kishairi/sifa.
  3. Kutaja sifa zinazojitokeza za ushairi simulizi/utungo fulani wa ushairi simulizi.
  4. Muktadha ambamo unaweza kutolewa.
  5. Kuandika mbinu za kifasihi zilizotumiwa katika utungo huo.
  6. Kufafanua sifa za jamii zinazojitokeza katika utungo.
  7. Kuandika majukumu ya aina hiyo ya utungo wa ushairi katika
  8. Anayeimba/nafsi imbi ni nani?
  9. Kuandika maadili yanayojitokeza katika utungo.
  10. Kueleza toni ya utungo huo.

MAZUNGUMZO

  • Maongezi ya mdomo yenye usanii.

Sifa

  1. Huwa maongezi yenye usanii mkubwa.
  2. Hutolewa mbele ya hadhira.
  3. Hutolewa mbele ya hadhira.
  4. Hutolewa kwa njia isiyokera.
  5. Huambatana na sherehe fulani k.m. taabili katika matanga.
  6. Hutegemea sauti na vitendo.
  7. Huhusisha matumizi ya ishara k.v. za uso, mikono na miondoko.
  8. Huhitaji ustadi wa kuzungumza ili kuteka hadhira.
  9. Hutolewa na watu wenye umilisi mkubwa wa lugha.

Vipera vya Mazungumzo

  1. Hotuba
    • Maelezo yanayotolewa mbele ya watu kuhusu mada fulani.
    • Huhusisha mada maalum sio suala lolote tu.

Umuhimu

  1. Kuelimisha kwa kupa maarifa ya kukabiliana na maisha k.v. jandoni na arusini.
  2. Kuadilisha au kutoa nasaha hadharani.
  3. Huimarisha ukakamavu wa kuzungumza kadiri watu wanavyotoa hotuba hadharani.
  4. Kukuza ufasaha na umilisi wa lugha.
  5. Kupalilia kipawa cha uongozi.
  6. Kuelimisha kwa kupatia watu maarifa ya kukabiliana na changamoto za maisha.

Aina za Hotuba

  1. Risala
  • Hotuba inayowasilishwa mbele ya watu kueleza jambo fulani k.m. ya wafanyakazi kwa waajiri wao.
  1. Mhadhara
  • Hotuba inayotolewa kwa hadhira fulani kufafanua somo au mada fulani.
  1. Kumbukizi
  • Hotuba zinazohusu tukio fulani la kihistoria kuhusu mtu au kitu.
  1. Mahubiri
  • Hotuba zinazohusu masuala ya kidini.
  1. Taabili
  • Hotuba kuhusu aliyeaga dunia zinazohusu sifa zake nzuri.
  1. Malumbano Ya Utani
  • Mazungumzo ya kutaniana.

Aina

  1. Utani wa mawifi na mashemeji
  2. Utani wa marafiki
  • Utani wa vijana
  1. Utani wa watoto
  2. Utani wa marika/ watu wa hirimu moja
  • Wewe ni mweusi kiasi kwamba ukiingia chumbani taa zinazimika.
  1. Utani wa mababu/mabibi na wajukuu
  • Ee mume wangu, mbona walala mapema hivi? Utawezaje kulilinda boma letu ikiwa wewe ndiwe wa kwanza kujizika kitandani.
  • Utani wa maumbu (ndugu na dada)
  • Wewe unajifanya jasiri na juzi baba alikukemea kidogo tu ukaanza kutetemeka kama kondoo aliyenyeshewa.
  • Utani wa mazishi
  • Afadhali umekufa tukakuzika, sasa maghala yetu yatasalimika.
  1. Utani wa makabila/ki ukoo
    • Wakikuyu wanapenda pesa kiasi kwamba maiti ikisikia mlio wa sarafu inaweza kufufuka.
    • Wakamba wa ukoo wa Akanga wanapenda nyama kiasi cha kula kijusi cha mbuzi.

Sifa

  1. Huwa kati ya watu wawili au makundi mawili ya watu.
  2. Hufanywa kwa kujibizana papo hapo.
  3. Hufanywa kwa njia isiyo ya kuudhi.
  4. Hutumia maneno ya mizaha.
  5. Hutumia lugha ya ucheshi.
  6. Hufanywa na watu wenye uhusiano mzuri.
  7. Huchukua njia ya ushindani kila mmoja akitaka kumpiku mwenzake.
  8. Watanianao huwa wamekubaliana kufanya hivyo.
  9. Hufanyika katika wakati unaofaa sio baada ya kukutana tu.
  10. Huhusisha masimango au kumkumbusha mtu wema uliomtendea.
  11. Hutumia chuku sana kusisitiza au kukejeli sifa fulani hasi.
  12. Huhusisha wakati mwingine utaniaji wa wasiokuwepo ukiambatanishwa na uigizaji wa kuchekesha.
  13. Hutegemea uhusiano ulio kati ya wanajamii au makabila.
  14. Huandamana na sherehe kama matanga.

Umuhimu

  1. Kuburudisha kutokana na ucheshi.
  2. Kuimarisha urafiki wa watu walio na uhusiano mwema wanaotaniana.
  3. Hustawisha ufundi wa lugha.
  4. Kukashifu tabia hasi k.v. ulafi, uchoyo, wivu, n.k.
  5. Kukosoa wanajamii kwa njia ya kejeli/dhihaka
  6. Kuimarisha umoja na ushirikiano kati ya wahusika.
  7. Kuliwaza k.m. unaofanywa wakati wa maombolezo.
  8. Kukuza na kudumisha mila na desturi za jamii.
  9. Kukuza utangamano baina ya watu na wanajamii wanapokuja pamoja na kutaniana.
  10. Kuhimiza watu kujieleza kwa uwazi kwa kupunguza urasmi miongoni mwa wanajaii.
  11. Hudhihirisha uhusiano mwema baina ya watu wa jamii fulani.

Changamoto Sasa

  1. Mabadiliko katika jamii yaliyosababisha baadhi ya wanajamii kupoteza nyenzo hii.
  2. Kuingiliana kwa watu wa jamii mbalimbali.
  • Soga
  • Mazungumzo ya kupitisha wakati yasiyozingatia mada maalum.

Sifa

  1. Hutokea baina ya watu wa rika moja.
  2. Humithilisha uhalisia badala ya kuunakili.
  3. Hutumia chuku na kufanywa ljambo lionekane kama halina uhalisia.
  4. Hukejeli watu au hali fulani.
  5. Wahusika ni wa kubuni.
  6. Hutumia vichekesho kupunguza ukali wa ukweli uliomo.
  7. Wahusika hupewa majina ya wanajamii husika.
  8. Huwa na mafunzo au maadili.

Umuhimu

  1. Kuburudisha kwa kuchekesha.
  2. Kufunza maadili.
  3. Kukejeli matendo yasiyofaa katika jamii
  4. Kukuza ubunifu baina ya washiriki.
  5. Kufunza kuhusu matendo na tabia za kibinadamu.
  6. Huwa msingi wa utani unaokuwapo katika jamii.
  7. Kuonya na kutahadharisha dhidi ya tabia siyokubalika.
  • Mawaidha
  • Mazungumzo ya kutoa ushauri kuhusu jambo fulani.

Sifa

  1. Huwasilishwa mbele ya watu.
  2. Hugusia takriban vipengele vyote vya maisha ya binadamu.
  3. Aghalabu hutolewa na watu wenye umri mkubwa.
  4. Hulenga maudhui maalum na ya aina nyingi kutegemea jinsia, umri, shughuli, n.k.
  5. Hutumia lugha ya kubembeleza na isiyoonyesha ukali.
  6. Hutumia lugha ya kuathiri hisia.
  7. Huwa na ufasaha mkubwa wa lugha.
  8. Ni mawazo mazito kuhusu maisha.
  9. Hutolewa katika miktadha rasmi na isiyo rasmi.
  10. Ujumbe hulenga hadhira maalum k.m. ya kike au kiume.
  11. Hutumia fani nyingine za fasihi kama methali, misemo, ngano, nyimbo n.k. kupitisha mawaidha.
  12. Huibua maadili yanayohitaji kuzingatiwa.

Muundo wa Mawaidha

  1. Utangulizi
    • Kutoa kauli ya kuvutia makini ya hadhira k.v. ‘Utu uzima huenda na uwajibikaji’, au kueleza kiini cha mawaidha.
  2. Mwili
  • Kutoa wosia, maonyo, maelekezo kutegemea suala analotolea mawaidha akitumia jazanda, kupanda na kushuka kwa sauti, kimya, miondoko, kubadilisha kasi ya kuzungumza, kudondoa semi za watu maarufu, n.k.
  1. Hitimisho
  • Kuonyesha msimamo kuhusiana na suala analozungumzia.
  • Kushirikisha hadhira ili kujua msimamo wao kuhusu suala alilowausia.
  • Hadhira kutoa changamoto kuhusiana na mawaidha yanayotolewa.

Umuhimu wa mawaidha

  1. Kuelekeza jamii kimaadili.
  2. Kuelekeza kuhusu jinsi ya kukabiliana na changa moto maishani.
  3. Kushauri jinsi ya kutenda jambo fulani.
  4. Kujasirisha waoga na kuwapa ukakamavu.
  5. Kuwaondolea wanajamii ujinga.
  6. Kuhifadhi na kuendeleza mila na desturi za jamii.
  7. Njia ya kipato kwa baadhi ya watu.
  8. Kuelimisha kuhusu maarifa ya kuendeshea maisha, majukumu na matarajio ya jamii.
  9. Ulumbi
    • Uwezo na ustadi wa kuzungumza kwa uhodari mkubwa.

Miktadha Ambamo Ulumbi Hutumika Katika Jamii

  1. katika mijadala mbungeni
  2. katika hotuba za kisiasa
  3. katika mahubiri maabadini
  4. katika mijadala shuleni
  5. kortini
  6. katika shughuli za kijamii k.v. posa
  7. katika sala/dua
  8. katika maapizo
  9. katika malumbano ya utani
  10. katika majigambo/vivugo

Sifa

  1. Hufanywa mbele ya hadhira.
  2. Huwa na lengo maalum k.v. kushawishi, kuelimisha, kushauri n.k.
  3. Hutumia tamathali za usemi kwa ufanifu mkubwa k.v. chuku, misemo, methali, n.k.
  4. Lugha huwa yenye mvuto na ufasaha.
  5. Hutumia lugha yenye taharuki na ushawishi.
  6. Unenaji huambatana na utumizi wa ishara/ viziada lugha.
  7. Uwasilishaji huwa sahili na wenye ujumbe mzito.
  8. Huwa na urudiaji mwingi ili kusisitiza na kuvutia usikivu.
  9. Huwa na matumizi ya taharuki k.v. mtuo.
  10. Huwa na mtiririko mzuri wa mawazo.

Sifa za Mlumbi

  1. Asiwe mwoga ili kuweza kuzungumza hadharani.
  2. Asiwe na haya ili kuweza kuzungumzia mambo ya aibu inapobidi.
  3. Awe mchanganfu na mcheshi ili kunasa makini ya hadhira na kuzuia isikinai.
  4. Awe na ufahamu mpana wa utamaduni wa hadhira asitumie maneno na ishara zinazoweza kuwaudhi au kupingana na imani za hadhira.
  5. Awe na uwezo wa kuingiliana vizuri na hadhira ili aivutie.
  6. Awe na kumbukumbu nzuri ili ulumbi wake utiririke vizuri.
  7. Awe na uwezo wa kudramatisha ili kuonyesha picha fulani k.v. ishara za uso, mwili, miondoko kuonyesha picha ya analozungumzia.
  8. Awe na ujuzi na ufasaha wa lugha ili kuwasilisha mawazo kwa njia mwafaka na inayovutia.
  9. Aweze kubadilisha toni na kiimbo hadhira isikinai.
  10. Awe na uwezo wa kushirikisha hadhira k.v. kwa maswali ya balagha ili kuondoa uchovu wa kusikiliza.
  11. Awe na uwezo wa kutumia mtuo wa kidrama ili kuongeza taharuki, kusisitiza ujumbe na kuteka makini ya hadhira.

Umuhimu

  1. Hukuza uwezo wa kujieleza na kusema hadharani kwa kujiboresha kadiri anavyoendelea.
  2. Kigezo cha kuteulia viongozi wa baadaye kwani ushawishi humtambulisha mlumbi kama mwenye uwezo wa kuongoza.
  3. Kuelimisha jamii kwa njia isiyochosha.
  4. Kudumisha umoja na ushirikiano jamii inapokusanyika pamoja kusikilizaulumbi.
  5. Kuhamasisha na kuzindua jamii juu ya suala fulani.
  6. Kushawishi walengwa wakubali jambo fulani.
  7. Kukuza uwezo wa mwanajamii kushawishi na kupatanisha.
  8. Kushawishi watu wapende jambo fulani.
  9. Kuburudisha wasililizaji.
  • Maapizo
  • Maombi maalum ya kumtaka Mungu, miungu au mizimu kumwadhibu mhusika hasidi, mkinzani au muovu.

Mfano

Ikiwa kweli wewe ni mkazamwanangu,

Nami ndiye nilompa uhai mwana unoringia,

Anokufanya upite ukinitemea mate,

Chakula kuninyima, wajukuu kunikataza ushirika,

Miungu nawaone chozi langu, wasikie kilio changu,

Mizimu nawaone uchungu wangu,

Radhi zao wasiwahi kukupa,

Laana wakumiminie,

Uje kulizwa mara mia na wanao,

Usiwahi kufurahia hata siku moja pato lao,

Watalokupa likuletee simanzi badala ya furaha,

Wakazawanao wasikuuguze katika utu uzima wako!

Sifa

  1. Yalitolewa kwa waliokwenda kinyume na matarajio ya jamii.
  2. Yalifanywa mahali maalum k.v. makaburini, porini, chini ya miti mikubwa, n.k.
  3. Hutolewa kwa ulaji kiapo.
  4. Yalitolewa na mwathiriwa au watu maalum walioteuliwa.
  5. Maapizo huaminiwa yataleta maafa kwa jamii.
  6. Watoaji maapizo walikuwa walumbi.
  7. Maapizo hutumia lugha kali inayonuiwa kutia woga ili kutahadharisha dhidi ya maovu.

Umuhimu

  1. Kuonya na kutahadharisha wanajamii dhidi ya maovu.
  2. Kutambulisha jamii kwani kila mojawapo ina aina yake ya kuapiza.
  3. Kukuza umoja katika jamii kwani kaida na miiko hufanya wanajamii kujihisi kuwa kitu kimoja.
  4. Kuadilisha wanajamii kwa kujifunza kutenda mema ili kuepuka laana.

MAIGIZO

  • Utanzu wa fasihi simulizi unaoambatana na vitendo.
  • Sanaa ya mazungumzo yanayoambatana na vitendo.

Sifa

  1. Huwa na watendaji au waigizaji.
  2. Huwasilishwa mbele ya hadhira.
  3. Huwasilishwa mahali maalum k.v. ukumbini.
  4. Huwasilishwa kwa mazungumzo na matendo
  5. Waigizaji hujivika maleba yanayooana kutia uhai maigizo.
  6. Matayarisho kabambe hufanywa kabla ya maigizo.
  7. Huweza kuambatana na ngoma pamoja na uimbaji.
  8. Lugha ni yenye ufundi wa juu k.v. picha, mafumbo na tamathali.
  9. Huweza kuambatana na sherehe fulani ya kitamaduni k.v. jando, matanga, n.k.
  10. Huwasilishwa kwa lugha sahili.
  11. Hujaa taswira zinazoweza kutambulika na hadhira.

Umuhimu

  1. Kuburudisha wahusika na hadhira.
  2. Kukuza umoja na ushirikiano kwa kujumuisha watu pamoja.
  3. Kuimarisha uwezo wa kuzungumza hadharani-kupata ukakamavu jinsi mtu anapoendelea kuigiza.
  4. Kukuza umoja na ushirikiano watu wanapojumuika pamoja kutazama maigizo.
  5. Kukuza uwezo wa kukumbuka kwani mwigizaji huhitaji kukumbuka maneno halisi.
  6. Kukejeli kitendo kisichofaa/cha kijinga alichofanya mtu.
  7. Njia ya kipato/kuwatafutia riziki baadhi ya watu.
  8. Kutoa nafasi kwa watu kudhihirisha vipawa vyao.
  9. Kuonya na kutahadharisha watu dhidi ya kufaya mambo yasiyofaa.
  10. Kuelimisha watu wafahamu jambo fulani k.v. ukimwi, ufisadi, n.k.
  11. Kukosoa watu wanaofanya kinyume na matarajio ya jamii k.v. wivu, uchoyo, n.k.
  12. Kupitisha maarifa na amali za kijamii.

Ploti

  1. Utangulizi-kutambulisha mgogoro
  2. Ukuzaji wa mgogoro
  3. Kilele cha mgogoro
  4. Usuluhishaji wa mgogoro

Aina za maigizo

  1. Maigizo Ya Kawaida
  • Maonyesho ya jadi yakiwa yameondolewa kwenye mazingira yake halisi.
    1. Sanaa ya Maonyesho
  • Matendo ya kweli yanayojitokeza katika jamii kulingana na mazingira yake halisi k.m. uganga, mazishi, unyago, ngoma, n.k.

Tofauti

Maigizo ya kawaida Sanaa ya maonyesho
ü  Mazingira ya kuzua/maalum

ü  Matukio ya kuiga

ü  Huwa na wahusika na hadhira maalum

ü  Matumizi ya ukumbi na jukwaa maalum

ü  Hutumia maleba na vifaa vya kuzua mazingira maalum

ü  Hugawika katika maonyesho Kutumia lugha kwa njia maalum

ü  Wahusika hufanya mazoezi kabla ya igizo halisi

ü  Hutumia mazingira halisi

ü  Matukio halisi/ ya kila siku.

ü  Washiriki na waigizaji walio pia hadhira

ü  akuna haja ya ukumbi wala jukwaa

ü  Hakuna vifaa maalum bali huwa mazingira yenyewe.

 

ü  Muundo wake hufululuza au hayajagawika katika maonyesho.

 

ü  Hawahitaji kufanya mazoezi kwani ni matukio ya kila siku.

 

Maigizo ya kawaida

  1. Michezo ya Kuigiza
  • Maigizo ambayo huwasilishwa na watendaji jukwaani mbele ya watu.

Sifa za Mwigizaji bora

  1. Awe jasiri ili aweze kuigiza mbele ya watu/hadharani.
  2. Awe na ubunifu ili aweze kufanya uigizaji kuvutia na kuondoa ukinaifu.
  3. Awe na ujuzi wa kutumia ishara za uso, mwili na miondoko kuonyesha picha ya hali anayoigiza.
  4. Awe na ujuzi na ufasaha wa lugha ili kuwasilisha mawazo kwa njia mwafaka na inayovutia.
  5. Aweze kubadilisha toni na kiimbo kulingana na hali tofauti anazoigiza k.v. huzuni.
  6. Awe na uwezo wa kushirikisha hadhira kwa maswali ya balagha ili kuondoa uchovu.
  7. Awe na uwezo wa ufaraguzi/ kubadilisha uigizaji wake papo hapo kutegemea hadhira yake na kutoa mifano inayofahamika kutoka katika mazingira ya hadhira.
  8. Awe anaelewa utamaduni wa hadhira yake ili asitumie maneno na ishara ambazo zinaudhi ama kukinzana na na imani zao.
  1. Vichekesho
    • Michezo ya kuigiza inayokusudiwa kuzua kicheko ili kupitisha ujumbe k.m. vioja, vitimbi n.k.

Sifa

  1. Vichekesho huigizwa.
  2. Huwasilishwa kwa lugha sahili.
  3. Hujaa taswira zinazoweza kutambulika na hadhira.
  4. Hutumia mbinu ya kejeli, kunaya na tashtiti.
  5. Vichekesho huwa vifupi.
  6. Havihitaji uchambuzi wa ndani ili kuvielewa au kupata maana.

Jukumu

  1. Kuburudisha hadhira kwa kuchekesha.
  2. Kuelimisha kwa kuonyesha jambo la kijinga alilofanya mtu.
  3. Njia ya kuwapatia watu riziki.
  4. Hutumika katika hadithi kuifanya ivutie.
  5. Kukejeli kitendo fulani kisichofaa alichofanya mtu fulani.
  6. Kukashifu matendo hasi ya kijinga.
  7. Kuadilisha ama kutoa funzo fulani la tabia njema.
    • Ngonjera
    • Ngonjera inayoambatana na uigizaji/utendaji.

Sifa

  1. Kuweko kwa uigizaji/utendaji k.v. ishara za uso na mikono.
  2. Huwa na wahusika wawili au zaidi.
  3. Huendelezwa kwa njia ya wimbo.
  4. Mhusika mmoja huuliza jambo na mwingine hujibu.
  5. Wahusika kupingana mwanzoni.
  6. Wahusika hufikia uafikiano kufikia mwisho.
  • Michezo ya Watoto/Chekechea
  • Michezo inayoigizwa na watoto katika shughuli zao.

Aina

  1. Mchezo wa baba na mama
  2. Kuruka kamba
  3. Kujificha na kutafutana
  4. Kukimbiza kibaramwezi dhidi ya upepo ili kizunguke
  5. Mchezo wa baba na mama

Sifa

  1. Waigizaji ni watoto.
  2. Huhusu shughuli za kiuchumi na kitamaduni k.v. arusi, siasa, ukulima.
  3. Huandamana na nyimbo za watoto.
  4. Huwa na miondoko mingi k.v. kujificha, kuruka.
  5. Huwa na matumizi mengi ya takriri.
  6. Huchezwa popote.
  7. Huwa na kanuni fulani.
  8. Hukoma watoto wakichoka au wakikiuka kanuni

Umuhimu

  1. Kufunza watoto majukumu yao ya utu uzima.
  2. Kuwatanguliza watoto katika sanaa ya uigizaji.
  3. Kukuza ubunifu wa watoto kadiri wanapoendelea kuigiza.
  4. Kudumisha utamaduni wa jamii.
  5. Kuburudisha watoto.
  6. Kukuza stadi ya uigizaji miongoni mwa watoto.
  7. Kukuza utangamano miongoni mwa watoto kwa kuwajumuisha pamoja.
  8. Kukashifu matendo hasi ya watu wazima kwa watoto.
  9. Kuwapa watoto ukakamavu na kujiamini wakiwa wachanga.
    1. Majigambo/vivugo
  • Uigizaji ambapo wahusika hujigamba kwa matendo ya kishujaa.

Mfano

Ndimi Kisoi, dume la ukoo mtukufu

Ulojipamba kwa mabingwa

Wachezaji hodari wa ngoma

Ndimi dume liloingia nyanjani

Makoo yakatetemeka

Yakang’ang’ania, ngozi kusakata nani

 

Kijiji kizima kilinijua

Wazee walilienzi

Wakamiminika kiamboni

Mabinti kunikabithi.

Sifa

  1. Aghalabu huambatana na ngoma.
  2. Hujitokeza, kujigamba na kisha kuendelea kucheza ngoma.
  3. Anayejigamba hubeba zana zake za vita kama vile mkuki na ngao kuonyesha aliyotenda.
  4. Anayejigamba huvaa maleba kuambatana na jambo analojisifia.
    • Utambaji
    • Usimulizi wa hadithi unaoambatana na uigizaji.
    • Huwa na matumizi ya vizuizui.
    • Mazingira
  • Uigizaji wa maumbile asilia yaliyozunguka jamii ya watu k.v. sauti za wanyama.
  • Kuna matumizi ya viziuzui, matawi n.k.

Sanaa ya Maonyesho

  1. Ngoma
  • Uchezeshaji wa viungo vya mwili kuambatana na mdundo au miondoko maalum.

Aina

 

  1. Ngoma za wanawake
  2. Ngoma za tohara
  3. Ngoma za wanaume
  4. Ngoma za sherehe
  5. Ngoma za vijana
  6. Ngoma za unyago na jando
  7. Ngoma za wazee
  8. Ngoma za arusi
  9. Ngoma za kufukuza mapepo
  10. Ngoma za kuaga mwaka

 

 

Sifa

  1. Huandamana na muziki na ala ya muziki k.v. ngoma.
  2. Ngoma huchezewa mahali wazi na penye hadhira.
  3. Wachezaji huvaa maleba maalum kulingana na funzo linalonuiwa.
  4. Huwa na wahusika aina mbili; watendaji na watazamaji kwa wakati mmoja.
  5. Huweza kuandamana au kutoandamana na sherehe.
  6. Hutofautiana kulingana na jamii husika.

Umuhimu

  • Kuburudisha kwa ufundi wa kucheza kwa kuzingatia miondoko.
  • Kitambulisho cha jamii kwani kila moja ina aina yake ya ngoma.
  • Kuhifadhi na kuendeleza tamaduni za jamii husika.
  • Kukuza uzalendo kwa kuwafanya wanajamii kuionea fahari jamii yao.
  • Kukuza umoja na ushirikiano kwa kujumuisha watu pamoja.
  • Kuelimisha kwa kupitisha mafunzo na maarifa.
    1. Matambiko
  • Utoaji wa kafara kwa Mungu, miungu, pepo au mizimu ili wasaidiwe kutatua shida, kutoa shukrani au kuomba radhi.

Sifa

  1. Hutolewa na wazee maarufu walioteuliwa.
  2. Hufanywa nahali maalum k.v. pangoni, mwituni, n.k.
  3. Huandamana na sala.
  4. Huandamana na utoaji kafara k.v. kuchinja mbuzi, n.k.
  5. Huandamana na maombi.
  • Maigizo Ya Uganga wa Ramli

Sifa

  1. Mganga hujitia kujua kwa hivyo vitendo vyake ni maigizo ya uganga wa madaktari.
  2. Mengi katika matendo ya mganga hayana mashiko.
  3. Aghalabu kafara hutolewa.
  4. Waganga wanapopiga bao huvaa maleba kama ngozi, vibuyu, pembe, n.k.
  5. Huweza kuwa na fimbo maalum.
  6. Lugha maalum anayodai kuitumia kuwasiliana na misimu.
  7. Mizimu humshauri mganga kuhusu ugonjwa na tiba inayofaa.
  8. Mganga humchanja mgonjwa na kumpa dawa za miti shamba.

Umuhimu

  1. Wakati mwingine mizizi ya mganga huponya.
  2. Huwapa watu matumaini hasa walio na magonjwa yasiyo na tiba.
  3. Dawa za mganga hupunga mashetani kwa wagonjwa wake.
  4. Hukutanisha ulimwengu wa mizimu na ulimwengu halisi.
  5. Waganga huburudisha wanapoigiza.

Hasara

  1. Mgonjwa huenda asipone kwani matendo mengi ya mganga ni ya kukisia.
  2. Dawa za uganga zaweza kumdhuru mtu.
  3. Malipo ni ghali na mtu hata aweza kufilisika akitafuta tiba ya ugonjwa usiopona.
  4. Mazingira ya uganga husheheni uchafu mwingi.
  5. Mgonjwa huridhika kwa muda mfupi halafu uhalisia hudhihirika.
    1. Ngomezi
  • Uwasilishaji wa ujumbe kwa kupiga ngoma au zana nyingine ya kimziki.

Sifa

  1. Kuwepo kwa ngoma au ala nyingine kama panda.
  2. Mapigo ya ngoma hueleweka tu na jamii husika.
  3. Mapigo kufuata toni au ridhimu maalum kuwasilisha maneno fulani.
  4. Kuwepo kwa hadhira au wasikilizaji.
  5. Kueleweka kwa mapigo hayo na wanajamii husika pekee.
  6. Makini huhitajika ili kupata midundo.

Aina za ngomezi

  1. a) Taarifa
  • Huarifu kuhusu jambo k.m. msimu wa kuanza kutayarisha mashamba, kuitwa katika mkutano, kazi ya ujima n.k.
  1. b) Tahadhari
  • Hutoa tahadhari kuhusu mavamizi kama wizi wa mifugo, vita, majanga kama moto, mafuriko n.k.
  1. c) Uhusiano
  • Kuita watu kwa sherehe.

Umuhimu wa Ngomezi

  1. Njia ya mawasiliano kwa jamii zisizojua kusoma.
  2. Husaidia wanaokabiliwa na ugumu wa mawasiliano.
  3. Kuharakisha mawasiliano katika masafa mafupi.
  4. Kutoa taarifa kuhusu matukio fulani k.m. ndoa, kifo n.k.
  5. Husaidia kupitisha jumbe za dharura.
  6. Kutahadharisha wanajamii kuhusu tukio la hatari/dharura k.v. vita, gharika n.k.
  7. Kuficha siri kwa kuwasilisha ujumbe kwa njia isiyoeleweka.
  8. Kuhifadhi na kudumisha utamaduni wa jamii.
  9. Namna ya kudhihirisha ufundi wa kutumia zana kama ngoma.
  10. Kitambulisho cha jamii kwani kila jamii hupitisha ujumbe kwa mapigo tofauti.

Udhaifu wa Ngomezi

  1. Si kila mtu anaweza kufasiri ujumbe unaokusudiwa.
  2. Mapigo hayasikiki mbali na hivyo husikika na idadi dogo ya watu.
  3. Mapigo yaweza kuhitilafiana na hivyo kufasiriwa kwa namna tofauti.

Ngomezi za kisasa

  1. Milio ya ambulensi, magari ya polisi na zimamoto.
  2. Kengele za kubisha hodi nyumbani zinazotumia umeme.
  3. Kengele shuleni, makanisani, n.k.
  4. Toni za rununu zinazowakilisha aina mbalimbali za jumbe.
  5. Ving’ora vya kuashiria moto umetokea katika majumba ya horofa, benki, hospitalini, n.k.

Changamoto za Ngomezi katika Jamii ya Sasa

  1. Mwingiliano wa jamii mbalimbali unaosababisha kutofasiri ujumbe kwa njia moja inayotakikana.
  2. Viwanda na majumba marefu kusababisha kutosikika kwa sauti au milio ya ngoma.
  3. Njia nyingine za kisasa za mawasiliano zinazotumiwa kwa wingi na kwa wepesi.
  4. Uhaba wa zana kama baragumu na zumari zilizokuwa zinatumika.
  5. Mabadiliko ya maisha kuleta ubinafsi na kusababisha wengi kutoitikia wito wa vyombo.
    1. Mivigha
  • Sherehe za kitamaduni ambazo hutokea katika kipindi fulani cha mwaka ambazo huonyesha mwanajamii ametoka kiwango kimoja hadi kingine.

Aina za Mivigha

  1. Sherehe za tohara
    • kutoka utotoni na kuingia utu uzimani.
  2. Sherehe za ndoa
  • kutoka kapera hadi kuoa
    1. Sherehe za kutambika
  • kutoa sadaka kwa Mungu, miungu, pepo au mizimu
    1. Sherehe kutawazwa kwa kiongozi
  • kutoka uraia na kuingia katika uongozi/utawala
    1. Shughuli za mazishi/matanga
  • kutoka uhai hadi ufu
    1. Sherehe za kuwapa watoto majina
    2. Sherehe za ulaji kiapo
    3. Shughuli za posa
    4. ibada

Hatua

  1. Kutoa mtu rasmi kutoka kundi moja la wanajamii.
  2. Kumfundisha majukumu yanayohusiana na wadhifa mpya.
  3. Kumwingiza rasmi katika kundi jingine.

Sifa

  1. Huandamana na matendo au kanuni fulani (mivigha).
  2. Maleba maalum huvaliwa na wahusika kuwatofautisha na hadhira.
  3. Hufanyika kwa kutumia lugha maalum au kimyakimya.
  4. Kuna watu aina tatu: watendaji wanaoshiriki kuimba na kucheza, wale sherehe inafanyika kwa sababu yao na wanaoshuhudia tu.
  5. Huhusisha vitendo maalum kama kula viapo, kutoa kafara, kucheza ngoma, n.k.
  6. Huandamana na utoaji wa mawaidha.
  7. Uigizaji hujitokeza pale mwanajamii anaingizwa katika kundi fulani kutoka jingine.
  8. Huhusisha maombi.
  9. Hufanywa mahali maalum sherehe hiyo inapofanyika k.m. tambiko hufanywa porini au pangoni.
  10. Wahusika huweka ahadi za kutenda wema.
  11. Huwa na mpangilio wa shughuli kuanzia mwanzo, kati hadi mwisho.

Umuhimu

  1. Kuburudisha kwa vile baadhi ya mivigha huhusisha nyimbo, ngoma na uigizaji.
  2. Kutoa mafunzo ya utu uzima na elimu ya jadi.
  3. Mivigha ya mazishi huliwaza wafiwa.
  4. Kukuza utangamano miongoni mwa wanajamii kwa kuwajumuisha pamoja katika mivigha yao.
  5. Kuashiria mwanajamii ametoka kiwango kimoja cha maisha hadi kingine.
  6. Kujenga uhusiano bora kati ya jamii na miungu au mizimu.
  7. Kitambulisho cha jamii kwani kila moja ina aina yake ya mivigha.
  8. Kudumisha mila za jamii.
  9. Kuelimisha jinsi ya kukabiliana na changamoto maishani.
  10. Kuadilisha kwa kufunza tabia zinazokubalika na jamii k.v. uaminifu, utiifu, n.k.
  11. Kukashifu vitendo vya uoga.
  12. Kukuza uzalendo kwa kuhimiza wanajamii kuonea fahari tamaduni zao.
  13. Msingi wa wanajamii kujitambulisha na kuionea fahari jamii yao.

Hasara

  1. Baadhi ya mivigha huhatarisha afya na maisha k.v. kutahiri watoto wa kike.
  2. Baadhi ya sherehe hukiuka maadili kama vile kwa kuruhusu matusi hata kushiriki ngono.
  3. Baadhi yaweza kusababisha hasara kama vile kueneza ukimwi k.v. tohara kwa kisu kimoja.
  4. Huzua tofauti za kijinsia k.v. mwanamme kujiona bora kuliko mwanamke.
  5. Kuzua utabaka baina ya waliopashwa na wasiopashwa tohara.
  6. Baadhi ya mivigha hukiuka malengo ya kitaifa k.m. ukeketaji ni ukiukaji wa haki za binadamu
  7. Kunayo hujaza watu hofu k.v. kufukuza mapepo kunakohitaji kafara ya binadamu.
  8. Baadhi huhusisha ushirikina na hivyo kusababisha uhasama baina ya koo.
  9. Baadhi hugharimu kiasi kikubwa cha pesa na kuifilisi familia.

MOKASA AGRICULTURE JOINT EXAMS PP2

Name……………………………………………………………………………….Index…………………………………….

443/2

AGRICULTURE

Paper 2

MOKASA EXAMINATION 

2 Hours

MOKASA EXAMINATION

Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education

443/2

Agriculture Paper 2

2 hours

Instructions to candidates

This paper consists of three sections, A,B and C. Answer all questions in sections A and B and any two questions in section C. All answers be written in the spaces provided after every question.

Candidates should write their names and index numbers in the spaces provided above.

For Examiner’s Use Only

Section Question Maximum Score Candidates Score
A 1 -16 30  
B 17 -20 20  
C   20  
  20  
  90  

 

SECTION A (30 Marks)

Answer all questions in this section in the spaces provided.

1 Name four meat breads of rabbits.                                                                                                 (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

2 The following is a list of livestock diseases.

Brucelosis

Trypanosomiasis

Newcastle

Anthrax

African swine fever

Black guater

Which of the two diseases

  • Are both bacterial and zoonotic.                                       (1mk)
  • Highly infectious (1mk)

3 State four qualities of marketable eggs.                                                                                                      (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

4 Mention four reasons for treating timber before using on farm structures.                                        (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

5 List four sources of power in the farm.                                                                                                       (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

6 State four advantages of embryo transplant in cattle.                                                                           (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

7 Give four circumstances under which a farmer would use an ox-drawn cart instead of a tractor drawn trailer on the farm.                                                                                                                                            (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

8 State four factors that would contribute to the depression of farm equipment.                             (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

9 List two tools used for each of the following farm operations.

  • Tightening barbed wires during fencing. ( ½ mk)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  • Smoothening concrete floors during plastering ( ½ mk)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

10 State four advantages of deep litter system in poultry rearing.                                                        (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

11 State four ways of preventing mastitis in lactating cattle.                                                                    (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

12 State four factors to be considered when selecting heifers for milk production.                             (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

13 State four features of a good maize store.                                                                                               (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

14 State four methods that a farmer can employ to ensure maximum power output from animal power.

(2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

15 State four advantages of artificial incubation in poultry rearing.                                                         (2mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

16 Give two reasons for flushing in sheep management.                                                                             (1mk)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

SECTION B (20 Marks)

Answer all questions provided in this section in the spaces provided.

17 The following diagrams illustrate farm equipment. Study it and answer the questions that follow

 

  • Name the parts labeled A, B, C and D.                        A…………………………………………………….………………………………………………………………………………( ½ mk)

B…………………………………………………..………………………………………………………………………………..( ½ mk)

C……………………………………………………….……………………………………………………………………………( ½ mk)

D……………………………………………………………………………………………………….………………………… ( ½ mk)

  • Give the function of each of the parts labeled E and F.                         E………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………(1mk)

F……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….(1mk)

  • Give one use of the above equipment. (1mk)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

18 The illustration below shows a practice in layer birds. Use them to answer the questions that follow.

  • What practice is represented above? (1mk)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  • Which illustrated shows the right way of carrying out the practice. (1mk)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  • State three reasons for carrying out the practice in poultry. (3mks)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

19 The diagram below shows a routine practice being carried out on an animal. Study it and answer questions that follow.

  • Identify the practice.                                                              (1mk)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  • Name the structure in which the practice is being carried out. (1mk)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  • Give three advantages of using the above structure instead of a plunge dip. (3mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Fill the table below for the following diseases.
Disease Cause Characteristic/Symptom Preventive measures
Coccidiosis      
Blackquater     vaccination
Rinderpest virus    
Milk fever      

(5mks)

SECTION C (40 Marks)

Answer any two questions from this section in the spaces after every question.

21 (a) Explain eight factors that influence the composition of milk in a dairy cow.                              (8mks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. b) Outline six causes of cannibalism in poultry.                                       (6mks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. C) Explain six uses of fences in the farm. (6mks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

22 (a) Describe New castle disease under the following sub-headings.

  • Causal organism                (1mk)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  • Animal affected (1mk)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  • Symptoms                             (5mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Control measures. (3mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. b) Describe the principle operation of four-stroke cycle engine. (10mks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

23 (a) Outline five signs of parturition in cattle.                                                                                            (5mks)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. b) State five reasons for carrying out inbreeding in livestock production. (5mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. c) Give five effects of parasites on livestock. (5mks)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. d) Describe the difference between ruminants and non-ruminants digestive system. (5mks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..




MOKASA JOIN EXAMINATION 

443/2

AGRICULTURE PAPER 2

MARKING SCHEME.

1– Flemish giant

–  New Zealand white

– California white

– Chinchila

– Earlops

( 4 x ½ = 2mks)

2 (a)  -Brucellosis

  • Anthrax

( 2 x ½ mks)

(b) Newcastle

–  Anthrax

– African Swine fever

–  Black quarter

– Brucellosis

(2 x ½ = 1 mk)

3          – Large / heavy

  • Brown
  • Clean
  • Smooth shelled
  • Fresh
  • Good candling qualities

( 4 x ½ = 2mks)

 

4   –  prevent attack from insects

  • Prevent attack from fungi/rotting
  • Resist water penetration
  • Increase strength
  • Prevent warping

( 4 x ½ = 2mks)

5     -wind

  • Human
  • Solar Biogas
  • Electricity
  • Petroleum

( 4 x ½ = 2 mks)

6      – Superior females are used to produce which are spread widely

  • Stimulates milk production in females not in milk
  • Easier to transport embryos in test tubes
  • Embryos can be stored for long periods waiting for a recipient female
  • No injuries to small body size females from large body sizes
  • No spread of breeding diseases
  • Off springs adapt to the local conditions

( 4 x ½ = 2mks)

7      – Un availability of a tractor

  • When transporting small load
  • Where the terrain does not allow the use of a tractor
  • Lack of skills to operate the tractor.

( 4 x ½ = 2 mks)

8       – poor storage

  • Wrong size
  • Lack of maintenance
  • Obsolescence

( 4 x ½ = 2mks)

9   (i) –  Chain

  • Pliers
  • Claw hammer
  • ( 2 x ½ = 1mk)

(ii) –  Leveling board

  • Wood float ( reject steel float)

( 2 x ½ = 1mk)

10      – Require small compared to free range

  • Less loss of eggs
  • Easier collection of manure
  • Easier protection of birds from vermins/parasites/diseases
  • High stocking rate
  • Less labour requirement

( 4 x ½ =2mks)

11    – practice farm hygiene/miling infected cows last/using single towel to wipe the udder of cow.

  • Treatment of infected cows to prevent spread.
  • Practicing teat dips after milking.
  • Applying milking jelly/ salve to prevent teat from drying and cracking
  • Practicing good milking techniques.

( 4 x ½ = 2mks)

12      – size of the animal

  • Semen/sire to breed it with/mate it.
  • Health of the animal
  • Ancestors performance
  • Rate of growth
  • Dairy conformation.
  • Either male/female twin

( 4 x ½ = 2mks)

15       – possible to plan when to hatch

  • Possible to control internal conditions of the incubator
  • Easier to control diseases and parasites
  • Incubator can hold more eggs at any time than the hen can sit on.

(4 x ½ = 2mks)

 

SECTION B (20 Marks)

16  (a)            A – Hose pipe /delivery pipe

  • B – Lance
  • C – shoulder straps
  • D – preumatic lever

( 4 x ½ = 2mks)

(b) Trigger – Controls the rate of spray delivery.                                                          (1mk)

Nozzle – Breaks and ejects the liquid as spray

  • Atomizes the spray.

( 1mks)

(c ) – Spraying agricultural chemicals to crops in order to control pests and diseases

-Spraying livestock to control external parasites such as ticks.

( 1 x 1 = 1mks)

17

Diseases Cause Characteristics symptom Preventive measures
Coccidiosis Protozoa/coccidian sp Diarrhoea/whitish/yellow/blood stained Give coccidiostats in drinking water/food
Blackquater Bacteria/clostridium sp Lameness / swollen muscles Vaccination
Rinder pest Virus Diarrhoea with blood- stained feaces Vaccination
Milk fever Low level of calcium(reject lack of calcium) Animal goes down with stiff bent neck. Twitching of muscles –        Injection with calcium preparation eg calcium borogluconate

–        Feeding with calcium rich feed stuff during gestation period

( 1 x 6 = 6mks)

 

18  (a) Debeaking(1mk)

(b)P             (1mk)

(c )– Reduction of egg eating and breaking of eggs

  • Controls cannibalism
  • Prevents injury from pegging or fighting
  • Reduction feed wastages
  • Reduction of feather pulling
  • Moderates pegging order which encourages greater uniformity in the flock.

( 3 x 1 = 3mks)

19   (a) Spraying of livestock against tick control                                                (1mk)

(b) Spray race.                                                                                                    (1mk)

(c )  It is suitable for pregnant and sick animals as animals do not get a shock

  • Acaricide wash is not wasted since its recycled
  • Animals cannot swallow the acaricide wash
  • Spraying is faster less labour is required.
  • ( 3 x 1 = 3mks)

SECTION C

20 (a) Factors that influence composition of milk

  • Age of the animal
  • Condition of the animal i.e emaciation, sickness and pregnancy
  • Stage of lactation and pregnancy: butter fat content in milk tends to be higher at the middle phase of lactation period.
  • Completeness of milking
  • Breed differences
  • Season of the year
  • The type of food eaten by the animal
  • Presence of diseases such as mastitis and if the animal is under treatment through use of different drugs will produce milk with variable composition.

(b) Causes of cannibalism in poultry;

– Presence of external parasites

– overcrowding

– Presence of bright light

– presence of prolapse

– Mineral deficiency

– Introduction of a new bird in a flock.

( 6 x 1 = 6mks)

 

(C )Uses of fences in the farm,

  • It demarcates the farm from that of neighbours
  • Fences keep off wild animals and other intruders from outside the farm
  • They are used to separate crop fields from the pastures facilitating mixed farming
  • They are used to divide pasture into paddocks facilitating controlled grazing systems such as rotational grazing
  • Controls the movements of animals and people preventing the formation of unnecessary paths in the farm.
  • Helps to control the spread of pastures and diseases by keeping off wild and stray animals from the farm
  • Fences help to isolate sick animals from the rest of the herd to prevent disease spread.
  • They enable the farmer to control breeding by rearing different animals in different paddocks
  • They provide security to the homestead and farm animals.
  • It is for aesthetic value, that is, it improves the beauty of the land.

( 6×1 = 6mks)

21 (a) Newcastle disease

  • Causal organism- Virus           (1mk)
  • Animals affected; –   poultry            (1mk)
  • Symtopms
  • The birds have difficulties in breathing, produce a harsh, grating rasping sound when breathing
  • The beaks remain wide open and necks are strained
  • The birds become dull
  • The birds stand with eyes closed all the time
  • The birds loose appetite
  • There are nasal discharges which force the birds to shake their heads to clear it
  • Birds walk with a staggering motion since the nervous system is affected, paralysis of wings and legs may occur
  • Often the birds have their beaks and wings down
  • Birds produce watery greenish diarrhea
  • Eggs laid have soft shells

                       (5 x 1 = 5mks)

  • Control measures;
  • Vaccination should be done during the first six weeks and then two – three months later.
  • Farmers are advised to kill all the birds and burn them once infestation has occurred.
  • The houses be cleaned and disinfected before bringing in new stock.
  • Quarantine is imposed once an outbreak is suspected of occurred.

( 3 x 1 = 3mks)

   (b) Principle operation of four – stroke cycle engine

                 Induction stroke cycle

  • The piston moves down the cylinder causing the inlet valve to open and outlet valve closes. This causes the drawing in of fresh petrol vapour and air into the cylinder.

Compression stroke;

  • Both inlet and outlet valves are closed and the piston moves up the cylinder. This causes compression of the fresh fuel mixture in the combustion chamber.

The power stroke cycle;

  • The fuel air mixture is fully compressed and a spark is produced at the spark plug.
  • This causes the fuel mixture to ignite and expand resulting in high pressure that cause/force the piston to move down the cylinder.

The Exhaust stroke cycle;

  • This is the last stroke where the piston moves up the cylinder to eliminate the burned fuel mixture through an open exhaust valve.

( 1 x 10 = 10  mks)

23 (a) Signs of parturition in cattle;

  • Enlargement of the vulva
  • Thick mucus is discharged from the vulva
  • Relaxation of the hip muscles
  • Full and distended udder.
  • Thick sticky honey like fluid is discharged from the teats
  • Loss of appetite
  • Towards the end water bag emerges and bursts where the fore legs and muzzle is noticed.

( 5 x 1 = 5mks)

(b) Reasons for inbreeding;

–  To increase genetic uniformity in the herd

– Used to fix the required characteristics in the new- breeds.

– To increase phenotypic uniformity

– Used to get proven sires

–  used in animals of high prepotency.

                   (5 x 1 = 5mks)

(C )Effects of parasites in livestock;

  • Causes anemia
  • Deprive the host animal of food
  • Injury and damage to tissues and organs
  • Diseases transmission
  • Cause irritation
  • Obstruction to internal organs.

( 5 x 1 = 5mks)

(d) Difference between Ruminants and non- ruminant digestive system;

Ruminants Non – Ruminants
–         chew the cud

–       have four stomach chambers – thus polygastric

–        Regurgitate food

–        Can digest cellulose. Have micro – organisms in the rumen that digest cellulose.

–        Have no ptyalin in saliva hence no enzymatic digestion in the mouth.

–        Most digestion and absorption takes place in the rumen.

–        Have alkaline saliva due to presence of ammonia.

–        Doesn’t chew the cud

–        Have one stomach chamber – thus monogastric

–        Cannot regurgitate food once swallowed.

–        Have no micro-organisms in the stomach hence cannot digest cellulose except those animals with micro-organisms in the ceacum

–        Have ptyalin in the saliva hence enzymatic digestion begins in the mouth

–        Most digestion and absorption takes place in the small intestines

–        The saliva is neutral in PH.

( 5 x 1 = 5mks) Mark it as a whole.)

Form 3 Term 1, 2 & 3 Exams {Latest}

Get free Form 3 Term 1, 2 & 3 Exams {Latest} by clicking on the links below:

FORM 3 SUNRISE EXAMS

101 F3 ENGLISH MS

101 F3 ENGLISH QS

102 F3 KISWAHILI MS

102 F3 KISWAHILI QS

121 F3 MATHEMATICS QS

231 F3 BIOLOGY MS

231 F3 BIOLOGY QS

232 F3 PHYSICS MS

232 F3 PHYSICS QS

233 F3 CHEMISTRY MS

233 F3 CHEMISTRY QS

311 F3 HISTORY MS

311 F3 HISTORY QS

312 F3 GEOGRAPHY MS

312 F3 GEOGRAPHY QS

313 F3 CRE MS

313 F3 CRE QS

441 F3 HOMESCIENCE MS

441 F3 HOMESCIENCE QS

443 F3 AGRICULTURE MS

443 F3 AGRICULTURE QS

451 F3 COMPUTER MS

451 F3 COMPUTER QS

565 F3 BUSINESS MS

565 F3 BUSINESS QS

COMPREHENSIVE FORM 3 EXAMS

AGRICULTURE FORM 3 P1 MS

AGRICULTURE FORM 3 P1

AGRICULTURE FORM 3 P2 MS

BIOLOGY F3 CONFIDENTIAL

BIOLOGY FORM 3 P1 MS

BIOLOGY FORM 3 P1

BIOLOGY FORM 3 P2 MS

BIOLOGY FORM 3 P2

BIOLOGY FORM 3 P3 MS

BIOLOGY FORM 3 P3

BUSINESS STUDIES FORM 3 P1

BUSINESS STUDIES FORM 3 P2 MS

BUSINESS STUDIES FORM 3 P2_

CHEMISTRY FORM 3 P1 MS

CHEMISTRY FORM 3 P1

CHEMISTRY FORM 3 P2

CHEMISTRY FORM 3 P3 MS

CHEMISTRY FORM 3 P3

ENGLISH FORM 3 P1 MS

ENGLISH FORM 3 P1

ENGLISH FORM 3 P2 MS

ENGLISH FORM 3 P2

ENGLISH FORM 3 P3 MS

ENGLISH FORM 3 P3

GEOGRAPHY FORM 3 P1 MS

GEOGRAPHY FORM 3 P1

GEOGRAPHY FORM 3 P2 MS

GEOGRAPHY FORM 3 P2

HISTORY FORM 3 P1 MS

HISTORY FORM 3 P1

HISTORY FORM 3 P2 MS

HISTORY FORM 3 P2

KISWAHILI FORM 3 P1

KISWAHILI FORM 3 P2

KISWAHILI FORM 3 P3

MATHEMATICS FORM 3 P1 MS

MATHEMATICS FORM 3 P1

MATHEMATICS FORM 3 P2 MS

MATHEMATICS FORM 3 P2

MWONGOZO WA KUSAHIHISHA FORM 3 P1.doc

MWONGOZO WA KUSAHIHISHA FORM 3 P2

MWONGOZO WA KUSAHIHISHA FORM 3 P3

PHYSICS F3 CONFIDENTIAL

PHYSICS FORM 3 P1 MS

PHYSICS FORM 3 P1

PHYSICS FORM 3 P2 MS

PHYSICS FORM 3 P2

PHYSICS FORM 3 P3 MS

PHYSICS FORM 3 P3

Latest English Form 3 Exams and Marking Schemes Free Downloads

CHEMISTRY FORM 3 EXAMS WITH MARKING SCHEMES

Latest Chemistry Form 3 Exams and Marking Schemes Free

Latest Physics Form 3 Exams and Marking Schemes Free Downloads

Latest Physics Form 3 Exams and Marking Schemes Free Downloads

Latest Business Studies Form 3 Exams and Marking Schemes Free Downloads

Latest History and Government Form 3 Exams and Marking Schemes Free Downloads

Form 3 exams with marking scheme (Comprehensive papers)

Latest Kiswahili Form 3 Exams and Marking Schemes Free Downloads

Form 4 KCSE Joint Mock Exams; Full Papers with Answers

Form 4 KCSE Joint Exams; Full Papers with Answers

Agriculture-PP2-ms.pdf
PHY-PP2.docx
PHY-PP3-CONFIDENTIAL.pdf
PHY-PP3.pdf
PHY-PP3-MS.pdf
KISWA-P1-MS.docx
KISWAHILI-P1.docx
Maths-PP1.docx
MATHS-PP2.docx
MATHS-PP2.pdf
KISW-PP3.docx
KISW-PP3-MS.docx
HIST-PP1.docx
HISTORY-P2-FORM-4-_-MARKING-SCHEME (1).pdf
HSC-PP3-MS.docx
KISW-PP2-MS.docx
KISW-PP2.docx
GEO-PP1-MS.pdf
ENGLISH-PP1.docx
ENGLISH-PP1-MS.docx
Eng.P2-MS.docx
ENG-PP3.docx
PHY-PAPER-1-MARKING-SCHEME.pdf
CHEM-PP-1.docx
CHEM-PP-2.docx
CHEM-PP3-CONFIDENTIAL.docx
CRE-PP1-MS.docx
CRE-PP2-MS.docx
CRE-PP2.docx
Eng-P2-QS.docx
ENG-PP2-MARKING-SCHEME.pdf
ENG-PP3-MS.docx
Chem-F4.docx
MATHS-PP1-MS.pdf
BUSINESS-STUDIES-PAPER-1-SUKELLEMO.docx
BUSINESS-STUDIES-PAPER-2-MARKING-SCHEME.docx
BUSSINESS-MARKING-SCHEME.docx
CHEM-PP3.docx
BUSINESS-STUDIES-PAPER-1-SUKELLEMO-EDITED.docx
business-ppr2-pre-mock-qsns.pdf
business-ppr2-pre-mock-qsns.docx
BIO-PP3-QS.docx
BIO-PP3-CONFIDENTIAL.docx
BIO-PP1-QS.docx
BIO-PP1-MS.docx
AGRICULTURE-PP2-QS-SUKELLEMO.docx
AGRICULTURE-PP1-QS.doc
CHEM-PP3-MS1.pdf
Bio-PP3-ms.pdf
AGRICULTURE-PP1-MS.pdf

Physical Education, PE, Notes

Physical Education Revision Guide

PHYSICAL EDUCATION

This is a phase of general education system that aims through physical activities/experiences such as games, dances, athletics and gymnastics e.t.c to the growth and development of an individual.

Qualities of a good P.E. TEACHER

Should posses the following components of physical fitness:

  • Endurance
  • Speed – Co-ordination
  • Flexibility – Power
  • Strength – Reaction time
  • Agility – Balance
  • Should be knowledgeable with the subject
  • Should be cheerful
  • Should be confident
  • Should be sympathetic
  • Should be understanding
  • Should have good communication skills
  • Should be approachable
  • Should be organized

Duties/responsibilities of a P.E teacher

  • Instructor – Team Manager/Chaperon
  • Counselor – Demonstrator
  • Dietician – Administrator
  • Coach – First aider
  • Trainer – Referee/umpire
  • Evaluator – Disciplinarian

Problems encountered when teaching P.E

  1. Lack of role models
  2. Lack of resource materials e.g. books
  3. Lack of proper facilities e.g. fields, gymnasiums
  4. Lack of equipment e.g. balls
  5. Lack of proper game uniforms
  6. Competition from examinable subjects
  7. Negative attitude by pupils, fellow teachers and parents
  8. Conflict with religion
  9. Conflict with tradition and cultural beliefs

Sources of information to a P.E teacher

  •  Reading from newspapers, books and other sports journals
  •  Listening to radio programs
  • Viewing T.V and video cassettes
  • Officiating in sports
  • Active participation in sports
  • Coaching and training
  • Active and intellectual spectating
  • Participating in sports debates or lectures.

Purpose of P.E to early man

For physical fitness to enable them during hunting
and gathering
For recreation/entertainment
For surviving through gathering and hunting
expeditions
For defence mechanism against wild animals and
enemies
Settling disputes among clans
Choosing for marriage partners
For communication purposes.
Specific objectives of P.E
Physical fitness
Social development
Emotional development
Movement skills development
Aesthetic/beauty development
Mental/intellectual development.
How P.E tries to meet national goals of
education
1. National unity
a) Through national sporting competition
b) P.E curriculum in schools, colleges and
universities is the same.
c) Use of national anthem during sports
2. National development
a) P.E provides job opportunities
b) Income through cash rewards, trophies
acquired by players
c) Development of sporting industries to
provide sporting equipment for the
growing demand.
d) Fitness, Strength and health from
regular exercise leads to increased out
put.
e) Acquisition of skills, expertise and
personal qualities so vital for growing
economy.
3. Social equality
a) Rules encourage social relationship
which equal opportunity for all.
4. Respect for and development of cultural
heritage.
a) Through cultural dance and games
competition
b) Interaction with international culture
1
5. International consciousness
a) Through international sports e.g. all
African games
b) Hosting games in all countries
c) Drawing officials from all countries
6. Individual fulfilment
a) Opportunities for development of
physical talents.
b) Personal income
c) Personal esteem from successful
performance
Purpose of P.E. to the nation
 Enables people to perform skilful and
efficient movement through use of physical
and mental power.
 People use movement as a means of
communication, expression etc
 People use leisure time well in creating,
performing and appreciating physical
activities e.g. games, dance e.t.c
 Promotion, preservation and appreciation
of national and international culture.
 Self discipline through rules and regulation
 Learning and participating in P.E creates
awareness of natural resources and
environment.
 People learn to improvise and use
equipment in various activities.
 Maintenance of high standard of body
health, strength, fitness and general body
development.
OBJECTIVES OF P.E
P.E activities are conducive to growth and
development.
P.E contributes to constructive use of leisure time
P.E provides for leadership
P.E provides opportunity for expression and
creativity.
P.E provides for personality and character
development
P.E provides for neuromuscular skills
P.E develops habit of health and safety
P.E develops mental capabilities and knowledge
P.E has biological, psychological and sociological
function.
P.E provides for cultural development
Playing is an instinctive drive that has educational
potentials.
SPORTS ORGANIZATION
This deal with the way various sporting
activities/competitions is organized. It also
discusses how points are awarded and recorded ,
filling score sheet and arranging how teams are
going to play.
1. A LEAGUE (ROUND ROBIN)
This is a competition where each team will have a
chance to meet every team in the other group
either once or twice. The possible outcome during
league competition is a win, loss or a tie/draw.
Merits
Give satisfaction to the players
A weak team will have a chance to meet a strong
team.
Weak team improves as the league progresses
The winner is clearly determined
Players get a lot of exposure
Provide fair judgement.
Demerits
Take too long to be completed
Very expensive to organize in terms of transport
and accommodation
Require very many officials
Require very many facilities
Require very many equipment
Expose players to very many injuries
Tiresome on the side of players
Very difficult to organize especially the league
table.
Determining number of matches per team to play
T (T-1)
T
T = Number of teams
Minus (-) 1 because a team cannot play against
itself.
Determining the total number of matches in a
league.
T(T-1)
2
T = Number of teams
Minus (-) 1 because a team cannot play against
itself and divide by two (2) because it takes two
teams to play a match.
2. KNOCK OUT
A competition where once a team is defeated, it is
eliminated. The possible outcomes are (i) win
(ii) loss
2
Types of knock out
I. Single elimination
II. Double elimination
III. Consolation elimination
Merits of knock out
Takes short time to complete
Require few officials
Requires less equipment
Requires few facilities
Easy to organize
Has clear climax
Demerits of knock out
Does not give suggestion for the players
Players are not given time to improve on their
skills
Teams are not given chance to realize their
mistakes and correct.
A weak team can eliminate a strong team
The winner is not outly determined
Not the best way of judging a strong team.
A BYE
This is when a team is allowed to proceed to the
next stage without touching or playing the ball
Rules for a bye
a) Given during preliminary stages of competition
b) Give the bye when the teams cannot be paired
“through” to avoid odd numbers at the last stage.
Entering league score sheet
Egoji Vs.
Kigari 2:3
Egoji Vs
Meru 3:3
Egoji Vs
Rubate 3:2
Egoji Vs
Augustine 4:2
Kigari Vs
Meru 3:3
Kigari Vs
Rubate 1:1
Kigari Vs
Augustine 3:2
Meru Vs
Rubate 2:2
Rubate Vs
Augustine 0:1
Meru Vs Augustine 1:
How to give a bye
a) By considering the previous performance
b) By random draw
When giving byes pick on a magic number, which
is slightly higher than the number of teams. Magic
numbers include: 2,4,8,16,32,64,128 e.t.c
3. LEAGUE CUM KNOCK OUT
Takes the advantage of both league and knock out.
Neither too short nor too long
Provide a well – matched competition
Doesn’t exclude a team from a competition after a
game.
Organization of league cum Knock out
Teams are divided in to pools where each team is
expected to play all others in the same pool.
(Preliminary round league).
Winners meet runners up in the next pool.
After the preliminary round the competition
changes to knockout.
Only the winners and runners up from each group
proceed to quarterfinals.
Merits
Correct the mistakes of league and knock out
Has very clear climax of competition
Saves time
Allows the defending champion to participate
Problem of an even do not occur
Neither too long nor too short
No team plays greater or minimal game than the
other
P – Matches played
W- Matches won
D – Matches drawn
L – Matches lost
F – Goals scored by the team
A – Goals the team was scored
Pts – Points
Ps – Position
3
Enter the above information in a score sheet
Teams Egoji Kigari Meru Augustine Rubate P W D L F A
Pts
Ps
Egoji 2:3 3:3 4:2 3:2 4 2 1 1 12 10 7 2
Kigari 3:2 3:3 3:2 1:1 4 2 2 0 10 8 8 1
Meru 3:3 3:3 1:0 2:2 4 1 3 0 9 8 6 3
Augst 2:4 2:3 1:0 1:0 4 1 0 3 5 8 3 4
Rubate 1:3 1:1 2:2 0:1 4 0 2 2 4 7 2 5
ROUNDERS
B 2nd Post
13m 13m

DF
2.5m DF
2.5m
3
rd Post Bowlers
Umpire 1ST Post
B
7m
13m
7.5m
2m
B 13m
4
th Post
XXXXXXX
Waiting batsmen
B Substitute runner
Backstop

4
Batting
Square X
Bowling
Square B
This is a game played by 2 teams each having 9
player and 2 substitutes
The two teams are:
I. Bowling/fielding/out team:
Consists of:
a) Backstop; position at the back of the bating
square to collect backward hit
b) Bowler in bowling square
c) Bowlers at each post (4)
d) Deep fielders (3)
II. Batting/Inning team
Members are known as batsmen. One batman is
inside the bating square and the rest line up next to
the bating square.
Duration of game:
This is known as inning and normally given to
batting team. Should not take more than 15
minutes.
Basic skills
– Passing – Catching
– Bowling – Running
– Stumping – Batting
Basic equipment
Rounders ball
Rounders bat
4post (not > 1.5m high).
Officials
Batsman umpire
Bowlers umpire
Duties
Inspecting facilities and equipment before the start
of the game
Awarding the scores
 Signing score sheet after the game
 Declaring the ball as no ball
 Declares when a batsman is taken out
 Ensuring rules and regulations are
followed.
When a batsman can be taken out:
If a batsman misses a good ball unless he is the
last batsman who is entitled to 3 good balls.
If a batsman overtakes a teammate
If a batsman is found in a post by a teammate
If the ball is grounded in the bowling square when
the batsman is in between the posts.
When the batsman runs inside the track
Failure to touch 4th post on completion
Batsman foot protruding outside batting square.
When the ball is caught in air unless it is no ball
When a batsman obstructs a fielder
When the post a head is stumped with a ball.
NO BALL
This is a ball that cannot be batted due to the
mistake of the bowler.
Ball either too high or too low i.e above the head
and below the knees.
When the ball is outside the batting square
When the feet of the bowler are protruding outside
the bowling square.
When the ball is not thrown in a smooth
continuous motion.
SCORING
1. Full rounder:
Awarded when the batsman hits the ball
successfully in a forward direction and manages to
hit round the track from outside touching the 4th
post before the ball is grounded in the bowling
square.
2. Half rounder:
Awarded in case of a backward hits and the
batsman run in the normal way.
3. Penalty half rounder
a) Awarded incase of 3 consecutive no balls
b) A bowler or fielder obstructs a batsman.
Ha Full rounder –
Why rounder is famous in primary schools:
 Equipment’s cheap to attain
 Skills easy to master
 Rules easy to understand
 Take short time
 Use limited space
 Can be played by all ages
 Can be played by both sexes
 Not tiresome
 Limited chances of injuries
Improving accuracy when batting
 Should have good stance
 Should have good eye contact
 Should have good co-ordination between
the hands and the ball.
 Good reaction time
 Enough power/strength
 Good bowling ball.
5
OLYMPIC EDUCATION
Ancient games
The first ancient games were held in 776BC in
Olympia Athens in Greece. The games were
meant to commemorate burial of a prominent
personality and as a way of worship.
The major events were gymnastics and athletics,
which were specifically by the Greeks. It was
done by men only and during night.
The game was held after every four years
(Olympiad) and truce period was maintained.
Amateurism dominated the game. The price give
to the winner was the olive wreath.
Philosophy of olympism
 Was based on;
 Games free from corruption
 Games free from discrimination
 Promote the spirit of brotherhood
Modern Olympic games
The first modern Olympic was held in Athens
Greece in 1896A.D. The games are held after
every four years (Olympiad).
Was revived by a French scholar by the name
Baron Pierre with an intention to unify the whole
world by opening the game to the rest of the
world.
The modern games are hosted by the city and the
city is selected six years before the game.
i) International Olympic Committee (IOC)
This is a world governing body with the
headquarter Geneva in Switzerland.
Former President was Juan Antonic Samaranch
Current President is Jacques Rogge.
Tripartite commission is made up of:
(ii) International sports federation (I.S.F)
I.S.F deals with the laws of the game and
officiating e.g IAAF (Atheletics), FIFA (Football)
FIVB (Volleyball)
(iii) National Olympic Committee (NOC)
Made up of all the countries that are members of
the Olympic committee e.g. National Olympic of
Kenya (NOCK)
(iv) International Olympic Academy (IOA)
Deals with principles and philosophies of Olympic
(Olympism)
(v) Olympic Solidarity (O.S)
Trustee, which handles IOC funds for, sports
development.
Olympic logo
This has five interlaced rings, which represent the
solidarity of five continents e.g.
Red ———————– America
Green ——————– Australia
Yellow —————— Asia
White ——————- Europe
Black ——————- Africans
Opening ceremony
Singing of the Olympic anthem and hosting of
Olympic flag
Putting up Olympic torch flame.
Three gunshots associated with the Olympic motto
– which reads higher, faster and stronger.
Releasing of doves and pigeons.
Order of Olympic games
Year City Country
1968 Mexico America
1972 Munich Germany
1976 Mautical Canada
1980 Moscow Russia
1984 Los Angeles U.S.A
1988 Seoul S. Korea
1992 Barcelona Spain
1996 Atlanta U.S.A
2000 Sydney Australia
2004 Athens Greece
a
Conditions for awarding medals
A competitor must be nationality of a given
country and must have a national flag.
Athletes must pass the drug test.
The result must be verified to find out whether it
was accurate.
Why some countries don’t participate in
Olympic games
If they are not members of International Olympic
Committee (I.O.C)
Lack of finance/funds
Failure to meet the required qualifying standards
Political ideologies e.g. capitalization, socialism,
apartheid e.t.c
Political instability e.g. civil wars
Lack of qualified coaches and trainers
Lack of equipment
Lack of standard facilities
6
Similarities between ancient and modern
Olympic games
 Both are held after every 4 years i.e.
Olympic
 In both the games are hosted by cities
 Both propagate the spirit of brotherhood
 In both Olympic flames is put up during
the opening ceremony
 Both emphasize on peace/truce
Difference between ancient and modern
Olympic games
 In ancient the games were held at night
while modern the games are held during
daytime.
 In ancient only men participated while in
modern both sexes participate.
 In ancient winners were awarded olive
wreath while in modern winners are
awarded medals
 In ancient the games were specifically for
the Greeks while in modern the games are
open for all races
 The ancient Olympic games were
dominated by amateurism while in modern
both professionalism and amateurism
dominates the games.
 In ancient only two events were
participated in i.e. athletics and gymnastics
while in modern many games are
participated in.
NETBALL
HISTORICAL BACKGROUND
This game was invented in America in 1891.
Originally, the method of playing was similar to
that of basketball. Two baskets were placed at the
end of the gymnasium and two opposing teams
passed the ball to score in the baskets. In 1895
Dr. Tole an American introduced it in England and
the game spread by word of mouth because there
were no printed rules.
Some of the changes that have taken place in the
development of netball include:
a) In 1897 rings were introduced instead of baskets
b) Rules were published for the first time in 1901.
c) In 1924 the netball federation was formed
d) In 1926 all England netball association was
formed in England
e) The game was introduced in Kenya in 1920s by
the missionaries and was mainly played by the
Europeans.
f) In 1968 Kenya netball association was formed
under the chairmanship of British lady who was a
physical education lecture at the Kenyatta College.
g) In 1960 the International Federation of Women
Netball Association was formed and new rules
were published.
Members of the I.F.W.N.A meets after every 8
years to review and change the rules if need arise.
Kenya is a member through the affiliation of
Kenya netball association.
Team size
A team is made up of 12 players i.e. 7 in the court
and 5 substitutes. A game cannot be played if a
team has less that 5 players. If a team is
incomplete they loose the game by default and if
the team refuses to play then they loose the game
by forfeit.
PLAYERS
The seven players include:
1. Goal keeper (G.K)
2. Goal defence (G.D)
3. Wing defence (W.D)
4. Centre (C)
5. Goal shooter (G.S)
6. Goal attack (G.A)
7. Wing attack (W.A)
7
Side line (30 ½ m)
Goal third
WA
WD

Goal area
GK 1
GS 4.9
2
GD
GA
Center third
0.9m

3
Center circle
Goal third
GA
GD
Goal area
5
4 GS
GK

PLAYING AREAS
GK – 1,2 GD – 1,2,3 WD – 2,3 C- 2,3,4
WA – 3,4 GA – 3,4,5 GS – 4,5
Substitution
There is no limit to the number of substitutes a
team can use provided they were all registered at
the beginning of the play. A player comes in and
out as many times as possible and this is referred
to as revolving substitution.
Game duration
In a match:
There are 4 quarters of 15 minutes each with
resting interval of 3 minutes between first and
second quarters and between third and fourth
quarters. There is a resting interval of 15 minutes
during half time.
In tournament:
There are 2 halves of 20 minutes each with a
resting interval of 5 minutes during half time. The
teams change sides at the end of every quarter or
half.
Breaking a tie:
If a tie occurs it is broken by adding an extra
period of 5 minutes. If still occurs similar periods
are added till it is broken.
BASIC EQUIPMENT
1. Ball
Size number 5
Spherical
Circumference 27-28
Weight 400gms – 450gms
Color – white
2. Goal post
3.05m tall (10ft)
Ring diameter 380mm
3. Players equipment
Sports shoe and stockings
Skirts/shorts/bloomers/wrappers
Jersey/T-shirts
Playing bibs.
STARTING THE GAME
Procedure
Umpire tosses a coin for the 2 captains and the
winning captain has two options i.e.
i) Choice of the side
ii) The 1st centre pass
The team starting with centre pass is known as
even team while the other is known as odd team.
8
CC
Conditions during centre pass
 The centre with the ball should be within
the centre circle.
 All other players except opponent of the
centre should be in their respective goal
thirds.
 After the umpires whistle, the ball must be
released within 3 seconds.
 The centre pass must be received within
the same third (centre third)
 The centre with the ball must obey the
footwork rule.
 A goal cannot be scored directly from the
centre pass.
Occasions when centre pass are administered
 Start of the game
 After the score
 After the score
 After every quarter or half
 Start of 2nd half
 Start extra time.
NB/ Incase of any infringement during centre
pass, the centre pas is referred to as faulty centre
pass.
CONTROL OF CENTRE PASS
i) When the whistle is blown the centre in
possession of the ball shall play within three
seconds and obey the footwork rule.
ii) The centre pass should be caught or touched by
a member of the attacking team who is
standing/lands within the centre third.
iii) A player who lands with one foot or both feet
simultaneously within the centre third is judged to
have received the ball in that third.
iv) A player who lands with both feet
simultaneously with one foot within the centre
third and the other on goal third is judged to have
received the ball in that goal third.
v) If a member of a team taking the centre pass,
catches the ball in the centre third without crossing
the line, a free pass is a warded the opposing team
to be taken at the goal third close to the point
where the ball crosses the line.
vi) If a member of opposing team touches or
catches the ball on the centre third or goal third,
with a stride along a transverse line, then the
advantage rule is applied.
vii) If a ball from centre pass goes untouched over
the sideline boundary or the centre third, a throw
in is awarded to the opposing team where the ball
crosses the line.
PLAYING THE BALL
A player may:
i) Catch in one or both hands
ii) Gain or regain possession of the ball if it
re-bounces on the goal post.
iii) Bounce the ball to another player
iv) Tip the ball in uncontrollable manner once or
more than once, hit the ball to another player or
catch the ball.
v) Bat the ball once, catch or direct to another
player
vi) Fall while holding the ball but must regain
footing and throw the ball within three seconds.
A player may not.
i) Kick the ball deliberately
ii) Strike the ball with the wrist
iii) Deliberately fall on the ball to get it
iv) Attempt to regain possession of the ball while
lying, sitting or kneeling on the ground
v) Use goal post as a support in recovering the ball
going out the court
vi) Use the goal post as a means of regaining
balance/ any other way or purpose.
LATE ARRIVALS
A late comer can only replace a player who filled
her position only after notifying the umpire.
She takes to the court:
a) After a goal has been scored
b) After stoppage for injuries or illness
c) Immediately following an interval
The penalty for breaking the rule is a free pass to
the opposing team where the infringer is standing
and she leaves the court until the next goal is
scored or next interval.
Stoppages, injuries or illness
When a player is injured or ill a stoppage of up to
3 minutes is allowed from when team manager is
called to decide whether the player is fit to
continue with the play.
Umpire may stop play for emergency related to:
i) Equipment, court interference by
outsiders, weather conditions
ii) Players clothing.
9
OFFICIALS
Team officials – Game officials
Coach – Umpire
Team manager – Timekeeper
Captain – Scorer
1. UMPIRE
 They put on costumes distinct from that of
players
 Should have control over the game and
make decisions
 Should officiate according to the rules
 Each umpire should control and give
decisions only in one half of the court
unless appealed to by other umpires for
decision on her behalf.
 The umpire whistle starts and stops the
game after an interval.
 After the players have taken their positions
in the court, the umpire tosses a coin for
the start.
 Each umpire restarts the game after all the
goals scored in the half he or she is
controlling.
 Keeps outside the court except when it is
necessary to enter in to secure a clear view
of a player or to indicate the point of which
the penalty must be taken or to take a toss
up.
 Move along the sideline and behind the
goal line to see play and make decision.
 An umpire may call on an advantage to
indicate an infringement has been observed
and not penalized.
 Not criticize or coach any team when the
game is in progress.
 Check that during the stoppage, injuries,
other players remain in the court and there
is no coaching going on.
 On seeing an infringement blow whistle,
state the infringement and the penalty and
indicate the place on which the penalty is
to be taken.
2. SCORERS
There are two scorers and their duty include:
a) Keep a written record of the scores
together with the record of the centre pass
and the record of all the successful scores
shot.
b) Record each goal as it’s scored unless
notified contrary by the umpire.
c) Call centre pass if applicable to.
d) Notify the umpire immediately if the
incorrect centre pass is given.
3. TIME KEEPERS
Their duties include:
a) Toss off for the choice of goal side or first
centre pass and notify the umpire of the
result.
b) Take note of time during an interval,
stoppage or illness.
c) During the above occasions notify the
umpire and the other captain that they have
changed the positions whether or not
substitute is involved or not.
Over third
a) The ball cannot be thrown over a complete
third without being touched or caught by a
player who is at the time touching or
catching the ball is fully within the third or
lands within that third.
b) The player, who lands first with one foot in
the correct third, is judged to have received
the ball I that third.
c) The player who lands on both feet
simultaneously with one foot within the
correct third and the other one in incorrect
third is penalized.
FOOTWORK RULE
A player may receive a ball with one foot or both
feet grounded or jump to catch and land on one or
both feet and then:
a) Step with one or both feet in one direction, any
number of times pivoting on the landing foot. The
pivoting foot may be lifted but the player must
throw or shoot before grounding.
b) Jump from the landing foot or both feet on the
other foot or either foot but must throw or shoot
the ball before re-grounding foot.
A player in possession of the ball may not:
Drag or slide the landing foot
Hop on either foot
Jump from either both feet unless the ball has been
released before landing.
DEFENCE
This is mounting around of the player who is in
the guard position. Its duty is to capture from the
opponent and bring it up court to start her team’s
attack. She is also supposed to draw the defence
onto herself and then pass the ball to her team
mate in her position.
10
Player’s responsibilities in defence against an
opponent include:
Anticipating an opponents moves so as to
discourage him from moving past for a shot near a
goal area.
Discouraging the opponent from reaching the high
percentage scoring area.
Making it difficult for the opponent to pass
accurately.
Making it difficult for the opponent to run fast and
receive a pass or collect a reground.
Types of defence
1. Man to man defence – A player marks her
opponent wherever she goes in the court.
2. Zone defence- court player guards one section
at all times no matter which attacker comes into
the area.
PENALTIES IN NETBALL
These are awarded when infringement occurs i.e.
offences or breaking of rules.
1. THROW IN
This is an act of putting the ball back into play
when the whole ball is out the court.
Occasions when the ball is considered out:
When it touches the ground outside the court.
When the player steps outside the court while
holding the ball.
When the ball comes in contact with a person or
an object outside the court.
Conditions to observe:
Should be thrown at the exact point where it went
out.
Throw at the nearest third.
Release the ball in three seconds.
At least one foot should be close to the line but not
stepping on it.
Footwork rules should be obeyed i.e. the foot
should be in contact with the ground.
Opponents should be 0.9m away from the ball.
A goal cannot be scored directly from the throw
in.
The player cannot pass the ball to herself.
A player should not enter the court before
releasing the ball.
2. TOSS-UP/THROW-UP
This is awarded incase of:
1. Simultaneous infringements – 2 opposing
players committing same offence.
2. Simultaneous offside – when one player
interferes with the ball.
3. When two opposing players claim possession
of the ball – holding the ball at the same time and
struggling for it.
4. Incase of serious injuries or illness (stoppages)
5. When the umpire cannot tell who has
committed the offence.
6. Incase of external interference.
7. Technical problems e.g. ball bursting
Conditions to be observed
1. Two opposing players stand at a distance of 1m
facing each other and their own goal line.
2. Their hands should be straight and alongside
their body.
3. The ball should be tossed at a height not more
than two feet.
4. The shoulder of the shorter player should be
considered when tossing the ball.
5. The players can bat or catch the ball only when
it is coming down.
3. FREE PASS
Awarded incase of infringement occurring within
the court – except with simultaneous offside
Examples of infringement include:
Over third
Offside
Internationally kicking the ball
Repossessing the ball i.e. double catch
Faulty centre passes.
Scoring from outside goal area
Rolling the ball to a team mate.
Conditions to observe
i. The umpire blows the whistle and indicates kind
of infringement.
ii. Opponent should be 0.9m away from
iii. Play the ball after the umpire’s signal within
three seconds.
iv. Obey the footwork rule
v. Any other player allowed playing in that area
can take a free pass.
11
4. PENALTY PASS/PENALTY SHOT
This is awarded incase of:
1. Obstruction – A player defending the ball at a
distance of less that 0.9m.
2. Contacts – Body contacts: charging, stripping,
pushing, holding and blocking e.t.c
– Ball contacts – a player contacting the opponent
with the ball
3. Intimidation – This is when the player uses
threatening gestures against the opponent.
4. Interfering with the goal post – G.K shaking the
goal post when G.S is set to shoot.
SKILLS
A. THROWING
1. Chest Pass
Teaching points
 Both hand at a chest height level
supporting the ball. Thumbs pointing each
other and the rest of the fingers spread
behind the ball, elbows points outwards.
 Pass the ball as you push by the use of both
hands.
 Follow though by a step forward and by
lifting the body weight in the direction of
the throw.
2. Overhead pass
Teaching points
Ball is held in two hands either
i. Directly above the head
ii. Slightly forward of the head
iii. At rear of the head
Ball propelled with a forceful flexing and weight
placed over the front foot.
Teaching points
Used in a congested space to at full defence.
May be passed with one or two hands, grip same
as chest pass.
Ball directed towards the floor either:
i. Just behind the feet of the tight defence
ii. Approximately two thirds of the way between
the sender and receiver.
TYPES OF PASSES
1. One handed straight shoulder pass
Teaching points
 Hands spread evenly behind the ball
 Body turned sideways
 Weigh the body on the back foot.
 Palm cupped and the thumb spread to
support the ball.
 Throwing arm is thrust from the shoulder
with follow through of body weight.
 Both hip and shoulder should rotate to the
side and forward during the throwing.
 A flick of the wrist will give speed to flight
of the ball.
2. One handed high shoulder pass
Teaching points
 Same as straight shoulder pass but:
 Weight should be behind, fingers spread
out behind the ball.
 Throwing arm thrust forward from the
elbow and shoulder.
 Direct the ball in upward direction over the
head of an opponent
 Follow through.
3. Chest pass
Teaching points
 Ball held in hands closer to chest
 Weight behind the foot. (See chest and
bounce pass)
4. Overhead bounce pass
 Same as overhead and bounce pass except
the bounce come from a different angle.
5. Underarm (sling) pass
 Like shovelling
 Flight the ball in wrist height high or lower
and direct.
 Used for short passes
 Ball travels fast
 Follow through.
12
B. CATCHING
1. Two handed catch
Teaching points
Hands firm and stretched towards the ball.
Fingers opened and relaxed
Arms recoiled to pull the hands
The whole arm and body side give the direction of
the flight of the ball so that catch is ‘soft’ and
almost noiseless. If hands and arms are rigid,
fingers can be damaged.
GYMNASTICS
This is a systematized forms of exercise designed
to produce particular effect to the body.
Skilful performance of the basic human movement
e.g walking, rolling, vaulting, springing e.t.c
Qualities of a good gymnast
Should be physically fit
Disciplined
Committed/dedicated
Interested
Knowledgeable/conversant
Willing to learn
Sympathetic
Possessing sportsmanship attributes
Aims of gymnastics
 To exploit human potential talents
 To develop physical fitness for individual
 To make proper use of leisure time
 To make proper use of locally available
materials
 Help to correct body defects e.g. lard Isis,
scoliosis e.t.c.
 To promote emotional development
 To promote sportsmanship spirits e.g.
co-operation, discipline, sharing.
 Improves body system e.g. circulatory,
respiratory, digestive e.t.c
 Helps form career opportunity
 It lays foundation for other sporting
activities.
Problems encountered while teaching gymnastics
Lack of equipment/facilities
Negative attitudes by pupils, parents, fellow
teachers, society e.t.c
 Lack of sufficient time for practice
 Lack of role models in the society.
BRANCHES OF GYMNASTICS
There are three branches of gymnastics. These
include:
1. Traditional/informal
2. Modern/formal
3. Olympic/Acrobatic
1. TRADITIONAL / INFORMAL
This branch deals with the skills as performed by
the gymnast. It is categorized into two:
a) Balance
b) Agilities
a) Balance
This is the ability to hold the body still or
stationery without any movement. It is the state of
body equilibrium.
i) Static/non – locomotor
No movement once the body is balanced
Examples include:
 Head stand
 Hand stand
 Crouch balance
 V balance
 Crab stand
 Elbow plant
 Swan/plane balance
ii) Dynamic/locomotor
In this case once you the balance you can make
some movement.
Examples include:
Crab walk
Tiger/fore arm balance
Hand walking
Counter balance
This is a kind of a balance where an individual
require a partner or group of partners to support.
Examples include:
 Should balance
 Knee balance
 Pyramid
13
Pyramid
This is a grouped balance having a triangular or
colonial shape.
Conditions for a good pyramid
 Should have a strong, broad base and a
sharp apex.
 Should be composed of 16 participants
with varied body sizes, heaviest at the
bottom and lightest at the apex.
 The service of the spotter is highly
required when building and breaking the
pyramid
 Hips and shoulders give the strongest
support when building the pyramid.
 The taller the pyramid the higher the marks
scored.
Pyramids form the climax of the gymnastic
competition.
Gymnastic movements that can be used to
disembark the pyramid are:
 Backward or forward roll
 Headspring or neck spring
 Cat wheel
 Summersaults
b) Agilities
These are fast moving gymnastic activities or
skills that are done with a lot of ease.
Categories of agilities
1. Rolls
 Forward roll
 Dive forward roll
 Tank roll
 Backward roll
 Judo roll
 Side roll
2. Vaults
 This is a movement of going over or
jumping over an obstacle or an object.
 Through vault
 Fence vault
 Astride vault/leap frog
 Side vault
 Overswing vault
 Gate vault
 Thief vault/ window
Progressive stages of performing vaults
 Approach ——- short run
 Take off —– breaking contact with the
ground
 Flight —– being in air
 Landing —- making contact with the
ground
3. Springs
These are movements of turning the body part
from one point to another either in the air or over
an obstacle.
 Headspring
 Neck spring
 Cat spring
 Hand spring
 Arab spring
4. Tumblings
 Cartwheel
 Forward somersault/ flick flack
 Backward somersault/ flack flick
 Arab spring
 Round off
 Up start
2. MODERN / FORMAL GYMNASTICS
This branch deals with the themes of educational
gymnastics and factors of movements
A. Themes of educational gymnastics
i) Weight transfer
This is shifting or transferring of the body weight
from one body part to another.
Examples
Walking – from one leg to the other
Cat wheels – Leg to hand and to other leg
Hoping – from leg to the same.
ii) Resilience
This is the amount of spring, bounce or elasticity
of the body when landing or taking off.
Importance
To avoid body shock thus preventing body
injuries.
To create beauty in the movements
Good landing
Landing with balls of the foot
Land with feet apart
Land on a stable and even ground
Hands stretched out for balance
Knees slightly bend
14
iii) Space awareness
Personal space – space occupied by the body
cylinder.
General space – Unoccupied space where the body
can move.
iv) Balance and counter balance. (Refer to types
of balance – page 13)
v) Twisting and turning:
Turning
This is when the whole body including the feet
moves round as one.
Twisting
This is when at least one part of the body is fixed
on the ground while the remaining parts rotate/
move around.
B. FACTORS OF MOVEMENTS
1. Weight
The body weight determines the quality of the
movement. Can be described as heavy, medium
and light. The heavier the body the clumsy the
movement.
2. Space
(Ref. to themes of education – page 13)
3. Time/flow
Time is used to measure the speed of movement.
Movement can be described as either very fast,
moderate and very slow. Flow of movement can
be described as:
Free flow: Movements that cannot be stopped or
held at one point once they start.
Bound flow: Movements that can be held at one
point once they are start.
Other terms of movements
1) Level:
Can be described as high, medium or low
2) Direction
Can be described as forward, upward, sideways,
Backwards and downwards.
3) Progression
This is how work is build up
4) Movement sequence
This is comparatively complete movement
Made up by combining small short movements
In a sequence manner, e.g.
 Head springs
 Through vaults
 Astride vaults
5) Curling
Body parts being taken or brought to the centre of
the body.
6) Stretching
When the body parts are taken away from the
body centre i.e. legs and hands
7) Symmetrical movement
This is when the corresponding parts of the body
i.e. hand and legs are used to do the same thing at
the same time.
8) Asymmetrical movement
Corresponding parts of the body are not used to do
the same thing at the same time.
SAFETY PRECAUTION WHEN TEACHING
GYMNASTICS
 Ensure adequate and appropriate warm up
before starting the activity.
 Demonstration should be very clear.
 Instructions/explanations should be very
clear.
 Maintain discipline of the highest order.
 Provide adequate space.
 Ensure pupils have appropriate uniform
 Avoid using faulty apparatus
 Proper timing of the activities i.e. avoid
activities when it is extremely too hot or
slippery
 Avoid using faulty facilities e.g. grounds
with stones
 Avoid involving sing pupils
 Activities should be related to pupils’ age
APPARATUS USED IN GYMNASTICS
 The horse
 Bars
 Ropes
 Tables
 Vaulting boxes
 Spring board/take off board
 Chairs and stools
 Old tyres
 The hoops
Adjusting gymnastics competitions
Points to look at:
Entry in the arena. The entry should be in
gymnastic movement or skills.
Teacher and the leaders’ appearance. They should
have uniforms, which looks a bit confident,
knowledgeable e.t.c
Table interpretation.
Continuity and progression i.e. does one part
follow another (sequence) in mount
15
Teacher’s creativity
Improvisation and use of apparatus.
Skill mastery
Timing – for the timing you are given 10 min to
complete.
Exit from arena.
ATHLETICS
16
STRUCTURE OF ATHLETICS

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

TRACK EVENTS FIELF EVENTS ROAD RACES COMBINE EVENTS OFFICIALS
SPRINTS
MIDDLE
DISTANCE
LONG
DISTANCE
Walk
races
JUMPS
High
Jump
Pole
vault
Throws
Discuss
Shot put
Tripple
jump
Javelin
Harmmer
Marathaon
Cross
Country
Pentathlon
Heptathlon
Decathlon
Marksman
Announcers
Lap scorers
Walk judges
Chairman
Org. Secretary
Referee
Guest steward
Technical manager
Chief timekeeper
Chief track judge
Chief field judge
Chief recorder
Umpires
Marshals
Statler
Blackboard officials
ATHLETICS TRACK
Home straight Lane 1.22m( width)
Common finishing line
HISTORY OF ATHLETICS
Started in Greece as a funeral site or religious
ceremony and later became part of life the Greeks.
During these festivals the sacrifices to heroes and
lesser gods were followed by feasting, dancing
songs and exhibitions of agilities of strength and
skills in the form of competition.
The important festival was held in Olympia in 776
B.C. which was known as Olympic games.
ATHELETICS TRACK
The length of the track is 84.39m and the width is
73m. Have two parallel lines and two curved
bends. The shape of the track is elliptical.
PARTS OF THE TRACK
1. Kerb line
The innermost line if the athletics track.
2. Kerb distance
This is the distance measured following the Kerb
line.
3. Track distance
This is the distance across the lane. The first lane
is measured 30cm from the kerb line and the rest
are measured 20cm from every line.
4. Home straight
This is the final stretch towards the finishing line.
5. Lane
This space in between consecutive lines and the
distance is 1.22m.
6. Change over box
This is a 20m zone along the lane with which the
batons should be changed.
7. Acceleration zone
A 10m zone just before the nearer boundary of the
change over box where the competitor receiving
the baton can move to gather momentum before
receiving the baton.
Formula for kerb distance
Kerb distance = 2L + ПD
17
Kerbline
84.39 m
73m

Factors to consider when selecting site for
athletics track.
Level/flatness of the ground
Adequate space where the track can fit all the
lanes.
Free from obstacles e.g. stumps
Avoid waterlogged areas (swampy areas)
Direction of both sun and wind.
The area should be accessible.
Standard track has 8 lanes measured from inside.
TRACK EVENTS
These are running events done on the athletic
track. They include:
1. Sprints races
2. Middle distance races
3. Long distance races
4. Walk races.
SPRINTS
These are short races normally referred to as
explosive events. They take short time to
complete. Also referred to as anaerobic in nature
because they require little oxygen for producing
energy.
The events include:
100m
 110m hurdles
 200m
 400m
 4 x 100m
 4 x 400m
Characteristics of sprint events
 They take very short time to perform.
 They involve strength, power and speed.
 They are anaerobic in nature. Less
oxygen and energy
 They result to oxygen debt. Twice as more
oxygen than supply.
TYPES OF STRAT IN TRACK EVENTS
1. Crouch start
The body assumes crouch position or shape. Used
in starting all the sprint events.
There are three types of crouch start.
(a) Elongated
The knee of the rear foot is opposite the ankle of
the leading foot.
(b) Medium/bullet start
The knee of the rear foot is opposite the toe of the
leading foot.
(c) Bunch start
The toe of the leading foot and the toe of the rear
are 12 inches apart. The competitor looks as if he
is seated down.
2) Straight start
This is whereby the competitors are on a straight
line e.g. 100m, 110m hurdles, for men and
women.
3) Curve start
This is whereby the competitor assumes a curve
formation when starting the competition e.g. all
long distance races.
4) Staggered start
This is where each competitor starts from a stagger
on his/her lane. It is used in all events where the
competitor is required to keep his/her lane
throughout the race. Also where the competitors
are going round the curve.
5) Standing start
Competitors start the race on standing position.
This is used in long distance events and road races.
PROCEDURE FOR THE CROUCH START
1) The starters command
The starter gives the command “on your marks”.
The competitors take their positions on their lanes.
The rear foot kneels down depending on the
crouch start. The hands are stretched alongside
the body. Eyes focused forward so that they are
not caught unaware.
2) Second command “set”
The rear foot is straightened and the weight is
transferred to the leading foot. Eyes focused
forward.
3) Third command “go”
The starter starts the race when the competitors are
motionless.
Rules governing the start of the track events
Assuming full or final set position on the
command “on your marks/set.”
Not disturbing a fellow competitor by sound or
any other means after the command “on your
marks”
A competitor should not leave his mark with hands
or foot after the command “on your marks”.
For all short races up to and including 400m,
starting blocks should be used.
NB/ If a competitor commits two consecutive
faults, he is warned for the first one and
disqualified for the second one.
18
RELAY RACES
1) Shuttle relay
This is where a competitor runs from one straight
to another and back before he passes the baton to
another.
A
2) Medley relay
This involves different competitors in a team
covering different distances. It’s mainly for
enjoyment and for both genders e.g. 100m >>>>
200m>>>>400m e.t.c
3) Circuit relay
This is where the competitors run round track and
each member of the team covers the same
distance. We have two types of circuit relay:
(1) 4 x 100m
(2) 4 x 400m
Rules governing relay races
1. The baton shall be carried by the hand
throughout the race.
2. The baton shall be passed literally to next.
Should not be hurled or thrown.
3. The passing of the baton shall take place
within the change over box.
4. A competitor after passing the baton shall
not escort the fellow competitor but waits
for the area to clear and then leave the
track.
5. In 4 x 100m and 4 x 400m, first round the
competitor shall maintain his/her lane
throughout.
6. Each team shall have 4 competitors and
shall wear identical uniforms.
7. For a team to win, the last competitor must
have a baton with him/her.
8. The competitor receiving the baton is
allowed to move within the change over
box but beyond the acceleration zone. i.e
10m.
Anchor leg
This is the member in the relay team who covers
the last stretch or the final round in the relay.
 Characteristics of anchor leg
 Must be very fast runner
 Good at receiving the baton.
 Good at finishing.
MIDDLE AND LONG DISTANCE EVENTS
They include:
 800m
 1500m
 3000m steeple chase
 5000m
 10000m
 Walk races
Characteristics of middle and long distance
events.
They take longer time to perform.
They involve both cardio-vascular and muscular
endurance.
They are aerobic in nature.
Sometimes may result to fatigue ( accumulation of
lactic acid along the muscles).
General rules governing the track events
A competitor shall maintain his/her lane when the
track evens demands so e.g. 200m, 400m e.t.c
A competitor shall not obstruct his or her opponent
e.g. pushing, blocking the way e.t.c.
A competitor shall not run inside the track or
move out of the track and come back again to
resume the race.
A competitor shall overtake to the right of the
opponent unless there is enough space to the left.
Each competitor shall wear a number and color
allocated to his/her team. At the end, points shall
be awarded as follows:
Position Points
1 7
2 5
3 4
4 3
5 2
6 1
7 0
All competitors shall be registered by the recorder.
Running shall be done anticlockwise. This is
because it is easier to negotiate curves on the left
as opposed to right.
Timing of the events.
This is taken from the smoke on the flash of the
pistol or any approved starting apparatus to the
moment any point of the torso comes over the
flashing line.
19
Every competitor shall be timed by three time
takers and in the event of the times disagreeing the
middle time taken.
HURDLING EVENTS
These are events where the competitor runs over
an obstacle placed along the course e.g.
100m/110m hurdles.
Rules governing hurdling events
A competitor shall only clear those hurdles that are
on his lane.
A competitor shall not trail his leg around the
hurdles.
A competitor shall not deliberately knock down
the hurdles.
When sub standard hurdles are being used, a
competitor shall only be allowed to knock down a
maximum of three hurdles. When standard
hurdles are being used then there is no limit to be
knocked down.
Do not avoid any hurdle.
Specification for a hurdle
Overall width 120 cm
Length of the base 70 cm
Depth of the top bar 70 mm
Thickness of the top bar 10-25mm
Minimum total weight 10 kg
Distance specifications SEX
RACE Height
Of
Hurdles
From
Start
to
1
st
hurdle
Distance
Between
Hurdles
From
Last
hurdle
To
finish
MEN
110m 1.67m 13.72 9.14 14.02m
400m 0.914m 45m 35m 40m
WOMEN
100m 0.84m 13m 8.5m 10.5m
400m 0.762m 45m 35m 40m
Steeplechase
Ways of clearing steeplechase hurdles include:
Step over – Jump over
Vault over – Climb over
Run over
Types of hurdles to be cleared are:
i. Dry hurdle
ii. Wet hurdle
Getting number of hurdles cleared
Dry hurdles = No. of lapse x 4
Wet hurdles = No. of lapse
FIELD EVENTS
JUMPS
1. Horizontal jumps
In a situation where there are more than 8
competitors, each competitor shall be given three
chances after which the best 8 shall proceed to the
next round. This first round is call preliminaries.
The competitor with the best jump shall be
declared the winner. In championship meetings a
qualifying competition of three trials is held
preceding competition.
Rules governing horizontal jumps
A competitor shall take off from a single foot.
A competitor shall not apply any form of
summersault.
After landing a competitor shall not leave the
landing pit from the runaway.
The jump shall not count if the competitor takes
from beyond the take off point.
After commencing the jump, a competitor shall
have no contact between his body and the ground
outside the runway.
A competitor shall not place any checkmarks on
the runway.
Do not touch the ground outside the area nearest
the take off.
A competitor shall not use hand weights or grips
of any sort.
How to take measurement
The tape measure shall be perpendicular to the
take off point.
The zero (0) mark of the tape measure shall be at
the nearest point of contact with the landing area.
The reading shall be taken from the inner edge of
the take off board.
20
Breaking a tie
Incase of two competitors tying, the competitor
with the second best jump shall be declared the
winner. If the tie remains then the competitor with
the third best jump shall be declared the winner. If
the tie remains then each of them is given three
more chances.
5.5m
40.45M
13m RUNWAY
1.22m
Take off board
(1.22m x 20cm)
Specification for triple jump
5.5m
40.45M
1m RUNWAY
1.22m
10m
Take off board
(1.22m x 20cm)
Specifications for long jump
Progressive stages
i. Approach
This is a short run before take off to gain
momentum
Errors during approach
Contact with the ground outside the runway
Taking off before gathering full momentum
Inconsistent pace of strides.
Take off
This should be single foot take off.
Errors during take off
Stepping beyond the take off board
Taking off far much behind the take board.
Stepping on the take off board using the wrong
foot
Not balancing the vertical or horizontal motion
during take off.
Take off foot is the foot that remains longer in
contact with the ground. The other foot is known
as the power foot.
ii. Flight
This is when the body is in air.
Errors during flight
Somersaulting
Assuming an upright shape while in air
iii. Landing
This is making contact with the ground from air.
Errors during landing
Contact with the ground outside the pit.
Touching behind the area of contact during
landing.
Styles of jumping
1. Hitch kick
During the flight he makes a scissor like
movement.
2. Float/sail
During the jump the legs and the hands are
stretched a head of the body.
3. Hung
The legs are folded backwards as arms cycle in air.
The triple jump has three distinct phases i.e. the
hop, step and jump.
A competitor is allowed to land between the take
off board and the landing area without penalty
provided that he:
i. Lands first on his take off foot.
ii. Lands secondly on the opposite foot.
iii. Does not permit the sleeping leg to touch the
ground during any phase the jump before the final
landing.
All other aspects same as long jump.
Equipment
1. Tape measure
2. Pegs
3. Scorecards
4. Flags – Red for no jump
– White for jump accepted
5. Rake/Jembe
2. VERTICAL JUMPS
Rules governing vertical jumps
1) Failure is recorded if the athlete
Dislodges the bar, directly or indirectly
Touches the ground including the landing area
Beyond the plane of the uprights without first
Clearing the bar.
21

Landing
Pit
2) A competitor shall not be permitted to use the
runway or take off area for practice purposes once
competition begins.
3) The bar shall never be raised by less than 2cm
unless there is a tie or one competitor only
remaining.
4) A competitor may commence jumping at any
given height above the minimum height.
5) 3 consecutive failures disqualify a competitor
regardless of the height at which they occur.
6) A competitor is permitted to place checkmarks
on the runway, takeoff and use handkerchief at the
poles for sighting.
7) A competitor shall take off from both of his foot
and shall not apply any form of somersaulting.
8) The competitor shall complete the event in one
and half minutes.
Breaking a tie in vertical jumps
Consider the competitor with the least jump at the
height where they tie.
Consider the competitor with the least total
failures.
If the tie remains consider the competitor with the
least total jumps.
If the tie still remains then a jump off is awarded
i.e. the bar is lowered or raised by less than 2cm
and the tying competitors given chance to jump.
Taking measurement
The distance between the ground and the upper
most part of the cross bar at its lowest point is
measured with a steel tape.
a) High Jump
The competitor lower there centre of gravity their
bodies over the cross bar in order to reach
optimum height.
Styles of high jump
i) Orthodox/scissors
Weight above the bar
ii) Western roll
Take off foot is the landing foot
iii) Straddle
Landing is on the back or the shoulder and
upper back.
iv) Fosbury/flop
Landing is on the back or the shoulder and
upper back.
v) Eastern cut off
vi) Straight jump/direct jump
Equipment
Tow upright post
Crossbar
Pegs
Steel tape measure
Progressive stages/techniques
Approach from 350
– 400
or from a curve.
Take off – trunk upright at the bar level
Good flight
Proper landing.
Physical components of a good high jumper.
 Good height
 Good speed
 Strength
 Flexibility/agility
Specifications for high jump
i. Landing area
 Measure 5m x 4m
 Filled with sand.
ii. Take off area
 Should be levelled, well watered and
free from Pitting.
iii. Runway
 Should permit an approach run of 18m
at any angle on the take off side of
the pit.
iv. Uprights
 Must be rigid and placed at least 4m
apart.
 Supporting pegs 4cm wide and 6cm
extension in the direction of the
opposite upright.
v. Crossbar
May be triangular or circular in section.
Diameter 30mm and should be slightly longer
than 4m.
b) Pole vault
The competitor can forego a trial at certain
Right.
They are allowed to move uprights, forward
Or backward in preparation for the jump.
The competitor is not allowed to place the
Lower hand above the upper hand after the
Take off.
A pole may be touched by someone else other
Than the competitor when:
i) It is released and happens to fall away
from the bar.
ii) It lands outside the landing zone.
It is not a failure for a pole to fall underneath.
22
Why aluminium poles are preferred to fibreglass
poles.
 Aluminium poles do not bend
 Aluminium poles are made of metals
 Aluminium poles are safer in terms of
accidents
Physical components of a good pole-vaulter.
 Co-ordination
 Courage
 Speed
 Flexibility
Specification for pole vault
i. Landing area
Should be 5m2
filled with sand
ii. Take off
This is from specially constructed box
measuring 100cm x 60 cm (take of box). It is
sunken in the runway so that the upper edge is in
level with the surface of the runway.
iii. Runway
Should be between 40m and 45m long.
iv. Uprights
Be placed at least 4m apart.
v. Cross bar
Should be between 4.5m and 5.0m.
Differences between vertical and horizontal
jump.
Horizontal jumps Vertical jumps
Athletes compete for
distance
Athletes compete for
height
No obstacle to be
jumped over
There is an obstacle to
be jumped over
Preliminaries are held
then the best 8 proceed
to the next round
Once a competitor
commences the jump he
will continue up to the
point where he fails
THROWS
1. DISCUSS (Refer to figure 1 page 23)
Weight
For men —— 2kg
For women —– 1kg
Throwing styles
i. Standing style
ii. 1 ½ turns
Teaching points
Place discuss on the palm with the finger well
spread.
Grip the rim of the discuss with the fingertips
Support the discuss with the thumb.
Do the preliminary swings.
Release.
Rules for discuss
A competitor must complete the throw in 1 ½
minutes time.
The competitor should not leave the circle before
the implement lands.
Exit should be from the rear part of the circle
The discuss must land within the sector
The discuss must be thrown while within the
circle.
Competitor should not touch or step to the ground
outside the circle (should not step on the arc).
Materials for discuss
Tape measure – Pegs
Discuss – Stop watch
Score sheet – Flags (red and white)
Measurement:
The zero (0) mark is placed on the point of landing
then stretched up to the center of the circle. The
reading is taken at the outer edge of the scratch
line.
Breaking a tie.
Consider the second best throw.
If still remains consider the third best throw.
If the tie remains, competitors are given another
trial.
Factors contributing to good throw.
 The speed of the release
 The angle of the release
 The strength of the release
 Method of grip. Poor grip results into
wobbling.
2. SHOT PUT(Figure 2 page 23)
Weight
Men ———–4 kg
Women——– 2kg
Throwing styles
i. Standing styles
ii. Obrien style (gliding/sliding).
23
Rules
Same as discuss
Similarities between shot put and discuss
Both have sector of 400
In both exists is from the rear circle
Measurement taken the same way.
Breaking the tie same procedure
Duration for performance is the same i.e. 1 ½ mins
Differences
Shot heavier than discuss
Diameter longer than in shot put
In discuss we have 1 ½ turn method of throwing
while in shot put we have obrien method of
throwing.
In short put we have stop board while in discuss
we have metal rim.
In discuss we throw the discuss while in shot put
we put the shot.
3. JAVELIN (Figure 3 page 24)
Weight
Men —————- 800 gms
Women ————- 600gms
Rules for javelin
A competitor is not permitted to step on the curved
scratch line during, or after the throw.
A competitor must approach within the runway.
He must remain within the confines of the run way
and behind the scratch line until the implement has
landed.
Javelin should not land on the tail first.
Javelin must land within the sector (landing
sector)
The competitor must complete the throwing within
1 ½ minutes.
The competitor must retire from behind the scratch
line. Front Circle
Scratch arc
Metal rim
Rear
Circle Landing
sector
Extension
0.75m
Figure 1: Specification for discuss

Javelin must not be hurled or slung
Javelin must be held at the grip with one hand
Progressive stages
1. Grip
Cord of the javelin is placed on the open palm
Fingers wrapped around the cord.
Thumb parallel to the javelin shaft.
2. Carriage
Javelin placed parallel to the ear and above the
shoulder with the head slightly higher than the tail.
Hand and arm should be relaxed
3. Approach
Approach at a run to gain momentum
4. Release/recovery
Safety precautions
Should be thrown in one direction
Throwing should be done in order
Javelin to be thrown towards the wind
Spectators away from the throwing area
Should be carried from the landing area to the
throwing circle i.e. should not be thrown.
Should be carried in upward direction with head
pointing upwards.
4. HAMMER (Figure 4 page 24)
Weight —————- 7.26 kg
Overall length ———- 116 – 117cm
In a competition of more than 8 competitors,
preliminaries are organized where they select the
best 8 to proceed to next final round.
Incase of a tie, both preliminaries and final rounds
are considered.
The throwing should be done in a cage for the
purpose of safe.
. Front Circle
Stop board
Rear
Circle Landing
sector
Extension
0.75m
Figure 2. Specification for shot put
24

2.5m
400
2.25m
400

8m
Landing area
4m Runway – 40m
Arc – 34.950

Extension 0.75m
Figure 3: Specifications for javelin
Handle
Chain
Head
Figure 4: Specifications for hammer
ROAD RACES
Cross country
This is a team event where the team runs on the
countryside on different land terrain.
Distance in cross-country is determined by age
and sex.
It is determined as follows:
Senior men———- 12km
Junior men———– 6km
Senior women——- 8 km
Junior women —— 4 km
 For women you register between 6 & 8 out
of which only 4 scores for the team.
 For men you register between 7&9 out of
which only 6 scores for the team.
 The team with the lowest or the lest points
emerges the winner.
 To break tie consider the position of the
last competitor of each team and one who
is placed in a better position helps to break
the tie.
 Trophies awarded are individual trophies
and team’s trophy.
 The cross-country event usually ends in a
funnel placed in the athletics track. At the
funnel we have funnel judge.
 We have points men at various points to
show direction flags. Red indicates right
direction while white indicates left
direction.
2. Marathon
 Individual events done on the city streets.
We have two types of marathon i.e.
i. Full marathon ——- 42 km
ii. Half marathon——- 21 km
 After 15km you get refreshment points.
Water points are also placed after every
5km.
 Sponging is allowed in marathon
 Sponging and water points helps in
preventing dehydration.
 Differences between cross country and
marathon
Cross country Marathon
A team event Individual event
Individual and teams
trophy awarded
Individual and trophy
awarded
Distance vary with sex
and age
Is either full half distance
Is done in country side Is done in city streets
Finishing is done in a
funnel
Finishing is done on open
Refreshment and water
points not allowed
Refreshments, sponging
and water points are
allowed
A bit shorter distance i.e.
12,8,6,4
A bit longer distance i.e.
42,21
COMBINED EVENTS
1) Pentathlon
These are 5 events done by junior men and women
in one day.
Order of events
i. Long jump
ii. Javelin
iii. 200m
iv. Discuss
v. 1500m
2. Heptathlon
These are 7 events done by women in two
consecutive days
25
Order of events
Day 1.
 100m hurdles
 High jump
 Shot put
 200m
Day 2
 Long jump
 Javelin
 800m
Decathlon
These are 10 events done by men in two
consecutive days
Day 1
 100m
 Long jump
 Shot put
 High jump
 400m
Day 2
 110m hurdles
 Discuss
 Pole vault
 Javelin
 1500m
ORGANIZING MEETINGS AND THE
OFFICIALS IN ATHLETICS
 How to organize a meeting
 Set the date considering the season, time of
the year.
 Consider and arrange the venue.
 Consider the participation level i.e. junior
or senior.
 Types of events to be considered according
to the participants.
 Draw a list of officials needed during the
meeting.
Programme
 A programme must be drafted including
the number of events, competitor’s names,
times e.t.c
 Heats, quarters, semis and finals are to be
included in the programme.
 Indicate times when the events shall take
place.
Day of meeting.
 Officials should be there before the start of
the events.
 It should be known the times the events are
to take place.
 The clerk of the course to address the
officials before the start of the meeting.
 Evaluation of the meeting is done at the
end of the meeting.
 Send letters of acknowledgement to
officials and other helpers.
 Ensure safety of the apparatus and the
score sheet.
 Close and balance the accounts of the
meeting.
DUTIES OF THE OFFICIALS
1. Chairman (normally head of the institution)
 In charge of the meeting
 Sees the smooth running of the programme
 Checks on the officials and substitution
 Settles disputes.
2. Guest steward (normally deputy principal)
 Welcoming guests of honor and other
guest.
 Minds about there sitting and feeding
arrangements.
3. Organizing secretary
 Correspondence to other team officials
 Responsible for programmes
 Certification
 Invitation cards.
4. Technical manager
 Clerk of the course
 Ensure that lines, landing areas, runways
etc are marked.
 Ensure that stationery and equipment are
available.
 Check if the weights of the implements are
appropriate.
5. Referee
 Settle any dispute
 Decides when judges fail to agree
 Makes final decision
 Ensures that rules are followed
 Can disqualify competitors.
6. Chief timekeeper
 Assigns duties to other timekeepers
 Give signal to the starter when other
timekeepers are ready.
 Control other timekeepers and checks final
time.
26
Instruct other timekeepers to clear the watches
Fills in the scores card.
Checks the scores card before it goes to the
records.
Chief track judge
Assigns other track judges into different duties.
Control his officials
Signals the starter when judges are ready.
Check scores card before it goes to the records.
Makes final decisions on placing particular
competitors when watches have same reading or
disagree.
Helps to run the programme. He can change the
position of the event/track programme.
Consults the clerk of the course.
Ensure that the track is properly marked.
Ensure that there are record papers and other
stationery.
Ensure that all the equipment are available and are
in good order.
Chief field judge
Controls other field officials
Checks final judgement
Checks score card before it goes to the records
Ensures that all field areas are properly marked.
Ensure that all equipment are ready in good
condition.
Issues all forms for events.
He counter sign the forms and send them to the
chief recorder.
Overall authority in all field events.
Chief recorder
Record the results
Awards points
Position finalist.
Guides his assistants
Sports the broken records
Consults with the black board officials.
Umpires
Stay at all 4 truck corners
Check on the change over boxes of the baton
exchange in relay races.
Ensure athletes follow their lanes.
Check on the hurdles according to the rules
Communicate by use of flags once they notice any
infringements.
11. Starter
Start the track events
Signals to the chief track judge
Completely controls the track
Keeps programme running to the schedule
Records false by call alone but not by name.
Give the starting command.
12. Marksman/starter assistant
Assembles the athlete in their correct lanes
Assist the starter
Signal the starter when all are “on your marks”
Indicate false start and who is offender.
13. Marshals
Assembling the athletes to the starting point
Assist lane manager
Give competitors notice to prepare
14. Announcers
Calls athletes to start the events
Announce results
Announce new records set
Helps keep programme running
Silence spectators at the start of the race
Keep public informed of what is going on in the
field.
15. Lap Scorer
Minimum of two in the race
One shows the competitors how many laps to go.
The other shows the competitors laps gone.
16. Walk judges
Ensures that the athletes follow the walk rules
Chief walk judge disqualify the participants.
17. Prize and certificate steward
Ensure that certificates are awarded to the winners
after each event.
Makes proper arrangements for the trophies to be
awarded at the end of the day by the guest of
honor.
27
Refreshment steward assistant.
Provides drink during the meeting
Feed guests and officials after the meeting
First aider
Gives the competitors the necessary first aid.
Blackboard official
Continuous record of results on the blackboard for
guests and competitors to be kept informed.
Typist
Types the certificates as events are done.
JURY OF APPEAL COMPOSITION
Referee or chairman of the meeting
Chief track judge
Chief field judge
Clerk of the course or secretary
Overall man e.g. churchman.
The above group is formed when disputes that are
beyond the referee arises.
How a protest is lodged
It has to be in writing to the secretary or
organizing committee.
Should be made not more than 30 minutes after
the official announcing of the result.

THE COURT

Sideline (18m)

3m
There is non-refundable fee paid to the organizer.
The chairman calls the members of the jury for
final decision.
VOLLEYBALL
Historical background
The game was started by William Morgan, a
physical education specialist and director at Young
Men Christian Association (YMCA) in 1895 in
U.S.A. He first called this game Mintonette.
Latter the Y.M.C.A directors suggested that the
game should be called “Volley ball” because the
ball was volleyed back and forth across the net.
In the early stages of development 9 players on
each side were playing volley ball. The YMCA
drew the first formal rules in 1897.
During the First World War the American troops
introduced the game in Europe. U.S.A formed
amateur volleyball association in 1928 while the
Great Britain did the same in 1955. In 1946
volleyball was introduced in Olympic games both
for men and women.
In 1947 the international volleyball federation was
formed with its headquarters in Paris. In Kenya
we have Kenya Volleyball Association (K.V.A)

End line
28
5 4 2 1
6 Attack line 3 Centerline 3 Attack line 6
1 2 4 5
Sideline
Length of the court (18m)
Substitution takes place along this line
Team bench is located along this line.
End line
Width of the court (9m)
Service takes place along this line.
Center line
Subdivide the court into two equal parts
Net is fixed along this line
The two referees stand along and opposite this
line.
Prevents the player from entering the opponents
half.
Attack line
Subdivide one of the half of the court into two
parts i.e. front and back row. Front is marked 3m
from the centreline.
Playing positions
1. Right back player
2. Right front player
3. Center front player
4. Left front player
5. Left back player
6. Centre back player
Rules governing back players
They cannot participate in the block
They can spike provided they take off from the
back row plane.
Principle of rotation
Once the team gains the service the players move
one position in clockwise direction.
TEAM SIZE
A team is made up of 12 –layers, 6 main players
and 6 substitutes.
A team may register among the top players a
specialized defensive player known as libero
A team must have a captain.
The maximum number a team can substitute is 6.
Rules governing libero player.
(i) He shall wear a different color from the rest.
(ii) Shall be registered with the scorer.
(iii) Shall only replace the back court player.
(iv) Shall enter the court on the area between the
attack line and the base line.
(v) Shall not serve the ball at any given time
(vi) Shall not block the ball or play any ball above
the net
(vii) Can substitute the back court player as many
times as possible.
(viii) Shall only be substituted by a player who he
substituted.
(ix) Can not complete rotation
Qualities of a good libero player
(i) Very good in receiving the ball
especially the spiked balls.
(ii) Enduring/withstanding for long
(iii) Very fast in reaction.
BASIC EQUIPMENT
The ball
Spherical in shape
Circumference 65-67cm
Weather/synthetic casing with bladder inside
Weight 260-280 grams
The Net
Length 9.5m
Depth 1m
Should have a band with a cable inside to help in
tightening the net.
Heights – Men – 2.43m
Women – 2.24m
The Antennae
Measure 1.8m
Used to show aerial dimension of the volleyball
court.
The Post
Measure 2.55m
Fixed at 0.5m from the sideline.
When the ball is considered dead
(a) After the referees whistle
(b) Faulty service
(c) Ball lands out of the court
(d) Ball touching an object outside the court
(e) If a team makes more than three contacts
with ball before it crosses the net except
the block.
(f) When the ball is hand faulty
(g) If the ball touches the ground inside the
court during the play.
29
START OF THE GAME
The first time referee tosses a coin between two
captains and the winning captain has two options
to choose:
I. Choice of side
II. The first service
The other captain takes the remaining option.
SERVICE
The act of putting the ball into play by the right back
player anywhere along and outside the sideline.
TYPES OF SERVICE
1. Underarm (sling) service
Teaching points
Stand facing the net
Legs a stride with leg opposite the serving arm in
front.
Trunk and the knees slightly bent with more weight
on the rear leg.
Ball held at about knees level and slightly above.
The opposite arm with closed fingers swing
backwards and forward to hit the ball as you toss.
The opposite arm should be straight and make
contact with the inner part of the wrist.
Follow through as you transfer the weight from the
rear foot to the front foot.
Maintain the eye level coordination and aim at the
large position or position you want to serve the ball
to.
Overhead/tennis service
Teaching points
Stand same as underarm service
Ball held with straight-arm just above the knee of
the front foot.
Bring the ball up above and in front of the head. At
the same time swing the opposite arm upwards and
backward with the elbow facing forward.
With the trunk arched and more weight on the rear
foot, release the ball at maximum height of your
arm.
The opposite arm with fixed wrist and fingers
spread; hit the ball with heel of the palm for the ball
to make topspin.
Contact should be made at the back of the ball with
the arm making a follow through.
The whole trunk makes a follow through.
Windmill/Hook/Round house service.
Teaching points
The same as over arm except that the body makes an
anti-clockwise rotation of 180 degrees and face
backward making the right foot in front instead of
the left foot.
More weight in the front foot(right) with knees
slightly bent, release the ball at arm height and hit it
from the back.
Good service
This is when the ball is within the court.
Faulty service.
When the service is not acceptable or when the
player has committed a service fault.
Examples of faulty services
 Ball hitting the post
 B passing under the net
 Ball failing to reach opponents court.
 Ball touching a teammate before crossing the
net
 Failure to toss the ball
 Ball hitting the antennae
 Serving the ball when standing on the end
line or inside the court.
 Ball landing outside the court
 Exceeding three seconds with the ball after
the referee’s whistle.
Ace service
This is a very hard or difficult service that the
opponents cannot receive easily.
How to make ace service
1. Spinning the ball
Hitting the ball by side so that it comes rotating
2. Spike service
Jumping up high and hitting the ball with a lot of
force.
SUBSTITUTION
This is replacement of players. It is requested when
the ball is dead either by coach or the captain.
Rules governing substitution
a) The player must have registered in the line up
b) Done when the bail is dead
c) Done on the line of the first referee
d) The player to be replaced gets out first before the
substitute goes
e) Requested for either by the coach or captain.
30
i) Maximum of 6 substitutes is allowed per set.
ii) Must be conducted within the substitution zone.
b) Should not exceed 30 sec.
TYPES OF SUBSTITUTION
1. Legal substitution
This is when the team is utilizing the 6 registered
substitutes.
2. Illegal substitution
When the team has exhausted the 6 substitutes but
continue substituting.
It is when the team utilizes the unregistered player.
3. Compulsory/exceptional substitution
This is when substitutes have been exhausted yet
another player gets injuries. The referee may
authorize the coach to substitute another player.
TIME OUT
This is a brief interruption of the game or pause
requested by coach or captain for a technical talk.
Duration for time out is 30sec. Each team is
entitled to 2 time outs per set. It is requested when
the ball is dead.
During time out the coach is not allowed to enter
the court neither the players allowed to leave the
court.
TYPES OF TIME OUT
a) Teams time out
Requested by the coach or the captain
b) Official time out
When referee stops the game incase of:
1. Technical problems e.g.
Ball bursting
Loosening of the net
Breaking of the post.
2. External interference e.g.
Spectator invading the court
Bad weather – heavy rainfall
When lowering national flag
Disagreement between officials
c) Technical time out
This is given when playing the deciding set and
the first team reaches 8 points. The duration of
this time out is 1 minute.
THE PLAYING FORMAT
To win a point
A team wins a point when the opponents make a
playing fault.
Examples of playing fault
Double hit by individual player unless there is a
block.
Four hit by a team unless there is a block.
Positional fault (When the players are not in their
playing position when the ball is being served)
Rotational fault.
A player touching the net with or without another
opponent player
Front court player crossing the centreline
Ball landing inside or outside the court
Faulty service
Wrong substitution
Breaking time out rules
Back court player participating in block or spiking
while in the frontcourt.
Ball passing under the net.
Consequences of playing fault.
The serving team looses the point and chance to
serve.
Receiving team gains a point and chance to serve.
The receiving team looses a point when they make
a play fault thereby serving team continues to
serve.
How to win a set.
In a volleyball 5 sets are played. To win a set the
1
st team to reach 25 points with a leading margin
of a minimum of two points takes the set. Eg 25-
23, 25-21.
At the end of every set, teams changes sides.
Incase of deciding (5th) set, the first team to reach
15 points with a leading margin of a minimum of
two points takes the set. Team changes sides
when the first team reaches 8 points.
How to win a march
The team which wins more sets emerges the
winner.
OFFICIALS OF THE GAME
1. First named referee
He has the absolute authority over the game and
other officials.
His decision is final
He uses whistle to signify the beginning and end
of the game, a point, change of service e.t.c.
Awarding points and services gained
In charge of disqualification.
31
2. 2
nd named referee
Supervises control of substitution on the side of
lines
He takes note of the following:
Net faults
Crossing the centreline
Illegally crossing the attack line by backcourt
players.
Reaching over the net (over reaching)
Draws the attention of the first named referee of any
unsporting behaviour.
Notes players position at the start if the game.
Keeps check on all time outs.
Authorizes all substitutions.
3. The scorer
Positions himself opposite the first named referee.
Take note of all scores.
He notes all time outs, substitutions and any other
interruptions.
Before the sets, he takes names of all the players,
substitutes, captain, coaches.
Take care of the positions of players in the court and
ensure that the rotation order of the court is kept.
He supplies the referee with relevant information at
all times.
Referee assistants
They are four and they sit at each corner of the
court.
They note the serving faults.
Note the ball, which passes outside the net vertical
markers during the service.
Note the ball falling out of the court.
BASIC SKILLS IN VOLLEYBALL
1. Volley
This is the act of setting or passing the ball over
the net using two – handed overhead pass.
Teaching points
Wide base with legs comfortably apart to maintain
the balance.
Knees slightly bent with the body position under the
and eyes on the ball.
Arms almost stretched, fingers spread, palm facing
upwards with thumbs and first fingers almost
meeting.
The elbow bends as you receive the ball.
Flex your wrist and bend your knees as you receive
the ball in order to be able to accommodate the ball
comfortably.
Use your fingers mainly those of the thumb and the
two fingers.
The body almost immediately straightens after
receiving the ball on legs, fingers, arms and toes
thus putting the ball into play.
The body makes a pumping action by moving down
and up with the wrist flicking to make the ball move
fast.
2. Serving
The act of putting the ball into play from the serving
area of the court.
Teaching points
(Refer to types of services)
3. Spiking/smashing
This is the act of jumping in the air besides the net
and forcibly hitting the ball down into the
opponents’ side. The hands must not touch or pass
over the net.
Teaching points
 Take two running steps
 Jump of from both feet
 Take ensuring both hands backwards and
upwards to propel your body off the ground.
Factors contributing to good spiking
The take off should be with knee bent and trunk bent
The contact with the ball should be made at the
highest point of the jump with the trunk arched
backwards.
With fingers spread, wrist flexed, contact the ball
with the heel of the palm first and close with fingers
as in the case of the tennis service.
The ball should be hit with a maximum force to
make it move to the opponent court at a sharp angle.
4. Block
This is the wall of hands put by the opponents’ side
during the smashing of the ball.
Styles of blocks
i) Umbrella block
ii) Pun block
Types of blocks
a) One man block
b) Two men block
c) Three men block
Teaching points
Double feet take off at about two feet from the net.
32
 Arms fully stretched upwards and toss with
fingers.
 Knees slightly bend with fingers spread at
ear level.
 As the ball hits your hands, flick the wrist
downwards.
HANDBALL
THE COURT

 

 

This is a game played by two teams where a team
consists of 12 players with 7 players in the court
any one time and 5 players remaining substitutes.
One of the 7 players in the court is designed to be
the goalkeeper.
For a player or team to be allowed to participate.
i. He must have his/her name entered in the score
sheet.
ii. Should be present at the start of the game incase
of lateness of a player or official, he should notify
the table officials and his name is entered into the
score sheet.
The minimum number of players to start the game
is 5 and it can go down as the game progress.
Substitution
A substitute becomes a court player when the
player he is substituting leaves and he in turn
enters the court. A substitute can enter the court
as many times as possible (revolving substitution)
Rules governing substitution.
5. Dig
The method of retaining the ball when it comes
below the level of the waist of the player.
6. Set-up
This is the situation where the ball is volleyed for
smashing or spiking.

1. Can be done without the notification of
the referee provided a player is
registered.
2. Substitute should enter the court when
the player he is substituting has left the
court.
3. A player entering/leaving the court
should do so from within his team
substitution area. But this does apply
incase of injury.
4. The game cannot be stopped for
substitution to be done.
Duration of the game
For players 16 years and above, the game consists
of 2 halves of 30 minutes each and break of 10
minutes in between.
30 30

10
Timing starts at the referee signal for the initial
throw off and ends when the timekeeper’s signal is
released.
33
Side line

 

Goal
Line
(20m)

Goal lin e
Goal Free throw

4m line
goal keepers 9m
line/free throw line
centre line
7 line/penalty
mark
6m line/goal arc line

 

I
I
I
If the referee is not satisfied he retains the players
in the court and if there was an error the game
continues.
Breaking a tie
Incase of a tie an extra time is added 2 halves of 5
minutes each with break of 1 minute in between.
If it still stands duration of the same is added. If it
continues the tie is broken in accordance to the
rules of that particular game.
Time out
This is a temporary stoppage of the game
requested either by the captain or the coach
Obligatories
i. When a player is injured
ii. When coach has requested teams time
out.
iii. A stoppage for penalty throws
iv. When player is given suspension
Rates governing time out
A team is entitled to one time out each half.
Shall be requested by either by coach or captain.
Shall be requested by placing a green card on the
official table.
Pieces of equipment used in the game of handball
 Ball
 Upright posts
 Cross bar
 Net
Score sheet
The following information are entered in the score
Sheet
a) Name of players and team officials
b) Chronological order of the scores made by
each team.
c) Punishment given to each player e.g.
suspension, disqualification or exclusion.
d) Time at the start of the game
e) Name of the teams
Uniforms
 A pair of sports shoes
 Socks
 Shorts
Tshirts
Goalkeeper always should wear uniforms different
from other playmates and opponents.
Tshirts shall have conspicuous numbers both back
and front ranging from 1-20.
Numbers 1,12,16 are reserved for the goalkeeper.
Captain ear an armlet on the arm.
1. Goal line
 Measures 20m
 Forms width of the court
 Where the goal posts are fixed
 Confirms the score
2. 4m line.
 Also known as goalkeeper’s line.
Goalkeeper shall not go beyond this line
during penalty throw until the thrower shall
have released the ball.
3. 6m line
 Goal area line
 Marks the extent of the goal area
 Goalkeeper shall not move or cross the line
with the ball under his control.
 Goalkeeper shall not collect the ball
outside this line and comes back with it
inside the are.
 Goalkeeper shall not collect the ball lying
outside 6m line while he himself he is
within the area.
 Penalty is awarded to the attacking team if
a defender enters his goal area and by so
doing gains an advantage over the
opponent.
 Free throw is given to the defending team
if an attacker enters opponent’s goal area
with or without the ball.
 Goal shall not count if an attacker makes a
score while in contact with the ground
inside the 6m line.
 During free throw by the attacking team,
the defenders position themselves along
the 6m line.
5. 7m line
 Penalty mark
 During the penalty throw the thrower shall
not step on or over this line before
releasing the ball. Incase of infringement
by the thrower, a free throw is awarded to
the opponents at the 7m line.
6. 9m line
Free throw lineA long where all the free throws
shall be taken for infringements on the defenders
along the free throw zone.
34
During the penalty throw all the players apart from
the thrower and the goalkeeper shall be outside the
9m line.
7. Center line
Divides the court into 2 equal halves
Along where throw off is taken
All the players of the team taking the throw off
shall be along this line.
Along where substitution takes place.
8. Side line
40m long
Forms length of the court
Confirms a ball out of A ball is out of bound
when:
Comes into contact with the ground outside the
sideline.
Comes into contact with an object in contact with
the ground outside the sideline.
Along where substitution takes place next to the
centreline.
Along where substitution takes place next to the
centreline.
Along where the officials table and the
substitution bench are placed.
THROWS IN HANDBALL
1. Throw in
Awarded when the whole ball completely passes
over the sideline.
Conditions to be observed
Throw at the exact point where it went out.
Atleast one foot should step on the sideline.
Opponents 3m away from the ball.
Must be released within three seconds.
A player cannot pass the ball to himself.
No blowing of the whistle.
2. Penalty throw
Awarded when:
Goalkeeper enters his goal area with the ball or
takes it from the court to the goal area.
A court player internationally gives a back pass to
his G.K in the goal area.
A court player enters his goal area to gain
advantage of the ball.
When a clear chance of scoring has been spoiled.
Dangerous play.
Unwarranted whistle signal at the time when a
team had a clear chance of scoring.
Conditions to be observed.
Must be done 3 sec. after the referee’s whistle
Shot must be directed to the goal
The penalty thrower must not touch on or cross the
penalty throw line before the ball leaves his hand.
Other players to be beyond 9m line.
The G.K. should not move the 4m line till the ball
is released.
3. Free throw
Awarded incase of minor infringements of the
rules within the court e.g. illegal substitution,
double dribbling e.t.c
Conditions to be observed
Taken at the exact point where the infringement
occurred.
Ball must be released with 3 sec.
Opponents be 3m away from the ball
4. Goalkeepers throw
Awarded when the goalkeeper gains control of the
ball within the goal area.
A player throws the ball over the opponent’s own
goal line.
The ball is considered to be in play when it passes
over the goal area line.
No whistle for the throw.
5. Throw off
At the start of the game
Begin of the 2nd half
If a whole ball passes in between the upright posts
under the cross bar joining them (score).
6. Referee throw
Awarded when:
i. There is a simultaneous infraction
ii. When the referee is not sure of the
player who has committed the offence
iii. Technical problem e.g. basting of the
ball external interference e.t.c
iv. When lowering national flag
Conditions to be observed
Two opposing players stand facing each other,
hands alongside their body
Referee tosses the ball between the two opposing
players.
7. Corner throws
35
Awarded when the whole ball completely crosses
over the goal line having lastly been touched by
the defender (But not in between the two upright
posts) It is taken at the edge of the court where the
sideline meets the goal line. Conditions similar to
throw in.
Passive play
This is when a team keeps the ball in their
possession without making any recognizable
attempt to attack or to shoot on the goal.
Penalty for this is free throw.
PUNISHMENTS IN HANDBALL
1) Warning/Caution
Can be given verbally or through us of yellow
card. It is given when.
i) Time wasting
ii) Wrong approach to an opponent
iii) A persistent infringement.
2. Suspension
This is 2 minutes compulsory break given to
player due to:
a) repeat/persistent infringement concerning an
approach to an opponent
b) when a player is disqualified, he shall be
accompanied by 2 minutes suspension.
c) Infringement of the substitution rule.
d) Failure to release the ball or throw the ball
way after being penalized.
e) Rough play – directed to an opponent using
unnecessary force.
3. Disqualification
This is where a player is supposed to live the
court or the remaining period part of the game.
However one shall substitute after two minutes.
Occasions
At the third suspension.
Endangering the life of an opponent e.g. pushing
an opponent who is in air.
Unsportsman – like language.
Unregistered player entering the court/playing.
It is indicated by read card
Expulsion
This is where a player is supposed to leave court
for the rest of the game and shall not be
substituted. An expelled player shall be required
to leave the team bench and vicinity of the game.
It is indicated with 2 hands crossed above the
head.
Occasions
Assaulting a fellow player or an official
Spitting to a fellow player.
OFFICIALS IN HANDBALL
1. Court referee
 Shall start the game by blowing the whistle
during the throw off.
 Shall raise his hand to confirm a score
when a goal has been made.
 He shall penalize any infringement within
the court and incase of any disapproval
with the other referee, his decision shall be
final.
 During a penalty throw, he shall ensure
that the thrower does not step on the line.
Goal line referee
 Confirm the score by blowing two sharp
whistles when a goal is scored.
 Shall penalize any infringement along the
6m line.
Combined duties of the referees
 They shall run the game according to the
laid down rules and regulations.
 They shall inspect the facilities equipment
and players before the start of the game.
 They sign the score sheet at the end of the
game.
 They shall inspect the score at the end of
each half or any other time one feels like.
 They shall make the final decision in case
of any disapproval between the table
officials.
 They shall penalize the players according
to the laid down rules and regulations.
 They shall keep a record of scores and
shall confirm the score before approving
the score in the score sheet.
 One of them shall minister the toss-up of
the coin at the start of the game.
3. Time keeper
Shall take note of the time at the start of the game.
Shall make a signal at the expiration of the game.
He shall alert the court referee two minutes to the
end of a half of the game.
Shall time the two minutes suspension.
Shall stop the game clock as instructed by the
referee during time out:
Shall take note of any time wasted e.g. in case of
injuries or any other interruption and shall add that
time at the end of the particular half.
36
BASIC SKILLS
1. Passes
Similar to those used in net ball apart from over
arm pass which is only used in hand ball.
2. Shots
These includes dive shot, jump shot, set shot,
sling/under arm shot, standing shot, hook shot.
3. Dribbling
Constant bouncing of the ball on the ground by
use of one hand.
4. Dodging/faking/feinting.
This is provoking the opponent to go in the wrong
direction.
5. Blocking
Restricting movement of the opponent by using
various body parts e.g. chest (frontal blocking)
back (rear blocking) side (linear blocking)
6. Catching
Single and double hand catching
Qualities of a good keeper
 Courageous
 Flexible
 Good reaction time
 Very fast/swift
 Reasonably tall
 Disciplined
 Conversant with the rules and regulations
of the games
 Dedicated/committed.
 Strong
 Good grip of the ball.
 Good co-ordination.
SYSTEMS OF PLAY
Defence system
1. Man to man
A player is given a specific opponent to mark or
guard.
2. Zonal guard
Each player is given a specific area or region in
the court to guard.
3. Combined cover
This is the combination of both man to man and
zonal defence.
Attacking tactics
1. Simple first break
Only one player sprints forward to make a score
2. Complex first break.

More than one rushes forward to make attack.
3. Figure 8
This is an attack made by three players with the
ball at any given time. A player follows his or her
pass.
4. Posting
The use of a very tall player against short player.
He is given high pass that the other players cannot
touch then he scores
5. Screening
6. Overloading/piston movement.
Playing systems
i. 6:0 ii. 5:1 iii. 4:2 iv. 3:3 v. 3:2:1 vi. 2:3:1
METHODOLOGY
This is the scientific study of various teaching
approaches/methods done systematically.
Factors to consider while choosing teaching
method.
 Age of the learners
 Previous experience
 Equipment available
 Facilities available
 Nature of the skill or activity
 Time available
 Safety precautions
 Mental ability
 Physical ability
 Sporting season
 Weather
 Size of the class
 Class discipline.
METHODS OF TEACHING
1. Direct/formal method
Teacher dominates the class/teaching and
determines the activities to be done and the
apparatus to be used.
Merits
A lot of work is covered
It saves time
Discipline is maintained in the class
Teaching/learning is systematic
Avoids a lot of repetition
Class coaching is possible
Appropriate when dealing with young pupils who
have no previous experience.

37
Appropriate when dealing with large class but
apparatus are limited.
Apparatus not familiar with the pupils are not
neglected.
Injuries are minimized.
Demerits
 Activities/apparatus not familiar with the
teacher are neglected.
 Pupils do not progress at there own pace.
 Do not cater for individual difference e.g
physical and mental abilities.
 Pupils are passive and bored throughout.
 Pupils’ creativity/discovery are hindered
because they are not given the freedom.
 Does not promote self-confidence in
pupils.
 Does not express self-expression and
satisfaction.
2. Indirect/informal method
Pupils are given the freedom to select the
apparatus/activities of their choice. Role of the
teacher is supervise and provide apparatus.
Merits
 Enhances pupils’ maximum participation.
 Pupils progress at their own pace.
 Promote self confidence in pupils.
 Promote self-expression and satisfaction
 Caters for individual differences
 Promotes pupils discovery/creativity.
Demerits
 Class coaching not possible because pupils
are doing different activities
 Require more space/facilities
 Apparatus not familiar with pupils are
neglected.
 Take a lot of time
 A lot of apparatus/equipment is required.
 There is a lot of repetition.
 Class control discipline is not possible.
 Very little is covered.
 More injuries.
3. Limitation of on line method
Borrows advantages of both direct and indirect
methods of teaching.
4. Part method
This is when the whole skill is divided into various
components and each part is taught at a time.
Appropriate when dealing with complex skills e.g.
when teaching pole vault we have;
Grip>carriage>approach>plant>take off
flight>release>landing.
5. Whole method
This is applicable when whole skill cannot be
broken into parts e.g. fly spring, cartwheel e.t.c
6. Task method
This is when pupils are given assignment by the
teacher to accomplish within a given period of
time e.g. 10 press-ups within 5 seconds.
7. Discovery method
This is when the teacher presents a problem to the
pupils and gives them a chance to look for the
solution e.g. stopping the ball using the chest. The
problem will be to find other parts of the body that
can be used to stop the ball.
8. Reciprocal method
This is done in pairs. One performs the other
observes and later gives comments.
SCHEMES OF WORK
This is the break down of syllabus into smaller
teachable units done systematically spread over a
given period of time e.g. week, month, term or
year.
Purpose of scheme of work.
 Make teaching become systematic to avoid
repetition and lesson oversight.
 To consult various references in advance.
 To gather the lesson requirements in good
time
 To budget time properly.
 Professional requirement for inspection
and administrative purposes.
 Assist teachers during evaluation e.g.
pupils and self-evaluation.
Incase of new teacher he can comfortably fit into
the class (doesn’t break the continuity)
Types of schemes of work
1) General scheme of work
The contents of class activity and group activities
are taken from different topics e.g. gymnastics,
netball, athletics e.t.c
2) Specify topic based scheme of work
The contents of the class activity and group
activities are taken from same topic.
3) Theory scheme of work
This is when topics such as exercise and nutrition,
sports injuries, first aid, rules of the game,
Olympic education are taught in class.
PARTS OF THE SCHEME OF WORK
(The description is as per the new syllabus)
It has 9 columns.
i. Week
This is the week of the term
ii. Lesson
38
This is the lesson number for the specific week.
iii. Topic
The area where you derive the content e.g. net ball
gymnastics e.t.c.
iv. Content
This is the subtopic or the specific skill you are
dealing with e.g. in gymnastics we may have swan
balance.
v. Objectives
The behaviour change you expect from the
learners by the end of the stated duration i.e. a
period of about 30 or 35 minutes.
A good objective should have the following
characteristics:
 Should be specific
 Should be measurable
 Should be achievable
 Should be behavioural.
vi. Teaching/learning activities
Teaching activities are those that shall be
performed by the teacher during the learning
process while learning activities are those that
shall be performed by the learners during the
learning process.
vii. Resources
This shows the apparatus and the equipment that
will be used during the learning process.
viii. Reference
This shows materials used by the teacher as his
sources of information. They may include books,
magazines, newspaper e.t.c.
ix. Remarks
This column is filled after teaching. It shows
whether the lesson was taught or not and if not
taught must show the reasons as to why it was not
taught. If it was taught then must show whether
the objectives were achieved or not.
LESSON PLAN (New Syllabus)
This is a work schedule guiding the teacher on
what is to be taught at a given stage of the lesson
and the allocation of each stage. It guides the
teacher so that he does not go a stray.
Parts of the lesson plan.
A. Row headers
1. Introduction
This comprises of both introductory and
compensatory activities. It has 2 introductory and
3 compensatory activities.
Introductory activities
These are activities or exercises involving the
whole body. They should lively, motivating and
stimulating.
Purpose
 To give general warm up to the body
 For psychological/mental preparation
 Creation of interest/motivation
 Changes pupils mood from classroom to
field.
Compensatory activities
These are activities or exercise meant for specific
parts of the body to be used in a given skill. They
are supposed to be vigorous and lively.
Purposes
 To give further general warm up of the
body
 To give specific warm up of the body parts
that will be used in the skill to be learnt.
 To mobilize body joints and strengthen the
muscles.
To facilitate steepness in flexibility of the body
thereby reducing chances of injuries.
2. Development
This is where the teacher explains and
demonstrates the skill that appears in the content
column of the scheme of work.
3. Application
This is the practical stage where the pupils are
divided into group and are given chance to
practice the skill for proper mastery. The
teacher’s role is to supervise and to correct
mistakes.
Purpose of grouping.
 For practice of the new skill.
 Where rules and regulations of the game
are emphasized.
 Promotes spirit of sportsmanship.
 Promotes the spirit of sharing apparatus.
 Promote the spirit of co-operation.
 Promotes socialization.
 Give time for a teacher to attend
individual/group.
 Promote self-center of belonging.
Factors to consider when grouping pupils
 Nature of the skill
 Size of the class
 Apparatus available
 Space or facilities available
 Body size of the pupils i.e. height and
weight
 Physical abilities of the learners
 Mental abilities of the learners.
39
 Age of the pupils
 Past experience
 Gender/sex
4) Conclusion
This is the stage where pupils are involved in less
vigorous and less strenuous activities to cool the
body system.
Purpose
 For relaxation
 For cooling down the body system
 Changing pupils mind from the field to
classroom
 Psychological preparation for other
activities in the school.
 Where the teacher gives instruction for the
next lesson.
B. Column headers
i. Content
This shows activity/activities you will be doing in
that part.
ii. Objectives
This shows the reason why you are doing the
activity.
iii. Teaching/learning activities
This will show the teaching point of what you will
be doing in that part.
iv. Organization
This will show formation that you will use while
performing activity in that part.
v. Resources
This will show the apparatus and equipment that
will be used in that particular part.
vi. References
These are the sources of information to be taught.
vii. Resources
Comments on how activities were performed.
STEPS/STAGES OF TEACHING
PSYCHOMOTOR
1. Explanation
Factors to be considered
Good formation that the teacher and pupils can
easily see each other.
Explain only when pupils are attentive.
Explain systematically to avoid repetition
Explanation should be brief and precise
Use the language that pupils understand.
 Introduction of all vocabularies should be
done during the explanation stage.
 Teacher should be conversant with the
content.
 Pupils should not face direction of the sun.
2. Demonstration
 The skill is demonstrated by the teacher for
the pupils to have a mental picture of the
skill
Importance
 It enhances the comprehension of the skill
being taught i.e. what is seen is retained for
along time.
 Takes short time.
 Some skills can’t be taught without
demonstration.
 Can be used to compare different
movement.
 Help form good teacher/pupil relationship.
Instances when pupil demonstration is
preferred
 When the pupil is well conversant with the
skill than the teacher.
 When the teacher cannot perform the skill
because he or she might be unwell or not
changed.
 When the skill involved needs paring.
 When the pupils involved are too young to
pair with the teacher.
 When the teacher wants to pin point key
point key areas of demonstration.
Factors to be considered during demonstration
 Provide adequate space
 Good formation/organization.
 Adequate time.
 Avoid prolonged demonstration.
 Avoid wrong demonstration.
 Avoid using one pupil all the times.
3. Practical/participation
 Factors to consider
 Adequate apparatus.
 Adequate space.
 Adequate time.
 Close supervision of the pupils’ work.
 Correction from poor performance.
 Teacher to ensure maximum participation
by all pupils.
4. Exploration/discovery
This gives pupils opportunity to experiment with
the skill.
Purpose
Allows for self – satisfaction
Gives pupils self – confidence.
40
 Gives pupils freedom to handle and
manipulate the apparatus.
 Gives pupils sense of achievement
5. Evaluation
Meant to assess pupils’ acquisition of the skill
Methods of evaluation.
 Ask them to demonstrate.
 Let them explain oral questions or written
quizzes.
 Observe them during game situation.
 Project.
Ways of motivating children during the lesson
 Teacher must be interested/cheerful.
 Teacher must be actively involved.
 Teacher must be in correct P.E. uniforms.
 Supervise pupils.
 Praise for the correct performance.
 Teacher to give clear instructions.
 Good pupil/teacher relationship.
 Teacher to be confident.
Class control
 Pupils have freedom but to a limit.
 Use field markers to mark enough space.
 Use of voice i.e. clear, loud and
commanding.
 Teacher should have a good mastery of the
skill.
 Use appropriate language.
 Be firm in decision making/authoritative.
 Making trouble shooters group leaders by
giving them some responsibilities.
 Have a good working relationship with the
pupils.
IMPROVISATION
 The act of making or preparing an article
for use in learning process by use of locally
available materials to replace the real
article.
 Factors to consider when improvising
 Number or pupils in the class.
 The materials available.
 The cost involved.
 Durability of the item.
 The safety of the equipment.
 The functional utility of the item.
 The relevance of the apparatus involved.
 Importance of the apparatus.
 Makes the lesson formal.
 Ensure proper learning of the subject.
 Helps to maintain the interest.
 Trains co-ordination
 Improves quality of teaching
 Children master skill well by doing
 Children naturally enjoy playing with the
apparatus.
 Makes class control easier.
 Help prevent injuries.
Qualities of a good improvised item.
 Should resemble real object in shape size
weight and appearance.
 Should be safe to use and have no sharp
edges.
 Should be durable and avoid fragile ones.
 Should be pleasing to the eye.
 Should have proper gravity.
 Should suit the age of the pupils.
 Should be functional i.e. relevance to the
skill being taught.
Dangers of improvised items
 Are not durable
 Can cause injuries to the user
 They don’t motivate the learners as the real
ones.
 May not resemble the real one hence the
function may not be effective.
Care and storage of apparatus.
 P.E apparatus should be well looked after.
 Point pupils to carry them to and from the
field.
 Ones used for a particular activity should
be moved from the areas of operation to
save them from being stepped on.
 Apparatus should be well set so that pupils
can reach them so easily.
Factors influencing the occurrence of injuries
1. Old age due to less flexibility, elasticity,
strength, endurance, speed e.t.c
2. Insufficient warm up. This is concerned with
Raising body temperature with 20
c.
 Mobilizing joints and strengthening
muscles
 Mobilizing substances to be used in
production of energy.
 Prepare body tissue for proper ventilation.
 To stimulate hormone e.g. adrenaline and
non-adrenaline which help to suppress the
onset of fatigue.
 Prepare one psychologically and level of
conditioning.
3. Lack of adequate rest and pause. This makes
the glycogen depot to get exhausted and therefore
one suffers due to lack of metabolism or
accumulation of lactic acid.
4. Lack of balanced diet.
41
5. Nature of the game
6. Over dressing and under dressing
7. Experience on the sport
8. Sports specific techniques
9. Health status of the subject
10. Play grounds
11. Faulty apparatus
12. Poor demonstration/instructions.
Role of the teacher in prevention of injuries
 Group learners according to age and
learning
 ability.
 Teaching of correct technique.
 Ensure proper clothing.
 Always give ample time for
acclimatization to avoid heat stroke, heat
exhaustion e.t.c
 Should have knowledge of student medical
record, health status for him to have knowhow on how to treat them.
 Provide strict and proper supervision
during physical exercise activities.
 Ensure safe warm environment.
 Should have general knowledge on health
education.
 Educate pupils so that they can be able to
recognize dangers in equipment and
facilities.
Reasons for encouraging pupils to sit upright.
 To ensure that pupils are attentive.
 So that pupils can have very good view of
the teacher.
 To facilitate good blood circulation in the
body
 To avoid day dreaming/fantasy.
 Help in maintaining good class control.
 To facilitate good air circulation in the
body.
Importance of teacher’s self-evaluation.
(i) To check whether the method was appropriate
(ii) To find out whether the time was appropriately
used.
(iii) To check the effectiveness of the apparatus
used.
(iv) Help the teacher to prepare for remedial work
for the pupils.
(v) To check the safety of the apparatus used.
(vi) To find out how much the pupils have
mastered.
How to occupy sick pupils or disabled in your
class.
 You can use them as judges during
competition in the class.
 Use them to take care of the apparatus and
also distributing them.
 Use them to maintain discipline in the class
by helping you to identify those who are
misbehaving.
 Involve in some very light activities.
 Use them as group leaders to give
instruction to other pupils.
Factors considered when evaluating P.E.
program for a whole year.
1. Time
 Whether it was enough/was there any
wastage/was it used well.
 Time allocation for various topics.
2. Apparatus
 Were the apparatus enough?
 Were they appropriate for the level of the
learners?
 Were they bought or improvised?
 Did they cause injury?
3. Space
 Were the learners organized?
 Were the apparatus well spaced?
 Was there enough space between the
pupils?
4. Safety
Did the teacher ensure that the facilities and
equipment are safe for the pupils?
Is the teacher conversant with the first aid
knowledge.
Was there adequate teacher’s supervision?

42
BASKET BALL
The court
Sideline (28m)

Back
(Base)
line
(15 m)

Team’s bench Officials’ bench

Parts of the court
Centerline
 Subdivide the court into two equal halves
 The game starts along this line with jump
ball.
 Substitution takes place along this line.
Side line
 Length of the court (28 meters)
 Throw in takes place along this line
 Used for the purposes of substitution
 Team’s bench and official table located
along this line.
 It is the referee’s operation area
Base line
 Form width of the court (15m)
 Throw in can be taken along this line
 Its where back board is fixed
 Start of the game after score.
Center circle
Radius 1.9m
Where the game starts with the jump ball.

Restricted area

Team’s bench
 Used for penalizing common infringement
with jump ball.
Free throw line
 Where free throws are taken from
3 point line
It helps in demarcating 3 point and 2 point areas.
Restricted area
 No player is supposed to be in this area
during free throw.
 Unguarded attacking player is not
supposed to remain in the opponents’
restricted area without a ball for a period
exceeding three seconds.
Field goal area (2 point)
 Indicates when two points are awarded
when basket is scored.
3 point area
 Indicates when 3 point is awarded
Team’s bench
43
3 point line Field goal area Free throw lane
(2 point)
Centerline
Free throw
Line
Restraining of circles
R – 1.9 m 3 point field area
———–
——————

 This is where the substitute and the team
officials sit.
 Officials table
 This where the scorer timekeeper and 24
second operator sits.
 Marks
 Indicates line up when free throw is being
taken.
TEAM SIZE
A team is made up of 5 players.
The players should wear jerseys containing
numbers 4 – 15
DURATION
4 quarters of ten minutes each with a resting
period of 5 minutes. Incase of a tie, a period of 5
minutes is added.
ART OF TE GAME
It starts with jump ball at the center circle.
Procedure for jump ball.
Two opposing players at the center circle, each on
his side of the court. The rest of the players to be
outside the center circle.
Referee tosses the ball between the two and then
they jump to tap the ball outside the circle.
If one of the players commits a violation, the
opponent is given the ball for throw in on the
sideline.
Occasions when jump ball is administered
 Start of every quarter.
 Start of second half
 Start of extra period.
 Incase of common ball where it is
administered in any of the restraining
circles.
TECHNICAL EQUIPMENT
 Stop watch
 24 second operating device
 Score board
 Foul markers – numbers ranging 1-5
 Game clock
 Score sheet.
BASIC SKILLS
Catching
Passing
Shooting e.g. set shot, jump shot, stay up hook
shot.
Dribbling: This can be either low or high dribble.
Reasons for dribbling
 To beat an opponent
 To cover the space
 To create a good scoring chance when a
teammate is marked.
Faulty dribbling
 Double dribbling
 Dribbling using both hands simultaneously
carrying/lifting the ball.
 Pivoting
 Dodging/feinting/faking
SCORING
A score in basketball is called a basket.
A basket is considered to have been scored when a
live ball completely passes through the ring from
above.
A dead ball
After the score
Expiry of the time
Ball out of the court
When referee blows a whistle incase of a foul or
violation.
A live ball
When a ball is tapped outside the center circle
during a jump ball.
During free throw when the ball is disposed to the
player by the referee.
When the referee touches the ball during the throw
in.
Value of a basket
1 point – awarded during free throw
2 poins – awarded when score was made from
within goal area.
3 points – awarded when the score was made from
within the 3 point area.
Held ball
When two opposing players claim possession of
the ball at the same time and are struggling for it.
When the player holds the ball without dribbling,
passing or shooting for a period exceeding 5
seconds.
When the ball hangs between back board and the
ring.
44
TIME RULES
3seconds:
Unguarded player without a ball should not remain
in the opponents’ restricted area for a period
exceeding 3 seconds.
5 seconds:
A player should not exceed 5 seconds during
throw in when the ball has been touched by the
referee.
A player should not hold the ball without passing,
dribbling or shooting for a period exceeding 5
seconds.
A player should not exceed 5 seconds during free
throw when the referee has disposed the ball.
8 seconds
A team in control of the ball should make sure that
the ball moves from the backcourt to frontcourt
within 8 seconds.
24 seconds
A team should make an attempt to score at the
opponents’ basket within a period of 24 seconds.
30 seconds
A disqualified player must be substituted within
this time.
20 seconds
This is time for substitution.
1 minute
This is duration for time out.
Playing zones
G G
F F
C —— Center
G——- Guards
F——- Forwards
Playing systems
2:1:2
3:2
2:3
Attacking systems
Simple fast break
Complex fast break
Screening
Posting
Overloading
Disqualification
A player is disqualified after committing 5
personal fouls.
Must be substituted within 30 seconds.
Defence system
Man to man defence
Zonal defence
Combined cover
SUBSTITUTION
A team can substitute the whole team.
Substitution is effected when court player leaves
the court and the substitute enters
Must be done within 20 seconds
A disqualified player must be substituted within
30 seconds.
Substitution cannot be done during free throw
unless serious injury.
Procedure
The substitute reports to the official table and
gives signal for substitution.
The substitute then sits at the substitution bench.
When the ball is dead the scorer or timekeeper
signals the referee who authorizes substitution.
The substitute enters the court when the player
leaves the court.
TIME OUT
This is a period of interception of the game
requested by the coach or assistant coach for
technical talk.
Requested when the ball is dead.
Each team is entitled to one time out of minute
between 1st , 2nd , 3rd and extra time periods.
During the 4th period 2 time outs can be given to
each team.
Substitution can also take place during this time.
45
C
1. Violations
2. Fouls
1. VIOLATIONS
This is breaking of the rules when a players is
progressing with the ball i.e. offence committed
when a player is with the ball. They include:
 Breaking of time regulations.
 Back court play.
 Taking more than 2 steps with the ball i.e.
walking/travelling.
 Kicking the ball intentionally.
 Breaking the rules during jump ball.
 Throwing the ball out of the court.
 Breaking the free throw rule.
 Illegal dribble e.g. using two hands to
dribble simultaneously
 Lifting, carrying the ball.
 Double catch/repossessing.
Penalty for the violations
A throw in either from the back line or sideline is
awarded.
2. FOULS
This is the breaking of the rules concerning the
physical contact with an opponent or displaying
unsportsmanlike behaviours.
 Physical contacts
 Pushing
 Blocking
 Charging
 Holding
 Tripping.
Types of fouls
1. Technical fouls
These are fouls that are against the spirit of
games/unsportsmanlike behaviours.
They include:
 Changing the jersey number without
informing the referee.
 Entering as a substitute without referee’s
permission.
 Hanging on the ring.
 Failure to lift up hands when the foul has
been called upon you.
 Delaying the ball to be played e.g. during
throw in.
 Intimidating the opponent.
2. Personal fouls
Occur when a player intentionally contact an
opponent physically. 3 personal fouls lead to
disqualification and substitution.
Examples of personal fouls
1. Normal personal foul
When the player contact with an opponent
intentionally due to inexperience/poor skill
mastery.
2. Intentional foul
When a player deliberately contact the opponent
or when the player didn’t make any attempt to
prevent the contact.
3. Double foul
When two opposing players contact one another.
4. Multiple foul
When two or more teammates contact one another.
5. Disqualifying foul
Very dangerous foul/very serious unbearing
contact.
Penalty
Incase a player was in act of shooting and he
happens to be fouled and the score was successful
he is given points (2 or 3) and one free throw.
If the basket was not successful he is given 2 or 3
shots/throws.
Other personal fouls (not shooting foul) are
penalized with a throw in from the side or base
line.
Procedure for calling a foul.
 Referee blows the whistle.
 Give signal for the clock to be stopped.
 Indicate by raising his hand up that a foul
has been committed.
 Point at the player who has committed the
foul.
 The player acknowledges by raising his
hands up.
 Referee turns to the official table and
shows the number of the player who has
committed the offence.
 Indicate the kind of offence and the penalty
to be given.
 The penalty is taken.
SPORTS INJURIES
NEURO INJURIES (C.N.S & BRAIN)
1. UNCONSCIOUSNESS
46
The state of not being able to respond to a given
stimuli i.e. casualty is not aware or alert of what is
happening.
Causes
 Head knock
 Shock
 Heart attack
 Poison
 Drunkard ness
 Diseases of brain
 Shortage of blood in brain
 Lack of oxygen and blood supply
Stages of consciousness to unconsciousness
i) Full consciousness – The casualty is not to
respond to the stimuli e.g. feeling the paid when
touched.
ii) Drowsiness – The casualty is easily aroused but
relapses to unconsciousness.
iii) Stupor – Casualty aroused by a lot of
difficulties and information given is not reliable.
iv) Coma – The casualty cannot be aroused at all
Treatment
Place the casualty in a comfortable position i.e.
recovery/ coma position
Open the airway
Loosen the tight clothing
Resume artificial resuscitation (mouth to mouth,
mouth to nose, or chest compression e.t.c)
Treat for wounds
Dispose the casualty to the hospital.
2. STROKE
Caused by blood clot blocking the blood vessels to
the brain. Very common with people having high
blood pressure.
Signs and symptoms
Internal bleeding shown by
Blood shot eyes
Skin becomes pale
Blood coming out through the body openings
Stool/urine contains blood stain
Blurred speech
Loss of power on sensations in arms and legs
(paralyzed)
Treatment
Same as unconsciousness
3. HYSTERIA
This is caused by anxiety or too much worry
Treatment
Reassure the casualty
4. CONCLUSION
Caused by shaking up of the brain as a result of
falling or direct blow.
Signs and symptoms
 Unconsciousness
 Dizziness
 Headache
 Loss of memory
 Vomiting
 Nausea
 Weak pulse
Treatment
 Place the casualty in a comfortable position
 Keep the casualty awake
 Provide a fresh air
 Give adequate rest
 Give a lot of fluids to prevent vomiting
Dispose the casualty to the hospital.
5. COMPRESSION
Caused by pressure in the brain from the fracture
on the skull with the bone depressed or bleeding
and swelling within the brain.
Signs and symptoms
 Confusion
 Intense headache
 Slow noisy breathing
 Paralysis on one side of the body
 Unconsciousness
 Slow strong pulse
 Unequal pupils
 Dry and flushed face
 Twitching of the limbs
 Convulsion
Treatment
 Place the casualty in a recovery position
 Stop further bleeding
 Immobilize the broken bone
 Give the casualty cool fluids, adequate rest
 Dispose the casualty to the hospital.
6. SHOCK
This is when the blood pressure is very low
leading to collapsing of the body system.
47
Causes
 Good or bad news
 Stress
 Injuries
 Severe pain
 Nerve stimulation
 Severe illness
 Loss of the body fluids (bleeding or over
sweating)
 Dehydration
 Acute abdominal emergencies e.g.
 Rapture of appendix
 Heart attack
Signs and symptoms
 Cold dumpy skin
 Sweating
 Shivering
 Confusion
 Skin becomes pale
 Fast but weak pulse rate
 Shallow breathing
 Nausea
 Vision is blurred
 Restlessness
 Coma
 Stunned attitude leading to anxiousness
Treatment
 Remove the cause of the shock
 Rest the casualty either by sitting or lying
him with the legs higher than the head.
 Cover him but don’t make him feel too
warm
 Reassure the casualty by being calm and
confident.
 For minor shock give casualty warm drinks
 Provide room for breathing and fresh air.
 Loosen tight clothing
 Dispose the casualty to the hospital.
7. FAINTING (SYNCOPE)
This is a complete loss of consciousness due to
lack of oxygen in the brain.
Causes
– Injuries – Severe pain
– Lack of food – fatigue
– Horrifying sites – Illness
– Bad or good news
– Lack of enough oxygen in the brain
Signs and symptoms
Dumpy and cold skin – Dry lips
Face becomes pale – Sweating
Shallow breathing – Yawning
 Gradual unconsciousness
Treatment
 Rest the casualty on his back with the feet
slightly higher than the head to allow blood
flow from the brain
 Loosen tight clothing
 Keep away the crowd
 Sit the casualty on the chair and put his
head between the knees
 Hold his jaws and talk to him
 Fan the casualty to supply fresh air
 Place the casualty in a recovery position
 Dispose the casualty to the hospital
8. ASPHYXIA (SUFFOCATION)
This is a condition that a person suffer due to
inadequate supply of oxygen in the blood (brain
and tissue)
Causes
 Choking (obstruction of the airway)
 Strangulation
 Chest compression
 Electrical injury
 Poisoning
 Paralysis incases of a stroke
 Air pollution
 Drowning
 Carbon monoxide.
Signs and symptoms
 Rate and depth of breathing is rapid and
noisy
 Shallow breathing with froth
 Congestion around the neck
 Fits may occur
 Restlessness
 Unconsciousness
 Pale lips
 Increased heart rate
 Dizziness
 Casualty points at the mouth and the throat.
Treatment
 Remove the casualty from the cause
 Open the airway
 Loosen tight clothing
 Reassure the casualty
 Raise legs higher than the head
 Dispose the casualty to the hospital.
Methods of emergency resuscitation
1. Mouth to mouth resuscitation (Kiss of life)
Lie the casualty facing up
Tilt the head backwards
48
 Hold the jaws
 Breath to the mouth several times until you
see movement of the chest. The exercise
to continue up to a period of 10 minutes.
Why mouth to mouth may not be possible
Sometimes
 Incase the casualty is producing body
fluids through the mouth e.g. vomit blood.
 Incase there is serious injuries around in
the mouth.
 Incase the casualty is suffering from
contagious disease.
 Incase the casualty is facing downwards
2. Mouth to nose
3. Cardiac massage (Heart compression)
4. Nielsen Holger
ENVIROMENTAL INJURIES
High temperature
(a) Heat exhaustion
This condition occurs due to abnormal loss of salt
and water in the body in a very humid
environment. Water and salt is lost during
vomiting and diahroearing.
Signs and symptoms
 Moist skin
 Fatigue
 Dizziness
 Pulse faster but weak
 Muscle cramp
 Pale skin.
Treatment
 Place the casualty in cool area.
 Loosen tight clothing
 Place feet slightly higher than the head.
 Treat for shock
 Dispose to the hospital.
(b) Heat stroke
This is when the body is not able to loose excess
heat.
Causes
Exposure to very high temperatures
Signs and symptoms
 Restlessness
 Unconsciousness
 Flushed skin, dry and burning
 Pulse is faster and strong
 Temperature extremely high.
 Fits/convulsions may occur.
Treatment
 Place in cool area
 Apply cold applications
 Fan the casualty
 Raise the legs slightly higher than the head
 Loosen tight clothing.
(c) Sun burn
This caused by severe burn of the sun
Signs and symptoms
Skin is red, hot, tender, swollen and blistering
Treatment
 Sponging
 Sips of cold water
 Place the casualty in a cold area.
Low temperature
(a) Frost bite
 Damage to the body tissue caused by
exposure to extreme/severe cold. Blood
vessels contract reducing the blood supply.
 Signs and symptoms
 Skin becomes extremely cold
 Skin becomes numb
 Skin change colour to grayish
 Skin feels hard and stiff
 Loss of function.
Treatment
 Remove all cold and wet cloths
 Place the body in warm place
 Remove tight items e.g. rings, belts e.t.c
 Give hot fluids
 Dispose the casualty to the hospitals
(b) Hypothermia
This is dangerous lowering of the body
temperature caused by prolonged immersion in
cold water and general exposure to extreme cold.
Signs and symptoms
 Dizziness
 Severe headache
 Impair ness of muscular co-ordination
 Speech becomes blurred.
Treatment
Rap the casualty in a warm dry environment
Keep the victim a wake
Dispose the casualty to the hospital.
(c) Heat cramp
Caused by diminishing level of minerals in the
body
Signs and symptoms
Painful muscles
49
 Nausea
 Diarrhea
 Severe headache
Treatment
 Rest the casualty in a comfortable position
 Massage the muscles
 Place the casualty in a cool area
 Replace the fluid in the area.
BONE INJURIES
1. Fracture
This is cracking or breaking of the bone
 Causes
 Direct force
 Indirect force
 Muscular contraction/action.
Description of fractures
(a) Green stick
This is cracking of the bone due to body weight
Mostly common with children.
(b) Cross fracture
The bone is cut across
(c) Oblique fracture
The angle of breakage is 450
(d) Spiral fracture
The line of breakage has spiral shape
(e) Quashed fracture
The bone is severely damaged
(f) Avulsion
The bone moves out of its position
Types of fractures
1. Simple/closed
This is when the bone is injured and the
surrounding tissue is not interfered with i.e. no
would occurs.
2. Open/compound complicated
This is where the broken bon penetrates through
the skin injuring other body tissues e.g. muscles
and blood vessels
3. Multiple fracture
This is when body suffers more than one fracture.
Bone is broken at more than one point.
Signs and symptoms
Swelling and bruises
Pain
Tenderness
Deformity.
 Lose of movement and co-ordination
 Shock
 Bleeding
 Pale skin
 Temperature rises
Treatment
 Treat for shock
 Stop bleeding
 Treat for wounds
 Put the affected part on the splinters
 Immobilize the affected part
 Dispose the casualty to the hospital
JOINT INJURIES
1. Sprain
This is when the tendons and ligaments at the
joints are torn or twisted due to sudden turning of
the joint in a natural movement.
Signs and symptoms
 Tenderness
 Loss of movement
 Severe pain
 Change in skin colour
 Rise in temperature
 Treatment
 Support the joint in a comfortable position
 Treat for shock
 Elevate injured part
 Apply cold ice to control swelling, reduce
pain e.t.c
 Apply firm bandage at the joint
 Rest the joint with no active movement
 Dispose the casualty to the hospital
2. Dislocation/luxation
Displacement of one or more bones at the joint i.e
bones out of the alignment.
Causes
 Direct force
 Indirect force
 Muscular contraction/action
Signs and symptoms
 Bones not in the right place (deformity)
 Pain over the joint
 Bleeding due to tear of the muscles
 Swelling
 Affected part sensitive pressure and pain
 Tenderness
 Loss of movement
 Pale skin
50
SKIN/MUSCLES INJURIES
1. Wound
This is a break in continuity of the body tissue e.g.
skin.
Classification of wounds
(a) Open wounds: this is when there is a break in
the skin.
(b) Closed wound: this is when there is injury on
the underlying tissue.
Types of open wounds
(i) Abrasion
Caused by friction on the surface of the body.
Skin may be removed discoloration of the area and
bleeding e.g. sliding and tackling in soccer.
(ii) Incision/clear cut
The line of the cut is straight. Produced by sharp
cutting objects like knife, razor e.t.c
(iii) Laceration/torn
This is irregular breaking or tearing of the tissue
caused by a great force exerted on the body e.g. by
barbed wire.
(iv) Puncture/stabs
Caused by sharp objects piercing the skin creating
a hole in the tissue e.g. stepping on a thorn or nail,
being stabbed with a knife.
(v) Avulsions
This occurs when a tissue is forcibly separated or
torn from the victim’s body. There is a lot of
bleeding.
(vi) Contusions/bruises
This capillary bleeding beneath the unbroken skin.
This is caused by a knock or a blow by blunt
instrument. The blood vessels are torn and the
tissues are damaged.
Signs and symptoms
 Severe pain
 Swelling
 Rise in temperature
 Discoloration
 Skin becomes pale
 Treatment
 Rest in a comfortable position
 Cold application
(vii) Burns and scalds
Burns are caused by a dry fire or heat.
Scalds are caused by moist heat.
General treatment for all wounds
Remove all the impurities.
Wash the wound with warm soapy water
(should be running water).
Cover the wound with dressing e.g. cotton or
gauze
Place the bandage on the dressing
Immobilize the affected part.
Stop any bleeding
Treat for shock
Dispose the casualty to the hospital.
2. Bleeding
This is oozing of the blood from the wound or
injury.
Types of bleeding
i. External bleeding
a) Arterial bleeding
The blood spurts out and is bright red color due to
plenty of oxygen.
b) Venous bleeding
The blood flows out smoothly and is dark red in
colour due to less oxygen.
c) Capillary bleeding
The blood oozes out and is bright red in colour.
Pressure points
These are where arteries near the bone and can be
pressed to stop bleeding e.g. wrist/radial; base of
the neck/carotid, temple, elbow/radial vein, base
of the thigh/groin.
Signs and symptoms of external bleeding
 Face/lips become pale
 Skin cold and dumpy
 Casualty feels fainty/dizziness
 The pulse is rapidly becoming weaker
 Restlessness
 Shallow breathing
 Yawning
 Thirsty
Treatment
 Direct pressure on the affected part
 Indirect pressure on the affected part
 Cold applications e.g. ice cubes, cold spray
 Elevation of the affected part to reduce the
blood flow to the affected part.
 Cover the wound with sterilized dressings
 Immobilize the affected part
 Dispose the casualty to the hospital.
ii)internal bleeding
This is oozing of blood from internal body
organs/tissues without break of the skin.
51
Signs and symptoms
 Swelling on the affected part.
 Blood coming out from nose, ears and
other openings.
 Pain
 Blood shot eyes
 Skin is dark in colour
 Urine/stool containing blood.
 How the body naturally stops bleeding
 Lowering of the body temperature
 Blood pressure decreases
 Heart rate decreases
 Vasco constriction of the blood vessels
 Reduced supply of the blood to the
affected area.
Artificial treatment
 Elevation of the bleeding part to reduce the
blood flow to the wound
 Direct pressure on the affected part.
 Indirect
 Cold applications e.g. ice cubes
 Cover the would with sterilized dressings
 Immobilize the affected part.
 Dispose the casualty to the hospital.
3. Muscle cramp/muscle pull
Muscle cramp is sudden contraction of the muscle
fibres due to insufficient ions (salt) in the body.
Muscle pull is sudden overstretching of the muscle
fibres.
Causes
 Lack of enough salt intake
 Excessive sweating
 Improper training
 Overhauling if muscles i.e. warming and
cooling effect.
 Fatigue
 External forces e.g. knock, blow
 Inability to relax tight muscles
 Loose of function
 Swelling
Treatment
 Extend the affected muscles, pull both
muscle to allow contraction
 Encourage adequate fluids and salt intake
 Rest the muscles in a comfortable position
 Apply cold application
 Massage the affected area
4. Muscle tear
This can either be complete tear or partial tear
Causes
 Direct force on the muscle
 Indirect force (tension force)
 A cut by sharp object
Signs and symptoms
 Pain
 Cramp
 Swelling
 Depression
 Loss of function of the affected part
 Discoloration: due to internal bleeding
Treatment
 Apply ice to reduce pain
 Immobilize the affected part
 Secure the affected part with bandage
 Dispose the casualty to the hospital
5. Muscle soreness
This is pain along the muscles due to accumulation
of lactic acid.
6. Muscle strain
This is overstretching of a muscle beyond its limit.
7. Blisters
This is caused by rough surface/wearing of very
tight shoes
Treatment
 Cold application
 Never peel the blisters
FIRST AID
This is the first medical treatment given to the
casualty before disposing to hospital.
It is a skilled application of treatment given on the
occurance of injuries or sudden illness suing the
locally available materials and facilities.
First aid terminologies
a) Signs
This is what a first aider can be able to observe or
feel.
b) Symptoms
These are sensations/feelings experienced by the
casualty
c) Diagnosis
This is medical method of identifying a given
injury
d) Prognosis
This is the chance of survival
e) Treatment
These are the efforts and measures taken to cure
an illness/injury
f) Rehabilitation
52
This is the effect aimed at restoring the person to
his normal place/restoring the injury part to its
normal position.
Objectives of first aid
 To sustain or save life
 To prevent the condition from worsening
 To promote recovery
 Relieve pain
Qualities of a good first aider
 Should be in a position to use common
sense
 Should be observant i.e. can be able to
detect the signs and symptoms.
 Should be gentle i.e. avoid rough handling
of the casualty.
 Should be resourceful i.e. should use
locally available materials
 Should be tactful i.e. should be calm to
avoid alarming the casualty.
 Should be explicit i.e. clear in the
instructions giving.
 Should be confident
 Should be sympathetic
 Should be perseverance i.e. continue with
the treatment to the end.
 Discriminative i.e. should be able to give
priorities.
The scope of first aide
1. Assessing the situation
Find out:
 The cause of the injury
 The dangers around
 Safety of both casualty and first aider.
2. Diagnosis
This involves identifying the injury
Methods of medical diagnosis
a) Inspection (observation)
Check for:
Bleeding, swelling, change of skin color, vomiting
and tenderness.
Auscultation (listening)
Listen to:
Heartbeat, breathing
(c) Palpation (touching)
You tough to feel:
Swellings, broken bones, rise in temperature,
tenderness e.t.c
d) Tapping
You tap the chest to find out whether there is
internal bleeding/water in the chest.
(e) Medical history of the casualty
You can check the available document; listen to
the story narrated by the conscious casualty or
story given by the people around.
Contents of first aid box
– Safety pins – Scissors
– Dressings – Methylated spirit
– Bandages – Clinical thermometer
– Pain killers – Disinfectant/antiseptic
– Glucose/dextrosal – Jelly
– Ice cubes – First aid book
– Tweezers – Ointments
Dressings
This is the immediate protective cover placed over
the wound e.g. cotton wool and gauze
Uses of dressings
 To protect the wound
 To prevent germs from entering the wound
 To absorb discharge e.g. pus/blood
 Protect further swelling
 Stop bleeding.
Bandages
These are thin woven materials used to hold the
dressings in place /putting the splints in position.
Examples include: gauze, elastic, adhesive, binder
of muslin, emergency bandages e.g. string,
triangular bandages.
Uses of bandages
 Used to hold dressings in position
 To support splints
 To stop further bleeding
 To carry the casualty
 To support the body part
 To immobilize the affected part.
NOSE BLEEDING
This is the loss blood from the body through the
nose due to internal injury.
Causes
 High blood pressure
 Internal injuries to the head
 Sharp objects entering the nose
 Change in altitude
 Sneezing (forceful blowing of nose)
53
TRAINING
This is improving of components of physical
fitness.
Physical fitness components
Strength: force applied
Power: rate or speed of the force.
Agility: Ability to chance direction
Flexibility: rate of movement around the joint
Co-ordination: working together of the body
systems.
Speed: quickness to perform given task
Balance: ability to maintain body stability
Endurance: ability to work for long time without
being tired.
 Reaction time
 Methods of training
 Circuit training
 Internal training
 Fatleck training
 Cross country training
 Jogging
 Swimming
 Cycling
Benefits of training
For feeling better (well being)
Maintenance of the body weight
For health benefits (prevent psychosomatic)
Diseases e.g. stress, depression, hysteria e.t.c
Enhancement of physical capability
For relaxation
For enjoyment
Slowing down of the aging process
Correction of some body defects
Negative effects of over-training
Reduction of reaction time due to fatigue.
Muscles become hypertrophy (increase in size)
May bring some injuries e.g. wearing of bones due
to friction
The player become very aggressive (irritable)
Muscles become stale due to accumulation of
excess lactic acid.
Depletion of stored glycogen.
Fatigue (tiredness)
Decreasing of cognitive abilities
Reasons for having a rest/recovery period
To heal the injuries
So that the depleted glycogen in the muscles can
be restored.
Components of warm up program
Stretching and curling of the body parts
Specific activities related to the specific body parts
to be used.
Callisthenics – Exercise involving major body
muscles.
Merits of warm up
Increase body temperature by 20
c
Increase flexibility of the muscles
For proper distribution of blood in the body
Improve flexibility around the joints.
Prevention of injuries by warming up the muscles.
Improve co-ordination and accuracy.
Merits of cool down process
To bring the body to the resting state
To bring circulation to the normal
To improve elimination of lactic acid
For psychological preparation for other activities
To normalize respiratory systems.
Environmental factors affecting performance
Air pollution
Speed of wind
Altitude (shortage of oxygen)
Humidity
Atmospheric pressure
Factors influencing performance of an
individual
 Age – Drugs
 Physical fitness – Diet
 Heredity/genetics
 Facilities/equipment
 Climatic conditions
 Environmental factors (mentioned above)
 Psychological factor (motivation)
High altitude training
At higher altitude there is less oxygen as compared
to the lower altitudes. Athletes respond to this by
their bodies producing more red blood cells that
are consequently used in transporting oxygen to
the body parts. In this way they are capable of
running long distance events due to high amount
of oxygen carried in the tissues involved.
Atmospheric pressure is also limited at high
altitude. This explains why explosive events
(anaerobic) are
54
Performed better in high altitude (low air
resistance)
Why athletes move to high altitude for training.
To enhance proper transportation of oxygen to the
muscles.
To increase the RBC in the blood this helps in the
absorption of oxygen.
Increase total volume blood circulation in the
body.
Acclimatization – This is when a player moves to a
given climatic to get used to the condition of that
place (physiological adaptation).
Effects of training in high altitude areas
Breathing becomes deeper.
Volume of blood in circulation increases
The number of RBC increases thus improvement
of oxygen in the blood.
Increase in pulmonary ventilation, which help to
burn out of lactic acid.
Increase the muscles tissue.
Why Kenyans are so good in long distance
races
 Physique (body structure)
 Presence of role models
 Good climate
 Culture / tradition
 Serious training
 Improved training personnel
 Self motivation
 Diet
 Genetic inheritance
Phases of training
(i) Macro-cycle
This is entire training season form on-season to
off-season.
(ii) Meso-cycle
This is a training unit within a meso-cycle e.g. a
lay, a month or a week.
Training principles
(a) Specificity
The training is aimed at specific part of the body
to be used in the activity.
(b) Principle of reversibility
Re-training occurs rapidly when one stops
training.
(c) Principle of interference
Training of one component of fitness might
interfere with another component of fitness e.g.
training for endurance might interfere with
training for strength.
(d) Principle of cross transfer
An example of this is where running to develop
cardio-vascular endurance may also develop
muscular endurance.
(e) Principle of over load
This when the part of the body is worked beyond
normal (physiological stress).
(f) Principle of progression
This requires the over load or physiological stress
to be increased gradually or progressively in
stages.
Training pyramid
Off – season
Pre-season
On-season
Off-season
This period is normally called recovery/rest
period.
It is characterized by:
 Limited participation in specific sport
 Low intensity exercise.
During this season the participants are given
time to:
 Replace the energy consumed during the
competition time and also to allow for the
healing process to take place
 To break the monotony of the game
 To avoid effects of training.
Diet for off-season
 Carbohydrate to replace consumed energy
 Proteins and vitamins to repair worn out
tissues and healing injuries.
Pre-season
This is the season just before the competition.
The trainer should emphasize on physical
conditioning.
55
of the body i.e develop component physical fitness
and skill development sports.
Diet
Carbohydrates, proteins, vitamins
On-season
This is the competition time where emphasis is
laid on quality performance. There is also
building of energy capacity and fine skill
development. It also involves psychological
preparation for events to come. The presence of
the coach is highly required.
Diet.
Foods containing all food nutrients.
EXERCISE PHYSIOLOGY
 Effects of training/exercise to the growth
and development of all child.
 Improves physical fitness.
 Improve body posture
 Helps to correct defects at an early stage
before they become pronounced e.g.
lordiosis, kyophosis, knock-knee
 Help fasten growth of new body cells so
that the child grows up faster/increase of
red blood cells.
 Improves the character of the growing
child i.e. positive attitudes.
 Relaxation of the child’s mind, which
helps to reduce tensions, which can result
from psychological illness e.g. hysteria,
stress.
 Improves proper functioning of all the
body organs and systems.
 Progressively gain body co-ordination,
balance strength and control in movement.
 Getting rid of excess fat in the body.
Effects of training to human muscles
 Help to eliminate lactic acid
 Make the muscles to increase in size
(hypertrophy)
 Reduce stress within the muscles
 Muscles are able to operate for a longer
period of time without getting fatigue.
 Increases muscles strength.
 Muscles become tough and firm.
 Improves metabolism.
 Reduces muscles injuries.
 Dilation of blood vessels hence better
blood supply to muscles.
 Improve supply of nutrients to the muscles
Effects of training/exercise to human heart
 Increase in cardiac out put
 Decreases heart related diseases e.g.
hypertension, blood pressure.
 Cardiac reserves increases.
 Reduces heart rate, which is a good
indicator of cardio-vascular endurance.
 Increases stroke volume i.e. volume of
blood pumped per beat.
 Increase oxygen intake
 Strengthen heart muscles
 Reduces cholesterol in the heart.
 Improves functioning of the heart.
Effects of training in human lungs
 Proper ventilation of air within the lung
cavity i.e. gaseous exchange is improved.
 Respiratory muscles are strengthened e.g.
diaphragm, internal and external
intercostals muscles.
 Internal capacity improves
 Increase in volume of oxygen absorption in
the blood stream (total lung cavity)
 Minimizes respiratory diseases e.g. T.B,
Cold, Asthma.
 Improves residual volume i.e. the amount
of air remaining in the lungs after
breathing out.
 Breathing system becomes effective and
efficient.
Effects of training to human posture
 Improves postural defects e.g. cardiosis
 Maintains good posture
 Good postural appearance.
Factors affecting human posture
 Fitness level/conditioning
 Disease/illness
 Injuries
 Disability
 Bone structure
 Muscles structure
 Gender/sex.
BODY ANATOMY
56
This is the study of body parts or organs e.g. skin,
bones, blood, joints, muscles etc.
BONES
These are the framework or structure of the body
Functions of the bone
 Gives the shape to the body
 Enables movement of the body
 Provide support to the muscles
 Manufacturing of red blood cells (in the
marrow)
 Protect delicate body organs e.g. skull
protect brain, ribcage protect lung and
heart.
 Act as shock absorber.
Types of bones
 Long bones
 Flat bones
 Irregular bones
 Short bones
SKIN
 This is the outer covering of the body.
 Functions of the skin
 Prevents micro-organism from entering the
body
 Protects delicate body parts
 Store excess fats in adipose tissue
 Absorb vitamin D, which is responsible for
the formation of the strong bones and teeth.
 Helps in regulation of body temperature.
 Protects the body from harmful ultra-violet
ray from the sun.
 Acts as excretory organ by removing waste
like sweat from the body.
 Acts as a sensory organ.
MUSCLES
These are the connective tissues in the body that
controls body movement through the process of
contraction and relaxation. They are made up of
fibres (elongated cells).
TYPES OF MUSCLES
(i) Stripped/skeletal/voluntary
Characteristics
They are und the control of will (CNS)
They are responsible for the co-ordinated
movement e.g. jumping, eating etc.
They have liberal capillary network.
Some of them are antagonistic in nature.
What determines the strength of a muscle
The strength of a muscle is determined by the
number of motor fibres activated at any one given
time.
Reciprocal enervation
This is where one group of muscles are relaxing
and the other group are contracting.
Muscular tone.
This is a case where voluntary muscle is
maintained in a state of tension to allow quick
response to the stimulus.
(ii) Unstripped/smooth/visceral/involuntary
Characteristics
 They are not under the control of CNS
 They are unstripped
 They are very sensitive to mechanical
stimulation.
 They work slowly over a long period of
time
 They are found in internal organs
 They don’t get tired easily.
 Examples include:
 Muscle of the alimentary canal, the eye,
blood vessels.
(iii) Cardiac muscles
These are muscles that make up heart.
Characteristics
 They are not under the control of will.
 Found in the walls of the heart.
 Can work on their own.
 Can maintain 2nd alternate relaxation
without nervous stimulation.
 They are capable of continuing to beat
even when taken out of the body.
Injuries occurring to muscles
-Muscles pull – Muscles strain
-Muscles cramp – Muscles soreness
-Muscles tear
BLOOD
Components of blood
(i) Plasma
(ii) Platelets
(iii) Blood cells
(iv) Fibrins
Functions of blood
Transportation of oxygen in the form of
oxyhaemoglobin.
Transportation of Co2 in the form of
carboxyhaemoglobin.
57
 Contains white blood cells, which helps in
fighting infections.
 Transportation of food nutrients.
 It also transports enzymes and hormones to
parts where they are needed.
 Cools the body temperature due to heat
produced during the exercise.
 It has platelets, which helps in blood
clotting.
 Transports waste products.
JOINTS
This is where two or more bones meet.
Functions of the joint.
 Helps in body movement
 Helps in maintaining body balance
 Absorption of shock
Types of joints
a) Fixed/fibrous joints: these are
immovable joints e.g. skull, teeth.
SOCCER
THE FIELD PLAY
Touch line (110m)
Penalty area
16.5m Penalty arc

7.32m Goal Area
I
Penalty spot
Corner arc R-1m
1. Touch line/side line (110m)
Forms the length of the field
b) Slightly movable/cartilaginous e.g. the
vertebrae column
c) Freely movable joints/synovial joints are joints
which can move freely.
Types of synovial joints
(v) Ball and socket e.g. knee joint,
shoulder
(ii) Hinge joint: e.g elbow
(iii) Gliding joint: vertebral column
(iv) Pivot joint: at the neck, ulna and radius
(vi) saddle joint: lower jaw
Possible movement along the synovial joint
 Bending and flexion (reducing the angle
and the joint)
 Extension (increasing the angle along the
joint)
 Abduction – moving parts of the body
away from the body
 Rotation – movement around the axis
 Circumduction – combination of both
internal and external movement.
16.5m
5.5m

11m
Center circle 5.5m
R – 9.15m
Goal line
(75m)

Substitution takes place along this line
Used during throw in.
58
Where the reams bench and officials bench is
located.
Where the referee assistants operate from.
Center line
Subdivides the field into 2 equal halves.
Substitution takes place along this line.
Place kick takes place along this line
Indicates when the player is offside.
Center circle
Where the players are supposed to be during the
penalty shots.
Where place kick is taken
Goal line (75m)
Forms width of the field
Confirms the score
Where the goal post is fixed.
Indicates when a corner kick is to be awarded.
Goal area/box (5.5m x 18.32m)
This where the goalkeeper can’t be charged while
handling the ball.
Penalty area (40.32 x 16.5m)
Where the goalkeeper enjoys privileges e.g.
handling the ball.
The opponents should be outside this area during
goal kick.
The ball is considered to be in play once it moves
out of this area during foal kick.
If a player commits any of the ten penal offences
within this area then penalty kick is awarded to the
opponents.
Penalty are (R – 9.15m)
Helps to maintain the opponents away from the
goal at a distance of 9.15m during penalty kick.
Penalty spot
11m from the goal line where the ball is placed
during penalty kick.
MAIN LAWS OF THE GAME
LAW 1.
The ball
Spherical and made if leather or other suitable
materials.
Circumference between 68cm – 70cm
Weight between 410g – 450g.
2. Flag posts
Placed in all the 4 corners
Should be 1.5m high
3. Goal posts
Two upright posts measuring 2.44m
Cross bar measuring 7.32m. All the posts should
be painted black and white.
Net should be fixed for the purpose of:
(i) Confirming the score
(ii) Avoid a lot of disputes
(iii) Avoid wastage of time be preventing the ball
from going far.
LAW: 2
Players’ equipment
A player should not use any equipment or wear
anything that is dangerous to himself or another
player. Basic/compulsory equipment include
Jersey/shirt
Shorts
Stockings
Shin guards
Foot wear
Goalkeeper’s gloves
Each goalkeeper wears a colour that distinguishes
him from other players and the referee.
LAW 3
Number of players
A match is played with two teams each consisting
of players not exceeding 11 of whom one is
designed to be a goalkeeper. A match may not
start if either of the teams is having less than 7
players. Between 3 & 5 substitutions may be
made depending on the competition. The names
prior to the start of the game.
Any other player may change place with the
goalkeeper provided that:
The referee is informed the change is made
The change is made during a stoppage.
LAW 4:
Officials
Referee
Enforces the laws of the game
Ensures that the ball meets the requirement.
59
Controls the match with the assistant referees:
Ensures that the players equipment meet the
requirement.
Acts as a timekeeper and keeps the records of the
match.
Stops, suspends or terminate the match, at his
discretion for any infringement of the law.
Stops, suspends or terminate the match at his
discretions because of outside interference of any
kind.
Stops the match if a player is seriously injured and
ensures that he is removed from the field.
Allow the play to continue until the ball is out of
play of if a player is slightly injured.
Punishes more serious offences if a player
commits more than one offence at a time.
Takes disciplinary actions against a player guilty
of caution able and sending off offences.
Acts on the advice of assistant referee on the
incidents that he has not seen.
Restarts the match after if had been stopped.
NB/ Decisions of the referee regarding facts
concerned with the play are final.
Assistant referees
Two assistant referees are appointed whose duties
include indication of the following:
When the ball is out of the field of play, which
side is entitled to corner kick, goal kick and throw
in.
When a player may be penalized for being offside.
When substitution is requested.
When misconduct or any other incidence has
occurred out of the view of the referee.
(c) Match commission
He is the representative of the
federation/organization organizing the tournament.
He writes the report on how the game progressed
and incase of any incident he reports to the
federation.
(d) Fourth official (substitution referee)
Assist referee in general administrative duties e.g.
inspecting players’ equipment, facilities and
registering players.
He helps to enforce substitution.
Incase the center referee is incapacitated he can
take the whistle.
Qualities of a good referee
Physical fit
Conversant with the latest rules of the game
Good eye sight
Sympathetic
Friendly and cheerful
Firm in decision making
Should not be biased.
LAW 5
Duration of the match
The match lasts two equal periods lasting 45
minutes each.
Players are entitled to a resting interval of 15
minutes during half time. Allowances for time
lost is made in either period for all time lost
through:
Substitution
Assessment of injuries
Removal of injured players
Wasting time
During penalty kick.
LAW 6:
Start and restart of the play
A coin is tossed and the team that wins decides on
which goal it will attack in the 1st half. The other
team takes the kick off (place kick). The team
wins the coin takes the kick off in the 2nd half.
Place kick (kick off)
It is administered in the following instances:
At the start of the match
After a goal has been scored.
At the start of each period of the extra time where
applicable.
A goal may be scored directly from a place kick.
After a team scores a goal the other team takes the
kick off.
Procedure
All players at there respective halves of the field
of play.
Ball at the center spot.
The team starting lines up along the center b
within the center circle.
Opponents outside the center circle and must
maintain a distance of 9.15m from the ball.
Ball considered being in play once it moves
forward.
A player cannot pass the ball to himself.
60
Drop ball
This is a way of restarting the match after a
temporary stoppage. The referee drops the ball at
the point where it was located.
Cases when awarded.
 When there is simultaneous offence.
 When there is technical problem e.g.
basting of the ball
 External interference e.g. spectator
invading the court.
 When referee is uncertain of the player
who has committed the offence.
 When the game was stopped due to bad
weather.
 When the game was stopped when
lowering national flag.
 Stoppage in case of injuries.
Procedures
Done at the point where the incident occurred.
Two opposing players stand facing each other and
hands straight along side their body.
Referee drops the ball down considering the waist
of the shorter player.
The ball is considered to be in play once it touches
the ground.
LAW 7
Ball in and out of play
Ball out of play
If it has wholly crossed the goal line or touchline
whether in air or on ground.
When play has been stopped by referee.
Bal in play
The moment referee blows the whistle for the
game to commence during place kick and throw
in.
When the ball hits the ground during drop ball.
When the ball moves forward during corner kick.
When ball hits goal post, corner flag, referee or
referee assistant who is standing in the field.
When the ball moves out of the penalty area
during goal kick.
LAW 8:
Method of scoring
A goal is scored when the whole ball passes over
the goal line in between the upright post and under
the cross bar. If both teams score equal
Number of goals or no goals scored, the match is
drawn.
For matches ending in a draw, competition rules
may state provisions involving extra time or other
procedure to determine the winner.
LAW 9:
OFFSIDE
Offside position
It is not an offence in itself to be in an offside
position.
A player is in offside position if he is nearer to his
opponents’ goal line than the ball and the 2nd last
opponent.
A player is not offside position if:
 He is in his own half of the field of play
 He is in level with the 2nd last opponent
 He is in level with the last 2 opponents.
Offences
A player in offside position is only penalized if , at
the moment the ball touches or is played by one of
his team mate, he is in the opinion of the referee
involved in active play by:
 Interfering with the play
 Interfering with the opponent
 Gaining an advantage by being in that
position.
No offences
There is no offside offence if a player receives a
ball directly from:
 Goal kick
 Corner kick
 Throw in
For any offside offence the referee awards an
indirect free kick at the place where the
infringement occurred.
LAW 10:
Fouls and misconducts
Fouls —these are offences due to a player
breaking the law of the game.
Misconduct – these are offences due to a player
displaying unsportsman like behaviour or playing
contrary to the game to the spirit of the game.
They are penalized as follows:
a) Direct free kick
Awarded to opposing team if a player commits
any of the following offences (ten penal offences)
 Kicking or attempt to kick an opponent.
61
 Tripping or attempt to trip an opponent.
 Jumping at an opponent
 Charges at an opponent
 Strike or attempt to strike an opponent.
 Pushes an opponent
 Tackles an opponent making contact with
the opponent first before touching the ball.
 Holds an opponent.
 Spits at an opponent.
 Handles the ball deliberately (except
goalkeeper)
Penalty Kick
This awarded if any of the above offences are
committed inside a player’s penalty area
intentionally.
Procedure
 Ball is placed at the penalty spot.
 All other players outside the penalty are
except the kicker.
 Goalkeeper to remain stationary along the
goal line until the kick is taken.
 The ball should be kicked once and in
forward direction.
c) Indirect kick
This is awarded to the opposing team if a player,
in the opinion of the referee, commits any of the
following offences.
 Plays in dangerous manner.
 Impedes the progress of an opponent.
 Prevents the goalkeeper form releasing the
ball from his hands.
It is also awarded to the opposing team, if a
goalkeeper inside his own penalty area commits
any of the following offences:
 Takes more than 4 steps or 6 seconds while
controlling the ball with his hands before
releasing it from his possession.
 Touches the ball again with his hands after
it has been released from his possession
and has not been touched by any other
player.
 Touches the ball with his hands after it has
been deliberately kicked to him by a
teammate.
 Wastes time.
d) Disciplinary sanctions
Yellow card
This is shown when a player commits any of the
following offences.
Is guilty of unsporting behaviour.
 Shows dissent by word or action
 Persistently infringes the law of the game
 Delays the restart of the play
 Fails to respect the distance required when
play is restarted a corner kick or free kick.
 Enters or re-enters the field or play without
referee’s permission.
 Deliberately leaves the field of play
without referee’s permission.
e) Sending – off offences
Red-card
 This is shown to a player who commits any
of the following offences:
 Is guilty of serious foul play
 Is guilt of violent conduct.
 Spits at an opponent or any other person.
 Denies an opponent a goal or an obvious
scoring opportunity by deliberately
handling the ball (this does not apply to
goal keeper within his own penalty area.)
 Denies an obvious goal scoring
opportunity to an opponent moving
towards the player’s goal by an offence
punishable by free kick or penalty kick.
 Uses offensive, insulting or abusive
language
 Receive a second caution (yellow card) in
the same match.
LAW 11
Throw in
This method of restarting a play awarded when a
whole ball passes over the touchline either on the
ground or in the air. It is awarded to opponent of
the player who lastly touched the ball.
A goal cannot be scored directly from throwin.
Conditions to be observed:
 Should be taken at the point where it
crossed the touchline.
 Opponents should be 9.15m away from the
ball.
 The player cannot pas the ball to himself.
 Ball must be delivered from behind and
overhead.
 The thrower should note the field of play
before releasing the ball.
LAW 12
Goal kick
This is a method of restarting a play.
62
It is awarded when the whole ball, having lastly
been touched by a player of the attacking team and
passes over the goal line either on the ground or in
air and the goal is not scored as per law 8.
Procedure
 The ball is placed on top of the goal area
line.
 All the opponents outside the penalty area.
 A goal may be scored directly from the
goal kick.
LAW 13
Corner kick
This is a method of restarting a play
It is awarded when the whole ball having last been
touched by a player of the defending team passes
over the goal line and a goal is not scored in
accordance with law 8.
A goal may be scored from corner kick.
Procedure
 The ball is placed at the corner arc.
 Opponents 9.15m away from the ball.
 Flag should not be removed.
 A player can’t be offside during corner
kick.
 A player cannot pass a ball to himself.
LAW 14.
Kicks from penalty mark (penalty shoot out).
Taking kicks from a penalty mark is a method of
determining a winning team where the competition
requires a winning team after the match have been
drawn.
Procedure
 Referee chooses the goal at which the
kicks shall be taken.
 Referee tosses a coin and the team for the
winning captain takes the first kick.
 Referee keeps a record of kicks taken.
 Each team takes 5 kicks alternatively.
 If both teams have taken 5 kicks and one
has scored more goals than the other could
score, even if it were to complete 5 kicks
no more kicks are taken.
 If after both teams have taken 5 kicks, both
have scored same number of goal, kick
continue until one team has scored a goal
more than the other from the same number
of kicks.
 Each kick is taken by a different player and
all eligible players must take a kick before
a player takes a second kick.
 All players except the player taking the
kick and the two goalkeepers must remain
within the center circle.
BASIC SKILLS OF THE GAME
1. GOALKEEPING
A good goalkeeper should have knowledge on the
following:
Panting: this when a goalkeeper catches the ball
and does not take 4 steps of 6 seconds before
tossing the ball in air and kicking it.
Narrowing the angle: this is moving from the goal
line towards the attacker with the ball.
Other skills require of a goalkeeper are diving and
grip.
2. HEADING
Heading skills that can be used by a player
include:
Side head
Forward head
Back head.
Reasons for heading
To score
To give a pass
To control the ball
3. PASSING
This is the application of small amount of force on
the ball in order to reach the other teammate. Part
of the foot used in passing include:
 Inside of the foot.
 Instep
 Toe
 Heel
 Outside of the foot.
Types of passes
 Wall pass
 Through pass
 Square pass
 Diagonal pass
 Inter pass
4. KICKING
This is the application of great force on the ball
using your foot to go up the field or to shoot.
Types of passes
a) Banana/curve/swerve.
b) Scissors/orthodox
c) Volley kick
Half — ball lands first, bounce and then hit.
Full—ball is hit before it lands
d) Chip/loft: raising over the goalkeeper.
63
5. TACKLING
This involves getting the ball away from an
opponent.
 Styles of tackling
 Linear tackling
 Sliding
 Frontal
 Heading
 Rear.
6. DRIBBLING
This is moving with the ball under control by short
controlled taps.
Types of dribbling
Single leg/open
Double leg/closed
Reasons for dribbling
To advance with the ball
To give teammate room to open
To beat an opponent
To create a clear chance of scoring
To cover the distance.
7. SHIELDING/SCREENING

1. Goal keeper 7. Outside right
2. Right full back 8. Inside right
3. Left full back 9. Center forward
4. Left half back 10. Inside left
5. Center back 11. Outside left
6. Right half back
Formations (playing systems)
(i) Classic formation: 2-3-5
(ii) WM formation: 3-2-2-3
(iii) 4-2-4
(iv) Sweeper system: 1-4-3-2
(v) 5-3-2
(vi) 4-4-2
This is putting the ball away from the opponent by
leaning on the ball without causing obstruction.
8. BALL CONTROL
(a) Trapping
This is applied when controlling aerial balls
though the ball is not completely controlled. Parts
used in trapping the ball include: Head, shoulder,
thigh, heel, instep and sole.
(b) Stopping
Used to control the ball completely dead. Parts
used include; shoulder, instep, inside of the foot
and outside of the foot.
9. JUGGLING
Tapping the ball in air using several parts of the
body.
10. DODGING/FEINTING/FAKING
This is anticipating the opponent to go in the
wrong direction.
PLAY POSITIONS
Qualities of a good goalkeeper
 Reasonably tall
 Good reaction to time
 Courageous
 Swift
 Good grip
 Good eye sight
 Strong
Qualities of mid fielders
 Good ball dribbling
 Good ball distribution/passing
 Should be swift.
Qualities of full back
 Good timing/reaction time
 Enduring
 Good tackling technique
 Strong shots/kicks
Qualities of forward players
 Very fast
 Good accurate shots
 Good reaction time
 Good ball control.

English Topical Questions And Answers

ENGLISH

FUNCTIONAL WRITING SKILLS

  1. Imagine that you have completed secondary education. You have come across an advertisement in one of the daily newspaper that required clerical The email address of the Company    is [email protected]. You are interested in the job. Write one page                        curriculum vitae (C.V)                        using the e-mail address of the company

 

  1. You are the Secretary of your School’s Drama Your club is holding its second meeting of

the year to discuss the following issues:-

  • Tour to Nairobi
  • Awareness campaign
  • Strengthening of drama in the school

Two people have sent their apologies and a member from the writer’s club has also attended the

meeting. Write the minutes you could take at the meeting

  1. Imagine you are the managing directors of Alroki industries You manufacture padlocks and of late, there has been a lot of bad press concerning your products. Write an

 

internal            memorandum to your operations manger and sales and marketing manager. Advise them on            what should be done to counter the bad press and also recapture and retain your market share.

 

  1. You have finished reading the play An Enemy of the people by Henric Ibsen and you would like to recommend it to your In about 350 words, write the book

review

 

 

 

  1. You are the principal of Baraka Teachers Training College and one of your graduates Christopher Lipwoni has applied for employment as a teacher at Lirhanda boarding primary school. The head teacher of that primary school has send you an email requesting you to avail       more information about Mr. Christopher Lipwoni to enable the school decide whether to employ                                                                                                                       him or not. In the space provided below, write a sample report that you intend to email to the head           teacher. Remember to copy the report to the DEO Kakamega East District

 

 

  1. Imagine that you have been put in charge of a farewell party for your Write a recipe for the meal you would prepare for the occasion.

 

 

  1. Imagine that you are the library captain in your school. Write a memo to the class prefects asking them to ensure that students observe the library rules, especially regarding silence, prompt return            of books, appropriate dressing and observing opening and closing

 

 

  1. You are invited to give a speech on the role of the youth in fostering peace in your country by a friend You are unable to travel due to unforeseen circumstances. E-mail your speech to your friend to present it on your behalf.

 

 

  1. You are revising with your friend over the April On reaching school in May, you realize that one of your books, Top Mark English is missing. Write a fax to your friend in a

neighbouring school requesting for the book he had borrowed from you

 

  1. You have just read a novel entitled The ModernGirl by a famous You want to recommend it to a friend who has asked you to briefly tell him why you found the text interesting. Write with appropriate sub headings, a review of the text convincing your friend to read it.

 

  1. Imagine you live in Mumias, an average town in Western Kenya. The National Music Festivals are set to be held in this town for five days. Your friend who lives in Webuye

town    intends to come over.

  1. a) Give them clear directions to Nabongo cultural centre in Mumias Make your instructions

as precise (one page) and clear as possible – you could use land marks, well known

means of

transport, show distance in kilometers e.t.c.

 

 

 

  1. Imagine you are the school captain, and the CDF committee wishes to set up a project in your The principal has asked you to organize with the prefects to collect students

views on the most appropriate project. Write an internal memo to the concerned prefects.20mks)

 

 

  1. Imagine that you have done K.C.S.E exams, qualified and done some training in a professional You have seen an advertisement in “Sunday mirage” Newspaper of a position you qualify      for. You then decide to apply for it. Write your Own curriculum            vitae (C.V)

 

 

  1. Write a letter to the clerk of your local council complaining about the loud music in the bars

 

where you live. Indicate how residents spend sleepless nights due to the loud music, and what you think  should be done

 

  1. You have been selected to deliver a speech on Parent’s day on behalf of other students. Apart

 

from teachers, parents and students, there are several guests present as well as members of

Board of Governors. You are expected to highlight the challenges facing students population in

the school. Write the speech you would deliver.                                                  (20 mks)

 

 

 

  1. An Italian friend who had come to visit you left for his country a few weeks ago. He writes to inform you of his safe arrival and requests you for a recipe that would help him prepare ugali for his two Write him through this address; [email protected]

 

 

  1. The lions football team has won the just completed world cup You are the coach. Write a memo congratulating them and informing them on when/how to collect their tokens. Remember to have copies to the minister of sports.

(20mks)

 

 

 

A – IMAGINATIVE

 

 

 

  1. Either

 

  1. Write a composition ending with the words: The events of the previous day left me

 

challenged to begin a new life

 

Or

 

  1. Write a composition entitled “Love conquers all”

 

  1. Either

 

  • Write a composition to illustrate the saying “Do not count your chicks before they are hatched”

Or

 

  • Write a story ending; “Since then my brother and I have been good friends”

 

  1. IMAGINATIVE COMPOSITION (Compulsory)

 

Either

 

  1. Write a composition beginning “Everybody was very excited, little did we know that at that moment………….

Or

 

  1. Write a composition to illustrate the saying “A bird in hand is worth two in the ”

 

 

 

 

  1. Either

 

  1. Write a story ending with the following sentence: “……..thank you it was only a ”

 

 

 

 

 

with

Or

 

  1. Write a composition to illustrate the saying: “A journey of one thousand miles begins

 

 

one step.”

 

 

  1. Either

 

  • Write a composition ending:

 

…………….from that day, when ever I see him my heart is filled with bitterness.

or

 

  • Write a story to illustrate the proverb: ‘ Once bitten twice ’

 

  1. Either

 

  1. Write a story beginning:

 

He steadily walked towards me with a broad, warm smile, but as we shook hands, I realized he was avoiding eye contact…………….

Or

 

  1. Write a composition to illustrate the saying:

 

“Those who live in glass houses should not throw stones.”

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Imaginative Composition (compulsory)

 

Either;

 

  • Write a story to end with the following sentence:-

 

…………………If I had known, I would have thought twice before making that statement.

 

Or;

 

  • Write a story to illustrate the following saying:- You reap what you
  1. Either

 

  • Write an essay to illustrate the saying: “The early bird catches the worm”.

 

Or

 

  • Write a story beginning: There was an air of ..
  1. Either

 

  • Write a composition ending:

 

…………….from that day, when ever I see him my heart is filled with bitterness.

or

 

  • Write a story to illustrate the proverb: ‘ Once bitten twice ’

 

 

  1. Either

 

  1. Writeastoryending

 

I realized that I would never have a second chance in life

 

Or

 

  1. Write a story to illustrate the following saying “A tortoise may be slow but he seldom falls”

 

  1. Either

 

  1. Write a story beginning with

 

“It looked quite easy at first………………….. ”

 

Or

 

  1. Write a story to illustrate the proverb; Too many cooks spoil the broth

 

 

 

  1. Either

 

  1. Write a story that illustrate the saying:-a bird in hand is worth two in the bush

 

Or

 

  1. Write a composition beginning with the sentence:-from the outset one could see that a lot

was a waiting us.

 

  1. Either

 

  • Write a composition beginning with the following sentence: ‘John could not stand up by himself that particular morning’

Or

 

  • Write a composition on the measures that have been taken in your country to preserve forests

 

 

  1. Either,

 

  1. Write a composition with the following ending;

 

………………that experience taught me never to wish to be somebody else.

(20mks)

 

Or:

 

  1. Write a story to illustrate the saying “You cannot climb the ladder of success with your hands in the ” (20mks)

 

  1. Either

 

  • Write a composition ending “The events of that day will remain printed in my mind for ”

Or

 

  • Write a composition supporting the statement “Charity begins at ”

 

  1. Either

 

  • Write a composition showing that the strong do not always

 

Or

 

  • Write a story ending with: I wish I had known

 

 

  1. Either

 

  1. Write a story illustrating the saying, ‘Better to have tried and failed than never to have tried at all’

Or

 

  1. Write a story with the following beginning:

 

This was no ordinary day for a child orphaned by HIV and AIDS. Never before had the future looked…………..

 

 

1.

 

THE HARE  

 

The hare was always laughing at the tortoise because he walked so slowly. “Really I don’t know why you bother to go at all,” she sneered. ‘By the time you get there it will all be over-whatever it is.’

The tortoise laughed. “I may be slow.’ He said, ‘but I bet I can get to the end of the field before you can. If you want to race, ill prove it to you.’

Expecting an easy victory the hare agreed and she bounced off as fast as she could go. The tortoise plodded steadily after her.

 

Now it was in the middle of a very hot sunny day and before long, the hare started to feel a little drowsy. I think ill just take a short nap under this hedge. ‘She said to herself.’ Even if the tortoise passed by ill catch him up in a flash. The hare lay down in the shade and was soon fast a sleep. The tortoise plodded on under the midday sun. Much later, the hare awoke. It was later than she had intended but she looked round confidently ‘No sign of old tortoise, I see, even if I did have rather more than forty winks.’

Away she went, running through the short grass and the growing corn, leaping ditches and brambles with ease. In a very short time she turned the last corner and paused for a moment to look at the place where the rope was to end. There, not a yard from the finishing line was the tortoise, plodding steadily on. One foot after another, nearer and nearer to the end of the race.

With a great bounce the hare streaked forward. It was too late. Though she threw herself panting over the line , the tortoise was there before her.

‘Now do you believe me?’ Asked the tortoise. But the hare was too out of breath to reply.

 

 

 

 

  1. Classify the above narrative

 

  1. Why did the hare always laugh at tortoise?

 

  • Why did the hare feel drowsy?

 

 

  1. What made it possible for hare to lose the race?

 

  1. Try to picture yourself as the story teller charged with the responsibility of narrating this

 

particular story. What story telling devises would you employ?

 

  1. Why did the tortoise laugh at Hare’s comment?

 

 

  • Describe how tortoise’s own words “…. I may be slow but I bet I can get to the end of the

 

fields before you can…..”eventually proved to be true.

 

  • Mention any two moral lessons you can learn from this story

 

 

  1. POETRY

 

 CRAZY PETER PRATTLES

 

 

 

So what is the mountain deal about the minister’s ailing son that he makes boiling news?

 

How come it was not whispered

 

when Tina’s hospital bed crawled with maggots

 

and her eyes              pus

 

because the doctors lacked gloves?

 

 

What about Kasajja’s only child

 

who died because the man with the key to the oxygen room was on leave?

 

I have seen queues

 

 

of

 

babies with faint in line

mothers clinging to

 

skins

 

and the lioness of a nurse commanding tersely

“Get up or leave the line’

 

 

Didn’t I hear it rumoured that the man with the white mane and black robes

whose mouth stores the justice of the land ushered a rape case out of court

because the seven-year-old failed to testify?

 

Anyway, I only remember these things when I drink,

they are indeed tipsy explosion

 

 

(CrazyPeterPrattles’by Susan Nalugwa Kiguli in EchoesAcrosstheValley: Ed. Arthur

  1. Luvai and Kwamchetsi Makokha)

 

 

  • What problems are highlighted in the poem about the state of health care?

 

  • What is the significance of the rhetorical question in the first stanza?

 

  • Pick out any two images in this poem and explain their significance

 

  • (i) Identify the problem that the fifth stanza deals with

 

(ii) How does this connect with the problems in the previous stanzas?

 

  • Explain the meaning of the following words as they are used in the poem

 

 

  • Oozed ….

 

(ii) Emaciated………………..

 

(iii) Translucent ..

 

  • What is the significance of the last stanza?

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

I MET A THIEF

 

 

 

On the beach, on the coast,

 

Under the idle, whispers coconut towers, Before the growling, foaming, waves,

I met a thief, who guessed I had An innocent heart for her to steal.

 

She took my hand and led me under,

 

The intimate cashew boughs which shaded The downy grass and peeping weeds

She jumped and plucked the nuts for me to suck: She sang and laughed and pressed close

 

I gazed; her hair was like the wool of a mountain sheep, Her eyes, a pair of brown –black beans floating in milk.

Juicy and round as plantain shoots

 

Her legs, arms and neck:

 

And like wine-gourds her pillowy breasts:

 

Her throat uttered fresh banana juice:

 

Matching her face-smooth and banana-ripe.

 

 

I touched-but long I even tasted,

 

My heart had flowed from me into her beast:

 

And then she went-high and south-

 

And left my carcass roasting in thee

 

 

  1. Who is the persona?

 

  1. What is the relevance of the title?

 

  1. Paraphrase the last stanza

 

  1. Identify and explain the significance of the three stylist devices employed in the poem

 

  1. Of what race is the ‘thief’ in the poem?

 

  1. Explain the meaning of the line ‘an innocent heart for her to steal’

 

  1. Identify one economic activity portrayed in the poem

 

 

 

4.

 

THE PROSTITUTE

 

There I see her coming With borrowed steps Like a coward ghost

Out of grass covered graveyard

 

She comes Bearing no more

That attractive dames Cover like soft babes

 

These

 

She has exposed to bitter weather and lusty eyes.

 

There I see her coming like a nestles bird

that enters any nest for a transient stay at times

finding snakes or hostile hawks

There I see her coming like a black jack

a poisonous pest

 

that infects the city’s plantation diseasing the young

and old plant

 

 

There I see her

 

coiling herself around tourists and bosses like a parasitic climbing plant

 

 

 

There I see her coming from the back door like a forged coin

that assumes the high value yet always hounded by spies

 

I stand to see her

 

when the forged coin is found when the immigration birds are back in their nests

or when the dog

 

that it constantly feeds on is washed with DDT

or when the dog is dead on a tarmac road

and when the stems are cut in the dry windy season

 

  1. Name FOUR things the person referred to as ‘her’ has been likened

 

  1. What is the main theme of the poem? Explain with suitable examples

 

  1. What is the attitude of the poet towards the subject of the poem? Illustrate using words or

 

phrase from the poem?

 

 

  1. Identify three stylistic devices used in the poem and show their effectiveness in bringing out

the poet’s message.

 

 

(e) Explain the meaning of the last stanza – what mood does it express?

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5.

 

 

There lived once a wicked chief. Nobody liked him, because of his wickedness. He was wicked to old men and women. By pretending to be kind he tried to be popular to young men who lived in that country. When the chief won over young men, they all liked him.

 

One day, the chief called all the young men and told them, “My friends, don’t you see?” They asked, “What?” you should kill all of them. Everybody should kill his father.”

Ah: (that they should kill their fathers). As a result, everybody whose father was old brought him to be killed. This one went and brought him to be killed. This one went and brought him to be killed, the other went brought his father to be killed. They killed all the old men, leaving one only.

He was a father of a man who said no. “Why should the chief kill all old men and why would I send my father to be killed?” He got down and went to dig a large hole and concealed it nicely. He sent his father there, where he had dug. He fetched wood and put it across and coved it with soil, making a small hole for air to pass through. At that time, they had finished to kill all the old men.

 

When the chief finished executing them, he then called all the young men. “My friends we have now finished killing all our old men. This is a cow I am giving to you. I am so happy we have got rid of these old men, so go and kill the cow. When you have killed the cow, cut the best part of its meat and bring it to me. If you don’t bring it, you yourself are not safe.”(That is all right) eh;

The young men rushed out and slaughtered the cow, which is the best part of the meat of a cow? They were worried

They went and cut the liver and sent it to him. He asked whether or not that was the best part of the meat. They answered yes. They added part of the bile. He said that wasn’t the best part of the meat and they should go and find it quickly. The people became more worried.

Every night the young man secretly took food to his father. One day he took food to his father, who asked about the news of the town. He said, “My father, now we are suffering. When we killed all the old men, the chief gave us a cow to go and kill. When we killed the cow, he said we must both find the sweetest and the best part of the meat and bring to him, that if we do not bring them, we are not safe ourselves. This is what is worrying us.” The old man laughed, but asked him if he knew the sweetest part of the meat. He said no. He again asked if he did not know the bitterest part. He said no. “Then the sweetest and the bitterest is the tongue. When you go, cut the tongue and sent it to him and say that is the sweetest part of the meat and the bitterest.”

The man rushed home while all the people sat down, undecided about what to do. If something had not happened they might have thrown the whole meat away and run away. When the boy arrived he said, “My friends take the tongue of the cow in.” they cut the tongue for him, and he took it to the chief’s palace.

He went and threw it down and said, “Chief, see the sweetest part of the meat and the bitterest part also.”

The chief sat down quietly and finally said, “You did not kill your father. Speak the truth. You have not killed your father.”

He said, “It is the truth, I didn’t kill him. When all the other men were killing their own fathers I went and hid mine.”

He said, “You are the son of a wise old man. The sweetest and the bitterest part of a meat is the tongue. As for that all these young men are fools. Why should somebody send his father to be killed? But if you want the sweetest part of the meat, find the tongue, were it not for your tongue, you would not have an enemy: it is also because of your tongue that you will not have a friend.”

 

  1. Classify the above narrative

 

  1. State any two characteristics of oral narratives present in the narrative above

 

  1. Identify and discuss any two characteristics traits of the chief and any one character of the young man (who didn’t kill the father)

 

  1. Explain any moral lesson that can be learned from this narrative

 

  1. Give one economic activity practices by the community from which this narrative was taken
  2. Identify any two styles in the oral narrative

 

  1. Why do you think the chief wanted all the old men to be killed?

 

 

 

  1. Read

 

Would you know my name if I saw you in heaven? Would it be the same if I saw you in heaven?

I must be strong and carry on, cause I know I don’t belong here in heaven.

 

 

Would you hold my hand if I saw you in heaven? Would you help me stand if I saw you in heaven?

I’ll find my way through night and day, cause I know I can’t just stay here in heaven

 

 

Time can bring you down, time can bend your knees

 

Time can break the heart; have you ‘begging’ “please” ‘begging’ “please” Beyond the door there’s peace, I’m sure

And I know there will be no more tears in heaven. Would you know my name if I saw you in heaven? Would you be the same if I saw you in heaven?

 

I must be strong and carry on, cause I know I don’t belong here in heaven. ‘Cause I know I don’t belong here in heaven.

 

  1. What is the subject matter of this poem? Illustrate your answer

 

  1. Identify and illustrate the feature of style evident in stanza three

 

  1. Give and illustrate two examples of the persona’s statements to illustrate his attitude of admiration

 

  1. What is the implication of rhetorical questions beings set in conditional tenses?

 

 

  1. What is the personas imagination of life in heaven?
  2. In note form, give the main item of the last stanza

 

 

  1. Explainthemeaningofthefollowingphrasesasusedinthepoem

 

  1. Hold my hand…… –

 

  1. Break the heart……

 

  • No more tears………

 

 

 

 

 

7.

*UGU*You see that Benz sitting at the rich’s end?

 

Ha! That Motoka is Motoka.

 

It belongs to the minister for fairness Who yesterday was loaded with doctorate

At Makerere with whisky and I don’t know what Plus I hear the literate thighs of an undergraduate.

 

You see those market women gaping their mouths? The glory of its inside has robbed them of words

I tell you the feathery seats the gold steering The TV the radio station the gear!

He can converse with all the world presidents While driving in the back seat with his darly Between his legs without the driver seeing a thing! Ha! Ha! Ha!

 

Look at the driver chasing the children away They want to see the pistol in the door pocket

Or the button that lets out bullets from the machine Through the eyes of the car – Sshhhhhhhhh

Lets not talk about it.

 

 

But I tell you that Motoka can run

 

It sails like a lijato, speeds like a swallow And doesn’t know anyone stupid on its way The other day I heard

But look at its behind, that mother of twins! A-ah That Motoka is Motoka.

 

You just wait, I’ll tell you more But let me first sell my tomatoes

(ByTHEOLUZUKA)

 

 

(a)        Who is the persona?

 

 

  1. Briefly explain what the poem is all

 

  1. Identify any two stylistic devices used in the

 

  1. Explain the character of the market women as portrayed in the

 

 

  1. Explain the meaning of the following lines as used in the

 

 

  1. Ha! That Motoka is

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

the

  1. The glory of its inside has robbed them of the

 

  • But look at its behind, that mother of *UGU*

 

  1. Describethetoneofthepoemandcommentonthepersona’sattitudetowards

 

 

minister forfairness.

 

 

  1. Identify the economic activity of the people portrayed in this

 

 

 

 

 

8.

 

AFTER A WAR

 

The outcome? Conflicting rumours As to what faction murdered

The one man who, had he survived Might have ruled us without corruption Not that it matters now:

We’re busy collecting the dead

 

Counting them, hard though it is To be sure what side they were on

What’s left of their bodies and faces Tells of no need but for burial

And mutilations was practiced By right, left and centre alike As for the children and women Who knows what they wanted Apart from the usual things?

Food is scarce now, and men are scarce Whole villages burnt to the ground

New cities in disrepair

 

The war is over, somebody must have won Somebody will have won. When peace is declared

 

  • According to the poem, what are the consequences of war?

 

 

  • What techniques has the poet employed and what are their effects?

 

 

  • What is the poet’s attitude towards war?

 

 

  • Explainthemeaningofthefollowinglines:-

 

  • Food is scarce now, men are scarce*KSW*

 

  • Whole villages burnt to the ground

 

  • From the poem, why would you say that war is a no win situation?

 

  • What’s the mood of the poem?

 

 

 

 

 

9.

 

Long ago, man tamed only the dog. Before he started taming any other animal, it was said that the donkey could also be tamed. This story came from one hunter.

One day while hunting, this hunter killed a large animal, which was too heavy for him to carry along. So, as he wondered how to carry his kill he saw a donkey pass nearby and an idea came to his mind. “Why not place this carcass on the donkey so that it can help me?” he wondered. He did not know what would happen if he tried this because the donkey was also a wild animal. Nevertheless he decided to try.

So he followed the donkey and luring it with sweet words and grass, the donkey allowed him to place his load on its back without resistance. He then led the way until they arrived home. After unloading the donkey, he gave it more grass and some water. It ate and drunk and appeared happy. From that day, the donkey never left the hunter’s homestead; and he gave the donkey food and drink daily. The donkeys multiplied and there were many donkeys in this homestead, all helping the hunter to carry his loads. Soon, the story went round that somebody had tamed a donkey, which he was using as a beast of burden. Villagers came to see for themselves and they were impressed with the way the hunter’s donkeys were working. Having satisfied their curiosity, they also went out into the wild to look for donkeys to tame. The donkey became a famous beast of burden in the whole village and beyond, carrying all the heavy loads that men and women could not even lift with assistance.

As all this was happening, the donkeys which were left in the wild did not know what was going on. They would only see their friends go away with men and women never to return. They came to understand that they had been deserted only after most of their friends had been taken away. The few who were left started to hide deep in the woods to avoid any contact with human beings. But their efforts to hide were all in vain! Human beings had realized that donkeys were very useful animals. So they made every possible effort to catch them even from deep in the forest.

This problem disturbed the wild donkeys. Many of their kind had been captured by human beings. The rumours spreading around were that the captured ones were made to work very hard with only little food, since there was no time to graze, while those left in the wild grazed the whole day and even during the night.

Indeed, this was frightening. The rest of the donkeys decided to act quickly, lest they too be captured. They called a meeting at which they discussed what should be

 

done to stop the movement of donkeys into people’s homes. When the meeting came to a stalemate, one donkey suggested that they should seek help from Hare since he was known to be cunning and clever. All agreed to seek advice from Hare.

The next morning, the donkey representative went to Hare. Hare was only too willing to help. Therefore Hare asked him to tell all his friends to come to his compound early the next morning. They agreed. When they arrived, they found Hare with whitewash in a large bucket and a brush in his hand. They were all at a loss as to know how this whitewash was going to help them. When they enquired, Hare attempted to explain but they could not understand.

So Hare asked one of them to volunteer for a demonstration but none wanted to. Then Hare approached one old donkey and whispered in its ear saying, “Once you have been painted, you will not be a donkey any more and human beings will not take you away.” The old donkey said, “I will volunteer because if the human beings take me and put loads on my back, I will die.” So the Hare quickly started painting stripes of whitewash on this donkey. Soon, the entire body of the donkey was filled with white and grey stripes. When the other donkeys looked at the painted donkey, they admired it and some wanted to be painted. But others came to the painted donkey and it whispered something in their ears. So they rushed and crowded around Hare and although he warned them that they had to be careful with the whitewash, they did not heed his warning. They jostled, pushed, fought and even bit each other in the struggle to be the next one to be painted. It was during this struggle to be painted that one donkey toppled the bucket containing the whitewash, pouring the entire contents on the grass from where it could not be recovered. The donkeys that had been painted remained in the forest because human beings did not capture them for they looked different from the domesticated ones. The striped donkeys changed their name from donkey to Zebra. All the ones that remained unpainted after the whitewash were captured by the human beings and taken to their homes to labour for them up to this day. And there ends my story.

 

(AdaptedfromKenyaOralLiteratureNarratives,Aselection editedbyKavetsaAdagala

andWanjiku.M.Kabira.EastAfricanEducationalPublishers.)

 

 

.           (a) Classify , with reasons, this story

 

  • Identify and illustrate the following:-

 

  • One economic activity

 

  • One social

 

  • Explain the use of personification in this narrative

 

  • What was the agenda of the meeting held by the donkeys?

 

  • What is the attitude of the donkeys towards the Hare?

 

  • What were the consequences of the donkey’s struggle to be painted?

 

  • Apart from personification, what other features of oral narratives have been used in this story
  • Explain the character of the donkeys in the 2nd last paragraph
  • Explainthemeaningofthefollowingwordsandexpressionsasusedinthestory

 

  • Beast of …….

 

  • ….

 

(iii) Toppled…………………..

 

 

 

 

 

10.

 

LOVE

 

Love is a universal migraine, A bright stain on the vision Blotting out reason.

Symptoms of true love Are leanness, jealousy, Laggard dawns;

 

Are omens and nightmares- Listening for a knock.

Waiting for a sign:

 

For a touch of her fingers In a darkened room,

For a searching look

 

 

Take courage, lover!

 

Could you endure such pain At any hand but hers?

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Identify the persona in the poem (2 mks)
  2. What is the persona’s attitude towards love? (Explain) (3 mks)
  3. Describe the tone of the poem with evidence from it (3 mks)

 

 

  1. Identify and explain any (6 mks)

figures of speech used in the poem

 

 

  1. Describe the mood of the poem citing evidence to support your answer (3 mks)
  2. Explain the rhetorical question at the end of the poem (2 mks)
  3. Explain the meaning of each of the following expressions as used in the poem

 

 

iii)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

11.

 

Don’t cry baby Sleep little baby

Father will nurse you Sleep baby sleep

 

Little bird flitting away to the forest so fast Tell me, little bird, have you seen her

Have you seen my crying baby’s mother?

 

 

She went to the river at early dew A pot upon her head

But down the water floats her pot And the path from the river is empty

 

Shall I take him under the palm? Where the green shade rests at noon?

Oh no, no

 

For the thorns will prick my baby Shall I take him under the giant baobab

Where the silk cotton plays with the wing?

 

Oh no, no

 

For the termite- eaten bough will break And crush my little baby

My little sleeping baby

 

The day is long and the sun grows hot So, sleep, my little baby, sleep

For mother is gone to a far, far land- Alas!

 

She is gone beyond the river.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

poem

 

  1. Give four features which prove that the above oral poem is a lullaby

 

  1. Identify and illustrate the two speakers in the poem

 

  1. Why is the singer hesitant to take the baby under the shade?

 

  1. Identify and illustrate any two characteristics of oral poems evident in the above

 

 

  1. What is the singer’s attitude towards the baby?

 

  1. Comment on social organization of the people in the community where this song was

 

collected

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

14.

 

 

 

The earth does not get fat,

 

It makes an end of those who wear the head plumes, We shall die on the earth

 

The earth does not get fat. It makes an end of those who act swiftly as heroes Shall we die on the earth?

 

Listen O earth. We shall mourn because of you, Listen O earth. We shall die on the earth?

 

The earth does not get fat. It makes an end of chiefs Shall we all die on the earth?

The earth does not get fat.

 

It makes an end of the women chiefs Shall we die on earth?

 

The earth does not get fat. It makes an end of the royal women Shall we die on earth?

 

Listen O earth. We shall mourn because of you. Listen O earth. We shall die on the earth?

 

The earth does not get fat. It makes an end of the beasts.

Shall we die on the earth?

 

 

Listen you who are a sleep, who are left tightly closed in the land.

 

Listen you who are asleep, who are left tightly closed in the land. Shall we all sink into the earth?

Listen O earth, the sun is setting tightly.

 

We shall all enter into the earth

 

(Source:Akivaga.K andOdagaA.B,OralLiterature:A schoolcertificatecourse)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Classify this song and give reasons for your classification

 

  1. What is the subject matter in this song?

 

  1. Identify and comment on two features of style that are characteristic of songs

 

  1. Describe the attitude of the singer to the subject he/she is singing about

 

 

  1. What social belief is brought out in this song?

 

 

  1. Explain the meaning of the following lines :-

 

 

  1. The earth does not get fat

 

  1. We shall all enter into the earth
  • …… who are tightly closed in the

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

I

 

I shall return, I shall return again

 

To laugh and love and watch with wonder eyes At garden noon the forest fires burn,

Wafting their blue black smoke to sapphire skies I shall return to loiter by the streams

That bathe the brown blades of bending grasses, And realize once more my thousand dreams

Of waters rushing down the mountain passes I shall return to hear the fiddle and fife

Of village dances, dear delicious tunes That stir the hidden depths of native life

Stray melodies of the dim-remembered tunes I shall return, I shall return again

To ease my mind of long, long years of pain

 

 

 

  • Explain briefly what the poem is about

(3mks)

 

 

 

(4mks)

  • In NOTE form, identify

things which the persona is longing to return to

 

 

 

  • With illustration from the poem, identify and illustrate any devices

stylistic

 

 

used in the poem                                                                                                                  (6mks)

 

 

(2mks)

 

 

 

as

 

 

 

(1mk)

  • What is the tone of the poem? Illustrate your answer

 

 

  • In what kind of environment is the persona living? Explain your answer (2mks)

 

  • What specific name is given to the poems with one stanza and fourteen lines

 

 

one above?

 

  • What is the name given to the last two lines ending in similar sound?

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Readthepoembelowandanswerthequestionsthatfollow:

 

 

 

They met by accident                                                    So they had to separate

 

He proposed the idea                                                     The boy remains illegitimate. She gave her consent

All the way to the alter.                                                 Last month not long ago They both took their go

The casualty was male                                                   Coincidentally by accident

 

And his pigment was pale                                              Nothing to inherit. Unlike his alleged sire

Who was black with Ire                                                 The poor boy is hardly ten And knows no next of kin

The recourse was legitimate                                           He roams the street of town.

 

He declaimed responsibility                                           Like a wind sown outcast. So they had to separate

The boy remains illegitimate.

 

 

  1. Who is the persona in this poem? (2 mks)

 

  1. What is the message in the poem? (4 mks)

 

 

  1. Comment on any (6 mks)

stylistic device used in the poem.

 

 

  1. What is the persona’s attitude towards the ”they?” (2 mks)

 

  1. Comment on the last (3 mks)

 

 

 

 

The inmates Huddled together,

Cold biting their bones,

 

Teeth chattering from the chill, The air oppressive,

The smell offensive They sit and they reflect.

 

The room self-contained,

 

At the corner the gents’ invites

 

With the nice fragrance of ammonia, And fresh human dung,

The fresh inmates sit thoughtfully.

 

 

Vermin perform a guard of honour, Saluting him with a bite here,

 

And a bite there,

 

Welcome to the world’ they seem to say.

 

 

The steel lock of the door, The walls insurmountable

And the one torching torturous bulb Stare vacantly at him.

Slowly he reflects about the consignment That gave birth to his confinement Locked in for conduct refinement

The reason they put him in the prison.

 

 

The clock ticks But too slowly

Five years will be a long time Doomed in the dungeon

In this hell of a cell.

 

 

  • What is the attitude of the speaker towards the fresh inmate? (4mks)
  • Explain the atmosphere created through description in the poem (4mks)
  • Why is the fresh ‘inmate in prison? (2mks)
  • Identify and explain any three stylistic devices in the poem (6mks)
  • Explain the mood of the new convict

 

(2mks)

 

‘Locked in for conduct refinement                                                                                                                                (2mks)

 

 

 

 

(20mks)

 

 

THE FOOLISH

 

 

MAN

 

 

My father began as a god Full of heroic tales

Of days when he was young His laws were as immutable As if brought down from Sinai

which indeed he thought they were. He fearlessly lifted me to heaven By a mere swing to his shoulder And made me a godling

By seating me astride

 

Our milk cow’s back and too, Upon the great white gobbler.

of which others went in constant fear.

 

 

Strange then how he shrank and shrank Until by my time of adolescence

He had become a foolish small old man with silly and outmoded views

of life and morality.

 

 

Stranger still

 

that as I became older

 

his faults and his intolerances scatted away into the past revealing virtues

such as honesty, generosity, integrity.

 

 

Strangest of all

 

how the deeper he recedes into the grave the more I see myself

as just one more of the little men who creep through life

no knee – high to this long-dead god.

 

(IanMudie)

 

 

 

 

 

(4mks)

 

 

(3mks)

 

 

(3mks)

 

  • Briefly comment on the theme of the poem

 

 

  • Comment on the suitability of the tittle of the poem

 

 

  • What is the attitude of the persona towards his father?

 

 

 

 

(6mks)

  • Identify and explain any

stylistic devices used in the poem

 

 

  • What do the following groups of people learn from the poem?

 

  • ……………… (ii) Children………

 

(2mks)

 

Immutable……………              Outmoded……………………

 

 

 

17 .

 

When she is the only one at the foot of the mortar-stones the hen only scratches with one paw. For she has, so she thinks, plenty of time to choose her grains for corn.

Ponda certainly was not the only girl in M’badane, but she had only to appear for the most beautiful, and far from being fastidious and difficult to please as might have been expected, she was only too anxious to find a husband, as she was afraid of growing into an old maid, for she had already turned sixteen. On their side suitors were not lacking: every single day her girl-friends’ brothers and fathers, young men and old men from other villages, sent griots and dialis bearing gifts and fine words to ask her hand in marriage.

If it had only depended on herself Ponda would certainly by now have a baby tied on her back, either good, or bad-tempered and crying. But in the matter of marriage, as in all things a girl must submit to her father’s will. It is her father who must decide whom she is to belong to: a. Prince, a rich dioula or a common badolo who sweats in the field in the sun; it is for her father to say it he wishes to bestow her on a powerful marabout or an insignificant talibe.

Now Mor, the father of Ponda had demanded neither the immense bride-price of a rich man, nor the meager possession of a badolo; still less had he thought of offering his daughter to a marabout or to a marabout’s disciple in order to enlarge his place in paradise. Mor simply told all those who come to ask for his daughter, whether for themselves, for their masters, for their sons or for their brothers:

“I will give Ponda without demanding bride-price or gifts, to the man who will kill an ox and send me the meat by the agency of a hyena; but when it arrives not a single morsel of the animal must be missing.”

That was more difficult than making the round-cared Narr-the-Moor keep a secret. It was more difficult than entrusting a calabash full of honey to a child and expect him not to even dip his little finger in. You might as well try prevent the sun from leaving his home in the morning or retiring to bed to the end of the day. You might as well forbid the thirsty sand to drink the first drop s of the first rains. Entrust meat to Bouki-the-Hyena? You might as well entrust a pot of butter to a burning fire. Entrust meat to Bouk and prevent her from touching it.

 

But how can you entrust meat; even dried meat to a hyena, and prevent her to touch it? It was an impossible task, so said the griots as they ended their way home to their masters: so said the mothers who had come on their sons’ behalf, so said the old men who had come to ask for the

beautiful Ponda for themselves.

 

A day’s walk form M’Badane lay the village of N’diour. The inhabitants of N’Diou were by no means ordinary folk’ they were, or so they believed, the only men and the only women since earliest times to have tamed the double hyenas, with whom in fact they lived in perfect peace and good understanding. It is true that the people of N’Diour did their share to maintain these good relations.

Every Friday they killed a bull which they offered to Bouki-the-Hyena and her tribe.

Of all the young men of N’Diour, Birane was the best at wrestling as well as working in

 

the fields, he was also the most handsome. When his griot brought back presents that Mor had refused, and told him the conditions which Ponda’s father had laid down, Birane said to himself:

“I shall be the one to win Ponda for my bed,” He killed an ox, dried the meat, and put it in a goatskin; the skin was enclosed in a coarse cotton bag and the whole thing placed in the middle of ‘a truss straw.

On Friday, when Boruki came with her family to partake of the offering given by the people of N’Diou Birane went to her and said, ‘My griot, who has no more sense than a babe at the breast and who is as stupid as an ox has brought the fine gifts that I sent to Ponda, the daughter of Mor of N’Badane. I am certain that if you, whose wisdom is great and whose tongue is as honey, took this simple truss of straw to N’Badane to the house of Mor you would only need to say, “Birane asks for your daughter, “for him to grant her to you”.

“I have grown old, Birane, and my back is no longer very strong, but N’Bar, the oldest of

my children, is full of vigour and he has inherited a little of my wisdom. He will go to N’Badane

for you, and I am sure that he will acquint himself well of your mission.”

 

M’Bar set off very early in the morning, the truss of straw on his back. When the dew moistened the truss of straw the pleasant Odour of the meat began to float in the air. M’bar-thehyena stopped, lifted his nose sniffed to the right, sniffed to the left, then resumed his way, a little less hurriedly it seemed. The smell grew stronger, the Hyena stopped again, bared his teeth, thrust his nose to the right, to the left, into the air, then

 

turned round and sniffed to the four winds. He resumed his journey, but now hesitating all the time, as if held back by this penetrating, insistent smell which seemed to come from all directions.

Not being able to resist it any longer, M’Bar left the track that led from N’Diour to N’Badane, made huge circling detours in the veld, ferreting to the right, ferreting to the left continually retracing his steps, and took three whole days instead of one to reach N’Badane.

N’Bar was certainly not in the best of tempers when he entered Mor’s home. He did not wear the pleasant expressions of a messenger who comes to ask a great favour. This smell of meat that impregnated all the grass and all the bushes of the veld and still impregnated the huts of N’Bedane and the courtyard of Mor’s home, had made him forget on the ‘way from N’Diour all the wisdom that Biouki had instilled into him, and stilled the gracious words that one always expects from a petitioner. M’Bar scarcely even unclenched his teeth to say: Assalamou aleyokoum!” and nobody could even hear his greeting; but as he threw down the truss of straw from his back had bent under its weight, he muttered in a voice that was more than disagreeable, ‘Bitane of N”Diour sends you this truss of staw and asks for your daughter. Under the very eyes of M’Bar the Hyena, first astonished, then indignant, then covetous Mor cut the liana ropes that bound the truss of a straw, opened it up and took out the bag of coarse cotton; from the coarse cotton bag of he took out the goat-skin and from the goatskin the pieces of dried meat.

‘Go’, ‘Mor, said to M’Bar-the-hyena, who nearly burst with rage at the sight of all that meat he had unsuspectingly earned for three days, and which was spread out, there without his being able to touch a single bit. (for the folk of N’Badane were not like the inhabitants of N’Diour, and in M’Badane hunting spears were lying all round). ‘Go,’ said Mor, ‘go and tell Birane that I give him my daughter. Tell him that he is not only the most spirited and the strongest of all the young men of N’Diour, but he is also the shrewdest.

He managed to entrust meat to you, hyena, he will be able to keep a sharp watch on his wife and outwit all tricks.’

 

 

  1. What type of oral narrative is this?

 

 

  1. State one economic activity of the community from which the story is c)         What two aspects of Birane’s character come out in this story?
    1. What moral lesson do we learn from this narrative?

 

 

  1. Identify two significant devices used in this narrative and comment on

 

their

 

effectiveness

 

  1. Identify three aspects of social life in the community from which the oral

 

narrative is set

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Readthepoembelowandanswerthequestionsthatfollow.

 

 

 

I know what the caged bird feels, alas ! When the sun is bright on the upland slopes;

When the wind stirs soft through the springing grass And the river flows like a stream of glass;

When the first bird sings and the first bud opens, And the faint perfume from its petals steals-

I know what the caged bird feels!

 

 

 

 

I know why the caged bird beats his wing Till its blood is red on the cruel bans;

For he must fly back for his perch and cling

 

When he rather would be on the branch a – swing; And a pain still throbs in the old, old scars

And they pulse again with a keener sting – I know why he beats his wing!

 

 

I know why the caged bird sings, ah me,

 

When his wing is bruised and his blossom sore, When he beats his bars and would be free;

It is not a song of joy or glee,

 

But a prayer that he sends from his heart’s deep core, But a plea, that upward to Heaven he flings –

I know why the caged bird sings !

 

 

 

 

 

Bontemps.

(AdaptedfromthepoembyPaulLawrenceDunbar      InAmericanNegropoetry,editedbyArna

 

NewYork:HillandWang,1974)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

form.

  • Explain briefly what the poem is about .

 

  • What does the poet focus on in each of the three stanzas? Give your answer in note

 

 

  • How would you describe the persona’s feelings towards the caged bird?

 

 

  • What can we infer about the persona’s own experiences?

 

 

  • Identify a simile in the first stanza and explain why it is

 

 

  • Explainthemeaningofthefollowinglines:
    • “And the faint perfume from its petals steals”.

 

 

  • “And they pulse again with a keener sting “

 

 

 

 

  1. THE MAGNIFICIENT BULL

 

My bull is white like the silver fish in the river

 

White like the shimmering crane bird on the river bank White like fresh milk.

His roar is like thunder to the Turkish cannon On the steep shore.

 

My bull is dark like the rain cloud in the storm. He is like summer and winter.

Half of him is dark like the storm cloud, Half of him is light like sunshine.

 

His back shines like the morning star.

 

His brow is red like the beak of the hornbill.

 

His fore head is like a flag, calling the people from a distance, He resembles the rainbow.

 

 

 

 

 

 

like”

  1. The singer achieves rhythm in the song above through repetition of words e. “white

 

 

like e.t.c. Identification Illustration

  1. If you are to do a live performance of this song how would you make it more interesting to the audience?

 

 

 

 

(5mks)

  1. Underline the silent letter in each of the following words

 

 

  1. Rendezvous

 

  1. Eulogy

 

  • Tourism

 

  1. Condemn

 

  1. Phlegm

 

 

 

“Willy warmly welcomed Wendy and wondered why Wyatt walked wearingly while whistling.’

  1. Classify the above

 

  1. Identify and illustrate one sound pattern from the genre

 

  • State any one function of the above genre
  1. You school is participating in a debate and the motion is: “Parents should let children decide their own destiny,” How would you ensure that your argument convincing?

 

*KC*

 

 

a lady

 

  1. Imagine that you are listening to a telephone conversation between a receptionist and

 

 

whose child is very ill and she is seeking her physicians’ help. Unfortunately, Dr.

 

Kemboi is

 

not in, but the receptionist is on the line. In the blank spaces, fill in what you think the receptionist should have said to the lady.

 

 

 

 

 

2.

 

Once upon a time, there lived an old man. One day he paid a visit to his in-laws. On entering the house of his mother-in-law, he found that she had been roasting some meat, among which was a delicious looking sausage and she was not in the house. He immediately took the sausage and quickly shoved it into his quiver. And it so happened that a piece of live coal had got stuck on the sausage but the old man didn’t know. He quickly shut the quiver.

No sooner had he sat down than the owner of the house came in. They sat down to talk about the children’s health. When they had finished, it was time for the old man to return to his home. Just then, the woman noticed smoke issuing from the quiver and asked the old man; “Paker, how come the quiver is smoking?” The man answered, “Oh. It’s some naughty fire stick with a soft head that smokes whenever it comes into contact with soft wood and the arrows.” The woman kept quiet and got up to escort her guest.

When they had walked only a short distance, the fire made a hole in the quiver and the arrows fell out, tiak! together with the stolen sausage. The lady, who was walking closely behind, exclaimed: ‘See, had I not known it! Then the old man fearing that his sausage might be eaten. shouted, “Oh, my Paker, please do not eat it!”

So while the lady ran home in shame, the greedy old man continued with his journey in extreme embarrassment. They showed each other their backs and there ends my story.

 

 

  • State two things a narrator would do to draw the audience’s attention to the beginning

of

 

t he story

 

  • Describe how a narrator would perform line 4-6 of the second paragraph

 

  • Explain three ways in which the audience can indicate active listening in the

performance

 

of this narrative

 

  • Apart from using the ending formula, how else would a narrator signal to the audience

 

the ending of his story?

 

 

 

3.

 

Where is she eee Where is she ee

We want to pamper her We want to pamper her x2

 

We advise you, we advise you

 

When you get there respect your husband When he calls you, respond to his call

So that your marriage can last

 

 

Both of you may live in peace Both of you may live in peace x2

 

  • List down what is lost when the above song is written down

 

  • The above song is a translation from Kiswahili to What has been lost in the translation?

 

  • (i) Underline the stressed syllable in the correct pronunciation of the following words (Thedotsindicatesyllableboundaries)
    • pect
    • view
    • ves. ti. gate
    • so.li.date
    • cu. late
    • vi. de (noun)

 

  • Provide another word with a similar pronunciation for each of the following words

 

  • Feet
  • Alter

 

 

 

 

 

speech

 

 

 

are

  • Ale
  • Cereal
  • None
  • Ate
  • (i) Explain three things you would do if you were unexpectedly asked to give a short

 

 

During the form four farewell party

 

  • You are giving this speech without a public address How do you ensure you

 

 

heard clearly by everybody

 

 

 

 

 

4.

 

THE MAN

 

LIVED WITH THE TRIBE

 

HIS WIFE

 

 

There was a man, it is said, who lived with the ethnic group of his wife. One day he said to his wife, “We are moving away-tell your people.” So she told her people and they gave him the customary gifts and returned to him a part of his bride wealth.

Then this man who had been living with his wife’s ethnic group moved away with his            family and his wife, and after he had walked all day he set up a camp in a certain place. Then he               said to his wife, “woman, there is a matter I have to discuss with the people whom we left, and I      am going back to them. Pen the animals and wait for me.”

 

 

So he went back, and when he reached the village in the evening he sat down in the clearing by the huts, intending to eavesdrop. The people were gossiping about and someone said,                             “well, let us all give our opinion of that who stayed with our tribe for such a long time!”

 

 

“He was a good man.” said one. “By God, he was a brave man.”

“By God, he was a generous man.”

 

“By God, he looked after the animals well.” “By God, he had some knowledge of men.”

 

 

The whole village praised him, and all the time the man was listening. There was pause, and then a young girl spoke, “but I know something about him that was bad!”

“What was it?” the people asked.

 

“He didn’t go far away enough from the huts when he urinated!” at this the whole village burst in to laughter, but the eavesdropper was so angry that he stood up said to them, “well, by God, I have moved far enough away now!” to the great astonishment of the whole village.

 

 

 

 

  1. How would you performs the narrative in order to capture the audience attention

 

 

 

 

 

 

words :

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

in

  1. (i) In which tone would the eavesdropper say last line of the narrative

 

  1. Underline the word in which the vowel sound is different in the following sets of

 

 

  1. ship, sheep,               sleep

 

  1. Pull, pool,                 book

 

  1. Bark, park,                 buck

 

  1. Might, height, mice

 

  1. Barn, ban,                  bag

 

  • State whether the stress would fall on the first or second syllable on the word

 

 

bold by underlining:

  1. I don’t like associating with that rebel

 

  1. Waiyaki had a lot of respect for the elders

 

  1. We manage to turn the businesses

 

  1. When can you contact me?

 

  1. You can access a lot of information in

 

  1. What would you consider important in giving someone directions especially to

 

a

 

 

 

for a job?

 

place that is difficult to trace?

  1. What preparation would you do before attending an interview

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5.

 

 ESCAPE FROM THE

 

I seek a quiet country life Without the city’s bursting strife I seek the sight of trees ablaze

Instead of streets that form amaze

 

 

 

  1. Identify two sound patterns in this poem and state their effectiveness

 

  1. i) rhyme Life                  Ablaze                          Strife                Amaze

 

  1. Which words in the poem contain dipthongs?

 

  • How could you say the first line of this poem and why?

 

 

  1. Describe the rhyme scheme of the poem above

 

 

 

rest.

Identify thewordwiththedifferentsound:-

 

  1. purse further              fury                  nurse

 

  1. three thick                theme               these

 

iii) have fame rake fate
iv) heir honest honoraria harbour
v) committee constitution command commodity

 

 

 

If freaky Fred found fifty feet of fresh fruit and fed forty feet to his friend Frank, how many feet of fresh fruit did freeky Fred find?

  1. Classify the oral item above
  2. Identify two characteristics of this genre

 

 

  • State four functions of this genre

 

 

 

 

  1. They were taught by the word of mouth

 

  1. The guest of honour asked us to lend him our ears

 

  • Politicians must now walk the talk

 

  1. Daisy has the gift of the gab

 

 

 

 

 

the

 

YouareaTVpresenterwith“DuondJokaNyanam”station.Youhavebeenassigned

 

duty               to               interviewanimportantandfamouswriterinthenameofNgugiWaThiong’o. Howwouldyou prepareyourselfforaneffectivesessionwithaviewtoproducinga

 

good                                   programme?

 

 

 

 

 

6.

 

LOW

 

Sweet and low, sweet and low, Wind of the western sea,

Low, low, breath and blow, Wind of the western sea! Over the rolling waters go,

Come from the dying moon, and blow, Blow him again to me;

While my little one, while my pretty one, sleeps.

 

 

Sleep and rest, sleep and rest, Father will come to thee soon; Rest, rest on mother’s breast; Father will come to thee soon;

Father will come to his babe n the nest, Silver sails all out of the west

Under the silver moon;

 

Sleep my little one, sleep, my pretty one, sleep.

 

 

 

  • State any two pairs of rhyming words from the above poem

 

  • Apart from rhyme, with illustrations from the poem, identify any other two techniques that have been used by the poet to create rhythm in this poem

 

 

 

 

you

 

  • If you were to classify the above poem as a song, in which category would

 

 

place it and why?

 

  • Comment on the number of syllables used in the last line of each

 

What does this tell you about the rhythm of this poem?

 

 

 

 

last

 

 

 

sound /Ù/

  • If you were to recite this poem to its target audience, how would recite the

 

 

line of the last stanza?

  • From the poem, identify any two words containing the vowel

 

 

  1. Underline the silent letters in the following words

 

 

  1. Subtle

 

  1. Comb

 

  • White

 

  1. Hymn

 

  1. Clinton

 

 

 

words (usestressmarks)

 

  1. Drug abuse is so rampant in coast province

 

  1. The alarm clock rang on time

 

 

  • Can I have your contact, please

 

  1. We were forced to desert our fertile land and now, here we are in a total desert

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

stated;

Juma : I am so happy! (Jumps up) we finally did it! Four powerful sweet goals! Solomon: No doubt about that victory! Chelsea…..

Collins :(interrupting) shut up your pointed beak! Its Chelsea not Chelesea! Simply

 

 

 

 

Collins,

the blues.

 

Solomon: Accept my apology. I didn’t mean to offend anyone. For your information

 

 

Man City isn’t my team. Notwithstanding, the fact remains that Manchester

 

city outran

 

and outfoxed your team. I saw the match myself.

 

Juma: Hold your peace, boy. Are you not aware of the adage that goes: he who fights the truth,

fights against God! Chelsea can beat any other team in the English premier league but

 

not

 

Manchester City: that’s the truth, period.

 

Collins : Sure? Come to think of it, have you ever stopped to wonder why all the beautiful

 

women                         in this present world and probably the one that will come, prefer to associate with Chelsea   players and fans rather than those of man city? Still wondering? Answer is obvious: Man                                                city players are not only short and ugly but also daft morons!

Juma: To be honest, you could be saying the truth as far as your captain’s snatching of

Wayne

 

bridges girl friend is concerned. However, don’t you think it’s a show case of

immorality,                  for a married man like him to engage in an extra-marital affair?

 

Catherine: Guys, let’s end the entire talk. Why can’t we talk about AFC Leopards, Sofa

 

Paka,

 

and Western Stima! Isn’t there any football being played in Kenya?

 

Solomon: True

 

Catherine: What I…..mean is, who in England talks about Western Stima? Anyway, thanks for your company! (Walks away)

 

  1. Identify and illustrate any two features demonstrated by Collins which indicate lack of courtesy while conversing with others

 

  1. From the above dialogue, identify any two features of a healthy conversation

 

  • With relevant illustrations from the above dialogue state any two features that characterize

natural speech

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7.

 

“How high up has he heaved his heavy hoe?”

 

  1. Identify the genre above

 

  1. For what purpose would the above genre be used

 

  • Cite one feature of oral skills used in the above genre

 

  1. Mention two characteristics of the above genre

 

 

  1. Give another word that has the same pronunciation as the words below

 

  1. Profit

 

  1. Mete

 

  • Pull

 

  1. Dough

 

  1. Key

 

  1. Imagine that Ngugi Wa Thion’go, the author of the novel ‘The River Between’ has been invited by the English department to give a lecture on the key themes and

 

aspects

 

of style evident in the novel, in a week’s time. As one of the students of literature preparing to offer him audience, what steps would you take just

 

before and during

 

the presentation to ensure that you benefit fully from the event.

 

 

 

I stood and stared, the sky was lit The sky was stars all over it

I stood. I knew not why Without a wish, without a will I stood upon the silent hill

My eyes were blind with stars still I stared into the sky

 

  1. Show how the poet has effectively created rhythm in this poem?

 

 

 

 

 

 

lines

  1. What word would you stress in line 5 and why?

 

  • Explain two ways in which you would make the recitation of the first three

 

 

of the  poem effective

 

 

 

 

 

Hawa : Hallo, is that Thatu’s Girl’s school? Peter : Yes, what is your name?

Hawa : Hawa Mukova Peter : What do you want?

Hawa : May I speak to the head teacher?

 

Peter : He went to do shopping for his family. What did you want to tell him?

 

Hawa : Sorry it is confidential. May I speak to the deputy?

 

Peter : He is attending a pre-wedding in fact he is never in school Hawa : Oh! I will call later

Peter : It’s okay

 

  1. Identify four instances of lack of telephone conversation etiquette

 

 

  1. Write corrections using correct telephone etiquette

 

  • Underline the silent letter in the following words

 

  1. Eulogy

 

  1. Phlegm

 

 

 

  1. (a)

 

  • Site …

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

play

  • Owe

 

  • Rite

 

  • Road

 

  • Blew

 

  • A resource person has been invited to your school to talk on the newly introduced

 

 

AnEnemyofthePeopleby Henrick Ibsen. What five things would you do to

 

ensure you

 

benefit maximumly from this talk?

 

 

  • Usingeachofthewordsgivenbelow,constructtwosentencestobringouttwo

 

 

  1. (i) Import
  • Im

 

  • Pro

 

  • Produce

 

d)

 

THANK THE MOTHER

 

I thank thee mother Your back I wet When I leaked

like a broken gourd,

 

 

Your breast I sought like a blind bat,

On your back

 

I swung like a little vagabond but you said

‘It’s my vagabond.’

 

 

  • Who is the persona?

 

 

  • On the line ‘Like a broken ’ Which words would you stress? Why?

 

  • How is rhythm achieved in the poem?

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(e)

 

There lived two men who were good friends. One of them was very wise

and the other very foolish. One day, they argued between themselves, and one said, “I am the wisest man in this country.” The other said, “No,! I am the wisest.”

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

the other.

As there was no way of measuring wisdom, the two men did not know who was wiser than the other.

One day they were discussing the ill-behaviour of their wives and one of them said, “If we want them to behave well we must beat them up. Women are like children, beat them up and they will behave well.”

The other said, “No ! if you beat your wife, she will become worse.” After arguing for a long time, they kept quiet and went home. On reaching his house, the man who was in favour of beating wives began to beat an ox-skin vigorously. When the other heard this, he thought the sound came from his friend beating his wife and he took a stick and beat his wife severely until she fell sick and later died.

When the two men met later, it was now clear who between them was wiser than

 

 

Lusweti:Nairobi:TheMacmillanPressLtd.1992)

 

 

 

 

  • Suppose you are the one narrating this story, what would you do first before narration

to

 

capture the attention of the audience?

 

  • How would you deliver the speech by the 2nd speaker? “No ! I am the ”
  • If you are listening to this story, what would you expect the story teller to do so as to make the story interesting?

 

 

 

FormOne

 

: ……………………………………………………………………………

 

: Good morning young man, how are you?

 

:

 

: Welcome to Elimu Secondary School and have a seat.

 

: Thank you, Madam.

 

:

 

: I’m Hassan Juma Masumbuko.

 

Teacher       : I have verified your documents and therefore allowed you to join the classroom next

 

door as our first Form One student this year, congratulations.

 

:

 

 

 

 

 

9.

 

THE CRUEL

 

Once upon a time, there was a man and wife who had a baby girl. Unfortunately,

the wife            died and so, the man married again. He got another girl with the second wife. The two girls     became extremely close; so close that whenever the mother sent one on an errand, the other was sure to accompany her. The mother, however, did not like the child of the deceased. She would always show her dislike by denying her certain favours. Her feelings became so bad that she decided to get rid of the girl.

To do this, she dug a hole in her bedroom on a day when the husband was absent and   covered the hole with a cow’s hide. She then called her daughter and sent her to the house of a      friend some kilometers away. As usual, the two girls wanted to go together but the woman      refused, giving the excuse that she wanted to send the other one elsewhere. After the departure of her daughter, she tailed the other girl and sent her for her snuffbox in the bedroom. Unaware of                what lay ahead, the girl eagerly rushed into the room only to fall into a hole! The mother very quickly filled the hole with soil, completely disregarding the girl’s screams for help.

When the daughter came back, she merely assumed that the absence of her dear companion was justified. After hours of waiting, she, however, became impatient and

questioned     the mother.

 

‘Where is my sister?’ she asked

 

“But she followed you. As soon as she did what I wanted, she ran after you. Now stop bothering me” the mother retorted.

Time passed and the now anxious girl went round calling out the name of the other one,   but all in vain. Alas …she cried the whole night and the next day and refused to touch any food.             The father helped in the search but to no avail.

After three days, the girl still cried and called the other one. She then heard a very weak voice    responding in song:

MaalyaMaalya MaalyaMaalya

Namwenvuniwemwaiiieemalya Ekwinzamuthikoiieemalya                             Wakwisakunthikaiieemalya                        MaalyaMaalya (Andyourmotheristhewiseoneiieemalya Shedugagraveiieemalya Forinterringmeiniieemalya)

The girl dashed towards the direction of the voice, repeated her cries and again got the             same response. She came to the conclusion that whoever was responding was definitely     underground somewhere in the house. Immediately the father came that day (before the arrival of the mother), she told him what had happened. After hearing the song, the father dug up the place              and pulled out an extremely weak and disfigured daughter. All the three wailed and eventually, the father gave her a mixture of blood and milk from a goat to drink after which she vomited all    the soil she had eaten. He gave her some more of the mixture after which he hid her.

When the wife eventually came back, the man did not let her get into the house but sent            her for a cow in a far off place. He explained his action by telling her that he had decided to host a      feast for relatives (including his in-laws). In the meantime, he sent-for all of them. When the woman came back with the cow, she found everyone waiting for her. Uneasy now, she sat down in the place she was shown by her husband. He then stood up and after welcoming all, reminded                them of the lost daughter. He then called upon the wife to explain the circumstance leading to the sad episode. She hauntingly repeated the now commonly know story. When she sat down, the husband told this woman’s daughter to repeat her earlier wails after which all heard;

 

MaalyaMaalya MaalyaMaalya

Namwenvuniwemwaiiieemalya Ekwinzamuthikoiieemalya           Wakwisakunthikaiieemalya

All were surprised to hear the words of the other girl’s song and at that moment; the ‘dead’         girl joined them. The woman was as though paralyzed by shock. The husband then explained the         truth of the matter and told his in-laws to take their daughter with them. They said that if that was what she had done to the girl, they couldn’t have such a monster in their house. The woman was disowned by all and chased away.

 

 

  • How would you say the following opening formula “Once upon a time”?
  • If you were performing this story what oral skills would you use?

 

  • As a story teller, how would you deliver the two songs to portray the different contexts?

 

  • If you were one of the relatives invited by the girl’s father, how would you portray your reaction towards the revelation of the step-mother’s behaviour?
  • Whatintonationwouldyouuseattheendofthisstatementandwhy?  “Nowstopbotheringme”

 

 

 

 

PART B

 

  • Shem showed Sila’s shining shoes shamelessly on Sheba’s

 

  • Classify the above genre

 

  • Identify the dominant aspect of style in the above genre and illustrate your answer with a brief explanation
  • State any three functions of the genre identified in (i) above

 

 

Noreen:                  Aha, Ok. The question is: What play should we pick for our class play? Does

 

anyone have suggestions? Kabonyi?

 

I suggest we do ‘An Enemy of the People’. How about ‘Shreds of Tenderness?’

No. I dislike ‘Shreds of Tenderness’ I love ‘The River Between’.

No way! That will make a stupid play! Let’s do ‘An Enemy of The People.’ Peter?

I have never watched ‘Shreds of Tenderness’ but… It’s a superb play.

Peris, Please let Peter finish then it will be your turn Sorry.

Peter:                     Anyway, I have seen a play on ‘An enemy of the People’ but I have watched the

movie and I love it Peris?

I just want to say that I think ‘Shreds of Tenderness’ is a really good play. Apepo?

Apepo:                   I saw the movie ‘An enemy of the people’ too and I really like it. I loved that part

 

where Aslasken asks Dr. Stockmann to…

 

Noreen:                  Excuse me, Apepo, but we should talk about that after the discussion is over. Does

 

anyone have any other suggestions? No? Ok, Kabonyi proposed ‘ An enemy of the

People’, Tom likes ‘Shreds of Tenderness’ and Lillian wants to the ‘The

 

River

 

 

go to

 

Between’. Has anyone seen or read all three? No. Ok? I suggest that we all

 

 

the library and read them and then continue the discussion in a couple of

 

days. Is

 

that ok with everyone? Ok. The discussion is over.

 

 

(i) Identify any threewrong things done by the class in terms of effective communication

 

 

 

  • Koech was part of the audience listening to a speech delivered by the Director of Youth Affairs on how to empower the After the speech the Director asked them

questions on

 

the key issues which featured in the speech. Koech could not remember much. What do you

think he failed to do during the speech?

 

  • You have been invited to give a talk to the Pamoja Youth Group on You decide to

 

focus on respecting personal space in social interaction in your talk. Describe two examples

that you would use to illustrate the different situations in which it would be important to respect personal  space.

  • During a presentation, you were interrupted severally by some members of the

 

Give four reasons why the audience would do so?

 

 

 

10.

 

(i) Married……………..

 

(ii) Bomb ……………….

 

  • Difference …………

 

(iv) Satchet……………….

 

(v) Buffet …………………..

 

 

 

 

Ndiegu akatsia kusuma Achima umwana Numwana akatsia kusuma Achima ndiegu

 

Ndiegu vava Ukalilanga gu? Zunu, zunu, zunu….

 

 

Ndiegu went to beg for food She didn’t give it to the child The child went to beg for food It didn’t give it to Ndiegu

 

Ndiegu, please

 

Why then are you crying?

 

Pinch, pinch, pinch……

 

 

 

  • Give the characteristics of this oral performance

 

  • What features of oral performance are lost when this song is written down?

 

  • If you were to perform this song before your fellow students in form II, what accompaniments would make for this audience to remember your performance for a long time?
  • What aspects of this song would make it easy for the audience to join in the singing

of

 

 

 

(c) You are required to give an impromptu speech in a crowded assembly of inattentive students.

State what you would do to ensure that they listen to you

 

(i) Wonder …………….

 

(ii) Honey ………………

 

(iii) Drawback……………

 

(iv) Town ………………..

 

(v) Education……………

 

 

 

(e)(i)   Twoteachers(Mrs.     Stima–   D.O.SandMr.   Obwaya–   thedramateacher)     of   Kiti   High school

are  involved in   a   discussion in   the   staffroom. They   are   assessing the   possibility of allowing

studentscontinuewiththeirentertainmentonFridayevenings.Completetheconversation:

 

Mrs Stima: Mr. Obwaya, do you think entertainment is necessary in this school?

 

 

 

 

school.

Mr. Obwaya:

 

Mrs. Stima: More time? This is unacceptable! Let the students do what brought them to

 

 

This is a school and not a leisure resort.

 

Mr. Obwaya:

 

 

 

Mrs Stima: In fact we are wasting time discussing this issue. Let’s ban entertainment.

We are not

 

destroying anybody.

 

Mr. Obwaya:

 

Mrs. Stima: (calmly) Would you please, explain why you are favouring this issue. Mr. Obwaya:

Mrs. Stima: But when they go into the dance hall they are never grown ups nor are they responsible. They should stick to books.

Mr. Obwaya:..

 

Mrs Stima: I am sorry, Mr. Obwaya, I’ve to cut you short. Are you aware that the majority

in

 

this school are of the opinion that entertainment should be curtailed?

 

Mr. Obwaya: (shocked)

 

Mrs. Stima: That is it. Nothing is going to happen and nobody is going to change this. Mrs. Stima:…………………….

Mr. Obwaya: yes! Why not? They even need to be added more time Mrs. Stima: ………………………..

Mr. Obwaya: I agree with you but you know, we may think we are assisting the children

 

but find

 

 

 

*

 

we are destroying them.

 

Mrs. Stima:

 

Mr. Obwaya: to me entertainment is part and parcel of learning. It is absolutely necessary Mrs. Stima: ……………………………………

Mr. Obwaya: Students need time away from their books. Let them ventilate their steam.

 

Furthermore, they are responsible as they are grown-ups Mrs. Stima: ……………………

Mr. Obwaya: But they need……

 

They show interruption. if no ellipse or dots, award “0” mark.

 

Mrs. Stima:

 

Mr. Obwaya: What! It can’t be! You are invited for trouble√

 

N/B:- The exclamation mark is necessary to show shock.

 

Mrs. Stima:

 

 

 

 

 

(ii) State two forms of polite address used by Mrs. Stima in the above conversation

(1mk)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

11.

 

Slowly he moves                                                           His blue shirt

 

To and fro, to and fro,                                                   Billow in the breeze

 

Then faster up and down.                                              Like a tattered kite

 

 

 

 

The world whorls by:                                                     Mother!

 

 

 

 

trousers?

east becomes west,                                                        Where did I come from?

 

north turns south                                                          When will I wear long

 

 

The four cardinal points in his head,                               Why was my father jailed?

 

 

 

 

  1. Identify any two sound patterns used in this poem and illustrate

 

  1. Why do you thing the poet uses the sound patterns you have identified in (i) above?

 

  • How would you say line 2 – 4 of this poem and why?

 

  1. Give words that sound similar to the following ones in this

 

Blue – Wear

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

has

 

b  (i) Rearrangethefollowingwordsinpairsofhomophones.

 

whines, mown,     lays, weather, dough, laze , moan, doe, whether, wine

 

 

/t/                                             /d/

 

doubt dt dor

  1. You were the best student in C.S.E. last year. The principle of your former school

 

 

requested you to give a speech to the present candidates. What important aspects would

you consider in order to enhance effective speech delivery?

 

 

 

 

 

:           Hi old man! I hope you know why I’m here, Your girl

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

must be

Lavender

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

loves me and I have come to take her away. Where is she?

 

:           Did I hear you right? Did you say ………………………….

 

:           Yes, Lavender! Just say how many goats you want!

 

:           Who are you? Whose son are you?

 

:           Good heavens! You mean you don’t know f who Iam? You

 

 

the only one in this village who doesn’t know famous people like

  1. I am Makokha or Deno, the guy whose voice you usually hear

on Egesa F.M. radio. You are a very lucky father- in- law!

 

:           What is the world coming to?

 

 

Makokha          :           I hope you are not going completely blind. The world is going

 

 

 

palace.

nowhere! It is Lavender who is coming to my three- stories

 

 

Ask her to come. I am running late.

 

 

:     Young man…….. get out of my sight before I set dog, Tobby,

on you!

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. (i) Identify and illustrate four things that you find wrong with Makokha’s manner of speech.
  • “Your girl, Lavender, loves me and I have come to take her ” Rewrite this

sentence

 

 

 

 

and

in the manner in which Makokha should have uttered if he had a sense of courtesy.

 

  • At one point Makokha deliberately misunderstands Identify this point

 

 

state what it reveals about Makokha’s attitude.

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Readthefollowingpoemandrespondtothequestions

 

I

 

I shall return again. I shall return

 

To laugh and love and watch with wonder eyes At golden noon the forest fires burn,

Wafting their blue – black smoke to sapphire skies I shall return to loiter by the streams

That bathe the brown blades of the bending grasses, And realize once more my thousand dreams.

Of waters rushing down the mountain passes. I shall return to hear the fiddle and fife

Of village dances, dear delicious tunes That stir the hidden depths of native life Stray melodies of dim- remembered tunes. I shall return. I shall return again

To ease my mind of long, long years of pain.

 

 

 

  • i) What things does the poet wish to return to?

 

 

  1. Name the stylistic device to emphasize the poets

 

 

 

 

silently?

  • Describe two sound patterns used in the poem

 

  1. A poem is best read What do you think is lost if you read this poem

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Imagine you are part of the audience that is listening to a You look around and notice

that some people are looking at their watches, a few are yawning and one or two are shifting in

their seats.

 

  1. What would be the likely cause of such behaviour? Mention at least four causes

 

  1. If you were to be the speaker, what would you do to capture and sustain the interest

to

 

the audience? Mention at least four

 

 

  1. i) Foreachofthewordsbelowgiveanotherwordwiththesamepronunciation

 

Wet – Soar – Would – Tied – One – You –

 

  1. ii) Underlinethesilentsoundsinthesewords

 

Gain Helipad

 

Resist Rhy Tomb Deliver

 

  1. What will be the meaning of the sentences below if the underlined words are stressed
    1. The young tout and the driver, hijacked the car

 

  1. The young tout and the driver, hijacked the car

 

 

Mr. Oundo: (picking the phone) Yes! Ken      : Who is speaking please? Mr. Oundo : What do you want?

Ken             : I would like to speak to …

 

Mr. Oundo : Speak up I cant hear what you are saying!

 

 

Fromtheabovetelephoneconversationidentifyandexplainatleastthreecasesoflackof                                     telephoneetiquette

 

 

 

 

 

 

LISTEN

 

RAIN

 

 

Listen to the rain,

 

The whisper of the rain, The slow soft sprinkle, the drip-drop tinkle,

the first wet shisper of the rain.

 

 

Listen to the rain,

 

the singing of the rain, the tiptoe pitter patter,

the splish and splash and splatter, the steady sound,

the singing of the rain.

 

 

Listen to the rain,

 

the roaring pouring rain, the hurly-burly

topsy- turvey

 

Lashing gnashing teeth of the rain, The lightning-flashing

Thunder crashing

 

Sounding pounding roaring rain, leaving all outdoors a muddle, A mishy mushy muddy puddle.

 

Listen to the quietude,

 

The silence and the solitude Of after rain,

The dripping, dripping, dropping, The slowly, slowly stopping

The fresh wet silent

 

after time

 

of rain.

 

 

  1. Identify any two sound patterns employed in the poem

 

  1. Describe the rhyme scheme of the poem

 

  • How would you say the first line of the poem?

 

 

  1. A bear will bear a bear

 

  1. Classify the above genre
  2. State two functions of the genre above

 

 

  • Give another example of the genre

 

 

. c) Underlinetheoddoneout

 

 

 

 

 

i)    Picked

 

ii)    World

wicked worker packed wolf sacked
 

iii) Think

 

this

 

thing

 

thistle

iv) Tube tutor turn tumour

 

worship

 

 

 

 

 

.           d) i) non-verbal skills in communication are very important in the delivery of any oral item.

 

State any four forms of non-verbal cues

 

  1. Give three reasons why listening is an essential aspect of communication

 

  • How would you say the following statements ;

 

 

  1. Why do you always come to church late?

 

  1. Are you the boy who was found bullying the form ones?

 

  • I don’t believe your

 

 

 

  1. e) Imagine you    are    facedwiththe    following    situationsand    give    at    least    two appropriate

 

  1. You accidentally knock down another student on the pavement

 

  1. You are in a hurry to get to school and three people are busy conversing right in the middle of the path
  • Your friend has lost a close relative and you decide to console her

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Readthepoembelowandanswerthequestionsthatfollow:-

 

 

 

The sun rises in the east Sending forth its morning Heat The lily in the valley below Reflects its wondrous glow

 

Red yellow pink and white

 

The roses send out their bright light It is such a wondrous sight

Beauty shining through the night

 

 

 

Explain one way through which rhythm has been achieved

 

  • Write down the rhyme scheme of the

 

 

  • Explain any two ways you would ensure your audience enjoys your performance of this poem
  • Which three words would you emphasize in line three of stanza one?

 

  • Underline the silent letter in the following words:.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

two

Rendezvous Condemn Eulogy .

Phlegm .

 

  • Using each of the following Construct two sentences with each to show the

 

 

meanings implied in the word . .

 

  • Your school principal has invited a prominent professor to offer a talk on a topic of

 

students’

 

interest. Briefly explain any four features that would prove one is not listening

 

  • Giveawordthatsoundssimilartotheonegivenbelow (3mks) ½ a mark each

 

Analyst – Surge – Session- Through – Sterling- Symbol-

(f)                                                               Thefollowingispartofaconversationbetweenastudentandaprincipalofsome schoolin

 

KakamegaDistrict. Thestudentisthechairpersonoftheschool’swriters’clubandis requesting forpermissionfortheclubmemberstoattendawriterssymposiumata

 

neighbouring school. Completetheconversation.

 

 

Student: ………………………………….. . . …………………………………………

 

Principal: Good morning, your club patron Mrs. Wasike had mentioned that you would see me about

 

 

 

you

a symposium but she did not elaborate what is the symposium about and Show will

 

 

benefit from it.

 

………………………………………………………………………………

 

 

Principal: That sounds like a very useful symposium How many club members will attend and how

 

do you intend to finance the trip? .

 

………………………………………………………………………………

 

Principal: That is a good number, and I hope you will raise enough money from the projects. If some

 

remains after the trip you could support the school bursary fund. You have my permission.

:   …………………………………………………………………………………………

 

 

 

 

 

Although     (1)          President and prime minister effectively (2)                a ceasefire

 

(3)             they    (4)          on the telephone      (5)                     Wednesday night and asked

their lieutenants to cease hostility            6relationship may not b e out of the woods (7)

               .

 

The President (8)              Prime Minister differed when Raila          (9)                        the suspension                     of                                                               (10)                        William Ruto of Agriculture and Sam Ongeri of Education a week ago.

(AdaptedfromTheStandardNewspaper)

 

.           (a) The following is a telephone conversation between Jane and her mother. Jane is a student at

 

 

 

business

Mwalimu High School, while her mother, who has been unwell for some time, is a

 

 

lady. Complete the dialogue by filling in the blanks with appropriate responses.

 

 

 

 

MOTHER         : Hello Jane! How are you?

 

JANE   :…………………………………………………….. (2mks)

 

Mother             : Oh! Little girl. Don’t worry about that, I am still on drugs and I believe all will                           be well very soon. I am concerned about your school work. Have you improved?

JANE   :                        …………………………………………………………………………….………

 

Mother             : This is great. I have always prayed for you. Don’t relax after mid-term results.

 

Now make sure that you are working hard to be the best in the district.

 

JANE   :                        …………………………………………………………………………….………

 

MOTHER         : You are right Jane. Caro is joining University of Nairobi and all of us in the

 

village are proud of her. Where are you going on the tour?

 

JANE   :                        …………………………………………………………………………….………

 

MOTHER         : I will send somebody to clear the remaining amount. Next month is only ten

 

days away.

 

JANE                        :…………………………………………………………………………….………

 

MOTHER      : Daddy is doing well but he has gone on transfer to Kianyaga.

 

 

 

 

 

 

She dwelt among untrodden ways Besides the springs of dove;

A maid whom there was none to praise And very few to love

 

A violet by mossy stone Half-hidden from the eye! Fair as a star, when only one Is shining in the sky

She lived unknown, and few could know When Lucy ceased to be:

But she in her grave, and oh, The difference to me!

 

 

 

(2mks)

 

 

(2mks)

  • Describe the rhyme scheme of the above poem

 

 

  • Which word would you stress in stanza 1 line 4, and why?

 

 

  • If you were to recite the poem in a drama festival, what two performance features

 

would you

 

 

(2mks)

 

 

employ in the last stanza? Give reasons

 

 

From the following list, write down five pairs of words whose pronunciations are Abattoir                        well                  coup

Rattle               kettle                hail

 

Nose                 zoo                   cape

 

Hale tour whale
Gape

(5mks)

meteor noise
Cattle knows cups

 

 

 

(5mks)

on

 

 

Conscious Special Ocean Measure Cushion Explosion Motion Seizure Brush Fushion

 

 

 

 

 

abuse

Imagine you have been invited to speak about the role of NACADA in fighting drug

 

 

among the Kenyan youth. What would you need to ensure that your speech is

 

successful?

 

  • Mention

 

non-verbal cues you would use to make your speech effective                (5mks)

 

 

 

 

16.

 

THE EAGLE

 

He clasps the Crag with crooked hands:

 

Close to the sun in lonely hands, Rung with the azure world, he stands,

 

The wrinkled sea beneath crawls:

 

He watches from his mountain walls, And like a thunder belt he falls.

 

 

Identify two sound patterns employed in the poem.                                             (2 mks)

 

What has the poet achieved by use of the above?                                                (2 mks)

 

Which word would you stress in the last line and why?                                        (2 mks)

 

  1. What gestures would you use while reciting line one of the poem? (2 mks)

 

  1. A small woman who cooks better than your mother, Bee

 

  1. Identify the above (1 mk)

 

  1. Give any functions of the genre                                               (3 mks)

 

  1. Write another word with similar pronunciation as (5 mks)

 

Come aren’t need way oral

 

  1. i) Explain
  2. ii) State any

 

entails.

reasons why listening is an important aspect of

 

 

forms of non verbal cues and briefly explain what each of them

 

 

 

(3

 

 

loud

 

 

their

 

 

 

 

 

 

house.

 

 

(1 mk)

 

 

decide

 

 

(1 mk)

 

  1. You are revising for your end term exams at Your neighbours are playing very

 

 

music. You decide to go over to their house to request them to reduce the volume of

 

 

radio.(1 mk)

 

  1. A friend of yours comes to your house to invite you to accompany him or her to watch a

You are unable to accompany him/.her because you have not finished your chores in the

 

 

You decide to turn down the invitation.

 

 

  • Your friend has sent you message that she or he has lost his or her You

 

 

to console him or her.

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. (a) Read the poem below and answer the questions that follow: My old man’s white old man

And my old mother’s black

 

If ever I cursed my old white old man I take my curses back

 

If ever I cursed my black old mother And wished she were in hell

I am sorry for that evil wish And now I wish her well

 

 

My old man died in a fine big house My ma died in a shack

I wonder where I’m gonna die

 

Being neither white nor black                                        (ByLangstoneHughes)

 

 

  1. (i) Describe the rhyme scheme of the poem (2mks)

 

  • Apart from rhyme, identify another sound pattern used in the poem and state its

effect

 

  • State the words you would stress in the third last line and explain why

 

(2mks)

 

 

 

  • How would you say the last line? (1mk)

 

(5mks)

 

 

 

  • son, sun, can, hut

 

  • came, come, late, name

 

  • so, sew, sow, sod

 

  • hot, robe, cock, cost

 

  • hurt, herd, hard, firm
  • Are you serious?

 

  • You must behave yourself

 

  • I am going shopping

 

  • He can’t do that, really!

 

  1. d) In a conversation, how does one know it is his/her turn to speak?

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(5mks)

 

(5mks)

 

(e) You are attending a seminar with your friend. Halfway through the presentation by one of the speakers, she (your friend) tells you that she can hardly concentrate.

 

 

effectively

 

 

.

 

 

Explain any seven strategies you would           advice her to employ so as to listen

 

 

and benefit from the talk.                            (7mks)

 

 

 

 

 

I sit outside my house and listen From the construction site comes Pound, push, pull and plunk.

 

I get back into the house and listen Form her kitchen comes

Wash, swirl and gush

 

 

To bed I go at last for peace But

Mutter, wheeze and slurp

 

 

He snores in peace While I awake I remain

The noise too intense to ignore

 

 

Oh! The noise they make In the house, out the house Out the bed, in the bed

Why can’t they keep silence?

 

 

 

 

(1mk)

 

 

(4mks)

 

 

(2mks)

 

 

(1mk)

  • What is the poem talking about?

 

 

  • Identify any two sound patterns used in the poem

 

 

  • Which words would you stress in the last line of stanza three? Why ?

 

 

  • (i) How would you say the line of the poem?

 

 

 

 

(4mks)

  • Identify

pairs of words with the same pronunciation from the list below

 

 

Hale                 Pose                 missed              draught                        mist Way          bawl                 air                        ball                   tile Why           tall                        pause                draft                 hit Drought                        ore                   wail                  till                        heat

  • You are a radio presenter and you are scheduled to interview a prominent politician abut

 

 

 

 

 

(6mks)

 

 

(6mks)

the current proposed constitution.

 

  • What preparations would you carry out before the interview?

 

 

  • What strategies would you employ during the interview session?

 

 

 

  • Explain

 

important details you will use when giving direction to make it

Grade 8 Term 3 Rationalized Schemes of Work.

Get free Grade 8 Term 3 Rationalized Schemes of Work here:

GRADE 8 TERM 3 AGRICULTURE SCHEMES OF WORK.docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 SOCIAL STUDIES SCHEMES OF WORK.docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 CRE SCHEMES OF WORK.docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 AGRI NUTRITION.docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 AGRICULTURE AND NUTRITION SCHEMES OF WORK.pdf
GRADE 8 TERM 3 CRE SCHEMES (1).docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 CRE SCHEMES OF WORK.docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 CRE SCHEMES.docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 CREATIVE ARTS SCHEMES OF WORK.docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 CREATIVE SCHEMES.pdf
GRADE 8 TERM 3 ENGLISH SCHEMES OF WORK.docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 ENGLISH.docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 INTEGRATED SCIENCE SCHEMES (1).docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 INTEGRATED SCIENCE SCHEMES OF WORK.docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 INTEGRATED SCIENCE SCHEMES.docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 INTERGRATED SCIENCE SCHEMES OF WORK.docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 KISWAHILI SCHEMES (1).docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 KISWAHILI SCHEMES OF WORK.docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 MATHS SCHEMES OF WORK.docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 MATHS.docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 PRETECHNICAL SCHEMES (1).docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 PRETECHNICAL SCHEMES OF WORK.docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 PRETECHNICAL SCHEMES.docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 SOCIAL STUDIES SCHEMES OF WORK.docx
GRADE 8 TERM 3 SOCIAL STUDIES.docx

Updated Form 1 to 4 Biology Notes Free Downloads

Updated Form 1 to 4 Biology Notes

CELL PHYSIOLOGY.docx
chemicals of life. 1.ppt
CLASSIFICATION.docx
EVOLUTION.docx
FORM FOUR BIOLOGY.dotx
FORM ONE BIOLOGY.dotx
FORM THREE BIOLOGY-2.dotx
FORM THREE BIOLOGY.docx
FORM TWO BIOLOGY1.docx
FORM TWO BIOLOGY1.dotx
Genetics.docx
INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGY.docx
NUTRITION IN ANIMALS AND ANIMALS.docx
nutrition in animals.pptx
Nutrition in plants complete.ppt
the cell 1.ppt
The cell 2.pptx
THE CELL.docx

Physics Topical Questions And Answers

Welcome to the number one site for free Materials for both teachers and learners. Download free Physics Topic By Topic Questions And Answers (All Topics) and many more resources at no cost.

PHYSICS TOPICAL QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS.

CIRCULAR MOTION QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

CURRENT I QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

ELECTRONICS QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

ELECTROSTATICS QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

EQUILIBRIUM AND CENTRE OF GRAVITY QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

FLOATING AND SINKING QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

FLUID FLOW QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

FORCE QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

GENERAL QUESTIONS FOR PRACTICE

GAS LAWS QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

INDUCTION QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

HOOKE’S LAW QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

LIGHT QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

LINEAR MOTION QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

MACHINES QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

MAGNETISM QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

MEASUREMENT I QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

MEASUREMENT II QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

NEWTON’S LAW QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

PARTICULATE NATURE QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

PHOTOELECTRIC EFFECT QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

PRESSURE QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

QUALITY OF HEAT QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

RADIOACTIVITY QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

REFLECTION AND CURVED SURFACES QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

REFRACTION OF LIGHT QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

RESISTORS QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

THERMAL EXPANSION QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

THIN LENSES QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

TURNING EFFECT OF A FORCE QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

WAVES II QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

WORK 2 QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

X-RAY QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

WORK 1 QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

HOT DOWNLOADS IN THIS SEGMENT.

Free Physics notes, revision questions, KCSE past Papers …

Free Physics notes, revision questions, KCSE past Papers …

PHYSICS FORM ONE WORK PAST KCSE QUESTIONS & ANSWERS PER TOPIC

FORM ONE WORK

INTRODUCTION TO PHYSICS

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. State two factors that should be controlled in manufacturing a cylindrical container of uniform thickness, which should normally be in a standing position.
  2. The figure shows a measuring cylinder which contains water initially at level A. A solid mass 11g is immersed in the water, the level rises to B.

 

Determine the density of the solid. (Give your answer to 1 decimal point)

A butcher has a beam balance and masses 0.5 kg and 2 kg. How would he measure 1.5 kg of meat on the balance at once?

  1.             The number of molecules in 18cm3 of a liquid is 6 x 1023. Assuming that

the diameter of the molecules is equivalent to the side of a cube having the same length as the molecule. Determine the diameter of the molecule.

  1. Determine the density in kg/m3 of a solid whose mass is 40g and whose dimensions in cm are 30 x 4 x 3
  2. Record as accurately as possible the masses indicated by the pointer in figures A.

 

  1.             Figure 1 shows the reading on a burette after 55 drops of a liquid have

been used.

 

 

 

 

 

 

If the initial reading was at 0cm mark, determine the volume of one drop.

(2 marks)

  1. Fig. 1 shows the change in volume of water in a measuring cylinder when an irregular solid is immersed in it.

 

 

 

 

Given that the mass of the solid is 567g, determine the density of the solid in gcm-3. (Give your answer correct to 2 decimal places.

 

  1. A thin wire was wound 30 times closely over a boiling tube.   The total length of the windings was found to be 9.3 mm.   Calculate the radius of the wire.
  2. (a)       Given that a kilogram of copper contains about 1025 atoms and that density

of copper is about 9000kg/m3/ estimate the diameter of the copper atom?

(b)       State the assumption made in (9a) above.

  1. A drop of oil of volume 1.0 x 10-3 spreads out on clean water surface to a film of area 10cm2. Calculate the thickness of the film.
  2. A small drop of oil has a volume of 5 x 10-8m3. When it is put on the surface of some clean water, it forms a circular film of 0.lm2 in area;

(i)        What is the size of a molecule of oil?

(ii)       State two assumptions you make in your calculations?

  1. The density of concentrated Sulphuric acid is 1.8gcm-3. Calculate the volume of 3.6kg of the acid.
  2. 1600 cm3 of fresh water of density l g/cm3 are mixed with 1400cm3 of seawater of density 1.25g/cm3. Determine the density of the mixture.

 

 

 

TOPIC 2

FORCES

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. A student was heard saying “the mass of a ball on the moon is one sixth its

mass on earth”. Give a reason why this statement is wrong.

  1. In the study of a free fall, it is assumed that the force f  acting on a given

body of mass m is gravitational, given by F= mg. State two other forces that act on the same body.

  1. State how a lubricant reduces friction in the bearings of moving part of a

machine.

  1. Distinguish between mass and weight of a body stating the units for each.
  2. State with reason the purpose of the oil that circulates in a motorcar

engine.

  1. Name two types of forces which can act between objects without contact.
  2. A house in which a cylinder containing cooking gas is kept unfortunately

catches fire. The cylinder explodes. Give a reason for the explosion.

  1. Give a reason why the weight of a body varies from place to place
  2. State why a pin floating on water sinks when a detergent is added.
  3. The figure below represents a rock balanced at point O.  G is the center of

gravity of the rock. Use this information to answer the following questions:

 

 

  • Draw and label on the figure the forces acting on the rock
  • If the portion of the rock represented by the shaded part is chopped off, explain why the rock may topple to the right.
  1. The figure shows a non- uniform log of mass 100kg balanced on a pivot

by a 2 kg mass placed as shown.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the distance of the centre of gravity of the log from the pivot

  1. 2003:   The figure below show two identical trolleys with loads A and B. The

loads are identical in shape and size.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Given that the density of A is greater than that of B, explain why the trolley in figure 3 (ii) is more stable.

  1. 2004:   Fig 2 shows a beaker placed on a bench. A block of ice is placed in the

beaker as shown. State and explain the change in the stability of the beaker when the ice melts.

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. 2004:   The system in figure 9 is in equilibrium

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the weight of the bar.                                           (3 marks)

  1. (a) Give a reason why water is not a suitable liquid for use in a barometer

(b) Fig. 3 is a simplified diagram of a hydraulic jack. The cross selection

area A2 of the load piston is 25 times the A1 of the effort piston, A2 = 25N. F1 is the force applied (Effort) while F2 represents A1 the load.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i)        Write an expression for the pressure exerted on the liquid by the

effort piston.                                                               (1 mark)

A mechanic applies a force of 100N on the effort piston while raising the rear part of a car.

(ii)       Determine the maximum load that can be raised      (2 marks)

(iii)      Give a reason why gas is not suitable for use in place of the liquid

in the jack                                                                   (1 mark)

  1. 2005:   Fig 2 shows a solid cylinder standing on a horizontal surface. The cylinder

is in stable equilibrium

 

 

 

 

On the horizontal space provided, sketch the cylinder in neutral equilibrium.                                                                                    (1 mark)

  1. Fig 8 shows water drops on two surfaces. In 8 (a), the glass surface is

smeared with wax while in 8 (b) the glass surface is clean.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Explain the difference in the shapes of the drops.                (2 marks)

 

  1. A see – saw of length 5 m is pivoted at the centre. A student of mass 50kg sits at one end and is balanced by another student of mass ‘m’ sitting at a distance of 1m from the other end. Calculate the value of ‘m’
  2. An astronaut is on the moon. He drops a hammer from a height of 3.2m and it takes 2.0s to hit the lunar landscape. What is the acceleration due to gravity of the moon?
  3. An unloaded spring has a length of 15cm and when under a load of 24N it has a length of 12cm.  What will be the load on the spring when length is 10cm?
  4. Two copper spheres M and N are joined by a light rod such that their center of mass are 30cm apart: if the radius of M is 2 times the radius of N, find the position of the COG from mass M.
  5. In the diagram below the system is in equilibrium. Determine the value of F1 in N.

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Fig 3 shows a device for closing a steam outlet. The area of the piston is 4.0 x 10-4m2 and the pressure of the steam in the boiler is 2.0 x 105Nm2. Determine the weight W that will just hold the bar in the horizontal position shown.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. The total weight of a car with passengers is 25,000N. The area of contact of each of the four tyres with the ground is 0.025m2. Determine the minimum car tyre pressure.
  2. A drum which is 2m high contains water to a depth of 0.5 m and oil of density 0.5g/cm3 extends to the top. Find the pressure exerted at the bottom of drum by the two liquids.
  3. Figure 2 shows a non- uniform rod, lying in a horizontal position. Vertical force of 5N and 4 N can just lift the rod when applied at the end A and B respectively.

 

 

 

If the rod is 1.8m long find

(i)        The position of the centre of gravity

(ii)       The weight of the rod

 

 

TOPIC 3

PRESSURE

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. Give a reason why a concrete beam reinforced with steel does not crack

when subjected to changes in temperature.

  1. The figure below shows part of a set up used by a student to demonstrate

the expansion of a wire.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • What three other items, not shown in the fig would be needed in order to perform the experiment
  • What purpose does the stone serve?
  1. 2001:   State the reason why it may not be possible to suck liquid into your mouth

using a drinking straw on the surface of the moon.

 

Figure 3 shows the levels of two liquids A and B after some air has been sucked out of the tubes through the tap. Use this information and the figure to answer questions 4 and 5.

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. The total weight of a car with passengers is 25000N. The area of contact

of each of the FOUR tyres with the ground is 0.025m2.

Determine the minimum car tyre pressure.

  • Write an expression for pressure on a liquid in hydraulic jack
  • While using a jack, a mechanic applied a force of 100N on the effort piston while raising the rear part of a car.
  • Determine the maximum load that can be raised
  • Give a reason why gas is not suitable for use in place of the liquid in a jack.
  1. State the mode by which heat travels from the cube to the balloons.

(1 mark)

  1. The face of the cube towards A is bright and shiny and the face

towards B is dull- black. State with reason the adjustments that should be made on the distances X1 and X2 so that the rate of change of temperature in both balloons is the same. (1 mark)

 

  1. Explain why the pressure of a gas increases when the mass of the gas in the container is increased.
  2. The lift pump is effective for pumping water as long as the well is less than 10m deep. Explain.
  3. The reading on a mercury barometer at Mombasa is 760mm. Calculate the pressure at Mombasa (density of mercury = 1.36 x 104 Kgm-3)
  4. State one property of a barometer liquid and explain its effects.

 

 

TOPIC 4

THE PARTICULATE NATURE OF MATTER.

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE QUESTIONS

  1. State the reason for the rise in the levels of the liquids when air is

sucked from the tubes                                                            (1 mark)

  1. Given that the density of liquid B is 1200 kgm3, determine the

density of liquid A.                                                    (3 marks)

  1. Brownian motion of smoke particles can be studied by using the

apparatus shown in figure 9. To observe the motion, some smoke is enclosed in the smoke cell and then observed through the microscope.

 

 

 

 

 

  • Explain the role of the smoke particles, lens and microscope in the experiment. (6 marks)
  • State and explain the nature of the observed motion of the smoke particles.                                                                                                       (3 marks)
  • State what will be observed about the motion of the smoke particles if the temperature surrounding the smoke cell is raised slightly. (1 mark)

 

TOPIC 5

THERMAL EXPANSION

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. 1990:   The figure below shows an arrangement for a solar water purifier for dirty.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • Describe how the solar water purifier works
  • Explain the role of:
    • Black coating
    • The pieces of charcoal in the tray
  • State why the solar water purifier continues to work when sunrays are cut off.
  • Explain the green house effect process in the purifier above.

 

  1. 2003:   The figures (a) and (b) show a convex mirror and a plane mirror of equal

aperture.

 

By sketching a pair of incident and reflected rays for each (a) and (b) show how the convex mirror provides to the eye, a wider field of view than the plane mirror.

  1. 2004:   Figure 12 shows a parabolic surface with a source of light placed at its

focal point F.

 

 

 

 

 

Draw rays to show reflection from the surface when rays from the source strike the surface at points ABC and D.

  1. 2005:   Fig 12 shows a vertical object O, placed in front of a convex mirror.

 

 

 

 

On the same diagram draw the appropriate rays and locate the image

formed.                                                                                   ( 3 marks)

  1. Figure 1 represents a pinhole camera. Sketch rays to show the

formation of an enlarged image in the camera. Label both the objects and the image.

 

 

 

  1. Figure 3 shows an object, O in front of a concave mirror and its

image, 1 formed after reflection.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • On the same diagram appropriate ray(s) to locate the principal focus ‘F’ of the mirror                                                                    (2 marks)
  • Determine the focal length of the mirror (scale 1:5)     (1 mark)

 

  1. Liquids expand more than solids. Explain why

 

TOPIC 6

HEAT TRANSFER

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. An electric heater is placed at equal distances from two similar cans A and

B filled with water at room temperature. The outer surface of can A is shiny while that of can B is dull black. State with reasons, which of the cans will be at higher temperature after the heater is switched on for some time.

  1. In the set up shown in figure 4, it is observed that the level of the water

initially drops before starting to rise.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Explain this observation.

  1. When a Bunsen Burner is lit below a wire gauze, it is noted that the flame

initially burns below the gauze as shown in figure (i),  after sometime, the flame burns below as well as above the gauze as shown in figure (ii)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Explain this observation

  1. In a vacuum flask the walls enclosing the vacuum are silvered on the

inside. State the reason for this                                              (1 mark)

 

Figure 4 shows two identical balloons A and B. The balloons were filled with equal amounts of the same type of gas. The balloons are suspended at distances X1 and X2 from a metal cube filled with boiling water and placed on an insulating material. Use this information to answers questions 5 and 6.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. State the mode by which heat travels from the cube to the balloons

(1 mark)

  1. The face of the cube towards A is bright and shiny and the face

towards B is dull black. State with reason the adjustments that should be made on the distances X1 and X2 so that the rate of change of temperature in both balloons is the same.     (1 mark)

 

  1. Temperature scale in clinical thermometer ranges from 350c to 430c. Explain.
  2. State one application of expansion in gases
  3. Why is it that boiling is not used for sterilization of clinical thermometer?
  4. Describe ONE advantage and ONE Disadvantage of anomalous behavior of water.
  5. (a) Draw a well labeled diagram of a vacuum flask

(b) Stating the specific parts in the flask explain how heat loss is reduced through:

(i)        Conduction

(ii)       Convection

(iii)      Radiation

  1. In the diagram below the ice remains in solid state for several minutes as heating continues. Explain the phenomenon.

 

 

TOPIC 7

RECTILINEAR PROPAGATION OF LIGHT AND REFLECTION AT PLANE SURFACES

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. What is meant by a virtual image?
  2. The figure below shows an object O being viewed using two inclined

mirrors M1 and M2.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Complete the diagram by sketching rays to show the position of the image as seen by the eye E

  1. The figure below shows an object O placed in front of a plane mirror

 

 

 

 

 

 

On the same diagram, draw rays to locate the position of the image 1 as seen from the eye E.

  1. The diagram shows a ray of light incident on a plane mirror at point O.

 

 

 

 

 

The mirror is rotated clockwise through an angle of 300 about an axis perpendicular to the paper. Determine the angle through which the reflected ray rotated.

 

  1. A luminous point object took 3 s to move from P to Q in front of a pinhole camera as shown below.

 

 

 

 

 

What is speed in cm/s of the image on the screen?

  1. The diagram shows the image of a watch face in a plane mirror

 

 

 

 

 

What is the time shown on the watch face?

  1. (a) Give two main reasons why concave mirrors are unsuitable as driving mirrors

(b) State one disadvantage of a convex mirror as a driving mirror

  1. Explain why a concave mirror is suitable for use as a make up mirror.
  2. In the space provided below, sketch a labeled diagram to show how a pinhole camera forms an image of a vertical object placed in front of the pinhole

(3 marks)

  1. A building standing 100m from a pinhole camera produces on the screen of the camera an image 5 cm high 10 cm behind the pinhole. Determine the actual height of the building.                                                                                   ( 3 marks)

 

 

 

TOPIC 8

ELECTROSTATICS 1

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. Two isolated and insulated spheres A and B carry the same positive

charge. Sketch the electric lines of force of their field when placed close to each other but not touching some.

  1. State the observation on the leaves of a positively charged electroscope

when a negative charge is brought near it.

  1. The fig shows sketches of two types of houses built in a lighting prone

area. State with reason which house is safer to stay in during lighting and thunderstorms?

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. The diagram below shows a circuit with a capacitor C and a lamp L. When

the sketch is closed at Y, the lamp L lights. When the switch is closed at X, L does not light. Explain the observation.

 

 

  1. In the clothing and textile industries the machines experiences

electrostatics forces at certain points. Suggests one method of reducing these forces.

  1. State two other factors to be considered in constructing a capacitor other

than the surface area of the plates.

  1. State the precaution that is taken when charging a metal object.
  2. (a)       (i)        State coulombs law of electrostatic force

(ii)       Define capacitance

(b)       Describe how the type of charge on a charged metal rod can be

determined

 

 

(c)       The fig. Shows hollow negatively charged sphere with a metal

disk attached to an insulator placed inside. State what would happen to the leaf of an uncharged electroscope if the metal disk were brought near the cap of the electroscope. Give a reason for your answer.

 

 

 

 

 

(d)       State two ways of charging the magnitude of the deflection of the leaf of an electroscope.

(e)       The fig- shows an arrangement of capacitors connected to a 10V d.c supply. Determine:

(i)        The charge stored in the 2μ F capacitor.

(ii)       The total capacitance of the arrangement.

 

 

 

  1. Explain why the leaf of an uncharged object is brought near the cap.
  2. A glass rod can be charged positively by rubbing it with silk. Explain what happens when the glass rod is being charged.

 

TOPIC 9

CELLS AND SIMPLE CIRCUITS

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. A student learnt that a battery of eight dry cells each 1.5V has a total e.m.f

of 12V the same as a car battery. He connected in series eight new dry batteries to his car but found that they could not start the engine.

Give a reason for this observation

  1. Distinguish between a primary cell and a secondary cell.
  2. What current will a 500Ω resistor connected to a source of 240V draw?
  3. A current of 0.08A passes in a circuit for 2.5 minutes. How much charge

passes through a point in the circuit?

  1. In large circuits, large resistors in parallel are preferred to low resistors in

series. Explain.

  1. State two advantages of an alkaline battery over a lead acid battery.
  2. A current of 0.5A flows in a circuit. Determine the quantity of charge that

crosses a point in 4 minutes.

  1. Explain why the bulb in figure 10 (b) will be brighter than each of the

bulbs in figure 10 (a).                                                             (2 marks)

  1. Give the reason why the cells in figure 10 (b) Can be used for a longer

period than the cells in Fig 10 (a)

  1. State the purpose of manganese dioxide in a dry cell.          (1 mark)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. A student wishes to investigate the relationship between current and

voltage for a certain device X. In the space provided, draw a circuit diagram including two cells, rheostat, ammeter, voltmeter and the device X that would be suitable in obtaining the desired results.   (1 mark)

  1. State one advantage of an alkaline cell over a lead acid cell

(1 mark)

  1.  In the circuit diagram  shown in figure 7, the ammeter has

negligible resistance. When the switch S is closed, the ammeter reads 0.13A.                                                                         (3 marks)

 

 

 

 

  • State Ohm’s law
  • The graph in figure 9 shows the current voltage characteristics of a device, X

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i) State with a reason whether the device obeys Ohm’s laws   (2 marks)

(ii)             Determine the resistance of the device X when the current through it is

60mA.

(iii)            When the device X is connected in the circuit below, the voltage across it

is 0.70V.

 

 

 

 

Calculate the value of the resistance R.

(c) The cell in figure 10 has an emf of 2.1V and negligible internal resistance.

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the

(i)        Total resistance in the circuit                                    (2 marks)

(ii)       Current in the circuit                                                  (1 mark)

(iii)      Reading on the voltmeter                                           (2 marks)

 

  1. Explain clearly the precautionary measures you would take to maintain the efficiency of an accumulator?
  2. State the advantage of Nickel-cadmium battery over the lead -acid type
  3. Draw a well labeled diagram of a dry cell
  4. When ammeter is connected between the two plates of a simple cell, the pointer deflects along the scale. Explain

 

 

 

FORM 2 WORK

TOPIC 1

MAGNETISM AND ELECTROMAGNETISM

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. The graph in the figure shows the relationship between the attractive

forces of an electromagnetic and the magnetizing current. Give reasons for the shape of the curve in terms of the domain theory.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. The figure shows a wire in a magnetic field. A current is switched on to

flow through the wire in the direction shown. State the direction of motion of the wire.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. The diagram in the figure below shows a flexible wire in a magnetic field.

 

 

 

 

  • Explain the behaviour of the wire when the switch K is turned on
  • What is the behaviour of the wire if R is reduced?
  1. You are provided with two iron bars, X and Y, one is magnetized and the

other is not. Explain how you would identify the magnetized bar without using a magnet.

  1. One way of demagnetizing bar is to place it in a solenoid in which an

alternating current (ac) flows. How is the demagnetization achieved?

 

  1. Give two reasons why soft irons is used as a core of the coil of an electric

bell.

  1. Give two differences between uniform and non-uniform magnetic fields
  2. Figure 5 represents a long horizontal insulated wire AB connected to an

electric circuit. A plotting compass is placed on the wire as shown. When the switch K is closed, the plotting compass shows a deflection. State two changes which can be made in the circuit to increase the deflection.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. State three factors which determine the magnitude of the force on a current

carrying conductor which is in a magnetic field.

  1. Give a reason why attraction in magnetism is not regarded as a reliable

method of testing

  1. The figure below shows two parallel current- carrying conductors A and B

placed close to each other. The direction of the current is into the plane of the paper. Copy the diagram and on the same figure;

 

 

 

  • Sketch the magnetic field pattern
  • indicate the force F due to the current on each conductor
  1. (a)       Given a bar magnet, an iron bar and a string.
  • Describe a simple experience to distinguish between the magnet and the iron bar
  • State with reasons the observations that would be made in the experiment.

(b)       In an experiment to magnetize two substances P and Q using electric currents, two curves (graphs) were obtained as shown. Using the information in figure 7 explain the differences between the substance P and Q with reference to the domain theory.

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Distinguish between soft and hard magnetic material
  2. Explain how hammering demagnetizes a magnet.
  3. How can it be shown that the strength  of a magnet is concentrated at the

poles

  1. Figure 11 shows a wire XY at right angles to a magnetic field. XY is part

of a circuit containing a galvanometer. When XY is moved, the current flows in the direction shown. State the direction in which XY is moved.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Fig 12 shows how magnets are stored in pairs with keepers at the end.

Explain how this method of storing helps in retaining magnetism longer.

(2 marks)

 

 

 

  1. In figure 13 the arrow indicates the direction of the current in the

conductor. Sketch on the diagram the magnetic field pattern (1)

 

 

 

 

  1. Fig 14 shows a soft iron ring placed between the poles of magnet. Copy

the diagram and sketch the magnetic field pattern. (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Fig 16 shows a soft iron core placed between poles of two magnets. Copy

the diagram and sketch the magnetic field pattern. (1)

 

 

 

 

  1. The figure below shows two parallel thick copper conductors connected to

a d.c power supply. A rider made from a thin copper wire is placed on the conductors. State and explain what is observed on the rider when the switch is closed. (3)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Figure 7 shows the poles of two magnets close together.

 

 

 

 

 

Sketch the magnetic field pattern in the space between the poles.

(2 marks)

  1. Figure 2 shows a horse- Shoe magnet whose poles are labeled and

two other  magnets near it. Iron nails are attracted to the lower ends of the magnets as shown.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Identify the poles marked X and Y.                           (2 marks)

  1. Sketch the electrostatic field pattern due to the arrangement of the charges shown in fig 6                                                                                                    (1 mark)

 

 

  1. Fig 7 shows the features of a dry cell (Leclanche) use the information in the figure to answer question 2A and 2B.

 

 

 

 

  • Name parts A, B, C, D
  • Explain the purpose of B
  1. Three magnets were brought near 3 pieces of material steel, soft from iron and aluminum as shown in figure 7. Indicate the magnetic field in each diagram.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. The figure shows the circular path followed by an electric beam in a magnetic field.

 

 

 

 

 

  • A force acts on the electrons as they follow this circular path. Show on the diagram the direction of that force.
  • Draw on the diagram the direction of the magnetic field responsible for the deflection of the electrons.
  1. Draw the magnetic field pattern in the diagram below and indicate the direction of the forces acting on the conductors.

 

 

 

  1. The force of a conductor carrying a current in a magnetic field can be varied by changing among others, the magnitude of the current and the magnetic field strength. Name two other factors that can be changed to vary the force.
  2. The figure below shows a soft iron ring placed between poles of two magnets.

 

 

Sketch the magnetic field pattern

  1. Four bars of metal A, B, C and D are tested for magnetism. B attracts both A and C but not D. D does not attract A, B or C

A and C sometime attract one another and sometimes repel one another. What conclusion can you draw about?

(a)       Bar A

(b)       Bar B

(c)       Bar D

  1.  Figure 8 beside shows an incomplete circuit of an electromagnet. Complete the circuit between X and Y by drawing the windings on the two arms of the core such that A and B are both North poles when the switch S is closed. Indicate the direction of the current on the windings drawn.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. (a)       State TWO factors that affect the strength of an electromagnet.

(b)       In the set up in figure 9, the suspended meter rule is in equilibrium

balanced by the magnet and the weight shown. The iron core is fixed to the bench.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • State and explain the effect on the meter rule when the switch S is closed
  • What would be the effect of reversing the battery terminals
  • Suggest how the set up can be adapted to measure the current flowing in the circuit.
  1. (a)       In an experiment to determine the strength of an electromagnet, the

weight of pins that can be supported by the electromagnet, was recorded against the number of turns. The current was kept constant throughout the experiment. The table shows the data obtained.

 

Number of turn, n 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36
Weight, W, of pins x 10-3 (N) 0 4 14 30 58 108 198 264 296 300

 

 

  • Plot a graph of weight, W, y- axis against the number of turns, n
  • Use the domain theory to explain the nature of the curve.
  • Sketch on the same axes, the curve that would be obtained using a higher current.

(b)       Using a labeled diagram, explain the working of a simple relay.

 

 

 

TOPIC 2

MEASUREMENTS II

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. describe one method of determining the diameter of the oil drop? (3 mks)
  2. Explain the cause of random motion of smoke particles as observed in

Brownian motion experiment using smoke cell.

  1. Fig. 3 shows part of an experimental set up of estimating the diameter of

an oil molecule.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i)        Describe how the oil patch is formed.                       (2 marks)

(ii)       In an experiment, the diameter, a, of the patch was measured to be 200mm for an oil drop of radius 0.25mm. Determine the diameter of the molecule of the oil.                                              (4 marks)

(iii)      State why this is an estimate                                      (1 mark)

  1. An oil drop of average diameter 0.7mm spreading out into a roughly circular patch of diameter 75mm on the surface of water in a trough.

(i)        Calculate the average diameter of a molecule of oil.

(ii)       State two assumptions to be made in (i) above when calculating the diameter.

  1. The Screw of micrometer screw gauge has a pitch of 0.5mm. The thimble is divided into 50 equal divisions. What is the smallest unit it can measure?

 

Figure 1 shows a metal cube of mass 1.75g placed between the jaws of a micrometer screw gauge. The magnified portion of the scale is also shown. The reading on the gauge when the jaws were fully closed without the cube was 0.012cm. Use this information and the figure to answer questions 6 and 7.

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. What is the length of the cube?
  2. Determine the density of the metal cube giving your answer correct to three significant figures.
  1. In an oil drop experiment the diameter of the oil was found to be 0.4mm and the drop was placed on a clean water surface. It spread into a circular parch of diameter 180mm. Estimate the size of the oil molecule.
  2. Name an instrument that would use for measuring the depth if a blind hole nearly 900mm deep.
  3. Suggest a suitable instrument that can be used for measuring the width of an object stated as 2.6 x 10-1cm.
  4. What is the reading indicated by the scale of the vernier caliper below?

 

 

 

  1. Name the instrument that would be most suitable for measuring the thickness of one sheet of paper.
  2. The micrometer screw gauge shown has a thimble scale of 50 divisions

What is the reading shown?

 

 

 

 

  1. In an experiment to estimate the radius of oil molecule 200 identical drops of oil of density 800kg/m3 are run from a burette. The reading on the burette changes from 0.0cm3 to 0.5cm3.

One of these drops is placed on a large water surface dusted lightly using chalk dust. It spreads forming a uniform patch of area 0.2m2.

What is the purpose of the chalk dust?

What is the mass of one drop of oil in kg?

What is the volume of one oil drop in m3?

What is the thickness of the oil film?

Estimate the assumption (s) made in this experiment

 

 

 

 

TOPIC 3

TURNING EFFECT OF A FORCE

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS FROM THE TOPIC

  1. The figure below shows a uniform bar of length 1 m pivoted near one end. The bar is kept in equilibrium by a spring balance as shown.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Given that the reading of the spring balance is 0.6N. Determine the weight of the bar.

  1. The figure shows a device for closing a steam outlet.

 

 

 

 

 

 

The area of the piston is 4.0 x 10-4 m2 and the pressure of the steam in the boiler is 2.0 x 105Nm-2. Determine the weight W that just holds the bar in the horizontal position shown.

  1. The figure below shows force F1 and F2 acting on a metre rule such that it is in equilibrium.

 

 

 

Mark on the figure a third force F3 acting on the rule such that the equilibrium is maintained.

  1. (a) State the principle of moments.

(b)      Two men P and Q carried a uniform ladder 3.6 m long weighing 1200N. P held the ladder from one end while Q supported the ladder at a point 0.4m from the other end.

(i)        Sketch a diagram showing the forces acting on the ladder.

(ii)       Calculate the load supported by each man.

  1. The figure shows a uniform half metre rod that is balanced over a pivot using a block of weight 2N and a spring.

 

 

 

Given that the tension in the spring is 9N, determine the weight of the rod.

 

  1. The diagram below shows a uniform bar of lengths 6m. If the weight of the bar is 15N, determine x.

 

 

 

  1. State the principle of moments
  2. Name four activities which produce a turning effect
  3. Why is it very difficult to open a door from a point too close to hinges
  4. Why are people who are maimed or have lost one leg provided with crutches?
  5. A uniform half- metre rod is balanced by a weight of 38N at one end. If the pivot is placed 10cm from the same end, calculate the weight of the rod.
  6. Two forces of 10N and 20N when applied at ends A and B respectively are just able to lift a non- uniform rod of lengths 2m.

 

 

 

 

  • What is the weight of the rod?
  • Determine the position of the centre of gravity of the rod
  1. Determine the value of Y in the diagram below

 

 

TOPIC 4

EQUILIBRIUM AND CENTRE OF GRAVITY

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. The figure shows two identical trolleys with loads A and B. The loads are identical in shape and size.

 

 

Given that the density of A is greater than that of B, explain why the trolley in (ii) is more stable.

  1. Figure 2 shows a solid cylinder standing on a horizontal surface. The cylinder is in stable equilibrium.

 

 

In the horizontal space provided, sketch the cylinders in neutral equilibrium

 

  1. State two factors that determine the stability of a vehicle
  2. State the necessary conditions for equilibrium of body which is acted upon by a number of forces
  3. State the modification introduced in the modern buses so as to enhance stability
  4. The figure below show a beaker placed on a bench. A block of ice is placed in the beaker as shown. State and explain the changes in the stability of the beaker when the ice melts.

 

 

 

 

  1. The figure below shows beaker containing water at 00. The beaker is placed on a bench.

 

 

 

 

State and explain the changes in stability of beaker when water freezes

 

TOPIC 5

REFLECTION AT CURVED SURFACES

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. The figure (fig 1) on the grid shows an object O in front of a concave mirror and

its image, I, formed after reflection.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • On the same diagram draw appropriate ray(s) to locate the principal focus, F, of the mirror.
  • Determine the focal length, f of the mirror, (scale 1.5)
  1. Fig 2 shows a ray of light incident on a convex mirror

 

 

 

 

Use a suitable construction on the same diagram: determine the radius of curative of the mirror.

 

 

  1. Fig 3 shows a vertical object O, placed in front of a convex mirror.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

On the same diagram draw the appropriate rays and locate the image formed.

  1. What is meant by a virtual image?
  2. Fig 4 shows two parallel rays incident on a concave mirror. F is the focal point of the mirror.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

On the same diagram sketch the path of the rays after striking the mirror

  1. Fig 5 shows a parabolic surface with a source of light placed at its focal point F.

 

 

 

 

 

Draw rays to show reflection from the surface when rays from the source strike the surface at points ABC and D.

  1. Fig 6 (a) and (b) shows a convex mirror and a plane mirror of equal aperture.

 

 

 

By sketching a pair of incident and reflected rays for each (a) and (b) shows how the convex mirror provides to the eye, a wide field of new than the plane mirror.

 

  1. Distinguish between a real and a virtual image.
  2. State ONE application of each of the following
    • Convex mirrors
    • Parabolic mirrors
    • Concave mirrors
  3. State the advantages a diverging mirror has over a plane mirror when used as a rear- view in vehicles.
  4. State characteristics of an image observed in a concave mirror when the object is between the focal point and the mirror.
  5. If a concave mirror has a focal length of 10cm. Find the two positions where an object can be placed to give in each case, an image twice the height of the object.

 

 

TOPIC 6

MAGNETIC EFFECT OF AN ELECTRIC CURRENT

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. Fig 4 shows a simple microphone in which sound waves from the person talking causes the cardboard diaphragm to vibrate.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • Explain how a varying current is induced in the coil when the diaphragm vibrates
  • State two ways in which the induced current in (a) above can be increased
  1. Fig 5 shows an electric generator. The points P and Q are connected to a Cathode Ray Oscilloscope (CRO).

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sketch on the axes provided the graph of the voltage output as seen on the CRO, given that when t= 0, the coil is at the position shown in the figure.

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. An armature composed of turns of insulated copper wire wound on a laminated soft- iron core is rotated in a magnetic field to generate an e.m.f. Use this information to answer the following questions.
    • State two factors other than the speed of rotation that affect the magnitude of the e.m.f generated.
    • State the reason why soft- iron is laminated.
  2. Fig 6 shows a wire XY at right angle to a magnetic field. XY is part of a circuit containing a galvanometer.

 

 

 

 

 

 

When XY is moved, the current flows in the direction shown. State the direction in which XY is moved.

  1. Fig 7 shows an incomplete circuit of an electromagnet. Complete the circuit between X and Y by drawing the windings on the two arms of the core such that A and B are both North poles when switch S is closed. Indicate the direction of the current on the windings drawn.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. State, with reasons, the material which you would consider most suitable for an electromagnet.
  2. Explain two ways of demagnetizing a magnet.
  3. State two ways of increasing the strength of an electromagnet.
  4. An iron rod XY is placed inside a coil of wire. What type of magnetic pole is induced at the end x when the current flows through the coil?

 

 

 

  1. An un insulated copper wire XY lies over the fixed wire A and B connected to a battery when the key in the circuit is closed, the wire XY experiences a force.

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • In which direction does the wire XY- experience the force?

(ii)       How do you determine the direction in (i) above

(iii)      When is the force on the wire XY greatest?

(iv)      What is the effect of reversing both the magnetic field and direction of flow of current?

(v)       State TWO factors by which the force on XY can be decreased

(vi)      Name an instrument which uses this effect

 

  1. Fig 3 shows a D.C electric motor.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • Name the parts labeled X1 and X­2 and state their functions.
  • What is the purpose of parts labeled Y1 and Y2?
  • When the switch k is closed state the forces acting on the sides  of the coil and the direction of movement of the coil
  • What can be done to increase the speed of rotation of the motor?
  1. State FOUR reasons why the efficiency of an electric motor is always less than 100%
  2. Give TWO practical applications of an electromagnet

 

TOPIC 7

HOOKES LAW

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. 1990: Distinguish between ductile end and brittle material
  2. 1990: Identify the girders in the structure that can be replaced by a string

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. It is easier to bend an iron rod than a glass rod of the same dimensions at

room temperature. Give a reason for this

  1. (a)     An experiment was performed to find out how the length L of a

spiral spring varies with the compression force, F The figure shows the variation.

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • Draw a diagram of a possible set up of the apparatus
  • Over which range of the force does the spring obey Hooker’s law?
  • Suggest a reason for the shape of the graph between 40N and 60N

(b)       Two identical springs of spring constant 3N/cm are used to support a load of   30N as shown. Determine the extension of each spring.

 

 

 

 

 

(c)       State two factors that govern the strengths of a spiral of given

material

 

  1. 1994: (a)       State Hooke’s Law)

(b)       Long uniform beams are to be supported near their ends by two supports X and Y, Which are fixed to the ground and at the same level. When beam A is placed on the supports, it sags in the middle but when it is turned through an angle of 900 the sag is the same.

 

 

 

 

(i)        Suggest the possible shapes of the beams A and B.

(ii)       Beam C is of the same shape as beam B but has a notch in the middle. How should it be placed on the supports so that the notch does not extend? Give a reason for your answer.

  1. The fig shows a beam AB supported at points A and B. A large force is

applied on the beam as shown. Mark on the diagram the position X where the notch is likely to appear.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. The figure shows a wire A and a spring B made of the same material. The thickness of the wire is the same in both cases. Masses are added on each of the same intervals and the extension noted each time.

 

 

 

 

Sketch the graph of extension against load for each. (Hooks Law is obeyed.)

  1. State Hooke’s Law
  2. A spiral spring stretches by 0.6 cm when a mass of 300g is suspended on it. What is the spring constant?

 

 

TOPIC 8

WAVES 1

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. Fig 1 shows the displacement – time graph for a certain wave

 

 

 

 

Determine the frequency of the wave?

  1. State one effect that would be observed when water waves pass from deep to shallow water.
  2. A source generates 40 waves in a second. If the wavelength is 8.5 cm. Calculate the time taken to reach a wall 102m from the source.
  3. Name a property of light that shows it is a transverse wave.
  4. State ONE difference between mechanical and electromagnet waves.

 

  1. Explain the following terms and state their S.I units
  • Wavelength
  • Amplitude
  • Periodic time
  • Frequency
  1. State THREE differences between light waves and sound waves.
  2. (a) Name two types of progressive wave motion

(b)      Distinguish between the waves stated in 3 (a) above

  1. (a) Fig 1 shows a displacement – time graph of a wave. The velocity of the

wave is 50cm/s.

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the

  • Amplitude
  • Period
  • Wavelength
  • Frequency

(b)       State ONE factor that does not change as water moves from shallow to

deep part.

  1. Give an example which show that speed of a wave depends on the medium in which it travels.
  2. Give an example to demonstrate that waves carry energy
  3. Best FM station broadcasts on a frequency of 250 KHz and the wavelength of its signals is 1200m.
    • The speed of radio waves in m/s
    • The wavelength of the signal of another station that broadcasts on a frequency of 200KHZ.

 

 

TOPIC 9

SOUND

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. State the type of wave produced when a stretched string plucked
  2. When a sound wave travels from a dense to a less dense gas, its velocity

changes. What wave property does this observation show?

  1. Standing waves are set up in a rope resulting in a series of nodes and antinodes.

In what state of motion is the rope at the nodes?

  1. Two identical sources of sound S1 and S2 are emitting the same frequency. Explain with reasons, the observations that will be made by an observe  listening to the  sound emitted who was moving slowly along the lines, PQ  and MN

 

 

 

 

  1. The table shows the frequency – squared f of the  fundamental  note

produced by a stretched string for various  tensions, T

 

T(N) 8 18 32 50 72 98
F2 (Hz2) 14,500 32,500 57,500 90,000 129,500 176,500

 

  • Plot a graph of f2 against the tension T.
  • Determine the gradient of the graph and hence obtain an equation relating the frequency f and the tension T.

 

  1. A gun is fired and an echo heard at the same place 0.5s later. How far is

the barrier, which reflected the sound from the gun? (Speed of sound 330m/s).

  1. State two ways by which frequency of a note produced  by a given guitar

wire may be increased.

  1. An observer watching a fireworks displays sees the light from an

explosion and hears the sound 2 seconds later.  How far was the explosion from the observer? (Speed of  sound  is air 340m/s)

  1.  (a)
  • What is the differences between longitudinal and transverse waves?
  • A mineworker stands between two vertical cliffs 400m from the nearest cliff. The cliffs are distance apart. Every time he strikes the rock once, he hears two echoes the first one comes after 2.5s while the second follows 2s later. From this information calculate:
    1. The speed of sound  in air
    2. The value d
  1. A girl standing 600m away from a cliff bangs two pieces of wood together

and hears an echo 3.5 seconds later. Determine the speed of sound in air at that place.

 

  1. What is an echo?
  2. Describe an experiment to show that sound cannot travel in a vacuum.
  3. Fig 1 shows air molecules in front of a hollow wooden box P set vibrating by a turning fork T of frequency 800Hz.

 

 

 

  • What is the purpose of fixing the tuning fork on the box which is open on one end?
  • Name the section labeled X and Y
  • State and explain the nature of the waves shown
  • Given that the speed of sound in air is 330ms-1. Calculate the wavelength of the waves.
  1.  Sound is very faint in high altitudes than at sea level. Why?
  2. Distinguish between  the following terms
  • Intensity and loudness

(ii) Frequency and pitch

  1. State two factors that affect the frequency of the note produced by a vibrating string

 

 

 

TOPIC 10

FLUID FLOW

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. When spraying a field of water using a hose pipe, it is common to reduce

the pipes opening in order to spray water furthest. Other than pressure, what other quality is varied in the process?

  1. The figure below shows water forces through a hydraulic system by a

pump. An air chamber is used to maintain a continuous flow of water during both the up stroke and down stroke of the piston pump.

 

 

 

 

 

Explain how the continuous flow of water is maintained.

  1. A pupil blows a current  of air  over the surface of a  sheet of paper held

close to its mouth. State and explain what happens to the paper.

  1. Two table Tennis balls are in the same level while suspended from

threads a short distance apart. A stream of air is blown between the balls in a horizontal direction. Explain what happens to the balls

  1. The figure represents a tube through which liquid is flowing in the

direction shown by the arrow. Copy the diagram and show on it the relative positions of the level of the liquid in sections marked, X, Y and Z.

 

 

 

  1. State how the pressure in a moving fluid varies with speed of the water is

steadily increased from low to high value.

  1. Water flows in a horizontal smooth pipe. State the changes that would be

observed in the nature of the flow if the speed of the water is steadily increased from low to high value?

  1. The figure below shows a pith ball in a flask. When a jet of air is blown

over the mouth of the flask as shown, the pith ball is observed to rise from  the bottom.

 

 

 

 

Explain the observation

  1. State Bernoulli’s principle.                                                    (1 mark)

Figure 2 shows a tube of varying cross sectional area. V1V2V3 and V4 represents the speeds of water as it flows steadily though the sections of the tube.

 

 

 

Arrange the speeds V1, V2,V3 and V4 in decreasing order starting with the highest.

 

  1. Water flows along a horizontal pipe of cross sectional area 30cm2. The speed of the water is 4m/s but it reaches 7.5m/s in a constriction in the pipe. Calculate the area of the constriction.
  2. A heart pumps blood at a rate of 1.8 x 103 cm3/ min though its aorta is of cross sectional area 0.6 cm3. The blood spreads into a capillary network that is equivalent to about 4 x 106 fine tubes each of diameter 6 x 10-3cm.

Calculate:

  • The average velocity of blood in the aorta
  • The average blood velocity in the capillary tubes.

 

FORM THREE WORK

TOPIC 1

LINEAR MOTION

PAST K.C.S.E QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. a) The diagram below shows part of the motion of a tennis ball, which is projected vertically upwards from the ground and allowed to bounce on the ground. Use this information to answer questions that follow.

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Describe the motion of the ball relating it to different positions of the ball along the following AB, BC, CDE.
  2. ii) From the graph, calculate the acceleration due to gravity.

iii)                   How high does the ball rise initially?

  1. iv) Explain why E is not at the same level as A.
  2. Sketch a velocity- time graph showing the motion of a ball vertically upwards with an initial velocity of u.
  3. Calculate the acceleration shown by the tickers-tape that was made using a ticker timer vibrating at 50HZ.

 

 

 

 

  1. What is the difference between speed and velocity?

5.An object is projected vertically upwards at a speed of 15m/s. How long will it take to return to the same level of projection?

6.A block slides off a horizontal table 4 meters high with a velocity of 12-m/s. Find:

  1. a)      The horizontal distance from the table at which the block hits the floor.
  2. b) The horizontal and vertical components of the velocity when it reaches the floor.

7.A particle initially at A moves along an arc AB of a horizontal circle of radius 4m and centre O.A is south of O and angle AOB is 600. Determine the displacement AB.

 

 

 

 

 

8.The figure represents dots made by a ticker-timer. The dots were made at a frequency of 50 dots per second. (Diagram not drawn to scale)

 

 

 

 

  1. a) What is time interval between two consecutive dots?
  2. b) The arrow on the tape indicates the dots made at time t = 0. Copy the

diagram and indicate in a similar way the dots made at t= 0.1s, 0.2s, 0.3s.

  1. c) Determine the average velocities of the tape over time intervals -0.02s to

0.02s, 0.08s to 0.12s, 0.18s to 0.22s and 0.28s to 0.32s

  1. d) Draw a suitable graph and from it determine the acceleration of the tape.

9.A mass is projected horizontally from height of 5m above the ground with a velocity of 30m/s. Calculate:

  1. a) The time taken to reach the ground
  2. b) The horizontal distance traveled before hitting the ground
  3. c) The vertical velocity with which the mass hits the ground
  4. The data in the table below represents the motion over a period of 7

seconds

 

Time s 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
D is m 0 20 40 60 80 95 105 110
  1. a) Plot on graph paper a graph of displacement (y-axis) against time.
  2. b) Describe the motion of the vehicle for the first 4 seconds.
  3. c) Determine the velocities at 4.5s and 6.5 s. Hence or otherwise determine the average acceleration of the vehicle over this time interval.
  4. a) A body accelerates uniformly from initial velocity, U to the final velocity

V, in time t, the distance traveled during this time interval is S.  If the acceleration is shown by the letter a, show that;

 

  1. i) V= U + at            ii) s= ut + ½ at2           iii) V2 =U2 + 2 as

 

  1. b) A body initially moving at 50m/s decelerates uniformly at 2m/s until it come to rest. What distance does it cover from the time it started to decelerate?
  2. An object dropped from a height h attains a velocity of 6m/s just before

hitting the ground, find the value of h.

13.: a)  A stone is thrown vertically upwards from the edge of a platform

eventually the stone lands without bouncing on the ground below the platform. Taking the upward velocity to be positive, sketch the velocity-time graph of the motion of the stone.

  1. b)     A car can be brought to rest from a speed of 200m/s in a time of 2s.
  2.   i)         Calculate the average deceleration
  3.   ii)        If the driver reaction time is 0.2s, Determine the shortest stopping

distance.

 

14.:      The figure shows a speed-time graph for part of the journey of a motorcar.

 

 

 

 

Determine the distance the car travels in the first 40 seconds

  1. Draw axes and sketch a graph of velocity (v versus time (t) for uniformly

accelerated motion given that when t = 0, v is greater than zero.

  1. a) The figure below shows the displacement time graph of the motion of a

particle.

 

 

 

 

 

 

State the nature of the motion of the particle between:

  1. i) A and B
  2. ii) B and C

iii) C and D

  1. b) A ball is thrown horizontally from the top of a vertical tower and strikes the ground at a point 50m from the bottom of the tower. Given that the height of the tower is 45m, determine the;-
  2. i) Time taken by the ball to hit the ground
  3. ii) Initial horizontal velocity of the ball.

iii) Vertical velocity of the ball, just before striking the ground. (Take acceleration due to gravity g as 10ms-2)

  1. The graph bellows shows how the velocity varies with time for a body

thrown vertically upwards.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the total distance moved by the body.                             (3mks)

  1. A bullet is fired horizontally from a platform 15m high. If the initial speed

is 300ms-1, determine the maximum horizontal distance covered by the bullet.                                                                                                  (3mks)

  1. Fig 14 shows the velocity-time graph for a small metal sphere falling

through a viscous fluid.

 

 

 

 

 

On the axes provided sketch the graph of momentum against time for the same mass                                                                                           (1mk)

Given that the reading of the spring balance is 0.6N, determine the weight of the bar.                                                                                                (3mks)

 

The graph in figure 6 shows the velocity of a car in the first 8 seconds as it accelerates from rest along a straight line.  Use the graph to answer question 19 and 20.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the distance traveled 3.0 seconds after the start.       (3mks)

Determine the acceleration of the car at 4.0 seconds.                 (2mks)

 

  1. A bomber flying horizontally at 100m/s releases a bomb from a height of 300m. Calculate:
  2. a) Time taken for the bomb to hit the ground.

The horizontal distance traveled when hitting the ground.

  1. c) The magnitude and direction of the velocity when hitting the ground?

22  An airplane is flying horizontally over a camp at 250m/s and drops a pack.  How far from the camp will the pack land if the plane was flying 300m above the ground?

  1. An object is projected horizontally at a velocity of 40m/s from a cliff 20m high. Calculate:
  2. a) The time taken to hit the ground
  3. b) The distance from the foot of the cliff when the object hits the ground.
  4. A ball-bearing X is dropped vertically downwards, from the edge of a table and it takes 0.5s to hit the floor below. Another bearing Y leaves the edge of the table horizontally with a velocity of 5m/s. find:
  5. a) The time taken for bearing Y to reach the floor.
  6. b) The horizontal distance traveled by Y before hitting the floor.
  7. c) The height of the table-top above the floor level.
  8. A helicopter, which was ascending vertically at a steady velocity of 20m/s, released a parcel that took 20 second to reach the ground.
  9. i) State the direction in which the parcel moved immediately it was released.
  10. ii) Calculate the time taken by the parcel to reach the ground from the maximum height.

iii) Calculate the velocity of the parcel when it strikes the ground.

  1. iv) Calculate the maximum height above the ground the parcel reached.
  2. v) What was the height of the helicopter at the instant the parcel was dropped.
  3. A stone is thrown horizontally from a building that is 50 m high above a horizontal ground. The stone hits the ground at a point, which is 65m from the foot of the building. Calculate the initial of the stone.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

TOPIC 2

REFRACTION OF LIGHT

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. The diagram below shows a transparent water tank containing water. An

electric light is fixed at corner A of the tank.  A light ray from the slit shines on the water surface BC at an angle of 480 as shown

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) i)         Determine the angle of refraction for the ray shown in the diagram.
  2. ii) Complete the diagram to show the refracted ray.
  3. b) Determine the angle of incidence for which the angle of refraction is 900
  4. c) Calculate the speed of light in water (nw = 4/3, C= 3 x 108ms)
  5. The figure shows the path of a yellow light through a glass prism. The

speed of yellow light in the prism is 1.88 x 108  m/s.

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Determine the refractive index of the prism material for the light. (Speed of light in vacuum = 3.0 x 108 ms-1)
  2. b) Show on the figure the critical angle C and determine the value.
  3. c) Given that r= 21.20, determine angle Q.
  4. d) On the same figure, sketch the path of the light after striking the prism if the prism was replaced by another of similar shape but lower refractive index. (Use dotted line for your answer).
  5. 2002: The figure below shows two rays A and B entering a semi circular glass

block which has critical angle of 420.  The rays are incident at an air glass boundary at point O

 

 

 

 

 

Complete the path of the two rays from point O. Label A1 and B1 the corresponding rays.

  1. A ray of light is directed at an angle of 500 on to a liquid-air boundary.

The refractive index of the liquid is 1.4.

Show on a diagram the patch taken by the ray on striking the liquid-air boundary.  Show how you arrive at your answer.

  1. Figure 13 shows a coin placed in a large empty container. An observer

looking into the container from the position shown is unable to see the coin.

 

 

 

 

 

Sketch two rays from a point on the coin to show how the observer is able to see the image of the coin after the container is filled with water.

Figure 6 show a ray of light incident on the face of a water prism.

 

 

 

 

 

Sketch the path of the rays as it passes through the prism. Critical angle for water is 490                                                                             (1mk)

 

  1. Calculate the refractive index of glass given that the velocity of light in air is 3x 108 ms-1 and velocity of light in glass is 2.4 x 108ms-1.
  2. The real thickness of crown glass block of refractive index 1.58 is 10cm is 10cm. Calculate the apparent thickness of the glass.
  3. You are provided with the following;

-A 50cm beaker full of water.

-Stand and clangs

-A half metre rule

-2 optical pins

-Cork

  1. a) Explain briefly how you would determine the refraction index of water using the materials provided.
  2. b) The data below shows the results obtained when such an experiment was performed by form three students using various values of real depths, Y of a liquid.

 

Real depth cm 30 50 70 90 110 130
Apparent depth cm 22 37 52 66 81 96
  1. i) Plot a graph of the real depth (y-axis) against apparent depth.
  2. ii) From the graph, determine the refractive index of the liquid.
  3. Paraffin has a greater refractive index than that of water. Comment about the relative velocity of light in paraffin and in water.
  4. a) State SNELL’S LAW
  5. b) A ray of light travels from air into medium 1 and 2 as shown.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Calculate;

  1. i) The refractive index of medium 1.
  2. ii) Critical angle of medium 1

iii) The refractive index of medium 2 relative to medium (1n2)

  1. Explain with the aid of a diagram, how a suitable glass prism may be used to turn a ray of light 1800
  2. What measurable quantity is associated with colour of light?
  3. State TWO uses of total internal reflection.
  4. The graph shown below shows, the apparent depth (y-axis) against real depth. Use it to calculate the refractive index of glass.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. The refractive index for air-water boundary is 4/3. Calculate the critical cycle for water–air interface.

 

TOPIC 3

NEWTON’S LAW OF MOTION

PAST K.C.S.E QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. Two masses of 3kg and 7kg are connected by a light string. The 3 kg mass rests on a smooth incline plane 300 to the horizontal. The 7 kg mass hangs freely from the frictionless pulley attached to the top of plane.
  2. i) Draw a diagram showing the bodies and identify the forces acting on the 3 kg mass.
  3. ii) Calculate the acceleration of the masses.
  4. A rocket propelled upward with a constant thrust. Assuming friction due

to air is negligible and the burning of the fuel is steady.  Explain its motion.

  1. A 2 kg body slides down a smooth slope from a height of 5m. As it

reaches the horizontal, it strikes another body of mass 3 kg which is at rest.  Both bodies stick together.  Calculate the velocity of the bodies after collision.

  1. A girl of mass 40 kg stands on a scale balance in a lift. The lift is

accelerating upwards.  At one instant the acceleration of the lift is 2m/s.  Calculate the reading on the scale at that instant.

  1. The diagram shows a tall measuring cylinder containing a viscous liquid.

A very small steel ball is released from rest at the surface of the liquid as shown. Sketch the velocity- time graph for the motion of the ball from the time it is released to the time just before it reaches the bottom of the cylinder.

  1. A body of mass 5 kg is ejected vertically from the ground when a force of

600N acts on it for 0.1s.  Calculate the velocity with which the body leaves the ground.

  1. a) i) A body is initially in motion.  If no external force acts on the body,

describe the subsequent motion.

  1. ii)     A car of mass 800 kg is initially moving at 25 m/s.  Calculate the

force needed to bring the car to the rest over a distance of 20 m.

  1. b) Two trolleys of masses 2 kg and 1.5 kg are traveling towards each other at 0.25m/s and 0.40 m/s respectively. Two trolleys combine on collision.
  2. i) Calculate the velocity of the combined trolleys.
  3. ii) In what direction do the trolleys move after collision?
  4. a) The diagram shows a block of mass 5 kg sliding down from rest on

a plane incline at an angle of 300 to the horizontal. A frictional force of 6N acts between the block and the plane.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Copy the diagram and show the forces acting on the block.
  2. ii) Calculate the resultant force on the block.

iii)       Calculate the time taken by the block to cover the distance of

25cm.

  1. b) The table shows the value of the resultant force, F, and the time t for a bullet traveling inside the gun barrel after the trigger is pulled.

Force, F (N)                            360  340  300  240   170  110

Time, (t) (milliseconds)         3         4       8    12     17    22

(i)        Plot a graph of Force, f against time t.

  1. ii) Determine from the graph.
  2. i) The time required for the bullet to travel the length of the barrel assuming that the force becomes zero just at the end of the barrel.
  3. ii)       The impulse of the force.

iii)       Given that the bullet emerges from the muzzle of the gun

with a velocity of 200 m/s, calculate the mass of the bullet.

  1. 1993: The diagram shows two identical strings A and B attached to a large mass
  2. String A is attached to the ceiling. State the reason why string B cuts when its free and is suddenly pulled downward.

 

 

  1. 1994: The fig. shows a 2 kg block attached to 0.5 kg mass by a light inextensible

string which passes over a pulley.  The force of friction between the horizontal bench and block is 3N.  The block is released from rest so that both masses move through a distance of 0.6m.  Calculate the velocity of the string.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. A trolley is moving at constant speed in a friction compensated track.

Some plasticine is dropped on the trolley and sticks to it. State with a reason what is observed about the motion of the trolley.

  1. Fig. 4 shows a block of mass 30.0 kg being pulled up a slope by force P at

a constant speed.  The frictional force on the block is 20.0N

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) i)         On the same figure name and indicate other forces acting on the

block.

  1. ii) Determine the component of the weight acting on the trolley down the slope

iii)       Determine the value of P.

  1. b) On reaching the top of the slope, the block is left to run freely down the slope.
  2. i) Which one of the forces previously acting on the block would then act in the opposite direction?
  3. ii) Determine the acceleration of the block down slope.

iii)       What is the effect of increasing the angle of slope on your answer in (ii) above?

  1. 2002: A high jumper usually lands on a thick soft mattress. Explain how the

mattress helps in reducing the force of impact.

  1. 2003: A resultant force F acts on a body of mass m causing an acceleration a1 on

the body. When the same force acts on a body of mass 2m, it causes an acceleration a2. Express a2 in terms of a1.

15.

 

 

 

 

 

The figure above shows two trolleys of mass 2.0 kg and 1.5 kg traveling towards each other at 0.25m/s and 0.4m/s respectively.  The trolleys combine on collision.  Calculate the velocity of the combined trolley and show the direction in which they move after collision.

 

 

  1. Two identical stones A and B are released from the same height above the

ground.  B falls through air while A falls through water.  Sketch the graphs of kinetic energy (KE) against time (t) for each stone.  Label the graph appropriately.

  1. A trolley is moving at uniform speed along a track. A piece of plasticine is

dropped on the trolley and sticks on it. Explain why the trolley slows down.                                                                                                  (2 mks)

18.

  1. a) State the Newtons law of motion.                                                     (1 mk)
  2. b) A wooden block resting on a horizontal bench is given an initial velocity,

u, so that it slides on the bench surface for a distance, d, before coming to a stop.  The values of d were measured and recorded for various values of initial velocity.  Figure 10 shows the graph of u against d.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Determine the slope, s, of the graph
  2. ii) Given that u2 = 20kd, where k is a constant for the bench surface,

determine the value of k from the graph.

iii)       State how the value of k would be affected by change in the

roughness of the bench surface.

(c)       A car of mass 800kg starts from the rest and accelerates at 1.2ms-2. determine its momentum after it has moved 400m from the starting

 

  1. A force of 6N acts on a 2kg trolley and accelerates at 2 m/s2. Calculate the retarding force acting on the trolley.
  2. A boulder is sliding down a slope, with a uniform acceleration of 3 ms -2; calculate its velocity after it has slid 10m down the slope.
  3. A man whose mass is 70 kg stands on a spring weighing machine. When the lift starts to ascend its acceleration is 2.45m/s. What is the reading on the scale?
  4. A bullet of mass 22 g traveling at a velocity of 18/ms penetrates a sand bag and is brought to rest in 0.6 seconds. Find:

The depth of penetration in metres

The average retarding force of the sand

  1. A bullet of mass 10g traveling horizontally with a velocity of 300m/s strikes a block of wood of mass 290g which rests on rough horizontal floor. After impact they move together and come to rest after traveling a distance of 15m.

Calculate the common velocity of the bullet and the block.

Calculate the acceleration of the bullet and the block.

Calculate the coefficient of sliding friction between the block and the floor.

  1. a) A body of mass m initially at rest is acted on by a force F for a time t, as a result

its velocity changes to a final value V. Use this information to show that the gain is kinetic energy E= ½ MV 2

  1. b) Calculate the kinetic energy of a car of mass 1000 kg traveling at 36 km/h
  2. Under a driving force of 400N a car of mass 1250 kg has an acceleration of 2.5 m/s. Find the frictional force acting on the car.
  3. An apple of mass 100g falls a distance of 2.5m to the ground from a branch of a tree.
  4. a) Calculate the speed at which it hits the ground and the time taken for it to fall.

(Ignore air resistance).

  1. b) Assuming the apple takes 100 milliseconds to come to rest. Calculate the average

force experienced by the apple.

  1. A helicopter of mass 3000 kg rises vertically at a constant speed of 25 ms-1 if the acceleration due to gravity is 10 ms-2; determine the resultant force working on the helicopter.

 

 

 

TOPIC 4

WORK, ENERGY, POWER AND MACHINES

PAST K.C.S.E QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. 1990: The figure shows positions of a ball bouncing on a floor. State the energy

changes at C.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Explain why a burn from the steam of boiling water more severe that of water itself?
  2. b) An energy saving stove when burning steadily has an efficiency of 69%. The stove melts 0.03 kg lf ice 00C in 180 seconds.

Calculate: –

  1. i) The power rating of the stove.
  2. ii) The heat energy wasted by the stove.
  3. c) A pump uses 1g of a mixture of petrol and alcohol in the ratio 4:1 by mass to raise 1000 kg of water from a well 200m deep.
  4. i) How much energy is given by 1g of mixture?
  5. ii)             If the pump is 40% efficient, what mass of this mixture is needed to raise

the water?                   (1g of alcohol = 7000J, of petrol= 48000J)

  1. d) Suggest two energy changes that accompany the changing of a liquid in a vapour phase.
  2. A bullet of mass 0.80 g traveling at 400 m/s is stopped by a concrete wall.
  3. A small mass m is suspended freely at the lower end of a spring as shown.

The mass is displaced by a small distance and then released and allowed to oscillate. What form of energy does the mass have at a point midway between A and B?

 

 

 

 

 

 

.     What makes the amplitude of osculation of a simple pendulum to decrease with time?

  1. A screw advances 1mm when the screw is turned through two revolutions.

What is the pitch of the screw?

  1. A ball rolls on a table in a straight line. A part from the transitional

kinetic energy, state the other form of kinetic energy possessed by the ball.

  1. A car of mass 800 kg is initially moving at 25 m/s. Calculate the force

needed to bring the car to rest over a distance of 20 m.

  1. A workshop has the following simple machines for lifting heavy loads, a

wheel and axle, and a movable pulley. The wheel has a diameter of 30cm while the axle has diameter of 3.0cm.

  1. i) Sketch force diagrams to show how each machine works.
  2. ii) Assuming that the machines are perfect. Calculate the mechanical advantage for each of the machines and show which machine is more advantageous in lifting loads.
  3. A body has 16 Joules of kinetic energy. What would be its kinetic energy

if its velocity was double?

  1. Define the efficiency of a machine and give a reason why it can never be

100%

  1. a) The fig shows a loaded wheelbarrow. Indicate and label on the

diagram three forces acting on the wheelbarrow when a worker is just about to lift the handle.

 

 

 

 

  1. b) Suppose the handlebars of the wheelbarrow were extended, which force(s) would change and how?
  2. Sketch a labeled diagram to show how an arrangement of a single pulley

may be used to provide a mechanical advantage of 2.

  1. The fig. below shows a force distance graph for a car being on a horizontal

ground

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Calculate the total work done
  2. b) If the velocity just before reaching point D is 6m/s, calculate the power developed by the agent providing the force at this point.
  3. c) An electric pump can raise water from a lower-level reservoir to the high level reservoir to the high level reservoir at the rate of 3.0 x 105 kg per hour. The vertical height of the water is raised 360m. If the rate of energy loss in form of heat is 200 kW, determine the efficiency of the pump.
  4. The figure below shows how the potential Energy (P.E) of a ball thrown

vertically upwards.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

On the same axes, plot a graph of kinetic energy of the ball.

  1. Using a pulley system, a girl lifts a load of 1800N using an effort of

400N. If the system is 65% efficient, determine the velocity ratio of the system.

  1. a) A crane lifts a load of 200 kg through a vertical distance of 3.0m in

6 seconds.  Determine the;

  1. i) Work done
  2. ii) Power developed by the crane

iii)       Efficiency of the crane given that it is operated by an electric

motor rated 12.5 kw.

  1. A certain machine uses an effort of 400N to raise a load of 600N. If the

efficiency of the machine is 75%, determine its velocity ration.     (3mks)

  1. Figure 5 shows a uniform bar of length 1.0 pivoted near one end. The bar

is kept in equilibrium by a spring balance as shown.

 

 

 

 

 

Given that the reading of the spring balance is 0.6N. Determine the weight of the bar.

  1. When an electric pump whose efficiency is 70% raises water to a height of 15m, water is delivered at the rate of 350 litres per minute.

What is the power rating of the pump?

What is the energy lost by the pump per second?

  1. In the arrangement shown, the mass of 30 kg hanging on the pulley helps to raise the unknown load. The person pulling up the other string finds that he had to do 800 Joules of work in order to raise the load 4m.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Calculate the value of the unknown mass.
  2. b) State the assumptions you make in calculating the value (a)           above
  3. A load of 100N is raised 20m in 50s. Calculate;

The gain in potential energy

The power developed

  1. Gitonga has a mass of 60kg and climbs up a slop of 200m long and inclined at an angle of 100 to the horizontal. Calculate the minimum work done by Gitonga.
  2. A force of 8N stretches a spring by 10cm. How much work is done in stretching this spring by 13cm?
  3. A simple pendulum is released from rest and it swings towards its lowest position. If the speed at the lowest position is 1.0m/s, calculate the vertical height of the bob when it is released.

 

 

TOPIC 5

CURRENT ELECTRICITY II

PAST K.C.S.E QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. A student learnt that a battery of eight dry cells each 1.5v has a total e.m.f of 12V the same as a car battery. He connected in series eight new dry batteries to his car but found that they could not start the engine. Give a reason for this observation
  2. a) You are required to determine the resistance per unit length of a nichrome wire x,

you are provided with A.D.C. power supply an ammeter and voltmeter.

  1. i) Draw a circuit diagram to show how you would connect the circuit.
  2. ii) Describe how you would use the circuit in (a) (i) above to determine the

resistance per unit length of x.

  1. b) i)         State Ohm’s Law.
  2. ii) A filament lamp and a thermostat are ohmic devices to a certain extent.
  3. c) i) Explain why moving coil meters are unstable for the use of alternating

voltages.

  1. d) Four 5W resistors are connected to a 10V d. c. supply as shown in the diagram below.

 

 

 

 

Calculate;-

  1. i) The effective resistance in the circuit.
  2. ii) The current I following in the circuit.
  3. Study the circuit diagram. Determine the potential drop across the 3 resistor.

 

 

 

 

  1. State two conditions that are necessary for a conductor to obey Ohm’s law.
  2. a) State Ohm’s law.
  3. b) Describe with aid of a diagram and experiment to verify Ohm’s law
  4. c) Two resistors R1 and R2 are connected in series to a 10V battery.  The current

flowing then is 0.5A.  When R1 only is connected to the battery the current flowing is 0.8A.

Calculate the

  1. i) Value of R2
  2. ii) Current flowing when R1 and R2 are connected in parallel with the same batter.
  3. d) Recharging is one of the practices of maintenance of accumulators. State two measurements, which need to be taken to help you decide when an accumulator is due for charging.
  4. A current of 0.08A passes in circuit for 2.5 minutes. How much charge passes through a point in the circuit?
  5. An ammeter, a voltmeter and a bulb are connected in a circuit so as to measure the current flowing and the potential difference across both. Sketch a suitable circuit diagram for the arrangement.
  6. a) In the circuit diagram shown, calculate the effective resistance between Y and Z.

 

 

 

 

  1. b) Determine the current through the 3W
  2. c) One of the 6W resistors has a length of 1m and cross-sectional area of

5.0 x 10-5m2. Calculate the resistivity of the material.

  1. In the circuit diagram five resistors are connected to a battery of e.m.f. 4V, and negligible internal resistance. Determine:

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) The total resistance of the circuit.
  2. ii) The current flowing through the 5.5m

iii)       The potentials at points Y and O.

  1. iv) The potential difference between Y and O
  2. An electric bulb with a filament of resistance 480W is connected to a 240V mains supply. Determine the energy dissipated in 2 minutes.
  3. A student wishes to investigate the relationship between current and voltage for a certain device X. In the space provide, draw a circuit diagram including two cells, rheostat, ammeter, voltmeter and the device X that would be suitable in obtaining the desired results.
  4. In the circuit diagram shown in figure 7, the ammeter has negligible resistance. When the switch S is closed, the ammeter reads 0.13A.

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the internal resistance of the cell.

13  a)   State Ohm’s law.

  1. b) The graph in figure 9 shows the current voltage characteristics of a device, X.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) State with a reason whether the device obeys Ohm’s laws.
  2. ii) Determine the resistance of the device, X, when the current through it is

60m A.

iii)       When the device, X, is connected in the circuit below, the voltage across it

is 0.70V.

 

 

 

 

Calculate the value of the resistance R.

  1. c) The cell in figure 10 has an emf of 2.1V and negligible internal resistance.

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the

  1. i) Total resistance in the circuit.
  2. ii) Current in the circuit

iii) Reading on the voltmeter

 

  1. The diagram below shows an electrc circuit. When the switch is close the ammeter reading is 0.3A

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the voltmeter reading.

  1. a) In the circuit diagram shown, calculate the effective resistance between Y and Z

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) Determine the current through the 3W
  2. A battery of e.m.f. 3v drives a current through a 20W resistor. The p.d across the resistor is 2.8v as measured by a voltmeter. Calculate the internal resistance of the battery.
  3. A torch uses two identical dry cells connected in series. When a bulb of resistance 2.0 ohm’s is connected across the cells the pd across the bulb is 2.0 v. When a bulb of resistance 1.5 ohms is used, the p.d is 1.8v, calculate the e.mf and internal resistance of each cell.
  4. Suppose a high–resistance voltmeter reads 1.5v connected across a dry battery on open circuit and 1.2v. when the same battery is in a closed circuit when it is supplying a current of 0.3A through a lamp of resistance R.

Draw a circuit diagram to show the above experiment when in;

  1. i) Open circuit
  2. ii) Closed circuit.

What is

  1. i) The emf of the battery.
  2. ii) The internal resistance of the battery

iii) The value of R?

  1. When a resistor is connected across the terminals of a battery a current of 0.20A flows.

What is the time taken for 2.0 coulombs of charge to pass a given point in the circuit?

If e.m.f of the battery is 4.0v and its internal resistance is 0.20hm determine the rate at which heat is produced in the resistor.

  1. a) State Ohm’s law.
  2. b) In an experiment to determine the resistance of a resistor x, it is connected in parallel with a 100 W The current through the combination and the p.d across the combination is tabulated as shown below.

 

Potential difference (v) 1.5 3.0 4.5 6.0 7.5
Current (A) 0.075 0.015 0.225 0.30 0.375

Draw a diagram of the circuit that could have been used

  1. c) i)         plot a graph of current against potential difference.
  2. ii) Calculate the gradient of the slope

iii)       Calculate the resistance of resistor x.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

TOPIC 6

WAVES II

PAST K.C.S.E QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. Explain how you would make a diffraction grating on a piece of glass

slide.

  1. One range of frequencies used in broadcasting varies from 0.5 x 100 Hz to

2.0 x 107 Hz.  What is the longest wavelength of this range? Velocity of light air =3×108 / s

  1. State one effect that would be observed when water waves pass from deep

to shallow water.

  1. The fig. shows a wave profile. Determine the frequency of the wave.

 

 

 

 

  1. What happens to the wavelength of a water wave when it moves from the

deep part to the shallow part of a ripple tank?

  1. A source generates 40 waves in a second. If the wavelength is 8.5m.

Calculate the time taken to reach a wall 102m from the source.

  1. What condition is necessary for a wave incident on a slit to be diffracted?
  2. a) Sketch a displacement-time graph of a wave of amplitude 0.5 cm

and frequency 4Hz over a time interval of 1.25s

  1. b) i)   State one condition not involving a phase difference for

interference pattern to be observed.

  1. ii) Two points sources s1 s2 oscillate in phase producing waves of wavelength = 1cm. The separation of the sources is 3cm
  2. a) Draw to scale a series of 10 semicircular lines to represent the wave fronts produced at intervals of one periodic time (T) for each of the two sources.
  3. b) Draw on the same diagram, lines which represent positions of constructive interference.
  4. c) Mark a point P on one of the lines drawn in II. Determine the magnitude of (S2P – S1P) in terms of wavelength.
  5. Light travels through glass of refractive index 1.5 with a speed v.

Calculate the value of v.  (Speed of light in air =3.0 x 108 m/s).

  1. Name a property of light that shows it is a transverse wave.
  2. In an experiment using a ripple tank the frequency, f of the electric pulse

generator was reduced to one third of its original value.  How does the new wave length compare with the initial wavelength?  Explain your answer.

  1. a) Distinguish between stationary and progressive waves.
  2. i) Describe how a young’s double slit may be made in a laboratory.
  3. ii) State the condition for a minimum to occur in an interference pattern.

The sketch graph shows the results of an experiment to study diffraction patterns using double silt.

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Sketch an experimental set up that may be used to obtain such a pattern.
  2. ii) Name an instrument for measuring intensity

iii)       Explain how the peaks labelled A and B and troughs labeled C are

formed.

  1. What measurable quantity is associated with colours of light?
  2. Circular water waves generated by a point source at the centre O of the

pond are observed to have the pattern shown in the Fig.  Explain the pattern.

 

 

 

 

  1. Explain how a piece of Polaroid reduces the sun’s glare.
  2. In an experiment to observe interference of light waves, a double slit is

place close to the source.

  1. i) State the function of the double silt.
  2. ii) Describe what is observed on the screen.

iii) State what is observed on the screen when

  1. a) The slit separation S1S2 is reduced.
  2. b) White light is used instead of monochromatic source.
  3. The Fig. shows an experimental arrangement. S1 and S2 are narrow slits.

State what is observed on the screen when the source is:-

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Monochromatic          (ii)       White light
  2. (a) (i) Distinguish between transverse and longitudinal waves.

(ii)       Give one example of a transverse wave and one example of a longitudinal wave.

(b)       The fig shows the displacement of a practice in progressive wave incident on a boundary between deep and shallow regions.

 

 

 

 

 

(i)        Complete the diagram to show what is observed after boundary. (Assume no loss of energy).

(ii)       Explain the observation in (i) above.

  1. State one difference between mechanical and electromagnetic waves.
  2. Figure 4 shows the displacement-time graph for a certain wave.

 

 

 

Determine the frequency of the wave.                                   (3mks)

  1. Figures 5 (a) and (b). Show wave fronts incident on barriers blocking part of the path.

 

 

On the same figures sketch the wave fronts to show the behaviour of the waves as they pass each barrier and after passing the barrier.                                       (1mk)

 

  1. A source generates 40 waves per second. If the wavelength is 8.5cm. Calculate the time waves takes to reach a wall 120 meters from the source.
  2. A gun is fired and an echo heard at the same place 0.5 s later. How far is the barrier which reflected the sound from the gun? (Velocity of sound = 340 m/s)
  3. A man standing between two parallel walls fires a gun. He hears an echo after 1.5 seconds and another one after 2.5 seconds and yet another one after 4 seconds. Determine the separation of the walls. (Take velocity of sound 340 m/s)

 

TOPIC 7

ELECTROSTATICS II

PAST K.C.S.E QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. a) i)         State coulombs law of electrostatics force.
  2. ii)       Define capacitance.
  3. b) Describe how the type of charge on a charged metal rod can be determined.
  4. c) The fig. shows a hollow negatively charged sphere with metal disk attached to an insulator placed inside. State what would happen to the leaf of an uncharged electroscope if the metal disk were brought near the cap of electroscope. Give a reason for your answer.

 

 

 

 

  1. d) State two ways of charging the magnitude of the deflection of the leaf of an electroscope.
  2. e) The fig. shows an arrangement of capacitors connected to a 10v. D.C supply determine:-

 

 

 

 

  1. i) The charge stored in the 2mF capacitor
  2. ii) The total capacitance of the arrangement
  3. The figure below represents two parallel plates of a capacitor separated by a distance d. Each plate has an area of A square units.  Suggest two adjustments that can be made so as to reduce the effective capacitance.

 

 

 

 

  1. The Fig. Shows part of a circuit containing three capacitors. Write an expression for CT. The effective capacitance between A and B.

 

 

 

 

  1. State the law of electrostatic charge.
  2. The capacitors in the circuit in Fig. 14 are identical and initially uncharged.

 

 

 

 

Switch S1 is opened and switch S2 closed. Determine the final reading of the voltmeter, V.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) In the circuit diagram shown in Fig. 4 each cell has an e.m..f of 1.5 and internal resistance of 0.5W. The capacitance of each capacitor is 1.4m

When the switch s is closed determine the:

(i)  Ammeter reading

(ii) Charge on each capacitor

6    A 2mF capacitor is charged to a potential of 200V, the supply is disconnected. The capacitor is then connected to another uncharged capacitor.  The p.d. across the parallel arrangement is 80V. Find the capacitance of the second capacitor.

7    A 5mF capacitor is charged to a p.d of 200v and isolated.  It is then connected to another uncharged capacitor of 10mF.  Calculate

  1. i) The resultant p.d
  2. ii) The charge in each capacitor.

8    Three capacitors of 1.5mF, 2.0 mF and 3.0 mF are connected in series to p.d. of 12V.  Find;-

  1. a) The combined capacitance.
  2. b) The total charge stored in the arrangement
  3. c) The charge in each capacitor.

9    In the circuit of the figure 3 C1=2 mF, C2 =C3 = 0.5 mF and E is a 6V battery. Calculate the total charge and p.d across C1

 

 

 

 

  1. In an experiment to study the variation of charge stored on capacitor and the potential difference across it, the following results were obtained.

 

Charge Q (m) 0.08 0.16 0.24 0.32 0.40 0.56
p.d (v) 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 14.0

 

Plot a graph of charge Q. against p.d

Use your graph to determine:-

  1. a) Capacitance of the capacitor.
  2. b) Energy stored in the capacitor when the p.d across its plate is 10V.

 

 

 

 

TOPIC 8

HEATING EFFECT OF AN ELECTIC CURRENT

PAST K.C.S.E QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. An electric bulb rated 40W is operating on 240V mains. Determine the resistance of its filament
  2. When a current of 2A flows in a resistor for 10 minutes, 15KJ of electrical energy is dissipated. Determine the voltage across the resistor.
  3. How many 100W electric irons could be safely connected to a 240V moving circuit fitted with a 13A fuse?
  4. A heater of resistance R1 is rated P watts, V volts while another of resistance R2 is rated 2P watts, v/2 volts. Determine R1/R2

 

  1. State THREE factors which affect heating by an electric current.
  2. What is power as it relates to electrical energy?
  3. An electrical appliance is rated as 240V, 200W. What does this information mean?
  4. An electrical heater is labelled 120W, 240V.

Calculate;

  1. a) The current through the heating element when the heater is on.
  2. b) The resistance of the element used in the heater.
  3. An electric toy is rated 100W, 240V. Calculate the resistance of the toy when operating normally.

 

TOPIC 9

QUANTITY OF HEAT

PAST K.C.S.E QUESTIONS FROM THE TOPIC

  1. An electric heater rated 6000W is used to heat 1kg of ice initially at -100c

until all the mass turns to steam.  Given that

Latent heat of fusion =334kJ-1

Specific heat capacity of ice= 2,260J kg -1 K -1

Specific heat capacity of water = 4, 200J kg-1 K-1

Latent heat of vaporization = 2, 260KJ kg -1 K -1

Calculate the minimum time required for this activity.

2 a)            Explain why a burn from the steam of boiling water more severe

that of water itself?

  1. b) An energy saving stove when burning steadily has an efficiency of

60%.  The stove melts 0.03kg of ice at 00c in 180 seconds.

Calculate; –

  1. i) The power rating of the stove.
  2. ii) The heat energy wasted by the stove.
  3. c) A pump uses a mixture of petrol and alcohol in the ratio 4: 1 by mass to raise 100kg of water from a well 200m deep.
  4. i) How much energy is given by 1g of mixture?
  5. ii) If the pump is 40% efficient, what mass of this mixture is needed to raise the water?
  6. d) i) Suggest two energy changes that accompany the changing

of a liquid in a vapour phase.

  1. ii) Explain why the time calculated in (i) above is minimum
  2. An immersion heater rated 90W is placed in a liquid of mass 2kg. When

the heater is switched on for 15 minutes, the temperature of the liquid rises from 200C to 300C. Determine the specific heat of the liquid.

  1. State two factors that would raise the boiling point of water to above 1000c
  2. a) State what is meant by the term specific latent heat of vaporization
  3. b) In an experiment to determine the specific latent heat of vaporization of water, steam at 1000c was passed into water contained in a well-lagged copper calorimeter. The following measurements were made:

Mass of calorimeter   = 50g

Initial mass of water   = 70g

Final mass of calorimeter + water + condensed steam = 123g

Final temperature of mixture = 300C

(Specific heat capacity of water = 4200 J kg -1K and specific heat capacity for copper = 390 J kg -1 K-1)

Determine the

  1. i) Mass of condensed steam
  2. ii) Heat gained by the calorimeter and water

iii)       Given that L is the specific latent heat of evaporation of steam

  1. Write an expression for the heat given out by steam
  2. Determine the value of L.
  3. A heating element rated 2.5 KW is used to raise the temperature of 3.0 kg

of water through 500C.  Calculate the time required to effect this.  (Specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J/kgK)

  1. An electric heater is connected to the mains supply. A fault in the mains

reduces the supply potential slightly. Explain the effect on the rate of heating of the heater.                                                                           (3mk)

  1. In an experiment to determine the power of an electric heater, melting ice

was placed in a container with an outlet and the heater placed in the ice as shown in Fig. 2. The heater was connected to a power supply and switched on for some time.  The melted ice was collected.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Other than the current and voltage, state the measurement that would be taken to determine the quantity of heat absorbed by the melted ice in unit time. (2mks)
  2. b) If the latent heat of fusion of ice is L, show how measurements in (i) above would be used in determining the power P, of the heater, (2mks)
  3. c) It is found that the power determined in this experiment is lower than the manufacturer’s value indicated on the heater.                    (1mk)

Fig 11 shows the variation of temperature ‘q’ with time t, when an immersion heater is used to heat a certain liquid.  Study the figure and answer questions 9 and 10.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. State the reason for the shape of the graph in the section labelled BC.                                                                                                                   (1mk)
  2. Sketch on the same axes the graph for another liquid of the same mass but

higher specific heat capacity when heated from the same temperature.                                                                                                                              (1 mk)

11State two factors that affect the melting point of ice.             (2mks)

12.

  1. a) Define the term specific latent heat of vaporization of a substance.

(1mk)

  1. b) Figure 11 shows the features of a domestic refrigerators. A volatile liquid circulates the capillary tubes under the action of the compression pump.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i)              State the reason for using a volatile liquid.               (1mk)

(ii)             Explain how the volatile liquid is made to vaporize in the cooling compartment and to condense in the cooling fins.

(2mks)

(iii)                        Explain how cooling takes place in the refrigerator.            (3mks)

(iv)                        What is the purpose of the double wall?                   (1mk)

  1. c) Steam of mass 3.0g at 1000c is passes into water of mass 400g at 100 The final temperature of the mixture is T. The container absorbs negligible heat. (Specific latent heat of vaporization of steam= 2260 kJ/kg, specific heat capacity of water= 4200Jk-1)
  2. i) Derive an expression for the heat lost by the steam as it condenses to water at temperature T. (2mks)
  3. ii) Derive an expression for the heat gained by the water.        (2mks)

iii) Determine the value of T.                                                      (2mks)

 

  1. A can together with stirrer of total head capacity 60j/k contains 200g of water at 100 c. dry steam at 1000c is passed in while the water is stirred until the whole reaches a temperature of 300c Calculate the mass of steam condensed.
  2. An immersion heater which takes a current of 3A from 240V mains raised the temperature of 10kg of water 300c to 500c. How long did it take?
  3. 100g of boiling water are poured into a metal vessel weighing 800g at a temperature of 200c if the final temperature is 500c. What is the specific heat capacity of the metal? (Specific Heat capacity of water 4.2 x 103J/kgk)
  4. 0.02kg of ice and 0.01kg of water 00c are in a container. Steam at 1000c is passed in until all the ice is just melted. How much water is now in the container?
  5. In a domestic oil-fired boiler, 0.5kg of water flows through the boiler every second. The water enters the boiler at a temperature of 300c and leaves at a temperature of 700c, re-entering the boilers after flowing around the radiators at 300c. 3.0x 107J of heat is given to the water by each kilogram of oil burnt.  The specific heat capacity of water is 4200Jkg -1K-1

Use the information above to calculate the energy absorbed by the water every second as it passes through the boiler

Use the same information above to calculate the mass of oil which would need to be burnt in order to provide this energy.

  1. You are provided with two beakers. The first beaker contains hot water at 700c. The second beaker contains cold water at 200c.  The mass of hot water is thrice that of cold water.  The contents of both beakers are mixed.  What is the temperature of the mixture?
  2. Calculate the heat evolved when 100g of copper are cooled from 900c to 100c. (Specific Heat Capacity of Copper = 390J/Kgk).
  3. An-immersion heater rated 150w is placed in a liquid of mass 5 kg. When the heater is switched on for 25 minutes, the temperature of the liquid rises from 20 – 2700c. Determine the specific heat capacity of the liquid.  (Assume no heat losses)

 

 

TOPIC 10

THE GAS LAW

PAST QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. a) The table shows the results, which were obtained in an experiment

on the behaviour of a gas.

Temperature 0C 15 30 45 60 76 90
Volume (Cm3)   42 45 47.5 51 54 57

(i)  Plot a graph of volume against temperature,

(ii) Using the graph, determine the constant of proportionally k of the relationship for this range of temperature.

  1. b) The pressure of helium gas of volume 10cm3 decreases to one third of its original value at a constant temperature. Determine the final volume of the gas.
  2. On a certain day when the temperature is 370c, the pressure in an open gas

jar is 640mm of mercury. The jar is then sealed and cooled to the temperature of 170c.

Calculate the final pressure.

  1. a) State Boyle’s Law.
  2. b) The table shows the results of Boyle’s law experiment.

 

Pressure (Atmospheres) 1 1.3 1.5 1.8 2.3 2.6 3.2 2.7
Length of air column L(MM) 441 31 27.522 22 18 16 12.5 11

 

  1. i) Copy the table and add values of 1/L (mm-1)
  2. ii) With the aid of a labelled diagram describe the apparatus and arrangements used in getting these results.

iii)       Plot a graph of pressure against 1/L

  1. A student used the set up to investigate the variation of the volume of a

trapped mass of air with pressure at constant temperature.  By raising the open end of the tube he measured the corresponding values of the length I of the air column and the excess pressure, h.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a)       In determining the volume V of the air he measured the length I of the air column.

(i)        What is the relationship between I and V?

(ii)       State the assumption made?

(iii)      what is the significance of the excess pressure.

 

 

(b) The table shows the results obtained using the set up.

Volume of gas (cm3) 5.1 5.5 6.0 6.8 8.2 9.7
Excess pressure 291 224 123 77 -55 -139

 

 

(i)        What does the negative excess pressure mean?

(ii)       Copy the table and add the values of I/V (cm3) and plot a graph of I/V against excess pressure.

(iii)      From the graph:

  1. a) Write an expression relating pressure and the volume of air.
  2. b) Determine the slope of the graph.
  3. c) Find the value of x of I/V when h = 0 and hence evaluate x/s. Comment on your answer.
  4. a) i) Draw and label a diagram of the apparatus you would use to verify

Charle’s law.

  1. ii)    Describe how to use the apparatus to verify the law.
  2. b) A gas has a volume of 20cm3 at 270C and normal atmospheric pressure. Calculate the new volume of the gas if it is heated to 540C at the same pressure.
  3. c) Show that the density of a fixed mass of gas is directly proportional to the pressure at constant temperature.
  4. The figure shows changes in pressure, P, and volume V for a fixed mass of

a certain gas.  Write down a statement of the gas law, which holds true from A to B.  (2)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) State the law that relates the volume of a gas to the temperature of

the gas.

  1. b) The fig. below shows an experimental set up that may be used to investigate one of the laws. The glass tube has a uniform bore and it is graduated in millimeters.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Describe how the experiment is carried out and explain how the results obtained verify the law.
  2. ii) State two limitations of the set up.
  3. Draw axes and sketch the P – V graph for a gas obeying Boyle’s Law.
  4. Two identical containers A and B are placed on a bench. Container A is

filled with oxygen gas and B with hydrogen gas masses.  If the containers are maintained at the same temperature, state with reason, the container in which pressure is higher.

  1. a) The figure below shows a simple set up for pressure law apparatus.

Describe how the apparatus may be used to verify pressure law.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) The graph in the figure below shows the relationship between the pressure and temperature for a fixed mass of an ideal gas at constant volume.
  2. i) Given that the relationship between pressure, P, and temperature, t in Kelvin is of the form P=kT + C, where k and C are constants, determine from the graph, values of k and C.
  3. ii) Why would it be impossible for pressure of the gas to be reduced to zero in practice?
  4. c) A gas is put into a container of fixed volume at a pressure of 2.1 x 105 Nm-2 and temperature 270 The gas is then heated to a temperature of 3270C.  Determine the new pressure.
  5. Draw axes and sketch a graph of pressure (p) against reciprocal of volume

(1/v) for a fixed mass of an ideal gas at a constant temperature.

  1. A balloon is filled with air to a volume of 200ml at a temperature of 293 k.

Determine the volume when the temperature rises to 353 k at the same pressure                                                                                              (3mks)

The graph in figure 7 shows the relationship between the pressure and temperature for an ideal gas.  Use this information in the figure to answer questions 13 and 14.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. State the unit of the horizontal axis. (1mk)
  2. Write a statement of the gas law represented by the relationship. (1mk)
  3. A balloon filled with organ gas a volume of 200 cm3 at the earth’s surface where the temperature is 200C, and the pressure 760mm of mercury. If it is allowed to ascend to a height where the temperature is 00C and the pressure 100mm of mercury, calculate the volume of the balloon.
  4. A mass of Oxygen occupies a volume of 0.01m3 at a pressure of 1 x 105 pa and a temperature 00C. If the pressure is increased to 5 x 106 pa and the temperature is increased to 250C. What volume will the gas occupy?
  5. An empty barometer tube of length 90cm is lowered vertically with its mouth downwards into a tank of water. What will be the depth at the top of the tube when the water has risen 15cm inside the tube, given that the atmospheric pressure is 10m head of water?
  6. A hand pump suitable for inflating a football has a cylinder which is 0.24m in length and an internal cross-sectional area of 5.0 x 10-4 m2. To inflate the football the pump handle is pushed in and air is pumped through a one-way valve. The valve opens to let air in to the ball when the air pressure in the pump has reached 150 000 pa. (Assume the air temperature remains constant}
  7. a) If the pressure in the pump is initially 100 000 pa, calculate how far the piston must be pushed inwards before the one way valves opens.

(b) When the one-way valve opens the total pressure in the cylinder will be 150 000 pa.  What force will be exerted on the piston by the air in the cylinder?

 

FORM FOUR WORK

TOPIC 1

THIN LENSES

PAST K.C.S.E QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. The figure below shows how a distant object is focused in a defective eye.

 

 

 

 

  1. i) State the nature of the defect.
  2. ii) Suggest suitable lens to correct the defect.
  3. a) You are provided with a rectangular glass block, two pins and a

piece of white paper. Describe how you would use them to determine the refractive index of the glass using real and apparent image method.

  1. b) An object O is placed 15cm from a converging lens of focal length 10cm.
  2. i) At what distance should a screen be placed so that a focused image is formed on it?
  3. ii) A diverging lens of focal length 37.5 cm is placed half way between the converging lens and the screen. How far should the screen be from the diverging leans in order to receive a focused image?
  4. c) Two lenses L1 and L2 placed 12cm from each other. The focal length of L2 is 4cm. An object 5mm high is placed 4cm from L1.
  5. i) Construct a scaled ray diagram on a graph paper to obtain the position of the final image as would be observed by a person on the right hand side of L2
  6. ii) Determine the magnification obtained by the arrangement.
  7. The figure below represents and object O placed 10cm in front of a

diverging lens. F is the focal point of the lens.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Draw rays to locate the position of the image. Determine the image distance.

 

  1. A vertical object is placed at the focal point F of a diverging lens as shown

in figure 16.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sketch a ray diagram to show the image of the object.                     (3mks)

  1. a) Describe with the aid of labeled diagram an experiment to

determine the focal length of the lens when provided with the following; an illuminated object, a convex lens, a lens holder, a plane mirror and a metre rule.                                                         (5mk)

  1. b) A small vertical object is placed 28cm in front of a convex lens of focal length 12cm. On the grid provided, draw a ray diagram to locate the image. The lens position is shown. (Use a scale: 1 cm represents 4 cm).
  2. c) 1 shows a human eye with a certain defect.

 

 

  1. i) Name the defect. (1mk)
  2. ii) On the same diagram, sketch the appropriate lens to correct the defect and sketch rays to show the effect of the lens. (2mks)

 

 

  1. a) Figures 11 (a) and (b) show diagrams of the human eye.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Sketch in figure 11(a) a ray diagram to show short sightedness. (1mk)
  2. ii) Sketch in figure 11(b) a ray diagram to show how a lens can be used to correct the shortsightedness. (2mks)
  3. b) Figure 12 shows the features of a simple camera.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Name the parts labelled A and B. (2mks)
  2. ii) A still object is placed at a certain distance from the camera. Explain the adjustments necessary for a clear image of the object to be formed.                                                                       (2mks)

iii)       State the functions of the shutter and the parts labelled A and B                                                                                               (3mks)

  1. c) A lens forms clear image on a screen when the distance between the screen and the object is 80cm. If the image is 3 times the height of the object, determine
  2. i) The distance of the image from the lens.                  (3mks)
  3. ii) The focal length of the lens.                                      (2mks)

 

  1. An image formed on a screen is three times the size of the object. The object and the screen are 80cm apart when the image is sharply focused. Determine the focal length of the lens.
  2. A luminous object and a screen are placed on an optical bench a converging lens is placed between them to throw a sharp image of the object on the screen, the magnification is found to be 2.5. The lens is now moved 30cm nearer to the screen and a sharp image is again formed. Calculate the focal length of the lens.
  3. An object is placed 16cm from a converging lens of focal length 12cm. Find.

(i)  Position of image.

(ii) Nature and

(iii)            Magnification of the image.

  1. An object is placed 15cm from a diverging lens and the image is formed 6cm from the lens. What is the focal length of the lens?
  2. Calculate the power of a lens whose focal length is given as 10cm.
  3. Explain differences between the eye and the camera. State also the similarities.

 

 

TOPIC 2

UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION

PAST K.C.S.E QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. A light inextensible string of length L is fixed at its upper end and support

a mass m at the other end.  m is rotated at horizontal plane or radius r as shown. The maximum tension the string can withstand without breaking is 2N.  Assuming the string breaks when the radius is maximum, calculate the velocity of the mass when the string breaks, given that L 1.25m, and m= 0.1kg.

  1. The diagram below shows a mass m, which is rotated in a vertical circle.

The speed of the mass is gradually increased until the string breaks. The string breaks when the mass is at its lowest position A and at a speed of 30ms-1. Point a is 5m above the ground.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Show on the diagram.
  2. i) The initial direction of the mass at the point the string breaks.
  3. ii) The path of the mass from A until it strikes the ground at a point b.
  4. b) Calculate;
  5. i) The time the mass takes to reach the ground after breaking off.
  6. ii) The horizontal distance the mass travels before it strikes the ground.

iii) The vertical velocity with which the mass strikes the ground.

  1. State the principle by which a speed governor limits the speed of a vehicle.
  2. The rear wheel of a certain car has a diameter of 40cm. At a certain speed

of the car, the wheel makes 7 revolutions per second. A small stone embedded in the tyre tread flies off initially at an angle of 450 to the ground. Determine the initial velocity of the pebble (take p = 22/7)

  1. a) Explain why a pail of water can be swung in a vertical circle

without the water pouring out.

  1. b) A car of mass 1,200kg is moving with a velocity of 25m/s around a flat bend of radius 150m. Determine the minimum frictional force between the tyres and the road that will prevent the car from sliding off.
  2. a) The fig shows the diagram of a set up to investigate the variation

of centripetal force with the radius r of the circle in which a body rotates. Describe how the set up can be used to carry out the investigation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) The table shows results obtained from an investigation similar to the one in part (a)
Mass, m(g) 60 50 40 30 20
Radius, r (cm) 50 41 33 24 16

 

  1. i) Plot a graph of force, F (y-axis) on the body against the radius r (in metre)
  2. ii) Given that the mass of the body is 100g, use the graph to determine the angular velocity.
  3. A small object moving in a horizontal circle of radius 0.2m makes 8

revolutions per second. Determine its centripetal acceleration.

  1. (a) Define the term angular velocity.                                          (1mk)

(b)       A body moving with uniform angular velocity found to have covered an angular distance 170 radians in t seconds. Thirteen seconds later it is found to have covered a total angular distance of 300 radians. Determine t                                                     (3mks)

(c)       Fig. 8 shows a body of mass m attached to the centre of rotating table with a string whose tension can be measure. (This device for measuring the tension is not shown in the figure).

 

 

 

 

 

The tension, T, on the string was measured for various values of angular velocity,

The distance r of the body from the centre was maintained at 30cm. Table 1 shows the results obtained.

Table 1

Angular Velocity (rads -1) 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
Tension T (N) 0.04 0.34 0.76 1.30 1.96

(5mks)

  1. i) Plot the graph of T (y-axis) against W2
  2. ii) From the graph, determine the mass, m, of the body given that T= mw2r-C where C is a constant (4mks)

iii)Determine the constant C and suggest what it represents in the set up.

(2mks)

  1. A child of mass 20kg sits on a swing of length 4m and swings through a

vertical height of 0.9m as shown in the figure below.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the:

  1. i) Speed of the child when passing through the lowest point.
  2. ii) Force exerted on the child by the seat of the swing when passing through the lowest point.
  3. a)         State what is meant by centripetal acceleration?
  4. b) Figure 12 shows masses A, B and C placed at different points on a rotating table.

The angular velocity, @ of the table can be varied.

 

 

 

  1. i) State two factors that determine whether a particular mass slides off the table or not. (2mks)
  2. ii) It is found that masses slide off at angular velocities @A, @ @c of in decreasing order.                                                             (1mk)
  3. c) A block of mass 200g is placed on a frictionless rotating table while fixed to the centre of the table by a thin thread. The distance from the centre of the table to the block is 15cm. If the maximum tension the thread can withstand is 5.6N, determine the maximum angular velocity the table can attain before the thread cuts.                                                                       (4mks)

 

  1. Find the maximum speed with which a car of mass 100kg can take a corner of radius 20m if the coefficient of friction between the road and the tyres is 0.5.
  2. An object of mass 0.5kg is rotated in a horizontal circle by a string 1m long. The maximum tension in the string before it breaks is 50N. Calculate the greatest number of revolutions per second the object can make.
  3. An astronaut is trained in a centrifuge that has an arm length of 6m. If the astronaut can stand the acceleration of 9g. What is the maximum number of revolutions per second that the centrifuge can make?
  4. A small body of 200g revolves uniformly on a horizontal frictionless surface attached by a cord 20cm long to a pin set on the surface. If the body makes two revolutions per second. Find the tension of the cord.
  5. A circular highway curve on a level ground makes a turn 900. The highway carries traffic at 120km/h. Knowing that the centripetal force on the vehicle is not to exceed 1/10 of its weight, calculate the length of the curve.
  6. A turntable of record player makes 33 revolutions per minute. What is the linear velocity of a point 0.12m from the center?
  7. An object 0.5kg on the end of a string is whirled around in a vertical circle of radius 2m, with a speed of 10m/s. What is the maximum tension in the string?

 

 

 

TOPIC 3

FLOATING AND SINKING

PAST K.C.S.E QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. State how a hydrometer may be used to test whether a car battery is fully

charged.

  1. Determine the density of glass that weighs 0.5N in air and 0.3N in water.
  2. A mass of 120g half immersed in water displaced a volume of 20cm3.

Calculate the density of the object.

  1. A solid displaced 5.5 cm3 of paraffin when floating and 20cm3. Calculate

the density of the object.

5    The figure below shows a cube of a certain wood whose density is the

same as that of water. The cube is held on the surface of the water in a long cylinder.  Explain what happens to the cube after it is released.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. A right angled solid of dimensions 0.02m by 0.02m by 0.2m and density

2,700kg/m3 is supported inside kerosene of density 800kg/m3 by a thread which is attached to a spring balance. The long side is vertical and the upper surface is 0.1m below the surface of the kerosene.

  1. i) Calculate the force due to the liquid on the lower upper surface of the solid.
  2. ii) Calculate the up thrust and determine the reading on the spring balance.
  3. A solid copper sphere will sink in water while a hollow copper sphere of

the same mass may float. Give a reason for this.

  1. A uniform plank of wood is pivoted at its centre. A block of wood of mass

2kg is balanced by a mass of 1.5 placed 30cm from the pivot as shown.

 

 

 

  1. i) Calculate the distance X
  2. ii) When the same block of wood is partially immersed in water, the 1.5kg mass need to be placed at 20cm from the pivot to balance it. Calculate the weight of the water displaced.

 

 

  1. A block of glass of mass 250g floats in mercury. What volume of the glass

lies under the surface of the mercury? (Density of mercury is 13.6 x 103).

  1. When a piece of metal is placed on water, it sinks. But when the same

piece of metal is placed on a block of wood, both are found to float. Explain this observation.

  1. a) State the law of floatation.                                         (1mk)
  2. b) Figure 13 shows a simple hydrometer.

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) State the purpose of the lead shots in the glass bulb             (1mk)
  2. ii) How would the hydrometer be made more sensitive?          (1mk)

iii)      Describe how the hydrometer is calibrated to measure relative density.                                                                                   (2mks)

  1. c) Figure 14 shows a cork floating on water and held to the bottom of the beaker by a thin thread

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Name the force acting on the cork.                                        (3mks)
  2. ii) Describe how each of the forces mentioned in (i) above changes when water is added into the beaker until it fills up. (3mks)

 

  1. The ball B shown below has a mass of 12kg and a volume of 50litres. It is held in position in sea water of density 104 kgm-3 by a light cable fixed to the bottom so that 4/5 of its volume is below the surface determine the tension in the cable.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. A balloon of volume 1.2×107 cm3 is filled with hydrogen gas of density 9.0 x 10-5/g/cm3. Determine the weight of the fabric of the balloon.
  2. A boat whose dimensions are equivalent to those of a rectangular figure of 5m long by 2m wide floats in fresh water. If this boat sinks 10cm deeper as a result of passengers climbing on board, determine the total weight of these passengers.
  3. One fifth of the volume of an iceberg stands above the water surface. If the density of the seawater is 1.2g/cm3, determine the density of iceberg.
  4. A hydrometer of mass 10g is placed in paraffin of density 0.8g/cm3. Determine the length of the paraffin if its bulb has a volume of 4cm3 and its stem has a cross section area of 0.5 cm2
  5. An object of mass 50g floats with 20% of its volume above the water surface as shown below. The tension in the string is 0.06N.

 

 

  1. a) Calculate the up thrust experienced by the object.
  2. b) Volume of water displaced.
  3. c) The density of the object
  4. d) What would happen if the string was cut?
  5. A piece of marble of mass 1.4kg and relative density 2.8 is supported by a light string from a spring balance. It is then lowered into the water fully. Determine the up thrust.
  6. The block of wood of mass 80g is pulled just below the water surface by a piece of copper of density 9g/cm3 using a string of negligible weight. What is the mass of the piece of copper?

 

 

 

 

 

  1. If the body weight 1.80N in air and 1.62N when submerged in a liquid of relative density 0.8, find the volume of the solid.

The density of the solid

 

TOPIC 4

ELECTROMAGNETIC (EMS) SPECTRUM

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. State one-way of detecting ultra violet radiation.
  2. Arrange the following radiations in order of increasing wavelengths.

Ultraviolet                  Gamma Rays

Radio Waves              Infra Red

3    Name two types of electromagnetic radiations whose frequencies are

greater than that of visible light.

  1. Calculate the wavelength of the KBC FM radio waves transmitted at a

frequency of 95.6 mega hertz.

  1. The chart below shows an arrangement of different parts of the

electromagnetic spectrum.  Complete the table.

Type of Radiation Detector Uses
Ultraviolet Photographic paper, fluorescent

material, phototransistor

 
Radio waves Balanced thermometer Warmth sensation, making toast.
Radio waves   Communication

 

  1. Arrange the following in order of increasing frequency. Visible light,

infrared radiation, x-rays, u.v. radiation, radio waves.

  1. State the difference between X-rays and gamma rays in the way in which

they are produced                                                                               (1mk)

  1. Other than a photographic film state one other detectors of
  2. i) X-rays
  3. ii) UV,

iii) Visible spectrum

  1. iv) Infra-red radiations
  2. State 3 uses of infra- red radiation.

10  Name two properties of ultra-violent radiation.

11  State the origin of all em-radiation from radio waves to x-rays.

12  State where Gamma rays originate.

  1. State one common property for electromagnetic waves and state one use of microwaves and one for ultraviolet radiation.
  2. State one common properties for electromagnetic waves and state one use of microwaves and one for ultraviolet radiation.
  3. Name the radiation represented by A.

Radio Infrared visible A- rays Gamma Rays

 

  1. Complete the table below to show the name and use of some types of electromagnetic radiation.

 

Type of radiation Use
  Sending information to and from satellites
  Normal photography
  Producing shadow pictures of bones
Gamma rays  

 

  1. Give one important use of each of the following em-waves.
  2. i) Microwaves
  3. ii) Infrared

 

 

 

 

TOPIC 5

ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION (EM I)

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. The diagram in figure 1 shows an arrangement that may be used to

investigate how electromagnetic force varies with current. Explain how the arrangement may be used for this investigation.

 

 

 

 

 

 

2    a)         The free ends of a coil are connected to a galvanometer. When the

north pole of a magnet is moved towards the coil, the pointer deflects towards the coil, the pointer deflects towards the right as shown. State with reason the behaviour of the pointer in the following cases.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) The north pole of the magnet is held stationary near p.
  2. ii) The south pole of the magnet is made to approach the coil from Q.
  3. c) Two coils T and S are wound on a soft iron core as shown. T has 1000 turns while S has 600 turns and resistance of 100W

 

 

 

 

 

Calculate the maximum current measured by the ammeter.

  1. Calculate the peak value of an alternating current which has a root mean

square value of 3.0A.

  1. A large sub station transformer is used to step down voltage from

11,000V to 450V.

  1. i) Determine the ratio of the turns in the primary to secondary coils.
  2. ii) How is the efficiency of this transformer ensured?

iii)       State one function of the core in a transformer.

  1. A generator produces a peak voltage of 220v. What is the root mean

square value of this voltage?.

  1. Name any two ways by which a transformer loses energy.
  2. The Fig; Represents a transformer connected to an ac source and a resistor
  3. Compare the magnitudes of the:
  4. i) Voltages Vp and Vs
  5. ii) Currents Ip and Is

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. (a)
  2. i) A researcher studying the behaviour of step up transformer made the following observation. ‘More joules per coulomb and fewer coulombs per second at the output than at the input terminals’. Explain why the observation does not imply a violation of the principle of conservation of energy.
  3. ii) A transformer of 480 turns in the primary coil used to connect a 9-volt a.c. electric device to a 240V a.c. mains power supply. Calculate the number of turns in the secondary coil
  4. What causes electromagnetic damping in a moving coil galvanometer?
  5. State how Eddy Currents are reduced in a transformer.
  6. A transformer in a welding machine supplies 6 volts from a 240V mains

supply. If the current used in the welding is 30A. Determine the current in the mains.

  1. A hair drier is rated 2500W, 240v. Determine its resistance. (3mks)

13.

A heater of resistance R1 is rated 2p watts, v volts, Determine R1/R2                (3mks)

14.

  1. a) State Len’s law of electromagnetic induction.                                  (1mk)
  2. b) Figure 13 shows a simple microphone in which sound waves from the person talking cause the cardboard diaphragm to vibrate.

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Explain how a varying current is induced in the cell when the diaphragm vibrates. (3mks)
  2. ii) State two ways in which the induced current (i) above can be increased.                                                                                                 (2mks)
  3. c) A transformer with 1200 turns in the primary circuit and 120 turns in the secondary circuit; it produces heat at the rate of 600w. Assuming 100% efficiency, determine the:
  4. i) Voltage in the secondary circuit.                               (2mks)
  5. ii) Current in the primary circuit.                                   (2mks)

iii)       The current in the secondary circuit.                         (1mark)

 

  1. An ac flows in a resistor of 100Ω. If the peak value of the voltage across the resistor is 60V. Calculate.
  2. a) The rms. Voltage
  3. b) The rms. Current
  4. A student designed a transformer to supply a current of 10A at a potential difference of 60V to a motor from an A.C mains supply of 240V. If the efficiency of the transformer is 80%, determine the;
  5. a) Power supplied to the transformer
  6. b) Current in the primary coil.
  7. An immersion heater rated 300W is used continuously for 45 minutes per day. Calculate the cost per week at 60cts per unit.
  8. A radio transmitter directs pulses of waves towards a satellite from which reflections are received 10 millisecond after transmission. Determine the distance of the satellite from the radio transmitter. (Speed of radio waves= 3 x 108ms-1)
  9. An electric bulb with a filament resistance 300W is connected to a 2v main supply, determine the energy dissipated in 2 minutes.
  10. A 50w bulb is used continuously for 36 hours. Determine the cost of energy consumed at a cost of Kshs. 2 per unit.

 

 

TOPIC 6

MAIN ELECTRICITY

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. What current will a 500W resistor connected to a source of 240V draw?
  2. Name a device used to change light energy directly into electrical energy.
  3. When a current of 2.0A flows in a resistor for 10 minutes, 15000 Joules of

electrical energy is dissipated.  Determine the voltage across the resistor.

  1. An electric bulb rated 40W is operating on 240v mains. Determine the

resistance of its filament.

  1. An electric heater rated 240V, 3000V is to be connected to a 240V mains

supply, through a 10A fuse.  Determine whether the fuse is suitable or not.

  1. A 60W bulb is used continuously for 36 hours. Determine the energy

consumed, giving your answer in kilowatt hour (kwh)

  1. How many 100W electric irons could be safely be connected to a 240V

mains circuit fitted with a 13A fuse?

  1. Find the maximum number of 75W bulbs that can be connected to a 13A

fuse on a mains supply of 240V.

  1. Determine the cost of using an electrical iron box rated 1500W, for a total

of 30 hours given that the cost of electricity per kwh is Kshs. 8.

 

  1. State Ohm’s law.
  2. Electrical energy costs Kshs. 1 per Kwh unit. Find the cost of using an electric heater of power 1.5 Kw for a day.
  3. The figure below represents part of the main circuit.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Explain why it is not advisable to fix a fuse on neutral line.
  2. ii) Explain why there are fuses of different rating in the distribution box.
  3. Calculate the power of a devise which has a p.d of 250V applied across it when a current of 0.5A passes through it.
  4. An electric iron box is rated 2500W and uses a voltage of 240V. Given that electricity costs Kshs. 1.10 per Kwh, what is the cost of using it for 6 hours?

 

 

TOPIC 7

CATHODE RAYS AND CATHODE RAY TUBE

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. State two differences between the cathode ray tube (CRT) of a T.V and the

cathode ray oscilloscope (CRO)

  1. Distinguish between a photon and a quantum.
  2. How does the energy of ultra violet light compare to that of yellow light

given that the energy E of a wave frequency f, is given by E = hf, where h is plank’s constant?

  1. A photon has an energy of 5×10-19J. Calculate the wavelength associated

with this photon.

  1. The control grid in a cathode Ray Oscilloscope (CRO) is used to control

brightness of the beam on the screen. How is this achieved?

  1. a) Figure 14 shows the features of a cathode ray tube.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Name the parts labelled A and B.                                          (2mks)
  2. ii) Explain how the electrons are produced in tube.                   (2mks)

iii)       State two functions of the anodes.                                         (2mks)

  1. iv) At what part of the cathode ray tube would the time base be connected? (1mk)
  2. v) Why is a vacuum created in the tube?                                   (1mk)
  3. b) The graph in Figure 15 was obtained on a cathode ray oscilloscope (CRO) screen when the output of an a.c generator was connected to the input of the CRO. The time-base calibration of the CRP was set at 20 milliseconds per centimeter and the y- gain at 5 volts per centimeter.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Determine the pick voltage of the generator.                                    (2mks)
  2. ii) Determine the frequency of the voltage.                               (3mks)

iii)       On the same grid, redraw the graph for the same voltage when the time

base calibration is set at 40 milliseconds per centimeter and the 7-gain at 10volts per centimeter. (Show at least one complete cycle).            (2mks)

 

  1. Sketch the picture seen on the screen of a cathode ray oscilloscope when the oscilloscope is adjusted so that the spot is in the middle of the screen and the output terminals from a transformer connected to the mains are connected across the Y-plates.
  2. The diagram shows the screen of a cathode ray tube, and behind it the position of the X and y plates which deflect the electron beam. The beam forms a spot on the screen.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Draw a labelled diagram showing a side view of the cathode ray tube.
  2. b) How is the brightness of the spot controlled?
  3. c) The “X-shift” control on the front of the cathode ray oscilloscope moves the spot sideways on the screen. What kind of voltage direct, alternating or zero) does it apply to:
  4. i) The X plates
  5. ii) The Y plates

 

The ‘time–base’ voltage normally applied to the X-plates in a RCO varies with

time as shown.

  1. i) Describe the motion of the spot when the time-base is on.

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) Illustrate on the diagram above what is seen on the screen if an alternating voltage is applied to the Y-plates with the time-base on.

State two uses of the CRO.

  1. The control grid in a cathode ray oscilloscope (CRO) is used to control the brightness of the beam on the screen. Explain how this is achieved.
  2. State and explain three uses of main parts of a CRT in an oscilloscope.

 

 

TOPIC 8

X-RAYS

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. An X-ray tube is operating with an anode potential of 10kV and a current

of 15.0 mA.

  1. a) Explain how the
  2. i) Intensity of X-rays from such a tube may be increased.
  3. ii) Penetrating power of X- rays from such a tube may be increased
  4. b) Calculate the number of electrons hitting the anode per second.
  5. c) Determine the velocity with which the electrons strike the target.
  6. d) State one industrial use of X-rays.
  7. a) For a given source of X-rays, how would the following be

controlled.

  1. i) Intensity
  2. ii) The penetrating power

iii)       The exposure to patients

  1. b) An accelerating potential of 20kv is applied to an X-ray tube.
  2. i) What is the velocity with which the electron strikes the target?
  3. ii) State the energy changes that take place at the target.
  4. Explain why X-rays are appropriate in study of the crystalline structure

materials.

  1. Name the metal used to shield X-rays operators from the radiation. Give

reasons why it is used.

  1. State the properties of X-rays, which makes it possible to detect cracks in

bones.

  1. State one difference between hard X-rays and soft X-rays. (1mk)

 

  1. A target was bombarded by electron accelerated by a voltage of 106 V. If all the K.E of the electrons was converted to X-rays, calculate:-
  2. a) The K.E of the electrons
  3. b) The frequency of the photons emitted.
  4. An X-rays tubes gives photons of 5.9 x 10-15 J of energy. Calculate:-
  5. a) The wavelength of the photons.
  6. b) The accelerating voltage
  7. c) The velocity of the electrons hitting the target.
  8. If accelerating voltage in an X-ray tube is 40kV, determine the minimum wavelength of the emitted X-rays. (Electronic charge = -1.6 x 1019C, planks constant = 6.6 x 10 -34Js, velocity of electromagnetic waves = 3.0 x 108ms-1)
  9. State the purpose of cooling fins in the X-ray tube.
  10. X-rays are produced by a tube operating at 1 x 104V. Calculate their wavelength. (Take h= 6.6 x 10 -34 Js, e= 1.6 x 10-19C, c= 3×108ms-1)
  11. State and explain the effect of increasing the EHT in an X- ray tube on the X-rays produced.

 

 

TOPIC 9

PHOTOELECTRIC EFFECT

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. Light of frequency 5.5x 1014 HZ is made to strike a surface whose work function is 2.5ev. Show that photoelectric effect will not take place.  H= 6.6 X 1034Js
  2. Photoelectrons emitted by illuminating a given metallic surface constitute

a “photocurrent”.  What is the effect of increasing the intensity of the illumination of the magnitude of the photocurrent?

  1. The diagram shows a photocell in action

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) The photocell is either evacuated or filled with an inert gas at low pressure. Give one reason for this
  2. ii) What is the function of the resistor R in the circuit?

iii) State one reason for using a particular radiation such as ultraviolet for a given photocell.

  1. iv) Explain how the set-up shown in the diagram may be used as an automatic switching device for a burglar alarm.
  2. A monochromatic beam of radiation is directed on a clean metal surface so

as to produce photoelectrons.  Give a reason why some of the ejected photoelectrons have more kinetic energy than others.

  1. (a) Describe with the aid of a labelled diagram an experimental set-up

for observing the photoelectric effect.

  1. b) The table shows the relationship between the wavelength of a radiation falling on a surface and the energy, k of the emitted electrons.

l(m) x 10-7      1.0       1.5       1.0       0.5

K(J) x 10-19     10        13        20        40

  1. i) Plot a graph of energy k(Y-axis) against the frequency, f, of the incident light.
  2. ii) Determine the work function of the surface used (h=6.663 x 10-34JS)
  3. Name a device used to convert light energy directly into electric energy.
  4. Electrons emitted from a metal when light of a certain frequency is shone

on the metal are found to have a maximum energy of 8.0 x 10-19 J.  If the work function of the metal is 3.2 x 10-19 j, determine the wavelength of the light used.

  1. The figure below shows ultra violet light striking a polished zinc plate

placed on a negatively charged gold leaf electroscope.

 

 

Explain the following observation

  1. i) The leaf of the electroscope falls.
  2. ii) When the same experiment was repeated with a positively charged

electroscope, the leaf did not fall.

  1. The work function of a certain material is 3.2 ev. Determine the threshold

frequency for the material. (1 electron volt (eV) = 1.6 x 10-19 and planks constant H= 6.62 x 10= 34Js)

10.

State what is meant by the term accommodation as applied to the human eye.                                                                                                            (1mk)

 

The graph in figure 8 shows the variation of photoelectric current with applied voltage when a surface was illuminated with light of a certain frequency. Use this information in the figure to answer questions 11 and 12.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. On the same axes, sketch the graph of when light of higher

intensity but same frequency is used to illuminate the surface.

(1 mk)

  1. Explain your answer in 11 above . (1 mk)

 

  1. Calculate the energy of a photon of red light and ultra-violet light

(lR = 7.0 x 10-7m: lv = 4.0 x 10-7m)

  1. The wavelength of light from a sodium lamp is 5.9 x 10-7m. A 200W sodium vapour has an efficiency of 40%. Calculate:
  2. a) The energy of one quantum of sodium light.
  3. b) The number of quanta emitted in one second
  4. The threshold frequency for potassium is 5.37 x 1014 HZ. When the surface of potassium is illuminated by another radiation, photoelectrons are emitted with a speed of 7.9 x 105 m/s

Calculate:

  1. a) The work function for potassium
  2. b) The k.e of the photoelectrons
  3. c) The frequency of the second source
  4. Explain the term “work function”
  5. A metal has a work function of 2eV. Calculate the threshold wavelength of the metal given that e= 1.6 x 10-19C and h= 6.63 x 10-19C and Me = 9x 10-31kg.

 

TOPIC 10

RADIOACTIVITY

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. a) What is meant by the following terms:

Radioactive decay and isotope.

  1. b) The table shows how the activity (disintegrations per minute) of a

sample of carbon-14 varies with time (in years).

 

Time (grs) 0 2500 5000 7500 1000 12500 17250 20000
Disintegrations/min 15 11 8 5 4.0 3.2 1.6 1.2
  1. i) Plot a graph of activity against time (x-axis).
  2. ii) Estimate the half-life of carbo-14 from the graph.
  3. c)         i)         Draw a labeled diagram of a Geiger- Muller tube.
  4. ii) Explain how it detects radioactive particles/rays.
  5. d)         State one use of radioactivity in each of the following;
  6. i) Medicine
  7. ii)

222

iii)       Radon gas       Rn decays by emission of µ particles. Show

86

by use of an equation the transformation of the gas.

  1. iv) Give two uses of cobalt  – 60 as a Radioactive source.
  2. One of the isotopes of Uranium has a half life of 576 hours.
  3. i) Complete the table to show how the mass varies with time from an initial mass of 1280 mg.

 

Time (Hours) 576 1152 1728 2304
Mass (Mg) 640        

 

  1. ii) Explain whether the mass of the isotope will eventually reduce to zero.
  2. State two factors that determine the extent of the damage to the body cell

caused by the radiation from radioactive substances.

How many neutrons does the nuclide                  u contain?

86

  1. Name the quantities, which must be measured so as to determine the half-

life of a radioactive sample whose half-life is known to be a few hours.

  1. Explain why µ particles are more ionizing than b particles.
  2. A radioactive carbon -14 decays to Nitrogen by beta emissions as shown.

Determine the values of x and y in the equation.

14              X         u

C       =        N          B

6               7          y

  1. Alpha particles are more ionizing than Beta particles. Give one reason for this.
  2. In a sample there are 5.12 x 1020 atoms of Krypton 92 initially. If the half-life of Krypton is 3.0s, determine the number of atoms that will have decayed after 6s
  3. Cobalt 60 is a radioisotope that has a half-life of 5.25 years. What fraction

of the original atoms in a sample will remain after 21 years.

107

  1. A nucleus is represented by x

32

State the number of neutrons in a nucleus.

  1. a) Fig 2 shows the path of radiation from a radioactive source after

entering a magnetic field. The magnetic field is directed into the paper and is perpendicular to the place of the paper shown in the figure.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Identify the radiation.

Give a reason for your answer.

  1. b) Below is a nuclear reaction

232                        228                        (gamma)

A               K         B                Y         x          Y         C

90                          88

  1. i) Identify the radiation k.
  2. ii) Determine the values of X and Y.
  3. c) The figure below shows a device for producing metal foils of constant thickness. Any change in the thickness can be detected by the Geiger tube and recorded by the Geiger cooler. The pressure exerted by the roller is then adjusted to keep the thickness constant.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) State the change in the metal foil that will lead to a decrease in the Geiger counter reading.
  2. ii) Give a reason for your answer in (c) (i) above.

iii) State the change in the roller pressure that should be made as a result of this decrease in the Geiger counter reading.

  1. iv) Give a reason for your answer in (c) (iii) above.
  2. v) Explain why a source emitting (alpha) particles only would not be suitable for this device.
  3. vi) Explain why a radioactive source of a half-life of 1,600 years is more suitable for use in this device than one of half-life of 8 minutes.
  4. The following is part of a radioactive decay series.

234           b      a                   230

Bi                  X                   Y

83                 84                      b

Determine the values of a and b.

 

  1. a) A nucleus of an element X of atomic mass 238 and atomic number 92 decays by

emitting 8 alpha particles and 10 beta particles and finally forms a nucleus of an element y. Write the equation of the reaction.

  1. b) Each of the following sentences describes a particular radiation from different radioactive source. In each case name the type of radiation described and give a reason to support your choice.

(i)        The radiation is not affected by either a magnetic or electrostatic field.

Type or radiation

Reason

234

(ii)       The radiation is emitted from 238u when it decays to    U

90

Type or radiation

Reason

(iii)      The radiation is very strongly deflected by a weak magnetic field.

Type of radiation

Reason

  1. The half-life of a certain radioactive substance is 57 days. Explain the meaning of this statement.
  2. The figure below shows a Geiger Muller (G.M.) tube.

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i)        Give the reason why the mica window is made thin.

(ii)       Explain how the radiation entering the tube through the window is detected by the tube.

(iii)      What is the purpose of the halogen vapour?

 

  1. Balance the nuclear reaction equation below.

24              0

Na®y +

11              -1e

  1. Given that 5g of cobalt-60 is kept in a laboratory and it has a half-life of 5 years.

Calculate its mass after 15 years.

 

 

TOPIC 11

ELECTRONICS

PAST KCSE QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. 1989: Sketch curves to show the variation of current and time as displayed on

the CRO in each of the

 

 

 

 

 

  1. State the majority carriers for a p-type semi conductor.
  2. a)       Using examples explain the difference between a semiconductor

and a good conductor.

  1. b) A radio repairer wishes to use an ammeter to detect a faulty diode.  With the aid of a circuit diagram describe how he will go about this task.
  2. Using examples, explain the difference between a semi conductor and a

good conductor.

  1. p- type and n-type semiconductors are made from a pure semiconductor

by a process known as “doping”.

  1. i) What is doping?
  2. ii) Explain how the doping produces an n-type semiconductor.
  3. Sketch a current-voltage characteristic of a junction diode with a forward

bias.

  1. Using the components symbols shown in the fig, sketch a series circuit

diagram for a forward biased diode.

 

  1. (a)
  2. i) Distinguish between semiconductors and conductors
  3. ii) Give an example of a semiconductor and one for a conductor.
  4. In the circuit below, when the switch s is closed, the voltmeter shows a

reading.

 

 

 

 

 

When the cell terminals are reversed and the switch is closed, the

voltmeter reading is zero.

Explain these observations.

  1. What is meant by Donor Impurity in semiconductors.
  2. You are provided with a diode, a resisitor R, an a.c source of low voltage

and connecting wires. In the space provided, sketch the circuit diagram for a half-wave rectifier and indicate the terminals where the output voltage v0 may be connected.                                                                              (2mks)

 

  1. Explain how doping produces an n-type semiconductor for a pure semiconductor material. (3mks)
  2. Distinguish between intrinsic and extrinsic semi-conductors.
  3. The diagram below shows a rectifier circuit for an alternating current (a.c) input.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Describe the rectification process.
  2. ii) Draw the traces of the signal obtained on CRO connected across QS and PR.

 

 

 

ANSWERS TOPICAL QUESTIONS

FORM ONE

  1. MEASUREMENT I
  2. height, base area
  3. Put 0.5kg mass together with meat and balance them against the 2 kg.
  4. Volume of one molecule = 18/ (6×1023) = 3x 10-23cm

X3 = 3x 10-23 cm3

          X = 3.11 x 10 -8 cm3

  1. d= m/v=40g/ 30 x 4 x 3cm3 = 0.1111 g/cm3
  2. 1.5 kg
  3. Vol. of 1 drop = (9/55) cm3 = 0.163cm3
  4. D= m/r =567/(150-80) = 576-80 /70g/cm3

 

  1. 4.1 X 10 -8M
  2. a) 4.06 X 10-10m
  3. b) That atoms are spherical and that mass is uniformly distributed on the atom and not in the nucleus.
  4. 0.001mm
  5. i) 5×10-7m
  6. ii) -Atoms spherical

-Mass uniformly distributed

  1. 2000 cm3
  2. 1.12g/cm3
  3. FORCES

1    Mass is constant everywhere

  1. Up thrust and frictional force.
  2. By going between two moving parts so that the parts slid on oil instead of

each other.

  1. – Weight is a vector quantity while mass is a scalar quantity.

– Weight varies from place to place while mass is constant.

– Weight is measured using a spring balance while mass is measured using

beam balance.

  1. To lubricate the engine/ reduce frictional force.
  2. Magnetic, electrostatic and gravitational.
  3. k.e of molecules increase hence the pressure increases.
  4. Because gravitational force varies with distance from the centre of the

earth. Since weight depends on the gravitational pull, then it also varies.

  1. The soap reduces the surface tension and hence the weight of pin becomes

greater the surface tension.

  1. Draw two arrowed lines one from C1 downwards and the other from O

upwards.

Anticlockwise moment is reduced hence the clockwise moment becomes relatively more.

  1. let c.o. g be X cm from pivot.

1000N x X = 20N x 2m

X= 0.04m

  1. Over all c.o g lower since the heavier the base the lower the C.O.G.
  2. When the melts the c.o.g. is lowered hence it becomes more stable

-Anticlockwise moment is reduced hence the clockwise moment becomes

relatively more.

  1. c.o.g is at 50cm mark which is 20cm from pivot.

0.2 x W = 0.3 x 5

W = 7.5N

  1. a) Very low density hence, a very big column required (º11m)
  2. b)     i) p=F1

F2

  1. ii) F2/A2=F1/A1\F2 = A2/ A1 F1 = 25 x 100 = 2500N

iii)       Gas is compressible hence it does not transmit pressure equally

throughout the system.

  1. For neutral equilibrium the cylinder will be horizontal.
  2. In (a) adhesive forces between glass and wax are weaker than cohesive

forces between water & water.  The opposite is true (b)

18.

-Taking moments and equating

– 0.6N x 70cm = mgN x 30cm

– w = mg = 1.4N

  1. 83.3kg
  2. 1.6m /s2
  3. 40N
  4. 3.33cm
  5. 25N
  6. 20N
  7. 250k Pa
  8. i) 9N ii) 0.8m

 

  1. PRESSURE
  2. i) Dirty water is drawn to the larger container through capillary action in the cloth.

-Water in the tray evaporates due to heat from the sun.

– Condensed water on the glass window collects at its lower end and pure water is collected in its lower container.

  1. ii) a) Increases/enhances/speeds up the absorption of heat
  2. b) Increases surface area for evaporation OR it removes coloring and gases Or it absorbs radiant heat to increase evaporation.

iii) Retained heat causes evaporation

  1. iv) Infra red rays can pass through the glass.  Re radiated rays are of longer wavelength than the infra red rays and cannot pass trough the glass, hence some heat is trapped, hence some heat is trapped inside.
  2. i) – Heater

– Scale (Measuring Device)

– Pinter/ Indicator

  1. ii) Making the wire straight/ remove kinks; making it steady / taut/ tensional force/ vertical position.
  2. Concrete mixture and steel have approximately the same linear expansively.

They expand / contract at the same rate.

  1. X2 should be made larger than X1 since B receives radiation at a higher rate. It must be moved Radiation
  2. further from source for rates to be equal.

 

  1. PARTICULATE OF MATTER

Sucking air reduces pressure inside the tube; so that atmosphere pressure forces the liquid up the tube.

  1. a) Smoke particles- smoke particles are large than air molecules and light enough to move when bombarded by air molecules.

Lens- focuses the light from the lamp on the smoke particle; causing them to be observable.

Microscope- enlarges the smoke particles so that they are visible.

  1. b) Smoke particles move randomly/zigzag

– Air molecules bombard the smoke particles.

– Air molecules are in random motion

  1. c) The speed of motion of smoke particles will be observed to be higher/move faster/ speed increases.

 

  1. THERMAL EXPANSION

Since the quantity of water in A is smaller, heat produces greater change of temperature in A; a decrease in density causing the cork to sink further.

 

  1. HEAT TRANSFER
  2. Can B is a good absorber of radiation/better absorber of radiation or heat.
  3. Glass flask expands first (creating more volume for water)

– Water then expands using the tube.

  1. In (i), Gauze conducts heat away temperature above is lower than ignition

temperature of the gas.  In (ii)           Gauze is hotter than ignition temperature of the gas (Required to ignite it).

  1. To reflect heat outwards or inwards hence reduce heat loss by radiation.

5.

– x2 is made larger than X1

– Since B receives radiation at a higher rate, it must be moved further from source for rates to be equal.

  1. Since the quantity of water in A is smaller, heat produces greater change of temperature in A; a decrease in density causing the cork to sink further.

 

 

  1. RECTILINEAR PROPAGATION OF LIGHT AND REFLECTION AT PLANE SURFACE

–     Image that cannot be formed on screen.

–     Always on the opposite side of the object

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Angle of rotation of reflected ray = 2(angle of rotation of mirrors)

= 2x 300

=600

5.

 

 

 

 

 

6:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Measure P1Q1 in cm (i.e. length of image on the screen as shown below)

 

 

 

Divide this value by 3 seconds i.e. vel =dis/time

  1. 4:05 p.m
  2. a) -Key form real inverted images

-Highly magnified images which give a wrong perception of object distance.

-Small field of view.

  1. b) Very small images, giving the illusion that the objects are far away.
  2. Can from magnified, erected images.

12.

 

 

 

 

Where                   o= object

h= pin-hole

u- Object distance

v- Image distance

  1. u =100m

hi= 0.5cm

v=10cm

 

v/u = hi/h0

 

\ho = hi x u/v

= 5m x 100m/10cm

 

h0=50m

 

  1. ELECTROSTATICS I

1.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. The leaf in the electroscope falls
  2. Metal roofed house. Because there is less resistance of the flow of charges

to the ground so if struck by lighting it would conduct it to the ground. The other one would burn or have the people inside struck by the lightening.

  1. At x the capacitor is charged only once and the keeps charging and

discharging in opposite directions hence current keeps alternating at the a.c frequency.       This lights the bulb continuously.

  1. : Earthing the machines/using spikes.
  2. Material used between the two plates of the capacitor.
  3. Well insulated / avoid touching
  4. a) Ability to store charge given by the quantity of charge it can store per unit p.d
  5. b) Bring it near a charged electroscope (say +vely). If not, charge the electroscope – vely and bring the rod near. If divergence is observed then they have the same charge.  Note that if decrease in divergence is observed in both cases then the rod is simply a conductor and it’s not charged.
  6. c) Nothing would happen to the leaf of the electroscope. This is because in a hollow charged conductor, the charged conductor and not inside
  7. d) – Earthing or using another

–     Charged body

  1. e) i) Q= CV

= 2×10

= 20mC

  1. ii) Series = 1/c = 1/3 + 1/3

1/c = 2/3

C= 3/2 = 1.5uF

Parallel Ct = 1.5 + 2               =3.5 uF.

 

  1. CELL AND SIMPLE CIRCUITS
  2. Dry cells have a very high internal resistance hence give very little current

that start a vehicle.

  1. Secondary cells are rechargeable while primary are not.
  2. I = V/R = 240/500 = 0.48A.
  3. Q = it =0.08 x 2.5 x 60 =12c.
  4. When connected in parallel, the total effective resistance is much less. The

heating effect is reduced.

  1. Large amounts of current can be drawn from them without damaging them

while in lead acid batteries.

  1. Q=it

–          = 0.5 x 4×60

–          = 120c

  1. The overall resistance of cells and bulb is least and hence more current flows
  2. Each will provide about half of the power supplied to the bulb. So they

are drained of power at a slower rate than rate than in figure 10(a).

  1. To oxidize hydrogen to water hence reduce polarization/internal resistance.

11.

 

 

 

 

12.

–     Alkaline cell last longer than lead acid cell.

–     Alkaline is more rugged than lead acid cell.

–     Alkaline cell is lighter than lead acid cell.

13.

1= 1.5

R+r

0.13 =  1.5

10+3

R = 1.5Ω

14.

  1. a) The ratio of the pd across the ends of a metal conductor to the current passing through it is a constant.
  2. b) i) It does not obey Ohm’s law; because the current – voltage graph is not

linear throughout;

  1. ii) Resistance= v/1 = inverse of slope

 

=          (0.74 – 0.70)V

(80-50)mA

 

= 0.40V

30 x10-3 A

= 1.33W

iii)       From the graph current flowing when pd is 0.70 is 60mA

pd across R = 6.0- 0.7 = 5.3V

R=  5.3V

60mA

= 88.3W

  1. c) i) Parallel circuit 1/30 + 1/20 = 5/60

 

R= 5.3V

Total resistance = 10 + 12 = 22W

  1. ii) I = V/R = 2.1/22 = 0.095A

iii)       V= 1R = 10 x 2.1

22

= 0.95V

  1. i) The level of the acid in the accumulator should be inspected regularly. Add

distilled water.

  1. ii) The terminals should be kept clean and smeared with grease.

iii) While charging the current used should be that specified by the manufacturer.

  1. The level of acid should be maintained 1cm above the plates.

16.

  • They have a much longer life than the lead-acid ones.
  • They supply larger amounts of current and for a longer period.
  • Can be left unused for months without any damage.

 

 

17.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Electrical energy is produced by chemical reaction between the plates of the cell (Zinc and copper) and the dilute sulphuric acid. Electrons are produced which flow on the external circuit and detected by the ammeter.

 

 

 

FORM TWO WORK

  1. MAGNETISM II

–     With current switched off record the initial reading of spring balance (Fo)

–     Vary the current (I) and each time record the corresponding values of I and the force F.

–     Tabulate these values.

–     For each value of F, subtract F-to get the magnetic force due to the current on the iron (fm)

–     Plot a graph of Fm against I.

–     The graph will help show the relationship.

  1. 1990: When the current increases the domains align themselves more until all of

them are the same perfectly lightened direction (magnetic saturation).  The magnetic force of attraction becomes constant.

3

 

 

 

 

  1. Wire curves/ jacks upwards according to Fleming’s Left Hand Thumb

Rule.

  1. Suspend each of them in the earth’s magnetic field. Change their rest

position and record the final direction in which key will rest.  Repeat this procedure several times and record the directions.  Do this experiment on each of the rods.  It is noted that, the magnetized rod will rest in the earths North-south direction each time it is disturbed.  The unmagnetised rod rests in random directions.

  1. The a.c magnetises the magnet alternately in the opposite directions 50

times in one second. When withdrawn slowly, different parts attain random polarities.

  1. It gains and loses magnetism easily. It is only magnetized if there is a

magnetic field around it and looses its magnetism immediately the field is withdrawn. It also requires very little energy to magnetise and demagnetise.

  1. In fields the lines are parallel and the force acting on a small

magnet/conductor is uniform. The opposite is the case for the non-uniform field.

  1. – Increasing current by decreasing resistance

– Turning wire AB to an angle of 900

– Increasing number of cells.

  1. – Amount of current

– Strength of magnetic field

– Angle between magnetic field and direction of conductor.

  1. Attraction can be between opposite poles or a magnet and a non-

magnetized magnetic material.

12.

 

 

 

  1. a) i) and ii) 1996 1992 suspend each of them in the earth’s magnetic

field.  Change their rest position and record the final direction in which key will rest.  Repeat this procedure several times and record the directions.  Do this experiment on each of the rods.  It is noted that, the magnetized rod will rest in the earth North-south direction each time if is disturbed.  The unmagnetised rod rests in random directions.

  1. b) When magnetizing current is increased, the dipoles align more and more until magnetic saturation is attained where the magnetization becomes maximum and remains constant. Substance P requires less current than Q to attain saturation.  This means that P is easily magnetized and also easily demagnetise- than Q. This also means that P can form temporary magnet while Q can for permanent magnet \P is soft and Q is hard magnetic materials.
  2. Soft magnetic material is more easily magnetized and demagnetised

compared to hard ones.  Soft ones form temporary magnets while hard ones form permanent magnets.

  1. 1 Vibration energy helps to turn the dipoles since they are in constant

repulsion from dipoles contained in adjacent domains.

  1. By using iron powder; more of it is attracted to the poles than at the sides.
  2. Upwards
  3. By making the magnetic ends to be removed and create complete loops

which reduce the repulsion of the dipoles in different domains which cause them to turn sideways.

 

19.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Upwards

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Rider rolls inwards i.e. into the U-shaped magnet.

22.

 

 

 

  1. x is north Y is North both correct

 

  1. MEASUREMENT II
  2. i) When dropped at centre, the drop starts spreading outwards. To ensure uniform spread, the wooden planks are moved outwards very slowly at the same speed when in parallel. The powder helps to show the extent of spread otherwise it would be difficult to see the clear oil on the water surface.
  3. ii)  Radius = 100mm =  rp, radius of drop, rd = 0.25mm

Volume of patch = volume of drop

Let diameter of oil molecule = d

\d= 4/3 x (0.25)3 mm

(100)2

d= 2.083 x 10-6mm

= 2.083 x 10 -9m

iii)   Assumptions:

  • The patch is assumed to be monolayer.
  • The molecules are assumed to be spherical, which is not true
  • The patch is assumed to be perfectly circular.
  • The drop is assumed to be perfectly spherical.

–     0.550 cm; 0.562 – 0.012

–     5.62 – 0.12 = 5.50mm.

  1. Density p = m/v;

1.75g

(0.550)3 cm3

= 10.5cm3

  1. TURNING EFFECT OF A FORCE

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Taking moment and equating Clockwise moments = anticlockwise moments

0.6 x 70cm = w x 30

W= 0.6 x 70

30

 

W = mg = 4.2

3

= 1.4N

  1. Since the system is in equilibrium, then (P x A) 15 = w (15+45)

2.0 x105 x 4x 10-4 x 15 = 60W

 

W= 8x 15×10

60

Weight, w= 20N

 

 

 

 

  1. Solution

5kg = 50N

50x = 15 x (3 – x)

50 x = 45-15x

50x=45-15x

65x= 45

X=45/65    = 0.692m

 

  1. For a system in equilibrium. The sum of clockwise moments about the same point must be equal to the sum of anticlockwise moments about the same point.

5.

  • Steering a wheel in a vehicles
  • Tightening a nut using spanner
  • Peddling a bicycle
  • Opening/closing a door
  • Closing /opening a water/gas tap
  1. The distance is small hence the moment produced is not enough to open the door. A lot of force will be required.
  2. It provides them with the necessary support and also makes them stable as they move about.
  3. Solution

 

 

 

 

 

 

Clockwise moment = Anticlockwise moment

38 x 10/100  = wx 25/100

3.8= 0.25W

W=  3.8

0.25

= 15.2N

  1. a)         Weight = total upward force

= (10 +20) N

= 30N

  1. b) Let position of c.o.g be xm away from A i.e

 

 

 

 

Using pt A as pivot thus

30x= 20×2

30x=40

X = 4/3 = 1.33 m

C.o. g is at 1.33m from A or 0.667 m from B

 

  1. Solution

Sum of clockwise moment = sum of anticlockwise moment

8×0.2 = (y-0.25)3 + 0.55

1.6 = 3y- 0.75 + 0.55

1.6= 3y -0.2

3y= 1.6 + 0.2 = 1.8m

Y= 0.6m

Y=60cm

 

 

  1. EQUILIBRIUM AND CENTRE OF GRAVITY
  2. The c.o.g is lower since the heavier base the lower the c.o.g.
  3. Cylinder should be lying down.

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. -Position of centre of gravity

-Width of its base i.e. length of axle

  1. i) The sum of upward forces should be equal to the sum of downward forces.
  2. ii) The sum of clockwise moments should be equal to the sum of anticlockwise moments.

5.

  • Luggage compartments are located on the lower part of the bus.
  • Engine is located as low as possible.
  • Floor of the bus is carpeted by a heavy gauge metallic material.
  • Light material is used for making the upper part of the bus.
  1. When the ice melts, water contracts hence centre of gravity lower. The beaker becomes more stable
  2. -Beaker becomes less stable.

-Water expands on freezing raising the centre of gravity of the beaker.

 

  1. REFLECTION AT CURVED SURFACE
  2. On the graph

 

 

 

 

 

 

F = 3 x 5

=15 cm

 

  1. Reflected ray is extended backward to cut the x-axis at 1.5cm

r= 1.5x 2

= 3.0 cm

 

 

 

 

3.

 

 

 

  1. -Image that cannot be formed on a screen.

-Image which is always on opposite side of object

5.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7.

 

 

 

 

 

8.

 

9.

Real  image                         Virtual image
·       Informed by rays converging on same side as the objects ·    Formed when only imaginary rays appear to converge on opposite side of object
·       Formed on a screen ·    Not found on screen

 

  1. (i)
  • Convex mirror
  • Driving mirrors in vehicles
  • Used in supermarkets

(ii)

  • Parabolic mirrors
  • Solar heater reflectors
  • Car headlights

(iii)

  • Concave mirrors
  • Shaving mirrors
  • Used by dentists

11.

  • Has a wide field of view
  • Produces an upright diminished image

12.

  • Magnified
  • Upright
  • Virtual
  • Behind the mirror

 

  1. Virtual image

1/u1/v = 1/f

1/u – 1/2u = 1/10

2-1/2u = 1/10

 

  1. u= 10/2

U= 5cm

Real image

1/u + 1/v = 1/f

1/u + 1/2u = 1/10

2+1/2u = 1/10

U= 3×10/2 = 15

U= 15cm

 

  1. MAGNETIC EFFECT OF AN ELECTRIC CURRENT
  2. a) As the diaphragm vibrates, it causes the coil to move back and forth, in the

magnetic field cutting the field lines. This causes varying current to be induced in the coil.  Varying current flows.

  1. b) -Increasing the number of turns in the coil.

-Increasing the strength of the magnet.

2.

 

 

 

 

 

3    a)   -Number of turns or number of coils.

-Strength of magnetic field.

-(Angle of inclination)

  1. b) To reduce eddy current in the armature.
  2. Downwards (or into the paper)

5.

 

 

 

 

  1. Soft iron – Iron produces a stronger magnet but looses it magnetism quickly. Also it is more easily magnetized than steel.
  2. i) Heating the magnet strongly until it is red hot and then cooling it suddenly.
  3. ii) Keeping it in a solenoid through which an alternating current is flowing when the current is still passing the magnet is slowly removed to a distance from the solenoid.
  4. -Increasing the number of turns of the coil.

-Increasing the strength of the current.

  1. Solution A – South Pole
  2. i) Towards the right
  3. ii) Using the Fleming’s left hand rule.

First finger- Field

Second finger- Current direction

Thumb – Motion

iii) -When the wire is positioned at right angle to the magnetic field.

-It is minimum when the wire is parallel to the magnetic field.

  1. iv) No effect
  2. v) – Reducing the amount of current.

– Replacing the magnet with a weaker one.

  1. a) -Commutator

-They are the split – rugs which reversed the current in the coil every half-cycled

and hence allow rotation to continue.

  1. b) They provide electric connection to the coil.
  2. c) -The lengths AB and CD of the coil are current carrying conductors in a strong

magnetic field which is perpendicular to the wires.

-Each side of the coil has force acting on it

-AB has a downward force while CD experience and upward force.

-Overall the coil experiences an anticlockwise motion.

  1. c) -Increasing the amount of current

-Increasing the strength of magnetic field

-Using more turns in the coil

-Winding the coil on a soft iron core

7.

  • Energy loss due to friction between brushes and commutators.
  • Resistance of the coil
  • Energy loss due to heat during magnetization and demagnetization
  • Flux leakage
  1. – Electric bell

– Telephone receiver

 

 

 

  1. HOOKE’S LAW
  2. (a) i)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) 0-19N or 0 – 18N

iii) The spring becomes shortest possible (NO further compression is possible)

  1. b)   Each spring experiences a force of

30/2NN = 15N

F= ke

E= 15/3 = 5cm

Each spring extends by 5cm.

  1. c) – Diameter of the coil

– Number of turns per unit length.

– Thickness (diameter) of the wire

– Length of the spiral spring.

  1. Ductile materials undergo plastic deformation while brittle materials break immediately after attaining plastic limit.
  2. a) Provided the elastic limit is not exceeded their extension e of a spiral spring is

directly proportional to the external applied force.

 

F(N) 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
E(mm) 0 11 19 29 41 51

 

  1. i) Strength – this is the ability of a material to resist breakage when subjected to a

stretching, compressing or shearing force.

  1. ii) Brittleness- This is the quality of material which makes it to break just after

exceeding the elastic limit.

iii) Ductility- This is the quality of a material which leads to permanent change in

size and shape.

  1. iv) Stiffness- This is the resistance of a material to withstand forces which tends to

change its shape or size or both.

  1. a) The extension (e) of spring is directly proportional to the applied force (f)

Provided the elastic limit is not exceeded.

  1. b) i)         Y-axis – Extension

X-axis – stretching force

  1. ii) OP- Shows that the extension on the spring increases in proportion to the

stretching force.  Obeys hookes law.

PN- spring not obeying Hookes law.  It does not regain original length.

iii)       Spring gets a permanent stretch.

 

  1. F=ke

F= Ke but e= 6/10cm = 6/10 x100

F= mg = (300/1000 x 10) N

= 3N

Spring constant.  K = f/e

= (3 ¸6/100)

= (3 x 1000/6) N/m

= 500Nm-1

b)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Solution

Extension of parallel springs

e1 = F/K = 8N/4N/cm = 2cm

 

Extension of lower spring

e2 = F/K = 16N       = 4cm

4N/cm

Total extension = e1 +e2

= (2 +4)cm

= 6cm

  1. Solution
  2. a) F= ke

k= f/e = mg/e

but mg = 210/1000 x 10

= 2.1N

e= 10.5cm = 0.105

 

= 2.1/0.105 Nm-1

= 20Nm-1

Using the block

F= ke

= 20x 7.5/100

= 2x 7.5/10 =15/10N

=1.5N

 

  1. b) e=f/k

 

= 550/100 x 10¸20

5.5/20m

= 0.275m

= 27.5cm

 

  1. Solution

Extension, e produced by 10g mass

e= (10.8-6) cm = 4.8cm

= 0.048m

 

F= 100/1000 x 10

= 1N

 

K= f/e = 1N/0.048m

= 20.83 N/m

Extension e produced by 10g mass

E = (7.8 – 6) cm = 1.8cm – 0.018m

F = ke

= (20.83 x 0.018) N

= 0.375n

 

But m = F/g= 0.375/10

= 0.075kg

= 37.5g

 

 

  1. WAVES I
  2. 1½ → 3.5 x 10-3

          1 → T

\T= 1 ¸3/2 x 3.5 x 10-3

 

= 1 x 2/3 x 3.5 x 10-3

=7/3 X 10-3 Sec

 

But f = 1/T

 

7 x 10-3

3

=  1 x     3

7×10-3

= 3 x 103

7

=429Hz

  1. Speed and wavelength decreases
  2. f= 40Hz l=8.5m

V= fl

= 40 x 8.5

= 340m/s

T= d/s = 102/340

=  0.3sec

  1. It can be polarized
  2. Mechanical waves requires a material medium to travel through. Electromagnetic waves don’t.
  3. i) Wavelength- This is the distance between two successive crests or troughs.  SI

Unit is Metre (m)

  1. ii) Amplitude – It is the maximum displacement of particles of a medium from the

mean/fixed position in either direction.  SI Unit is metre (m)

iii) Periodic time – It is the time taken to complete one oscillation.  SI Unit is

second(s)

  1. iv)   Frequency – Is the number of complete oscillations made by a particle in unit

time. SI unit is Hertz (Hz)

7.

Light waves Sound waves
Transverse Longitudinal in nature
Require no material; medium Need a medium
Have short wavelength Have very long wavelength
  1. a) i)         Transverse wave
  2. ii) Longitudinal wave
  3. b) Transverse wave is one in which the movement of each particle is at right angle to

the direction of travel of the wave. While longitudinal is where the movement of each particle is parallel to the direction of travel of the wave motion.

 

  1. (a) i) Amplitude = 0.6cm
  2. ii) Period = 2 seconds

iii)       Wavelength

l=Vt

= 50 x 2

=100cm

  1. iv) Frequency

F=1/T

= ½

= 0.5HZ

  1. b) Frequency
  2. In refraction of water waves, the wave speed is reduced in shallower region in a ripple tank.
  3. Water waves hitting the beaches have energy which causes weathering.
  4. i) The speed of radio wave in m/s

Solution

V= fl

= (1200 x 250 x 1000)ms-1

= 3.0 x 108 m/s

 

  1. ii) Wavelength = v/f

3.0 x 108

          2.0×105

= 1.5 x 103

          =1500m

 

  1. SOUND
  2. 1990: Stationary waves
  3. 1991: Refraction of sound waves
  4. At rest
  5. i) Ups and down in the loudness of sound i.e. loud and soft sounds as crosses on

nodal and antinodal lines. (Constructive and destructive interference)

  1. ii) Constant loud sound since he is equidistant from both speakers and constructive

interference takes place.

  1. i) Plot the graph of f2(y-axis) against T.
  2. ii) Determine its gradient (1800) from y= mx +c

f2 = (grad) T + C)

Obtain y intercept and substitute

f2=(grad) T +C)

Obtain y intercept and substitute

f2=2800 T + y-intercept

  1. 1994: 2x =330 x 0.5

x =82.5m

  1. 1995: By making the wire tighter

Decreasing length of the wire

  1. 1997: D= vt =340 x 2 = 680m
  2. 1996: (i) Transverse-oscillations are perpendicular to direction of wave

propagation.

Longitudinal – oscillation are parallel to direction of wave propagation.

Speed of sound

2.5 x s = 400 x 2

S=320 m/s

 

  1. ii) 2(d-400) = 2.5 + 2

320

d= 1,120m

  1. 2003: Distance covered by sound

= 600 x 2 = 1200m

Speed= Distance = 1200 = 342.9 m/s

Time          3.5

  1. It is the reflected sound
  2. A source of sound i.e. an electric bell is suspended inside a bell jar. Using a suction pump air is pumped out of the jar when the lowest pressure is attained, one can see the hammer striking the bell but the ringing can no longer be heard. Sound cannot travel through a vacuum.
  3. a) Box act as amplifiers. The air inside the box is forced to vibrate as the box

vibrates.

  1. b) X-Compressions

Y-Rarefaction

  1. c) Longitudinal – The movement of air molecules is parallel to the direction of travel of the wave motion.
  2. d) Solution

Since V= fl

Then x = v/f

 

 

330

800  m

= 0.4125m

 

  1. Solution – Air is less dense at the top of mountains or high altitude regions making transmission poor.
  2. i) Intensity and loudness- Intensity is the power carried by a wave and it depends on

the distance from the source while loudness is the power of sound to reach the ear and it depends on amplitude of the source.

  1. ii) Frequency and pitch – Frequency is the number of cycles made per second while pitch is how high on musical scale the note produced by an oscillator is.
  2. Solution -Vibrating length

-Tension

 

 

 

  1. FLUID FLOW
  2. Velocity
  3. Forward (upstroke) – The valve opens, pressure forces water flow into the air chamber and air is compressed. Backward (down stroke) – valve closes; compressed air expands hence continuous flow of water.
  4. The paper rises up because the pressure above becomes less than the pressure below.
  5. Balls move towards each other; pressure in the space between them decreases to below that on the outside.
  6. hx=hz.>hy
  7. Pressure is inversely proportional to the speed; or speed increases as pressure decreases.
  8. At low speeds the speed is streamlined while at high speeds, the flow is turbulent.
  9. Air over the mouth of the bottle moves faster than air under.

Pressure above the mouth of the bottle is less than pressure inside the bottle (hence dynamic lift of ball)

  1. At steady rate the sum of the pressure, the potential energy per unit volume and kinetic energy per unit volume in fluid is a constant

Provided a finish is non-viscous, incompressible and its flow streamline and increase in its velocity produces a corresponding decrease in pressure.

When the speed of a fluid increases, the pressure in the fluid decreases and vice versa.

  1. 2007: V2, V4, V1, V3
  2. A1V1 = A2V2

          30 x 4 = 7.5 x A2

A2= 16 cm2

  1. a) 50(cm/s)
  2. b) 26.53 (cm/s)

 

 

 

FORM THREE WORK

  1. LINEAR MOTION
  2. a) AB- ball rising to max height

BC- ball falling to ground

CDE- ball rebouncing/ changing velocity from +ve to –ve

  1. b) Acceleration = gradient = 19.8 = 9.9 m/s2
  2. c) Displacement = area

= ½ x 2 x 19.8 = 19.8m

  1. d) Upon hitting the ground the ball looses some energy.

 

 

 

 

 

3          Time interval between any two dots = 1/50 =0.02S

Dist d1 between 1st and 2nd dots = 2.2 cm

= V1 = 0.022m = 1.1ms-1

0.02S

Dist d2 between 4th and 5th dots = 3.3cm, v2 = 0.033 =1.65m/s

0.02

Note: the average velocity between any two dots = the velocity of a point half way between the pts. Label the pts A.B.C.D & E label a pt x and y half way between D and E respectively (i.e. halfway in time not distance)

T x y = 0.01+ 0.02 x 2 + 0.01 = 0.06s

Therefore a = V2 – V =1.65-1.1 = 0.54 = 9m/s2

   T            0.06        0.06

  1. Speed is a scalar quantity while velocity is a vector quality.
  2. v-u +at

0=15-10t

t= 15s (to max height) therefore total time = 2 x 1.5=3s

  1. (a) Initial vertical velocity = 0, a=10, S=4m

Therefore: S= ut + 1/2 gt2

4 = 0+5t2

t = 0.8944

Range (horizontal dist) = initial vel. (constant) x time

= 12 x 0.8944

= 10.73m

  1. b) Initial and final horizontal velocities are equal =12m/s

Final vertical velocity = V= u + at

V= 0+10×0.8944

V= 8.944m/s

  1. OA = OB therefore OAB is isosceles

Displacement is distance covered in a straight line i.e. AB since <OBA = AOB = 60 then the triangle is equilateral. So AB=AO=4m

  1. (a)       t=1/f= 1/50 = 0.02S

(b)       0.1s is equal to 5 time intervals

 

 

 

Diagram not drawn to scale (refer from the actual paper)

Average vel between – 0.02S to 0.02 = X1/0.04 (=vel at t=0s)

Similarly for 0.08 to 0.12, V2 = X2 = vel at t = 0.1s

0.04

For 0.18 to 0.22, V3 = X3 = vel at t = 0.2s

0.04

For 0.28 to 0.32, V4 = X4 = vel at t= 0.3s

0.04

(d)       Note: The average velocities above represent the actual velocities halfway between the three dots.

Tabulating the results

Time 0 0.1 0.2 0.3
Vel V1 V2 V3 V4

Plot v against t and draw the best line of fit. Find gradient = acceleration.

  1. (a)       Initial vertical velocity = 0, a = g; s= 5m

S=ut+1/2gt2

S = 0 + 5t2

T= 1s

(b)       Range = Uμ x t = 30 x 1 = 30m

(c)       Vv =UV + gt

Vv = 0 + 10 x 1           = 10m/s

  1. (a)       Plot the graph

Note: the graph is a straight line for the first 4 seconds then a curve

(b)       Velocity constant

(c)       Draw tangents to the graph at t = 4, 5 s and t = 6.5 s. Obtains the gradients of the tangents g1 and g2 which are equal to velocities at t = 4.5 s (V1) and at t

= 6.5s (V2)

Acc = V2 – V1            ≈4.9m/s2

6.5-4.5

  1. (a)       acc = (change in vel/time)

a = (v – u) t

v = u + at…. (i)

Displacement = average vel x time

s = (u + u + at)t = ut +2t2

2

Square equation (ii)

v2 = (u + at)2

v2 = u2 + 2aut + a2t2

Factorizing v2 = u2 + 2a (ut + 1/2at2)

but ut+ 1/2at2 = (from equ.(ii) .

v2 = u2 + 2as

 

(b)       u = 50m/s

a =2m/s2 V = 0

v2 = u2 + 2as

0 = 2500 – 4s

S= 625m

mgh = 1/2mv2

1/2 v2 = gh

1/2 x 36/10 = h

L = 1.8m

  1. (a)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(b)      (i)        u = 20m/s, t=2s, v=0

V = u + at

0 = 20 + a x 2

A = -10m/s

Deceleration = 10m/s2

(ii)       Distance traveled before starting to break = 0.2 x 20 = 4m

Distance moved after breaks are applied,

U=20, a=-10, v=0

v2 = u2 + 2as

0 = 400 – 20s

s = 20m

Total distance = 24m

(i)        Initial horizontal velocity of the bullet (50m/s) does change so it will move horizontally and parallel to the track despite its vertical movement.

(ii)       Uv= a =-10m/s2, s=45, v=0

V2=u2 + 2as

a= u2-900

u=30m/s

Therefore time to max height (t) horizontal distance covered in that time =6 x 50=300m

 

  1. (a) (i)        Time between two dots = 1/f =1/50 = 0.02s

1.5 x 10-2 m/s = 0.15m/s

0.02 x 5

V2=3.2×10-2 m/s = 0.32m/s

0.02×5

(ii)       From half way between AB to half way between CD time

= (0.02 x 20 + (21/2 x 2x 0.02)

= 0.4 + 0.1

= 0.5s.

Therefore acc= (V2-V1)/t = (0.32-0.15/0.5 = 0.34m/s2)

 

(b)       P.e is converted to k.e            or u=o, a=g, s=h, v=?

Therefore mgh= 1/4 mv2         Sub: V2= U2+2as

V2=2gh                                    V2=0+2gh

V=√2gh                                   V=√2gh

(c)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. (a)

(i)    Particle stationary/at rest.

(ii)   Increasing vel. (grad=vel)

(iii)  Particle moving at cost. vel in the opp. direction i.e. towards origin.

(b)

(i)        Uv=0, S=45m, a=10m/s2t=?

S=ut+ 1/2 at2

45 = 0+5t2

t=3S

(ii)       Range =50m

t=35

Um=50/3=16.67m/s

(iii)      Vv = Uv + at

Vv = 0 + 10 x 3

Vv = 30m/s

Total distance =area bound by x-axis and the line of graph

=20m + 20m

=40m

Note: Since distance is scalar quantity the -ve area is taken to be +ve.

  1. s=15, Um=300m/s, av=10m/s2, Uv=0m/s

Therefore s=ut+1/2 at2

15 – 0 + 5t2

t=3.873s

Therefore d=UH x t=300 x 3.873 = 1161m

18.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Distance = area under curve between 0 and 3.0 second.

= 120 x 3x 0.2 = 72m

Accept 70.5, 73.5, 76.5

  1. Acceleration = slope of graph at t = 4.0s

16 x 3

17 x 0.2           = 14.11m/s2

  1. 24.45s, 2445m, 264.2m/s or 67.80 to the horizontal
  2. 1936.5m
  3. 2s, 80m/s
  4. 0.5s, 2.5m, 1.25m
  5. Upwards, 18s, 180m/s,   1620m,      1,600m
  6. 20.6m/s
  7. 40.9°
  8. 50m/s, 125m, 10s
  9. 31.25m, 2.5s
  10. 0.0333s, 18m/s.

 

 

  1. REFRACTION OF LIGHT
  2. 1989:

(a) (i)        Sin 48 = 3                   Sin r = 0.9906

Sin r      4                    = 82.20

 

(ii)

 

 

(b) Sin C = 1 = 0.75

n

C= 48.60

i.e. when r= 90, I= C

Va = n

Vw

3 x108=   4            \Vw=2.25 x 108 m/s

Vw        3

 

  1. a) n= Va =   3.00 x 108         =1.6

Vp      1.88 x 10 8

b)

 

 

 

Sin C=1/1.6

C=38.8

 

  1. c) Sin Q = 1.6

Sin 21.2

Q= 35.40

3

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Sin C= 1/n = 1/1.4

 

C= 45.6

\Total internal reflection will take place.

 

 

5.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ang = Velocity of light in air

= Velocity of light in glass

= 3x 108

          = 2.4 x 108

= 1.25

  1. hg = Real thickness

Apparent thickness

 

1.58=                     10       

Apparent thickness

 

Apparent thickness = 10/1.58       = 6.33cm

The apparent thickness of crown glass block = 6.33cm

9    a)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • Set the apparatus as shown above.
  • Adjust the search pin to no-parallax position.
  • Using the metre rule, measure the apparatus distance x and the real

depth y of the water.

  • Repeat the experiment for other values of y
  • Plot a graph of y against x.

Refractive index = gradient of graph

= Real depth

Apparent depth

hw = y/x

 

 

 

  1. i) Graph

 

 

  1. ii) h1 = Real depth             = gradient of the graph

Apparent depth

Gradient = 135 = 1.35

100

\Refractive index, h1==1.35

  1. Bending of light is more in paraffin than in water.

Thus speed of light in paraffin is less than that in water.

  1. a) Ratio of sine of angle of incidence to sine of angle of refraction is always a

constant i.e.

h= Sin I in medium 1

Sin r in medium 2

  1. b) i)

ah1 =   Sin i

sin r

=          sin 400 =   0.6428

Sin 240            =  0.4067

= 1.581

(iii)      ah1 =  1                                    Where C is the critical angle then

Sin C

1.581=      1

Sin C

  1          1        = 0.6325

Sin C   1.581

C= sin -1 0.6325

= 39.230

Critical angle = 39.230

(iv)      ah1  =   sin I in 1

Sin r in 2

= Sin 240                 =    0.4067

Sin 260                =     0.4384

= 0.9277

  1. Solution;

Use a right angled prism.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ray meets longest side of prism at 900 and passes undeviated. It makes an angle of 450 with normal at O1 and is totally internally reflected. The reflected ray makes an angle of 450 with normal at O2 and is totally reflected as shown. Total deviation = (4 x 45)0 = 1800

  1. Frequency or wavelength
  2. Used in;
  • Prism periscope
  • Optical fibre
  • Prism binocular
  1. Solution;

Gradient of the graph =    Apparent depth

Real depth

= 10/20   = ½

But refractive index = Real depth

Apparent depth

 

hg    = 1/gradient

\ Refractive index of glass = 2

  1. Solution;

For light passing from water to air then

whg = 3/4

 

  1. NEWTON’S LAW OF MOTION
  1. 1989

R         – Reaction

W        – Weight

T          – Tension

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(ii)       Net force= 70N – mgsinx= 70N- 30Xsin 30sin 30

F= ma

55= (7 + 3) a

a= 5.5m/s2

  1. The rocket will accelerate due to 2 reasons
  • The total mass of the rocket decreases as the fuel burns but thrust force is constant
  • The gravitational pull decreases with increase in distance from the centre of the earth so it will be less.
  1.             P.E = K.E

Mgh = ½ mv2 therefore V= √2gh = √20×5 = 10m/s

Momentum before collision = Momentum after collision

M1U1 = (M1 + M2)20

10 x 2              5 x 20

V= 4m/s

  1. Total force downward = weight of the girl = 400N. Since the lift is moving

upwards the upward force T, is greater than 400N therefore from F=ma

(T-400)=40×2

T= 480N= reading

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1.             Force upward = 600N, Force downward = 50N (wt).Therefore Net force =

550N upwards.

F= ma = m(v-u)/t = m (v)/t since u= 0

550 = (50 x v)/0.1

V = 11m/s

  1.             (a)       (i)        The body continues in its uniform state of motion velocity

(ii)       U= 25m/s, V=0, S= 20m a=?

V2 = U2 + 2as

0= 625 + 40a

a= -15.625m/s2

F= ma = 800x – 15.625

= -12500N

Therefore decelerating force= 12500N

(b)       Since one is moving towards the other one is +ve while the other is –ve.

Momentum before collision = momentum after collision

(i)        M1u1 + m2u2 = (m1+m2) v

(2x 0.25) – (1.5 x 0.4) = 3.5 x v

0.5 – 0.6 = 3.5 V

v= -0.02867m/s

= -2.867 x10-2m/s

(ii)       The original direction of the 1.5kg mass

  1.             (a) (i)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fr= Frictional force

 

(ii)       Force= mg sin 30-6

= 5 x 10 x 0.5-6

= 19N

 

(ii)       F= ma

19=5a = a = 3.8m/s2

U= 0m/s

S= 0.25m

t =?

s= ut + ½ at2

0.25 = 0+ 1.9t2

t2 = 0.3627s

= 0.36s

(b)       (i)        Plot the graph

(ii)       Let it touch y and x – axis

(I)        Time taken by bullet = x intercept (30ms)

(II)       Impuse = force x time = area bound between x – axis and the line of the graph (6Ns)

(iii)      V= 200m/s m=?

Impulse = Ft = Mv – Mu

= 6Ns = M x 200-0 since u= 0

Therefore m= 0.03kg

  1.             M tends to remain in its state of uniform rest due to its inertia. This

protects string A

  1.             Propelling force= 0.5 x 10= 5N

Opposing force= frictional force = 3 N

Net Force = 5-3 = 2N

Using F= ma

2= (2+ 0.5)a

a= 0.8m/s2

s= 0.6m

u=0

V2 = U2 + 2as

= 0+ 2+ 0.8 + 0.6

= 0.96

Therefore V= 0.9798

V= 0.098m/s

  1.             Speed decrease. Since momentum before collision is equal to momentum

after collision i.e M1V1 = M2V2 then increase in mass implies/cause a decrease in velocity.

  1.             (a) (i)                          R=Reaction

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(ii)       Mg sin 10 = 30 x 10 sin 10

= 52.1 + 20

(iii)      Since the velocity is constant then the net force = 0

p=        mgsinӨ + Fr

p=        52.1 + 20

  1. 1N

 

(b)       (i)        Frictional force

(ii)       F= ma

(52.1- 2.0) = 30a

32.1 = 30a

a= 1.07m/s2

  1. The mattress increase time taken to land. Thus from

f= (Change in momentum)

Time taken

When time is more the force that will decelerate the jumper will be smaller (safer)

Fr= frictional force

F= ma

F= 2ma

Dividing

1 =       a1

2a2

i.e. a2 = (½) a1 OR read the value of x- intercept i.e. when a=0 m=mo and substitute in the equation to get m.

  1. Since one  is moving towards the other one has +ve vel while the other is –ve

Momentum before collision = momentum after collision

(i)        m1u1 + m2u2 = (m1m2)v

(2 x 0.25) – (1.5×0.4) = 3.5 x v

0.5 – 0.6 = 3.5 v

V= 0.02867m/s

= -2.867 x 10-2m/s

(ii)       The original direction of the 1.5 kg mass

 

 

 

 

  1.             Speed decreases. Since momentum before collision is equal to momentum

after collision i.e. M1V1 = M2V2 then increase in mass implies/cause a decrease in velocity.

(a)      A body at rest or in motion at uniform velocity tends to stay in that state unless acted on by an unbalanced force.

 

(b)       (i)        Slope s= 97.5 – 0 (m/s)2

16 – 0

20k = s = 6.09

 

(ii)       k = 6.17 = 0.304

20

 

(iii)      Increase in roughness increase k and vice versa

(c)       Applying equation

V2 – U2 = 2as

V2 – 0= 2x 1.2 x 400

Momentum P = mv

 

 

= 800 x    2 x 1.2 x 400

24787.09

24790 (table)

 

PREDICTION QUESTIONS ON THE TOPIC

  1. 2N
  2. 7.75m/s
  3. 5.4m, 0.66N
  4. (a) 10m/s, -3.33m/s,               (b) 0.333                     (c) 50,000J
  5. 875N
  6. (a)       7.07 m/s, 0.71s,

(b)       (i) 0.071kgm/s                        (ii) 0.71N                    (iii) 0.71N

  1. 30000N

 

 

  1. WORK, ENERGY, POWER & MACHINE
  1.             Kinetic- potential – kinetic
  2.             (a)       Steam has more energy and would release its latent heat of

vaporization before turning to water at 1000C.

(b) (i) Q= m1

= 0.03 x 336000

= 10080J

Power output = 10080 = 56W

180

Po x 100 = 60

Pi

56 x 100 = 60

Pi

Pi = 93.33w

(ii)       E= Pt = 93.33 x 180

= 16,800J

Energy wasted = 16800 – 10080

= 6720J.

(c)       1/5 g of alcohol will give 2.7 x 104J

4/5 of petrol will give 3.84 x 104 J

\1g of mixture gives

= 5.4 x 103 + 38.4 x 103J

= 43. 8 x 103J

w.d = mgh = 1000 x 200 x 10 = 2 x 106

Energy required = (2 x 106) x100

40

Mass required =     2 x 107        

4 x 43.8 x 103

= 114.2g

(d)       P.E → Heat

Heat →K.e

  1. : K.e
  2. : Air resistance causes damping of vibration
  3. : Quality of heat = k.e = ½ mv2

= ½ x 0.8 x 10-3 x 400 x 400

= 64J

  1. Pitch=distance the screw moves in or out when turned one

revolution=0.5mm

  1.             Rotational K.e
  2. u= 25m/s, v= 0m/s

s= 20m

v2 = u2 + 2as

O= 625 + 40a

a= -15.625 m/s2

F= ma              = 800 x – 16.625

= 12, 500N

  1.  (a)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • If E = 100% then M.A = V.R = R/r= 15/1.5 = 10
  • 2E = L or 2 = L/E = M.A

Wheel and axle is more advantageous

  1.             16 = ½ mv2

K.e = ½ m (2V1)2 =

Dividing K.e = 4/16                 Ke2 = 64J

  1.             Ratio of work output to work input expressed as a percentage.
  2.             (a)

 

 

 

E= Effort

W= Weight

R= Reaction

 

(b)       Effort decreases because the far the force applied is from the pivot, the smaller the value of force required to produce the same moment/turning effect.

 

 

 

 

 

  • Total work done= area under graph  e between the x-axis and the line  graph

w.d = 240000J. (Note that w.d is a scalar quantity and thus the –ve is consider as +ve)

  • Power output = mgh= 3 x 10 x 10 x 360 = 300 KW

T                  3600

Power input = power output + power loses

= 300 + 200     = 500KW

E = Po x 100 = 300 x 100 = 60%

P1           500

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

MA = 1800= 4.5

400

MA x 100 = 65

VR

VR = 4.5 x 100

65

v.r = 6.9

= 7

  1. (i)        w.d = F x d

= 20,000 x 3

= 60000J

(ii)       P = W.d = 60000

t           6

= 10kw

(iii) E= Po/pi x 100= 10/12.5 x 100 = 80%

  1. 2005:  MA x 100 = 75%

VR

But MA = 600/400 = 1.5

1.5 x 100 = 75

VR

VR = 2

  1. 1250W, 875J
  2. 50kg
  3. 2000J, 40W
  4. 2.08 x 104
  5. 0.676J
  6. 0.05m

 

 

 

  1. CURRENT ELECTRICITY II
  1. Dry cells have a very high internal resistance hence give very little current that start a vehicle.
  2. (i)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(ii)       – Measure length of wire (L)

– Take readings of ammeter (I) and voltmeter (V)

– Calculate its resistance R

– Then find the value R/L

 

(b) (i) The current flowing through a resistor  is directly proportional to the p.d. applied as long as the physical factors remain constant.

(ii) If the temperature is controlled to remain constant then they obey ohm’s law. If temp is changed, they don’t obey.

 

(c)       Every time the current is reversed the direction of key pointer also reversed. This would give an average of zero.

 

(d)       (i)        For the two 3Ω resistors in parallel their total = product/sum=1.5 Ω

For series connection i.e. 3.3 and 1.5Ω, total 7.5 Ω

\RT = 7.5 Ω

(ii)       I = E = 10v = 1.33A

RT  7.5

  1. RT = product/ sum = 9×18= 4.5 Ω

I = 12/4.5 = 8/3 Amps

I through the 3 Ω is equal to I through the Ω since total resistance in each route are equal = 8/3A x ½

p.d = 4/3 x 3 = 3V

 

  1. Constant temperature, magnetic field, tension, compression, kinks etc.

 

  1. (a)       The current flowing through a resistor is directly proportional to the p.d

applied as long as the physical constants are held constant.

(b)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • By varying R obtain a set of corresponding values for I and p.d readings
  • Tabulate them
  • Plot V against I
  • If it is a straight line the law is obeyed, over wise not.

(c)       (i)        When R1 only is connected I = 0.8a

R1 = E/I = 10/0.8 = 12.5 Ω

When both are connected, then

(R1 + R2) 0.5 = 10

(R2 + 12.5) = 20

R2 = 7.5 Ω

(ii)       When in parallel RT = products/ sum = 4.6875 Ω

I= 10/4.6875 = 2.133A

(d)       – Rod of the acid

– Voltage emf of the battery

 

  1. Q= It = 0.08 x 2.5 x 60 = 12C

 

 

 

 

 

  1. 1 = 1 + 1 + 1 = 4 = 2               \RT = 1.5 Ω

RT  6+  3 + 6 = 6 = 3

(b)       For the whole circuit Rt = 1.5 + 2.5 = 4 Ω

Main current = E = 2 = 0.5A

RT   4

p.d across YZ = IR = 0.5 x 1.5 = 0.75V

p.d across any of the resistors in parallel

3 x 1 = 0.75A

I = 0.25 A

  1. (i)        For parallel connection RT = Products/ sum

=          (5 x 5) = 2.5 Ω

(5 + 5)

\Total resistance = 2.5 + 5.5 = 8.0 Ω

(ii)       Current= main current = R/RT = 4/8 = 0.5 Ω

(iii)      Note currents through Y and Q are equal since the resistance values are equal – through the two routes.

Let potential be rep. by P

Py – Pp = 0 (earthed)

\Py = IV

PQ = PP = P.dQP = 0.25 x 2 = 0.5V

PQ – 0= 0.5

PQ = 0.5V

(iv) P.DYQ = Py – PQ = 0.5V

 

  1. E= Pt = V2 x 2 x 60 = 240 x 240 x 120

R                              480

= 14400J

= 14.4KJ

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. I =  1.5

R + r

0.13 =     1.5   

10 + r

R= 1.5Ω

 

  1. (a)       The ratio of the pd across the ends of a metal conductor to the current

passing through it is a constant.

(b)

(i)        It does not obey Ohm’s law; because the current – voltage graph is not linear throughout

(ii)       Resistance = V/I = inverse of slope

(0.74 – 0.70)V

(80- 50)mA

 

     0.40V    

30 x 10-3A

= 1.33 Ω

(iii)      From the graph current flowing when pd is 0.70 is 60mA

Pd across R= 6.0 – 0.7 = 5.3V

R= 5.3V

60mA

= 88.3 Ω

(c)       (i)        Parallel circuit   I   +   I  =  5

30      20    60

R= 12 Ω

Total resistance = 10 + 12 = 22 Ω

(ii)       I = V/R = 2.1/22 = 0.095 A

 

(iii)      V= IR = 10 x   2.1

22

= 0.95V

  • Alkaline cell last longer than lead acid cell
  • Alkaline cell is more rugged than lead acid cell
  • Alkaline cell is lighter than  lead acid cell

I =        1.5

R+ r

0.13 =    1.5    

10 + r

R= 1.5 Ω

  • The ratio of the pd across the ends of a metal conductor to the current passing through it is a constant.
  • (i) It does not obey Ohm’s law because the current – voltage graph is

not linear throughout

(ii)       Resistance = V/I inverse of slope

= (0.74 – 0.70) V

(80 – 50)mA

 

=      0.40V     

30x 10-3 A

= 1.33 Ω

(iii)      From the graph current flowing when pd is 0.70 is 60mA

Pd across R = 6.0 – 0.7 = 5.3V

R= 5.3V

60mA

= 88.3 Ω

(c)       (i)        Parallel circuit  1  + 15

30    20   60

R = 12 Ω

Total resistance = 10 + 12 = 22 Ω

 

(ii)       I = V = 2.1 = 0.095 A

R    22

 

(iii)      V= 1R = 10 x 2.1/22

= 0.95V

  1. 2V
  2. 4 Ω, 0.5A
  3. 1.43 Ω
  4. 1.5v, 0.5 Ω
  5. b i 1.5, ii 1Ω, 4 Ω
  6. 10s, 0.792w
  7. No answer

 

 

  1. WAVES
  1.             Make the glass sooty. Make very small markings with the edge  of a razor

blade. The marking (slits) run  parallel, to each  other light passes  through the slit as the rest of the glass has been blacken.

  1.             The longer the wavelength the lower the frequency.

Wavelength = C = 3 x 108      = 600m

0.5 x 106

  1.             Speed and wavelength decrease
  2.             T = 0.45

F= 1/T = 1/0.4 = 2.5 Hz

  1.             The wave length decrease
  2.             f = 40.λ = 8.5m

V= f λ = 40 x 8.5

= 340m/s

T= d/V = 102/340 = 0.3s

  1.             The slit and the wavelength of the wave have to be of the same order.
  2. (a)       T= I = 1 = 0.25s

F   4

So no. of waves S= t/T

= 1.25 = 5 wavelengths

(b)       (i)        Same wavelength & same frequency

(c)       S2P – S1P = 9λ – 7 λ

  1.             n=     V air          

V medium

V= 3 x 108 = 2 x 108m/s

  1.             Light can be plane polarized
  2.             C= f λ

F = c/λ where c is constant so f is inversely  proportional to λ. If f decreases by ¼ then value of λ is tripled

  1.             (a)       Stationary waves has nodes and  antinodes but progressive wave

does not have them

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(b)       (i)        By using a pin to rule two parallel lines about a third of  a

millimeter apart on a piece of thin glass coated with graphite and allowed to dry.

(ii)       Path difference = (n+ ½), where n= 0, 1, 2, 3, 4…….

(c)       (i)        Copy diagram of on 17

(ii)       Light meters

(iii)      A is formed when path difference of the waves is zero so there is

constructive interference. B is also due to constructive interference, but path differences is equal to one wavelength, C is as a result of destructive interference due to path differences being equal to half of one wavelength.

  1.             Wavelength
  2.             Tank becoming shallower outwards from the centre. The speed of waves

decreases and hence the wavelength decreases outwards.

  1.             They block certain directions of vibration of the light going through the

glass

  1.             Diffract the light waves and give interference
  • To produce 2 coherent monochromatic sources
  • Fringes of light separated by areas of some darkness
  • (i) More fringes

(ii)             Central white fringe and fringe of different colours on either side of central fringe

  1.             (i)        Fringes of light

(ii)       Central white fringe and fringes of other colours on either side of white fringe

  1.             Transverse- oscillations are perpendicular to direction of wave propagation

Longitudinal – oscillations are parallel to direction of wave propagation

(b) (i) No energy was lost, therefore the intensity remained the same and

there was no amplitude change.

(c) (i) 0.5 Hz                  (ii) 6m

  1. Mechanical waves require a material medium to travel through while the em waves do not.

T = 0.007s       f= 3 x 5 = 15 cm

3

F= 1/T              = 3/0.007                     = 429 Hz

 

 

 

 

Correct diffraction effect for both

  1. 0.35S
  2. 85M
  3. 680M

 

  1. ELECTROSTATICS II
  1. ( a) (ii)            Ability to store charge given by the quality of charge it can store

per unit p.d

(b)       Bring it near a charged electroscope (say +ve). If there is divergence then the rod is +vely charged. If not, charge the electroscope -vely and bring the rod near. If divergence is observed then they have the same charge.  Note that if decrease in divergence is observed in both cases then the rod is simply a conductor and its not charged.

(c)       Nothing would happen to the leaf of the electroscope. This is because in a hollow charged conductor, the charges are distributed on the surface of the charged conductor and not inside.

(d)       Earthing or using another charged body

(i)        Q= CV

= 2 x 10

= 20 μC

 

(ii)       Series = 1/C = 1/3 + 1/3

1/c = 2/3

C= 3/2 = 1.5 u F

Parallel Ct = 1.5 + 2

= 3.5 Uf

  1. Parallel = CT = C1 + C2

Series = 1/CT = 1/C3 + 1/ (C1+ C2)

1/CT = (C1 + C2) + C3

C3 (C1 + C2)

CT = C3 (C1 + C2)

C1 + C2 + C3

  1. Like charges repel while unlike charges attract.
  2. (a)       When S1is closed V= 3V

Charge stored in C2 is Q = CV = 3C

When S1 is opened, ½ Q is transferred from C1 to C2

Since they are in parallel p.d = 1.5V

(b)       (i)        RT = 6 + 5 + 0.5 = 11.5 Ω

\ I =   E = 3.0 = 0.26A

RT   11.5

\ Q= CV = 1.4 x 3

= 4.2 μ C

  1. QT = CV = 400 μc

CT = (2 + x)

QT = 80

(400uc) = 80

(2+x)

X= 3 μF

  1.  (i)       Ct = (5+ 10) μf = 15 μf

Q= 200 x 5

= 1000 μf

Q= 15 μf

V

1000 = V

15

V= 66.7V

 

(ii)    Q = C

V

  Q = 5

66.7

Q= 66.7 x 5

= 333.5 μf

Q = 10               Q   = 10

V                     66.7

Q= 66.7 x 10

= 66.7μf

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a)       1 = 1/1.5 + ½ + 1/3

C1

= 0.67 + 0.5 + 0.33

1/CT = 1.5

Ct = 0.67 μc

 

(b)       Q= CTV

= 0.67 x 12

Q= 8.04 μc

 

(c)       8.04uc this is because they are in series arrangement therefore the quantity of charge is equal in all the capacitors.

 

  1. For parallel CT = C1 + C2

= 1.0 μF

Series CT = product/ sum = 2/3 = 0.667 μF

QT = CV = 2/3 x 6 = 4 μC

QC1 = CV = QT = 4 μC

VC1 = QT = 4/2 = 2V.

 

  1. (a) Graph of change against p.d

(b)       Q= CV

C= gradient = 0.24 – 0.08

6.0 – 2.0

= 0.16

= 4.0

= 0.04 μF

(c)       Energy stored = ½ QV = area

= ½ x 40 x 10-6

= 2.00 x 10-4J.

 

 

  1. HEATING EFFECT OF ELECTRIC CURRENT
  1. P = V2

R

40 = 2402/R

R= 1440 Ω

  1. P= V1

W/t = V1

15000/10 x 60 = V x 2

V=       15000

10 x 60 x 2

= 150

12                            = 12.5V                       Voltage across resistor is 12.5V

  1. Solution

(No. of ions) x 1000 = IV

No. of ions      = 13 x 240

1000

= 3.12              = 3A

  1. Solution

R1 = V2/p………….. (i)

R2 = (V/2)2 ¸2P= V2/4 ¸V2/4 x 1/2p = v2/8p……. (ii)

\R1/R1 = V2 /P ¸ V2/8p

= V2/p x 8p/V2                         = 8

  1. Solution
  • Amount of current, I
  • Resistance, R of the conductor
  • Time t for which the current flows
  1. Is the rate at which electrical energy is converted to useful work per unit time?
  2. Solution: That the appliance operates at a voltage of 240 volts. When it is operating normally, the electrical power outputs is 200 watts i.e. 200J of electrical energy is converted to other useful energy per unit time
  3. (a)       Solution

Electrical power P = VI

120 = 240I

\ I = 120/240                 = 0.5A

(b)       From Ohm’s law

V= 1R

R= V/J

= 240/0.5                                        = 480Ω

The resistance of element = 480Ω

  1. Solution

P= V2/R

R= V2/P

= 240 x 240

100

= 24 x 24         = 576Ω

 

  1. QUANTITY OF HEAT
  1. 1989

(i)        Heat absorbed by ice from – 100 = 1x 2,100 x 10 = 2.1 x 104

Heat absorbed by melting ice= 1 x 334 x 104 = 3.34 x 105

Heat absorbed by water from 00 to 1000 = 1 x 4,200 x 100J = 4.2 x 106J

Heat absorbed water at 1000 = ML = 1 x 2,260 x 103 J= 2.26 x 106J.

Total heat absorbed = 301.5 x 104 = 3.035 x 106J

Heat given out by heater = power x time

Time = 3.035 x 106 =

6 x 103

= 0.5025 x 103

= 505 .83s = 8.43min

(ii)      Some heat is used to heat up the heater, some is absorbed by the container/ due to energy losses more time for heating will be required.

 

  1. 1991:   (a)       It has more heat energy than water at the same temperature.

(b) (i) At 60%, Q = ML = 0.03 x 3.36 x 105

At 100% power = 93.3 V or

P = E= 0.03 x 3.36 x 105

T                100

= 56W

(ii)             100% energy = 100 x 10080

60

= 16,800J

\40 x 16,800 = 6,720J

= 60J

(c) (i) 1/5g alcohol gives 5.4 x 103J

4/5 petrol gives 38.4 x 103J

1g mixture gives (5.4 x 103 J) + (38.4 x 103J)

(ii) Work done= Mgh = 1000 x 20x 10

1,000 x 20 x 10 x 100 = 1.14 x 102g

43.8 x 103            40

OR Energy output x 100 = 40%

Energy input

Energy output = 2 x 106J

Energy input = 100 x 2 x 106J

40
Mass = 100/40 x 2x 106

43.3 x 103

(d)       PE→ Heat energy

Heat → Kinetic Lost

  1. 2002:   Heat gained = Heat Lost

MC∆ θ= Vlt

2 x C x 10 = 90 x 15 x 60

C = 9 x 15 x 60 = 4050 Jkg-1K K-1

20

  1. 2004:   – Increased Pressure

– Impurities

 

  1. 2003:
  • Specific Latent Heat of vaporization is the quantity of heat required to change 1kg of liquid at 1s boiling point completely to vapour at constant temperature.
  • (i) (I)        123 – 120 = 3g or 0.003 kg

(II)       Heat for water                         Heat calorimeter

0.070 x 4,200                          0.05 x 390

x 25                                         x 25

= 7,350J                                  = 487.5J

Total = 487.5 + 7,350 = 7,837.5J

 

(ii)       I.          ML + MC∆ θ = 7837.5

  1. 0.003L + 0.003 x 4200 x 70 = 7837.5

0.003L + 882 = 7837.5

L= 2.3185 x 106

Or        L= 2.32 x 106J/kg

 

  1. p x t = MC ∆ θ

2.5 x 1000t = 3 x 4200 x 50

T= 252s

= 4.2 min

  1. 2004:   Decrease in V increases I hence the heating rate increase (P= 12R)
  2. (a)       Current, time, mass of water formed

(b)       Power x time = MLf.

Power = m x Lf

Time

(c)       Energy lost is not accounted for

e.g energy absorbed by heater, container and radiation.

  1. BC- Liquid boiling at constant temp (at boiling pt)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. 2007: Pressure impurities
  2. 2007
  • Quantity of heat required to change completely into vapour 1kg of a substance at its normal boiling without change of temperature.
  • (i) So that it vaporizes readily/ easily

(ii)       In the freezing compartment the pressure in the volatile liquid is lowered suddenly by increasing the diameter of the tube causing  vaporization; in the cooling  finns, the pressure is increased by the compression pump and heat lost to the  outside causing  condensation.

(iii)      When the volatile liquid evaporates, it takes away heat of vaporization from the freezing compartment; reducing the temperature of the later; this heat is carried away and dissipated at the cooling finns where the vapour is compressed to condensation giving up heat of vaporization.

(iv)      Reduces rate of heat transfer to or from outside (insulates)

(c)       (i)        Heat lost by steam = 0.003 x 2.26 x 10b

Heat lost by steam water = 0.003 x 4200 (100- T)

= 6780 + 126 (100-T)

(ii)       Heat gained by water = MC θ

= 0.4 x 4200 (T- 10)

(iii)      Heat lost = heat gained

1680 (T- 10) – 6780 + 12.6 (100- T)

1680T – 16800 = 6780 + 1260 – 12.6T

  1. 7g
  2. 1167s
  3. 875 J/kgK
  4. 32.51g
  5. 84000 J/s, 2.8g
  6. 57.50C
  7. 3120J
  8. 180 J/kgK

 

 

  1. GAS LAWS
  1. 1989: (a) (i)        Plot the graph (straight line)

(ii)       From PV = k, since P = const.

T

V= Const x T

Or        y =mx

Where the constant = gradient of the graph

(b)       P1V1 = P2V2

But P2 = 1/3 P1

\V2 = P1 x V1 =   P1 x 10 = 30cm3

P2           1/3 P1

  1. 1989:

P1 = P2

T1    T2

\P2 = P1 T2          = 740 x 290

T1                     310

= 692.3 mm Hg

  1. 1990:
    • Obtain reciprocal values for L

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Raise or lower the open end and record corresponding values of pressure (dgh) against length of trapped air L (it represents volume)

Plot a graph of pressure against reciprocal values of length.

 

  1. (A) (i) Directly proportional since X- sec is uniform.

(ii) Area of x- section is assumed to be constant

(iii) Pressure above atmospheric pressure

(B) (i) Pressure is below atmospheric value

(ii) Plot the graph (straight line)

(iii) Plot = K x 1/V

 

 

    • A short pallet of mercury/ concentrated sulphuric acid is introduced into the glass tube. As the temperature of air in the tube rises, it expands and pushes the mercury index further up the tube. The volume of air can be got from the length up to the level of the mercury index and temperature from the thermometer. The mercury thread is always at the same length so the total pressure in the tube remains constant. Plotting a graph of volume against temperature gives straight line which when extrapolated cuts the temperature axis at approximately 2730
    • V1 = V2

T1    T2

V2 = 20 x 327

300

= 21.8cm3

  • For a fixed mass of gas, pressure is inversely proportional to volume if temperature is kept constant.

P a €       1      

Volume

a                  1                 or                 density

Mass/ density                           mass

Pa €Density

  1. (a) Charle’s Law – For a fixed mass of gas at constant  pressure the volume is

directly proportional to the absolute temperature.

 

(b) (i)

–           Volume of gas is trapped by a drop of H2SO4. Water is heated and the gas is heated in a water bath.

–           Volume / height of gas in tube is increased as the temperature rises

–           Value of height, h, and temperature T are tabulated.

–           A graph of volume V against temperature T is plotted

–           A straight line graph cutting temperature axis at 2730C is obtained.

–           Therefore volume is directly proportional to the absolute temperature.

(ii)       Limitations

  • Short temperature range
  • Keeping pressure constant is difficult

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. B, Hydrogen is higher than oxygen hence moves faster, molecules collide more frequently with walls of container causing pressure to be more.
  2. (a) –   Heating of water/gas
  • Recording values of temperature, pressure at intervals of different values
  • Conversion of temperature to kelvin
  • Plot a graph of temperature against absolute temperature or find the values of P/T = K
  • Straight line graph obtained

(b)  (i)

C is the intercept and C=O

K is the gradient given by

15.2 104 – 4 x 104

400 – 105

 

11.2 x 103 = 380 + 10

295

(ii)       The gas would liquify

 

(c) C= 270C= 300K

3270C = 600K

 

P1 = P2 = 2.1 x 105 = P2

T1    T2        300         600

 

P2 = 4.2 x 105 p.a

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. 2004: V1 = V2

T1     T2

V2 =T2 x V1

T1

 

= 353 x 200 ml

293

= 241 ml

  1. 2007: Kelvin (K)
  2. 2007 The pressure of a fixed mass of gas is directly proportional to its

absolute (Kelvin) temperature provided the volume is kept constant.

P a T at constant volume

  1. 1416 cm3
  2. 0022m3
  3. 25m
  4. qa 0.08m
  5. b 75N

 

 

 

FORM FOUR

  1. THIN LENSES
  1. (i) Short sightedness (myopia)

(ii) Concave lens (diverging lens)

  1. (a) Arrange the apparatus as  shown  below

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Adjust the position of the search pin until there is no parallax. Measure A and R

Refractive index         =          Real depth       =          R

Apparent depth           A

(b) (i) u = 15cm, f = 10cm

I + I = I

u   v    f

 

I = II = 1

v  10  15  30

\v= 30 cm

(ii)

 

 

 

 

 

 

– Now for the diverging lens, V= -15cm since the image is vertical

\I = -1 + 1 (note that for concave is –ve)

v   37.5 15

V= 25 cm

(c) (i)  Draw rays to form 1st image due to L1. This image will be treated as the object for L2.  Use lines (Not rays to obtain the position of the final image I2 then complete the rays as shown below.

 

 

 

 

 

 

(ii)       Measure height of I2 and divide by height of object

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. 2004:   Place candle at a distance as shown below

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • Adjust until a sharp image is formed
  • Measure U and V and record
  • Repeat this procedure for other values of u
  • For each set of values find using 1/f = 1/u + 1/v
  • Calculate the average value

(b)    Draw one ray from top of object straight through the optical centre of the lens a

– Draw another ray parallel to the principal axis which should pass through principal axis after refraction

–  Where they meet, draw the image.

(c)          Short sightedness

 

 

 

 

 

(a)       (i)

 

 

 

 

 

(ii)

 

 

 

 

(b)       (i)        A-Diaphragm

B-Film

(ii)       The distance between the lens is adjusted so that the image is formed on the film

(iii)      Shutter- Opens for some given time to alloy rays from the object to fall on the film creating the image impression.

A         (Diaphragm) controls intensity of light entering the camera

B         (Film) – coated with light sensitive components which react with light to create the impression

(c)       (i)        Magnification = V = 3

U

Since v + u = 80

U = 80 – v

   V      = 3

80 – v

V= 240 – 3v

V= 60 cm

(ii)       From above u = 20cm

I = I + I + I + I

F   v   u    60  20

  1. f= 15cm
  2. f= 14.3cm
  3. Given information
  4. u= 16cm

f = 12cm

Applying l = l + l

f    u   v

then I = l + l

v    f    u

= 11

12   V16

= l = 4 -3         = 1

V    48            48

Hence distance = 48

(ii)       Nature: image is real

  • Inverted
  • 48 cm from the lens
  • Magnified

(iii)      Magnification, m= v = 48 cm = 3

u    16 cm

  1. Solution

Given information

V= -6 cm

U = + 15cm

Applying I = I + I

F   u    v

= II

15  6

2-5

30

I = -3 = -1

F   30   10

F= -10

F= 10 cm

  1. Solution

P= I

F

P = 1/10 = 1/10/100 m

 

= 1¸10/100 m

 

= 1 x 100/10

Power = 10 dioptre (D)

Similarity Differences
– Both have converging lens

– In the eye, retina act as the

screen while  in the camera a

light sensitive  film act as one

– Focal length of the eye lens is

variable while that of the camera

is fixed.

 

 

  1. UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
  1. When tension is max then r= l

T= F = Mv2

r

2 = 0.1 x V2

1.25

\V2 = 2 x 1.25

0.1

V= 5m/s

 

  1. (a) (i) & (ii)

 

 

 

 

(b)             (i)        S= Ut + ½ at2

 

t = €√ (2 x 5)

10

= 1 seconds

 

(ii)       S = Ut = 30 x 1 = 30m

 

(iii)      V2 = U2 + 2as

V= √(2 x 10 x 5)

= 10m

 

  1.             Principal of conical pendulum Or principle of circular motion

 

  1. V= wr

 

But w = θ = 2 p x 7 = 14 rads -1

T         1

 

\ V= 14 px 0.20

= 8.8 m/s

 

  1. Centripetal acceleration of bucket is equal or higher than gravitational acceleration of the water.
  2.             (a)       Keep angular velocity ω1 constant; Centripetal force provided by

mg; Fix the mass m and measure r; repeat for different values of m. Tabulate the values

(b)       Force- Mg. Calculate and fill a column for force and another for radius in m

Plot the graph

(ii)       Gradient of the graph

= 0.625 – 0.1 = 1.167 N 1m

0.525 – 0.075

Force F, on the body = mb w2r

Where mb = mass of the body

Mb w2 = Gradient of the graph = 1.167

 

W2 = 1.167 = 11.67

0.1

W= €√11. 67

= 3.42 rads-1

  1. 2pf = 2p x 8

a = rw2 = 0.2 (16p)2

                    = 505.3 m/s

  1. (a)       Angular displacement per second.

(b)       In 13s, angle turned = 300-170 = 130 rad

\ w=   θ = 130 = 10rads-1

t      13

So        300      = 10

t+13

10t + 130 = 300

10t = 170

t = 17 sec

(c)       (i)        Plot the graph which is a straight line.

(ii)       From T = (mr)w2 – C and y = mx + c

Y = T, grad = mr, y = intercept = -C

\ Obtain gradient and equate it to mr.

Where r = 0.3m, to obtain m.

(iii)      The y-intercept should be equated to, -C.

  1. (a)       Pe → Ke

\ mgh = ½ mv2

Or        V2 = 2gh.

V = √(2x10x0.9)

V = √18 = 1.24m/s

(b)       F = mg + Mv2

= 200 + 20 x 18

4

= 290N

(a)      Acceleration directed towards the centre of the orbit.

(b)       (i)        Roughness/smoothness of surface, radius of path, angular

velocity/speed.

  1. 10m/s
  2. 1.59 rev.s-1
  3. 0.61 rev.s-1
  4. 6.32N
  5. 1744N
  6. 0.41 m/s
  7. 30N

 

  1. FLOATING AND SINKING.
  2. Place it in the acid and read at the level of the acid surface. In a fully

charged car battery, should read 1.25.

  1. Volume of glass = Volume of water displaced

= (0.2 ¸ 103) kg

g

Mass of glass = 0.5

g

Density of glass = m

v

=          0.5 ¸ 0.2 x 1

g        g     103

=          2.5 x 103 kg/m3

=          2500 kg/m3

  1. Volume of the object = Volume of water displaced

Density of object =    Mass   = 120   = 3g/cm3

Volume   40

  1. Mass of paraffin = Mass of solid = vol x dens

= 5.5 x 0.8 = 4.4g

\ Density of solid = Mass    = 4.4    = 0.22g/cm3

Vol          20

  1. Metal is denser than water. Metal and the piece of wood have a general

density (combined density) less than that of water and floats just below the surface.

  1.             (i)        Lower surface of solid

P = gh

Force = P x A = gh x A

= 800 x 10 x 0.5 x 4 x 10-4

= 0.96N

Upper surface of solid.

Force = P x A = gh x A

= 800 x 10 x 0.1 x 4 x 10-4

= 0.32N

(ii)       Upthrust = 0.96 – 0.32 = 0.6N

Weight of the solid     = Density x Volume x g

= 2.7 x 103 x 0.2 x 104 x 4 x 10

= 2.16

Balance reading          = 2.16 – 0.64

= 1.52N

  1. Solid copper is denser than water hence the solid sphere sinks, weight is greater than upthrust. Hollow sphere experiences an upthrust equal ti its weight so it will float/density of hollow sphere is less than that of water i.e. volume of water displaced is a lot more than the weight of the sphere.
  2.             (i)        Clockwise moments = Anticlockwise moment.

2.0g x = 1.5g x 30

2x = 45                          x = 22.5cm

(ii)       Down force:    M x 22.5

= 20 x 1.5

M = 30/22.5 = 1.33Kg

Upthrust = 0.67Kg.

Therefore weight of water displaced = 6.7N

  1.             Weight of block = Weight of mercury displaced or law of floatation.

0.250 Kg = V x 13.6 x 103

V =      0.25     =          1.838 x 10-5m3 = 18.38m3

13.6 x 103

  1. The cube moves into the water, motion being opposed by liquid friction and increasing upthrust motion stops when the whole of the cube is completely under water.
  • A floating body displaces its own weight of the liquid on which it floats.
  •           (i)        To enable the hydrogen float upright.

(ii)       Float hydrometer on water and on liquid of known density in turn and mark levels/divide proportionally and extend on either side.

  •           (i)        Tension, upthrust, weight.

(ii)       As water is added, upthrust tension increases weight remains unchanged as water is added.

  1. 296N
  2. 14.52 kg
  3. 1000 Kg
  4. 0.969g/cm3
  5. 17cm
  6. (a) 0.56N

(b) 70cm3

(c) 0.7143g/cm3

(d) It would move up until it displaces its own weight.

  1. 5N
  2. 3.33g
  3. 22.5cm3, 8g/cm3

 

 

  1. ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM (EMS)
  1. Using a photocell/a fluorescent screen; photographic plate; also paper

smeared with Vaseline or quinine sulphur.

  1. Gamma rays, Ultraviolet, Infrared, Radio waves.
  2. Ultra violets rays, X-rays, Gamma rays.
  3. v = f x wavelength.

= v = 3.0 x 10ms-1

f    95.6 x 106s-1

= 3.14 m

  1. (i)        Killing germs, vitamin D synthesis, fluorescent

lamps/screen/signboard, vehicle reflectors, paints etc.

(ii)       Infrared radiation.

(iii)      Radio receiver.

  1. Radio waves, Infrared, Visible light, U-V radiation, X-rays.
  2. X-rays are produced from changes in energy from electron jumps in the

shells of an atom while gamma rays are produced from energy changes in the nucleus of atoms.

  1. (i) Scintillation tube, Geiger muller tube etc.

(ii)      Fluorescent materials, paper smeared with Vaseline etc.

(iii)     Eye, photometer.

(iv)     Skin, blackened thermometer etc.

  1. Warmth sensation, cooking, drying clothes etc.
  2. – They cause fluorescent.

–          They all travel at 3 x 10-8m/s.

–          They are part of em-spectrum and can travel through vacuum.

–          Transverse

  1. Electron jumps/ energy changes in electron structure of atoms.
  2. Energy changes in the nucleus of atoms.
  3. – They all travel at 3 x 10-8m/s.

–          All transverse.

–          Can be plane polarized.

–          They can travel through vacuum.

  1. (a) Radio waves, infrared, visible light, U-V radiation, X-rays.

(b)      Microwaves are used in cooking.

(c)      Ultraviolet are used in fluorescent paints.

  1. X-rays.
  2. (i) Radio waves

(ii)      Visible light.

(iii)     X-rays

(iv)     Treatment of cancer (radio therapy), detection of fault in manufacturing industry, sterilization/killing germs.

  1. (a) Cooking

(b)      Drying objects.

 

 

  1. ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION.
  2. (a)       No deflection: no change of magnetic flux cutting across the coil.

(b)       (ii)       The deflection is in the same direction. A south pole is

created to oppose the incoming south. It is the same as north approaching the opposite end.

(c)       Assuming 100% efficiency.

Ns = Ip            but       Is = V = 250 = 2.5A

Np    Is                               R    100

Is = 100 x 205

600

= 4.2A

  1. 1max = √2 x 3

= 4.24 A

  1. (i)        Np = 1000 = 24.4

Ns     450

(ii)       Cooling it, core made of material of low retentivity and it is

laminated, proper winding to reduce magnetic flux loss.

(iii)      Concentrate and reduce loss of magnetic flux.

  1. m.s. = 220

√2

= 155.6V

  1. – Hysteresis loses.

–          Copper loses.

–          Iron loses.

  1. (i)        Ns = 5

Np = 6

(ii)       Is = 6

Ip = 5

  1. (a)       (i)        Len’s law – The induced current flow is a direction such as

to oppose the change producing it.

(ii)       Faraday’s law – Whenever there is change in magnetic flux linked to a coil, a current/e.m.f. is induced whose magnitude is proportional to the rate of change of the flux (refer from A.F. Abbot)

(b)       (i)        Tables per coulombs means voltage and coulomb’s seconds

is current. If at the input V is high and I low then output should have low V and high I so that V1I1 = V0I0.

(ii)       Ns = Vs = Ns = 9v      \ Ns = 18 turns.

Np    Vp   480   240v

  1. Eddy current/self induction.
  2. Lamination the core.
  3. Vs = Ip Ip = Vs x Is =  9    x 30 = 1.125A

Vp    Is                   Vp           240

  1. P = V2 R = 2402 = 23.04W

R                               2500

 

  • The indicated current flows in such a direction that its magnetic effect opposes the change producing it.
  • (i) As the diaphragm vibrates, it causes the coil to move back and

forth in the magnetic field cutting the field lines; this causes a current to be induced in the coil which causes a varying current flow.

(ii)      Increasing number of turns in the coil increasing the strength of the magnet.

  • (i)      Vp = Np

Vs     Ng

400 = 1200

Vs     120

Vs = 40V.

(ii)      Ps = Pp = 600w

Is = 600 = 15A

40

(iii)      Ip = 600 = 1.5A

400

  1. (a) 43V

(b)      0.42A

(c)      18w

  1. (a) 750w

(b)      31.25A

  1. 5 cts
  2. 3 x 106m = 3000km
  3. 6w
  4. 3.60

 

 

  1. MAINS ELECTRICITY.
  1. I = V/R

240    A

500

= 0.48 A

  1. Solar (photo) cell.
  2. Power = Energy used

Time taken

Power = Current x Voltage

\         15000 = 2 x v

10 x 60

\         V =      15000 =   150

2 x 10 x 60    12

Voltage across resistor = 12.5V

  1. 2000: P = V2/R

40 = 240 x 240

R

R  = 240 x 240  W

40

= 140W

  1. Current in the heater = P/V = 3000/240 = 12.5A

Fuse not suitable since current exceeds the fuse value.

  1. E = Pt

= 60 x 36 x 60 x 60J

E in Kwh = 60 x 36 x 60 x 60 Kwh

1000 x 60 x 60

= 2.16 kwh

  1. 2002: (No. of irons) x 100 = IV

No. of irons = 13 x 240 = 3.12

1000

= 3

  1. Maximum power = VI

= (240 x 13)w

No. of 75w bulbs = 240/75 x 13

= 3120

= 41.6

Maximum number bulbs = 41

  1. of kwh = 1500kw/1000 x 30 Kwh

 

= 45Kwh

Cost     = Kshs. (45 x 8)

= Kshs. 360/=

R1 = V2/P,        R2 = V2/8P

R1 = V2 x 8p =8

R2     p     V2

  1. Current flowing through a conductor is directly proportional to potential difference across its ends provided temperature and other physical quantities remain constant.
  2. of Kwh = (1.5 x 24)Kwh

= 36Kwh

Cost = No. of Kwh x price per Kwh

= (36 x 1) = 36Kwh.

  1. (a) When a fault occurs on an electrical appliances damage will still be done

since current flows through the “live”

(b)       There are different circuits and each carries a different amount of current.

  1. Power = current x voltage.

= (0.5 x 250)W

= Kshs. 125W

  1. Energy dissipated in 6hrs = (2.5 x 6)Kwh

Cost = Kshs. (15 x 1.10)

= Kshs. 16.50

 

  1. CATHODE RAYS AND CATHODE RAY TUBE
  1. 1990: Photon – particle of light energy.

Quantum – Packet of energy.

  1. Ultra violet has a higher energy than yellow light.
  2. E = hf = hc

λ

λ = 6.63 x 10-34 x 3 x 108

5 x 10-19

Λ = 3.978 x 10-7

  1. Low negative voltage is applied on control grid, which controls the number of electrons reaching the screen.
  2. 1998: (i)        In Tv (CRT) deflection is by magnetic field while in CRO

deflection is by electric field

(ii)       CRO forms a spot on screen, CRT forms an image.

(iii)      CRO displays waves while CRT displays pictures.

(a)      (i)        A – Grid

B – Filament

(ii)       Filament heats cathode electron boil off cathode (theremionic emission)

(iii)      Accelerating

Focusing.

(iv)      Across X-plates.

(v)       to reduce collision with air molecules that could lead to

ionization.

(b)       (i)        Height = 4cm

Peak value = 4 x 5 = 20V

(ii)       2 wavelength = 16cm

T = 8 x 20 x 10-3

= 0.16s

F = 1 =   1         = 6.25Hz

T    0.16

(iii)

 

 

 

 

 

No answers for question 1& 2

  1. Low negative voltage is applied on control grid, which control the number of electrons reaching the screen.
  2. (i) Electron gun – produces direct electrons.

(ii)      Deflecting system – deflecting the beam to necessitate the study of external circuit.

(iii)     Fluorescent screen – to display the pattern being studied.

 

  1. X-RAYS
  2. (a)     (i)        Heater current or Filament current

(ii)       Anode Potential or operating potential

(iii)      Covering with protective materials where X- rays are not

required

  • Minimize exposure time as much as possible
  • Reduce no of exposures as much as possible

(b)       (i)        ½ MeV2 = eV

V= €√ (2eV)

Me

= √ 2 x 1.76 x 109 x 20 x 103

= 6.39 x 107 m/s

(ii)       KE- Heat or internal energy and energy of x- rays or radiation.

 

  1. X- rays have wavelengths of the  order of the lattice  spacing; and

therefore they can be diffracted; (Diffraction due to short wavelengths of x- rays). In calculation the atomic separation is equal to slit separation- or grating separation. Lead because it is very dense, has high atomic mass.

  1. (a)       (i)        Increase the filament current

(ii)       Increase the anode potential

(b)       Q= it = 15 x 10-3 A x is = 15 x 10-3C

Electron charge = 1.6 x 10-19 C

No. of electrons in 15 x 10-3C

= 15 x 10-3 = 9.38 x 1016 e/s

1.6 x 10-19

(c)       ½ mv2 = ev

V= √ 2eV

Me

(2 x 1.6 x 10-19 x 10 x 103) ½

9.1 x 10-31

                                                            = 5.9 x 107 m/s

(d)       –           Detecting flows/ fault in metals or other structures

–           Quality control of manufactured items e.g. tyres, thickness

of sheets, Paper.

–           Analysis of gem stones

  1. Highly penetrating in matter
  2. Hard X- rays are more penetrating than soft X- rays due to their higher

frequency.

  1. (a) 6 x 10-13

(b)      2.424 x 1020Hz

  1. (a) 35 x 10-11m

(b)      36,875V

(c)      1.3 x 1016 m/s

  1. 1 x 10-11m.
  2. The fins are used to cool the copper rod which conducts heat away from the target when electrons hit the target
  3. E on input = e.v

= 1.6 x 10-19 C x 1 x 104V

= 1.6 x 10 – 15 Houles

Energy of x- rays is hf

Where f=     c

λ mm

 

 hc = 1.6 x 10-15 Joules

λ mm

 

λ mm = 6.6 x 10-34 x 3 x 108

1.6 x 10­-15

 

λ mm = 1.24 x 10-10m

 

  1. Hard x- rays produced higher EHT results in faster electrons hence higher energy x- rays.

 

 

  1. PHOTOELECTRIC EFFECT
  1. Energy (incoming) = hf = 6.6 x 10-34 x 5.5 x 1014

= 3.63 x 10-19 J

= 3.63 x 10-19 = 2.27 eV

1.6 x 10-19

This energy is less than work function hence no photoelectric emission.

 

  1. θ = E = hf Û f = E = 8.0 x 10-18

h    3.34 x 10-34

(8.0 + 3.2) x 10-19 = 3.34 x 10 f

f= 3.35 x 1015

 

λ= 3.0 x 108 = 2.08 x 10-7

3.35 x 1015

hf = hfo + ½ mv2

 

= c = 3.0 x 108 x 6.64 x  10-34

f                  11.2 x 10-19

= 1.76 x 10-7m

  1. Higher photocurrents or more photoelectrons  produced.

(i)       Reduce/ prevent collisions of electrons with air molecules and hence increase current

(ii)       Control/ limit current, lowers current

  • The energy of the radiation must be greater than the work function of the emitting surface.
  • Current flows when uv falls on the cathode; interruption of the uv beam cuts off the circuit: use with relay to switch on a second circuit with alarm.
  1.             Electrons ejected from inside the metal lose more energy on the way out

while those on the surface require very little work function to be removed.

  1.             (i)

 

 

 

 

 

(ii)       Work function is given by = hfo

fo is the x- intercept in the graph fo (from graph)

= 1.2 x 1015 F= 6. 63 x 10-34 js x 1.2 x 1015

= 7.95 x 10-19

  1.             Solar cell (photovoltaic); Photocell/ photo electric cell
  2.             (i)        Photo – electric effect takes place releasing the extra electrons.

(ii)       The electrons released are attracted back by the positive charge.

  1. hf0 = 3.2 x 1.6 x 10-19J

f0 = 7.76 x 1014Hz

  1. 2007: PP2

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • The higher the intensity
  • Implies greater number of electrons and hence
  • Higher saturation current
  1. (a) 2.83 x 10-19J

(b) 4.95 x 10-19J

  1.  (a) 3.37 x 10-19J

(b) 2.37 x 10-20J

  1.  (a) 3.56 x 10-19J

(b) 2.84 x 10 -19J

(c) 9.7 x 1014Hz

  1. This is the minimum amount of work required to free an electron from a metal surface
  2. No = hf0

\f0 =  w0

h

= 2.0 x 1.6 x 10-19 Hz

6.63 x 10-34

= 4.85 x 1014 Hz                     λ o = V/f

= 3.0 x 108 ms-1 Hz

4.85 x 1014s-1                                    = 6.2 x 10-7

  1. eV = ½ meV2

V2 =     2ev

Me

V=  2ev                       =     2 x 1.6 x 10-19 x 500

Me                                      9 x 10-31

= 1.3 x 107 ms-1

 

  1. RADIOACTIVITY
  1.             (a)       Radioactive Decay – spontaneous disintegration of the molecules

and atom or emission of or a or β accompanied by release of energy and readjustment of the nuclide.

Isotope: Is a nuclide, which has same no. of proton but different atomic mass, same atomic number but different mass number, same chemical behavior but different properties.

(ii)       -When an alpha or beta particle or gamma ray enters the tube through the mica window, they ionize the gas inside the tube.

-The electrons produced are accelerated by the central electrode and in turn they produce more electrons by collision.

-This avalanche of electrons forms a pulse of current, which, after amplification, is used to operate a rate meter or counter.

-If a small loud speaker is connected a click will be heard every time a particle or gamma photon enters the tube.

(b) (i) Medicine: Deep penetrating gamma rays are used in the treatment of cancerous growth.

(ii) Agriculture: To determine the age of plant material and the movement of minerals implants.

 

  1.             (i)

Time (hrs)       576                  1152                1728                2304

Mass (mg)      640                  320                  160                  80

 

(ii) It will be zero

  1.             -Dosage

-Type of radiation

-Penetrating power

-Part of body exposed

  1. :           235 – 92 = 143 Neutrons
  2.             -Mass of that radioactive material

-Time taken to reduce to half

  1.             a Particles doubly charged and attracted electrons more.

a More massive i.e more momentum and not easily deflected

 

  1. 14        X         0

C  →   N   +    B

6          7          y

14 = x + 0 thus x = 14

6 = 7 + y thus y = -1

14                    14        40

C     =            N + e

6                      7          -1

  1. :           a- particles doubly charged and attract electrons more.

a more massive  i/e  more momentum and not easily deflected.

 

  1.  After 3s number decayed

½ x 5.12 x 1020 = 2. 56 x 1020

Next 3s number decayed

= ½ x 5.12 x 1020 = 2.56 x 1020

\€ Total number decayed

= (1.28 + 2.56) x 1020

= 3.84 x 1020

 

  1. No of T½ = 4

Thus fraction = (1/2)4 = 1/16

 

  1. : Number of neutrons  = 107 – 32  = 65

 

  1.             (a)       (i)        Beta particle (β – particle)

(ii)       A force is to the center of the circle implying negatively charged (Fleming’s L HR (etc)

(b)       (i)        Alpha particle ( particle)

(ii)       X- 88

Y – 228

 

(c)       (i)        Increase in thickness

(ii)       Increase in thickness reduces the number of radiations reaching the Geiger tube.

(iii)      Increase roller pressure

(iv)      Increase in roller pressure squeezes/ presses/ compresses metal sheet more reducing thickness of the foil coming out of them.

(v)       Alpha particles have low penetration power and so will not pass/ very few will pass though sheet.

(vi)      If a half life is short, decay rate reduces very fast with time and so this sudden change may be mistaken a shaving resulted from increase in thickness  OR would  be detecting as change in  thickness of foil, so longer half- life is more suitable

a= 234

b= 82

 

  1. (a)       23/9 X → 8 (8/2 a) + 10 (4/1 β) + Y

 

(b)       (i)        Gamma rays- not charges

(ii)       Alpha particles: mass number decreases by 4 and atomic number

decreases by 2

(iii)      Beta particles: easily deflected because they are light and carries

little charge.

 

  1. The substance takes 57 days to reduce its remaining mass by half.

 

  1. (i)        Alpha particles are weak in penetrating solid. So it has to be thin to

allow enough alpha particles to enter for ionization to take place.

 

(ii)       It causes ionization of the gas inside. The +ve ions move to the –ve plate and –ve ions move to the +ve terminal. This causes a flow of charge which is amplified and then fed to the counter.

(iii)      It controls the extent of ionization without causing avalanche flow of charge.

 

  1.  24       24        0

Na → Y  +    e

11       12        -1

  1. Year                            Amount

0                                  5

5                                  2.5

10                                1.25

15                                0.625

The mass will be 0.625g

 

 

  1. ELECTRONICS

 

 

 

If it doesn’t conduct at all or it gives equal deflections when reversed, then it is spoiled.  It should give deflection when connected in one way and not the other.

  1. (a)       (i)        Semi- conductor-  conducting is  by holes

Conductors- Conducting is by electrons.

(ii)       Semi conductors – silicon

Conductor – copper, tin, iron

 

 

 

 

Connect diode and check whether current flows reverse terminals of diode and check again.

 

  1. (i)        Introducing group III or V ( impurities to group 4 elements to improve

their  conduction

(ii)       The group V elements form covalent bonds with the semiconductor atoms using 4 electrons each. Thus an electron is left free for conduction.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. (i)        Semiconductors are from group 4 while conductors are from group 1,2 or
  1. Semiconductors poor conductors at low temp and improves conduction as temp increases. The conductors are good conductors at low temp and increases resistance with increase in temp.

(ii)       Semi- conductors- Germanium, silicon

Conductor – copper, silver, aluminum, etc.

  1. Positive holes
  2. (i)        It means introduction of impurities to a semi conductor

(ii)       Atom 25 doping has 5 valence electrons

Doper atom has 5 valence electrons (pent valence) Extra electrons unpaired and is available for conduction. n- type because the majority carriers are electrons.

  • Diode is forward – biased: current flows
  • Diode- reverse- biased; no current flows.
  1. Is the atom introduced into the semiconductor (doping) to provide an extra electron for conduction
  2. :

 

 

 

 

  1. No answer
  2. Intrinsic semiconductors are pure materials which conduct electricity under suitable conditions like increase in temperature.

Extrinsic semiconductors are materials that have been fitted with impurities.

  1. (i)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(ii)

 

 

 

 

 

 

PHYSICS K.C.SE. YEAR 2008

PAPER 1

SECTION A (25 MARKS)

Answer all the questions in this section in the spaces provided.

  1. A drug manufacturer gives the mass of the active ingredient in a tablet as 5 mg.

Express this quantity in kilogramme and in standard form.                         (1mk)

 

  1. The masses of equal volumes of a certain liquid and of water were found to be mv and mw respectively. Given that the density of water is 1gcm-3, express the density, p, of the liquid in terms of mv  mw (show your work)                       (2mks)

 

  1. Fig. 1 shows a brick placed on a plane inclined at an angle q to the horizontal. The weight, W, of the brick is shown.

 

 

 

 

  1. a) On the same diagram show with arrows the other two forces acting on the brick and name them. (1mk)
  2. b) State how each of the two forces named (a) above is affected when the angle q is reduced. (1mk)

 

  1. Water is known to boil at 1000C. A student heated some water and noticed that it boiled at 1010C.

State two possible reasons for this observation.                                           (2mks)

 

  1. Fig: 2 shows a flask filled with water. The flask is fitted with a cork through which a tube is inserted.  When the flask is cooled, the water level rises slightly, then falls steadily.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Explain observation.                                                                          (3mks)

 

 

 

 

  1. Fig. 3 shows a hot water bath with metal rods inserted through one of its sides.  Some wax is fixed at the end of each rod. Use this information to answer questions 6 and 7.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

What property of metals could be tested using this set-up?             (1mk)

 

  1. Besides the length of the rods that is kept constant, what else should be kept constant when comparing the property for the different metal rods?             (1mk)

 

  1. Fig. 4 shows a conical flask 15cm high, filled with a liquid of density 1200kgm-3. The atmospheric pressure of the surrounding is 8.4 x 104 Pa.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the pressure at the point marked X, at the bottom of the flask.  (3mks)

 

  1. Explaining the difference between a liquid and a gas in terms of intermolecular distances and forces. (2mks)

 

 

  1. Fig. 5 shows a toy resting on top of a closed bottle. Use the information on the figure to answer questions 10 and 11.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Mark on the diagram, point Q, the approximate centre of gravity of the toy.

(1mk)

  1. Giving a reason, name the state of equilibrium of the toy. (2mks)

 

  1. Fig. 6 shows a sheet of paper rolled into a tube.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

When a fast stream of air is blown into the tube as shown in the diagram the paper tube collapses. Explain the observation.                                           (2mks)

 

 

  1. The graphs in Fig. 7 represent the relations between extension e and mass m added on two springs x and y.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Given that the two springs are made of same materials, give a reason why the graphs are different.                                                                           (1mk)

 

  1. The system in Fig. 8 is in equilibrium

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

When the temperature of the water is raised the system is observed to tilt to the right, state the reason for this observation.                                       (2mks)

 

 

 

 

SECTION B (55 MARKS)

Answer all questions in this section in the spaces provided.

  1. a) State Newton’s second law of motion.                                 (1mk)
  2. b) A matatu starts from rest and accelerates to cover a distance of 49m in 7 seconds.

Determine

(i)        Its acceleration;                                                          (3mks)

(ii)       Its velocity, after 7seconds                                        (2mks)

  1. c) A trolley moving on a horizontal bench of height 1.2m, strikes a barrier at the edge of the bench. The brass mass on the top of the trolley flies off on impact and lands on the ground 2.5m from the edge of the bench.

Determine:

(i)        The time taken by the brass mass to reach the ground;        (2mks)

(ii)       The speed at which the trolley struck the barrier.                 (2mks)

 

  1. a) Define the term heat capacity.                                               (1mk)
  2. b) You are provided with the apparatus shown in Fig. 9 and a stop watch.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Describe an experiment to determine the specific latent heat of steam, l, using the set up.  In your answer clearly explain the measurements to be made and how these measurements could be used to determine l.   (6mks)

  1. c) A block of metal of mass 150g at 1000C is dropped into a lagged calorimeter of heat capacity 40JK-1 containing 100g of water at 250 The temperature of the resulting mixture is 340C. (Specific heat capacity of water=4200JK-1).

                    Determine:

(i)        Heat gained by calorimeter;                                                   (2mks)

(ii)       Heat gained by water;                                                            (1mk)

(iii)      Heat lost by the metal block;                                                 (1mk)

(iv)      Specific heat capacity of the metal block                              (3mks)

 

  1. a) What is meant by absolute zero temperature?                                  (1mk)

 

Fig. 10 shows a set up to investigate the relationship between temperature and volume for a certain gas.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) State two factors that are kept constant, in order to determine the relationship. (2mks)
  2. c) The graph in Fig. 11 shows the relationship between volume and temperature for the experiment.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i)        What was the volume of the gas at 00C?                               (1mk)

 

(ii)       At what temperature would the volume of the gas be zero? (1mk)

 

(iii)      Explain why the temperature in part (ii) above cannot be achieved.

(2mks)

 

  1. d) A sealed gas cylinder contains 300cm3 of certain gas at a temperature of 250C, and at a pressure of 9.5x 104 the gas in the cylinder was then cooled to 100C.

 

Determine the new pressure of the gas in the cylinder.                    (4mks)

 

 

  1. (a) Define the term velocity ratio of a machine.                                     (1mk)

(b)       Fig. 12 shows part of a hydraulic press. The plunger is the position where effort is applied while the Ram piston is the position where load is applied.  The plunger has cross-section area, a m2 while the Ram piston has cross-section area, a m2.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

When the plunger moves down a distance d the Ram piston moves up a distance D.

(i)        State the property of liquid pressure on which the working of the hydraulic press works.                                                           (1mk)

(ii)       Derive an impression for the velocity ratio (V.R) in terms of A and a.                                                                                                (4mks)

  1. c) A machine of velocity ratio 45, overcomes a load of 4.5 x 103N when an effort of 135N is applied.

Determine:

(i)        The mechanical advantage of the machine;                          (2mks)

(ii)       Efficiency of the machine;                                                     (2mks)

(iii)      The percentage of the work that goes to waste.                     (1mk)

 

19        a)         State the principle of moments.                                             (1mk)

  1. b) A uniform metal strip is 3.0cm wide, 0.6cm thick d 100cm long. The density of the metal is 2.7 g/cm

(i)       Determine the weight of the strip.                                         (3mks)

The strip placed n a pivot and kept in equilibrium by forces as shown in fig. 13

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(ii)       Determine the value of F and R                                             (3mks)

 

 

 

(iii)      X is the distance from the end of the plank to the point of application of force F. Force F is now applied at various points nearer to the pivot so that x increases. Equilibrium is maintained all the time.  On the axes provided sketch the relation between force F and x.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(iv)      Give a reason for the answer in (iii) above                                       (1mk)

 

 

 

 

 

 

PHYSICS K.C.S.E YEAR 2008

PAPER 2

SECTION A (25 MARKS)

Answer all the questions in this section in the spaces provided.

  1. Figure 1 shows three point sources of light with an opaque object placed between them and the screen.

 

 

 

 

Explain the nature of the shadow formed along B and C.                 (2mks)

 

  1. A leaf electroscope A is charged and placed on the bench. Another uncharged leaf electroscope B is placed on the same bench and moved close to A until the caps touch. State and explain what is observed on the leaves of A and B.

(2mks)

  1. You are provided with the following;

A cell and holder, a switch, a rheostat, an ammeter, a voltmeter and connecting wires.  Draw a diagram for a circuit that could be used to investigate the variation of the potential difference across the cell with the current drawn from the cell.

(1mk)

  1. An un-magnetized steel rod is clamped facing North-South direction and then hammered repeatedly for some time. When tested, it is found to be magnetized. Explain this observation.                                                                   (2mks)

 

  1. The diagram in figure 2 shows an object O placed in front of a converging lens.  F and F are the principal foci for the lens.

 

 

 

 

The object is now moved along the principal axis until a virtual image is produced.

On the same diagram:

(i)        Draw the object O in the new position along the principal axis;

(ii)       Sketch rays to show formation of the virtual image             (1mk)

 

  1. Figure 3 shows a flat spring made of iron clamped horizontally on the bench over a solenoid.

 

 

 

 

When the switch is closed, the spring vibrates. Explain this observation.   (3mks)

 

  1. Figure 4 shows a hack-saw blade clamped horizontally on a bench and the free end is made to vibrate about the rest position.

 

 

 

 

 

The movement     o            a            0            b              0          a          0          b takes 0.7 seconds.

Determine the frequency of vibration of the blade.                          (2mks)

 

  1. Figure 5 shows wavefronts approaching the boundary between two media.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The speed of the waves in medium (2) is higher than that in medium (1). On the same diagram complete the figure to show the wavefronts after crossing the boundary.                                                                                            (2mks)

 

  1. Figure 6 shows a circuit in which a battery of negligible internal resistance, two resistors, a capacitor, a voltmeter and a switch are connected.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Giving a reason for your answer in each case, state the reading of the voltammeter, V, when the switch is                                                 (2mks)

(i)        Open

V=…………………………………………………………………..

Reason……………………………………………………………..

(ii)       Closed

V=……………………………………………………………….

Reason………………………………………………………….

 

  1. A heating coil is rated 100W, 240V. At what rate would it dissipate energy if it is connected to a 220V supply?                                                                         (3mks)

 

  1. Figure 7 shows how rays from a distant and a near object are focused inside a human eye with a certain defect.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Name the defect and state the cause of this defect.                                       (1mk)

Defect…………………………………………………………………………..

Cause of defect…………………………………………………………………

 

  1. A narrow beam of electrons in a cathode ray oscilloscope (CRO) strike the screen producing a spot. State what is observed on the screen if a low frequency a.c source is connected across the y-input of the CRO                                      (1mk)

 

  1. The accelerating potential of a certain X-ray tube is increased. State the change observed on the X-rays produced. (1mk)

 

  1. A radioactive isotope of copper decays to form an isotope of Zinc as shown below

69                     69

Cu                   Zn + radiation

29                     30                                                                                             (2mks)

Name the radiation emitted and give a reason for your answer

Radiation…………………………………………………………………………

Reason……………………………………………………………………………

 

SECTION B (55 MARKS)

Answer ALL the questions in this section in the spaces provided.

  1. a)         State one factor that affects the speed of sound in a solid.              (1mk)
  2. b) An observer stands half-way between two vertical cliffs that are L metres

apart. He moves directly towards one cliff and after a distance x=10cm from the centre, he strikes a gong and measures the time interval, t, between the echoes heard from the two cliffs. He moves a further 10m and again strikes the gong and measure the time interval between the echoes.  The process is repeated several times.  The graph in Figure 8 shows the relation between the time interval, t and the distance, x from the centre.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i)        From the graph, determine the value of x for which the time interval was 0.55.                                                         (1mk)

(ii)       Given that t= 4/vx where v is the speed of sound in air, determine the value of v from the graph.                                                      (3mks)

(iii)      If the maximum time measured by the observer was t=4.7s, determine the distance L between the cliffs.                         (3mks)

(c)       A search boat uses a signal of frequency 6.0 x 104 Hz to detect a sunken

ship directly below. Two reflected signals are received; one after 0.1 seconds from sunken boat and the other after 0.14 seconds from the sea bed. If the sea bed is 98 m below the boat, determine:-

(i)        The speed of the signal in water.                                           (3mks)

You may use the value of v from (ii) above.

(ii)       The depth of the sunken ship below the boat                        ( 2 mks)

 

  1. (a) State two conditions necessary for total internal reflection to occur

( 2 mks)

(b)       Figure 9 shows a ray of light incident on the boundary between two media

1 and at an angle θ

 

 

 

 

 

 

Show that the refractive index for a ray of light traveling from medium 1

to medium 2 is given by:

M2 1

Sin θ                                                        (2 mks)

  • Figure 10 shows a ray of light incident on one face of a block of ice of refractive index 1. 31 and totally reflected at the adjacent face

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determine

(i)        Angle Φ                                                                      ( 2 mks)

(ii)       Angle x                                                                       ( 1 mk)

  • Angle θ, the greatest angle for which the total internal reflection is possible ( 2 mks)

 

  1. (a) Three resistors of resistance 2.0 W, 4.0 W and 6.0 W are connected together

in a circuit.

Draw a circuit diagram to show the arrangement of the resistor which

Gives

(i)        Effective resistance of 3.0 W                                     ( 1 mk)

(ii)       Minimum resistance                                                  ( 1 mk)

 

  • In figure 11 the voltmeter reads 2.1 V when the switch is open. When the switch is closed, the voltmeter reads 1.8 V and the ammeter reads 0.1A.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determine:

(i)        The e.m.f of the cell                                       ( 1 mk)

(ii)       The internal resistance of the cell                  ( 3 mks)

(iii)      The resistance of the lamp                             ( 2 mks)

 

  1. (a) Figure 12 shows two circuits  close to  each other

 

 

 

 

When the switch is closed, the galvanometer shows a reading and then returns to zero. When the switch is then opened, the galvanometer shows a reading in the opposite direction and then returns to zero. Explain these observations.                                                              ( 3 mks)

 

  • Explain how energy losses in a transformer are reduced by having:

(i)        A soft- iron core                                             ( 2 mks)

(ii)       A laminated core                                            ( 2 mks)

 

  • An ideal transformer has 2000 turns in the primary circuit and 200 turns in the secondary circuit. When the primary circuit is connected to a 400V a.c. source, the power delivered to a resistor in the secondary circuit is found to be 800W. Determine the current in:
    • The secondary circuit
    • The primary circuit
  1. (a) X- rays are used for detecting cracks inside  metal  beams

(i)        State the type of the X- rays used                              ( 1 mk)

(ii)       Give a reason for your answer in (i) above               ( 1 mk)

 

  • Figure 13 shows the features of an X- ray tube

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i)        Name the parts labeled A and B                                ( 2 mks)

A

B

(ii)       Explain how a change in the potential across PQ changes the intensity of

the X- rays produced in the tube.                               ( 2 mks)

(iii)      During the operation of the tube, the target becomes very hot. Explain

how this heat is caused                                               ( 2 mks)

(iv)      What property of lead makes it suitable for use as shielding material?

(1 mk)

  • In a certain X- ray tube, the electrons are accelerated by a Pd of 12000V. Assuming all the energy goes to produce X- rays, determine the frequency of the X- rays produced. (Plank’s constant h= 6.62 x 10-34 Js and charge on an electron, e = 1.6 x 10-19C). ( 4 mks)

 

 

 

ANSWERS TO KCSE PHYSICS 2008

PAPER 1

SECTION A

  1. 0 x 10-6 kg or 5 x 10-6 kg or 5 x 10-6
  2. since P = m/v = m/p

 

For water V = Mw

1

For liquid V = M1

P

Mw = Mv

1        p

\P = Mv

Mw

Relative density =      Mv = Pv

Mw      1

\P =   Mv

Mw

  1. (a)

 

 

 

 

 

(b)       R (reaction) increases while F (Friction) reduces or R approaches W while F reduces

  1. –Atmospheric pressure is higher than normal/ or pressure is higher than normal

atmospheric pressure/ or  boiled below sea  level.

– Presences of impurities in water.

  1. When flask is cooled it contracts/ volume reduces water due to poor conductivity of glass, subsequently as both cool the contraction of glass is less than that of water or that of water is greater than that of glass.
  2. Heat conductivity of rate of (heat) conductivity.
  3. Cross – sectional area or diameter or thickness or radious of the metal rods.
  4. Pressure in liquids = pgh

= 1200 x 10 x 15 x `0-2

= 1800 pa

Total pressure = (8.4 + 0/18) x 104Pa

= 8.58 x 104 Pa

P= PA + hpg

= 8.4 x 104 + 15 x 10-2 x 1200 x 10

= 8.58 x 104 Pa

 

  1. – Intermolecular distances are greater/ larger/ larger in gases than in liquids

– Forces of attraction in liquids are higher/ stronger/ larger / greater than in gases.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. – Stable equilibrium

–           When it is slightly fitted Q or cog rises or when released it reaches or comes to its original position when fitted.

  1. Fast stream of air reduces pressure inside the tube. Pressure from outside is greater than inside hence collapses or pressure differences causes the paper to collapse.
  2. Diameter of the coils is different or wires have different thickness or number of turns per unit length is different or length of the springs is different cross- sectional area of the sires.
  3. Heated water has lower density; hence lower upthrust.
  4. (a) The rate of change of momentum of a body is  (directly) proportional to

the (resultants external) force producing the change and takes  place in the direction of the force.

(b)       (i) S = ut + ½ at2

49 = 0 + ½ a x 72

9= 2 m/s2

 

(ii) 1st = average v x time

 

u+v   t or

2

 

If = 0 + v    x 7

2

= 14m/s

V = u + at Either

= 0 + 2 x 7

= 14m/s

V2 = u2 + 2as

= 0 + 2 x 49

V=   2 x 2 x 49

= 14m/s

(c)       (i) S= ut + ½ at2 Either

1.2 = 0 + ½ x 10 x t2

 

 

t=    1.2/5      = 0.49

V2 = u2 + 2gs

V= u + gt

V2 = 0 + 2 x 10 x 1.2 = 24

V=    24 = 4.899

  • = 0 + 10 x t

t = 0.4899

(ii)       V = s/t = 2.5/ 0.49 = 5.1 m/s

  1. (a) Heat capacity of a body is the energy required to raise the temperature of

the body by degree centigrade/ Celsius or 1 Kelvin.

(b)    –           Measure initial mass of boiling water + calorimeter = Mi

–           Measure final mass of boiling water + calorimeter = mf

–           Time taken to evaporate (mi – mf) to steam = mf

–           Heat given oral by heater = heat of vaporization or heat absorbed by water to change to steam.

Pt = (mi – mf) L

L =          pt    

mi – mf

Alternative

  • Initial mass = mi
  • Final mass = mf
  • Time taken- t

Heat given = heat gained + heat gained + heat of heat by water by calorimeter vaporization.

 

(c)       (i)        Heat capacity x ∆θ

= 40 (34 – 25) = 40 x 9

= 360J

(ii)       MwCw x ∆θ

= 100 x 10­3 x 4.2 x 103 (34 – 25)

= 3.780J

(iii)      = MmCm (100 – 34)

= 0.15cm x 66 = 9.9 cm or

= 360 +   3780

= 4140J

(iv)      = 0.15cm x 66 = 4140

= Cm = 4140/ 0.15 x 66 = 418 Jkg-1K-1

  1. (a) Absolute zero temperature is the lowest temperature (theoretically)

possible or is the temperature, at which volume/ pressure/ kinetic energy or velocity of particles (is assumed to be zero).

(b)       Mass of the gas

Pressure of the gas

(c)       (i)        40 x 10-6 m3 or 4 x 10-5 m3 or 4.0 x 10-5 m3 or 40 cm3

(ii)       277.5 ± 2.5 i.e ( -275 – -280)

(iii)      A real gas liquefies and/or solidifies before the temperature is

reached.

(d)                   P1 V1 = P2 V2

                                                       T1         T2

 

But V1 = V2

P2 = P1 x T2 = 95 x 103 x 283

T1                                         298

= 90.2 x 103 pa or 9.0 x 104 Pa

  1.            (a)

Velocity ratio    =        Distance effort moves                =       effort distance

Distance load moves             load distance

(b)       (i) Pressure in liquids is transmitted equally throughout the liquid

(ii)       Volume of the oil displace by plunger = volume received

by ram

d x a = A x D

d/D = A/9

But V.R = d/D

\V.R = A/9

Work done on plunger = work done on ram

P x 9 x d = P x A x D

a x d = A x D

Rearranging to have ratio of effort dist to load dist

V.R = d/D = A/9

(c)       (i)        M.A Load/ Effort or substitution

= 4.5 x 103

135

= 33 1/3

= 33.3

(i)        Efficiency = M.A x 100 = 33.3 x 100

V.R                45

= 74%

(ii)       Percentage of work going to waste

= 100 – 74 = 26%

% lost = input – output x 100

Input

= 6075 – 4500 x 100 = 1575 = 25.92

6075                   6075

 

  1.            (a)       When an object is in equilibrium the sum of the anticlockwise

moments about any point is equal to the sum of the clockwise moments about the same point or same point.

(b)       (i)        Volume = 100 x 3 x 0.6 = 180 cm or

 

Mass = volume x density = 180 x 2.7 = 48

W = mg = 486 x 10 = 4.86N

1000

W = mg but M = PV

\W = Pvf

= A 2.7 x 3 x 0.6 x 100 x 10

1000

= 4.86 N

(ii)       Taking moment about R

20F = 15 x 4.86

F= 15 x 4.86 = 3.645N

R= F + W

= 3.645 + 4.86 = 8.51 N

Taking moment about F

20R = 4.86 x 35 = 8.505N

\F = R – W

= 8.505 – 4.86

= 3.645N

(iii)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(iv)      As X increases the distance between F and pivot reduces so F has to increase to maintain equilibrium.

 

 

PAPER 2

  1. -Umbra, total absence of light, total darkness, completely.

-Rays of light are completely blocked from the region or no light reaches this

region

  1. –The leaf in A falls some distance while the leaf in B rises a little distance

– The two leaf electroscopes share charge acquiring same charges

 

 

 

 

  1. Hammering causes the domains (dipoles) in the rod to vibrate, when settling some of the domains align themselves in the N- S direction due to the earths magnetic field causing magnetization.
  2. (i)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. When the switch is closed so that current flows the inner core in the

solenoid is magnetized attracting the flat spring, this causes a break in contact disconnecting the current so that magnetism is lost releasing the spring and repeating the process.

  1. – Movement equals 1. 75 oscillations/ cycles

– So that period T = 0.7 = 0.4 seconds

1.75

f= 1/T = 1/ 0.4 = 2.5Hz

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. (i) V = 0V

Reason No current

(ii)       V = 3v

Reason current flows in the resistor

  1. P = V2 R= 2402

R                    100

  1. Defect- short sightedness (myopia) ½

Cause of defect. Extended eyeball ½ lens, has short focal length lens is too powerful, lens has high refractive power.

  1. The spot moves up and down
  2. The frequency of x- rays increases. Accept – becomes hard, wavelength

shorten (decreases) penetrating power increases, high frequency

  1. Radiation – Beta

Reason- Gain of an electron

– Neutron changes into a proton and an e- is emitted.

– Mass number remains the same, atomic no increases by one.

  1. (a) Temperature, density

(b)       (i)        46.5m

(ii)       V = 4x

t

x/t = slope x 10-1 = (0.51)-1

43

V = 43 x 4 = 337m/s

0.51

(iii)      For maximum internal, observer is at one end so distance = 2L

337 x 4.7 = 2L

L= 792m

(c)       (i)        Distance moved by sound to and from sea bed.

Distance = 98 x 2m

V= 98 x 2                    98

0.14                       0.4

= 1400m/s

(ii)       Distance = v x t

= 1400 x 0.10

2

= 70m

  1. (a) -Light must travel from denser to less dense medium

-Angle of incidence must be greater than critical angle.

(b)       1h2 = Sin i

Sin r

Since i = 90, r = θ

1h2 =   Sin 90

Sin θ

1h2 = 1/ Sin θ

 

 

Alternative

1h2 =   Sin i    = Sin θ = Sin θ

Sin r        Sin 90

 

1h2 =   1          = 1

1h2          Sin θ

 

(c)       (i)        Sin θ = Sin c = 1 = 1  = 0.763

n   1.31

 

θ = 49.80 (49.760)

 

(ii)       X = 90 – θ

= 40.240

 

(iii)      Sin θ = h = 1.31

Sin x

Sin θ = 1.31 x Sin 40.24 = 0.846

θ = 57.8

 

  1. (a) (i)

 

 

 

 

 

 

(ii)

 

(b)       (i)        2.1V

(ii)       The difference in reading is the p.d across the internal resistance r.2.1 V – 1.8 V = 1r = 0.1r

0.1r = 0.3V

r= 0.3 = 3W

0.1

(iii)      When current is being drawn from the cell the p.d across the

external circuit is the one measured.

0.1 x R = 1.8V

R = 1.8 = 18 W

0.1

  1. (a) When the switch is closed , flux in the coil on LHS grows and links

the other coil inducing e.m.f

When the I is steady No. flux change and hence no. when the switch is opened, the flux collapses even in the boil on RHS inducing current in opposite director.

(b)       (i)        Soft iron reduces losses due to hysterisis.

This is because the domains in soft iron respond quickly to changes in magnetic (or have low reluctance) or easily magnetism demagnetized.

(ii)       Laminated core reduces losses due to eddy currents, this is because

laminating cuts- off the loops of eddy currents reducing them  (resistance) considerably.

(c)

Vp =    Np

Vs        Ns

Np       = 400V            Vs=?

Ns

Np = 2000 Ns = 200

2000    = 400

200          Vs

2000 = Vs        Vs = 40V

200      400

Power = IS VS = 800W

Is = 800W

40V

= 20A

(ii)       Pp = Ps

800w = 400 x Ip

Ip = 24

  1. (a)      -Hard x- rays

-They are more penetrating (energetic)

(b)       (i)

A: Cathode rays, electron (s), electron beam

B: Anode (copper anode)

(ii)       Change in p.d across PQ changes the filament current

No. of electrons (Intensity of es) (Temperature of cathode)

This changes the no. of es released by cathode hence intensity of x- rays

(iii)      Most of the energy of e s hitting target is converted into heat.

(iv)      High density.

(c)       Energy of e s = ev = QV

Energy of x- rays = hf (ev = hf)

= 6.62 x 10-34 Js x f

= 6.62 x 10-34 x f = 1.6 x 10-19 x 12000

f = 2.9 x 1018 HZ

 

PRACTICALS

EXPERIMENT 1

You are provided with

  • A pendulum bols with a piece  of thread attached
  • Two wooden blocks
  • Retort stand, clamp and boss
  • Metre rule
  • ½ metre rule attached to wooden  block
  • Cello tape  (2 pieces of about 10cm long)
  • Stop watch

(a) Fix the thread between the two wooden blocks and fasten in the clamp. Adjust the thread so that length L shown the figure below is 50cm. Fix the metre rule horizontally to the bench using the cello tape provided. Adjust the clamps so that the marble is next to the end of the metre rule as shown.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i) Displace the pendulum bob by a horizontal distance x = 10cm and measure the corresponding vertical displacement, h

 

(ii)             Repeat the experiment to find h for each of the following values. X = 25 cm, 10cm, 35cm, 10cm, and 45cm. Complete the table below

X (cm) H (cm) X2 (cm2) X2/h cm
20 400    
25 625    
30 900    
35 1225    
40 1600    
45 2025    

(iii)             Plot the graph of X2/h cm against h starting the X2/h axis scale from 50cm and h- axis scale from zero. Draw the best line through the points.

(iv)             Determine the slopes of the graph                                                     (2 mks)

(v)             From the graph find the value of X2 /h when h = 0                           (1 mrk)

 

 

(b)       Raise the clamp slightly without changing the length I so the pendulum bob is free to swing. Displace the bob through a horizontal distance of about 10cm and let it free to swing.

(i)        Determine the periodic, T for one complete oscillation by timing twenty oscillations.

Time for 20 oscillations =                                                      (1 mark)

Period T                                                                                  (1 mark)

(ii)       Calculate the value of P from the following equation

T= 2x√(P/g ) where g = 10ms-2                                                ( 4 marks)

 

EXPERIMENT 2

You are provided with the following apparatus

  • Two retort stands
  • Two bosses
  • A metre rule
  • A pendulum bob
  • Piece of thread
  • Stop watch or clock

 

Proceed as follows

  1. Tie the thread provided to the pendulum bob securely so that it is the centre of the thread (put the thread through the hole or loop of the bob up to the centre and then make a knot).
  2. Use your pen to mark on the loose ends of the thread, point A and B 50 cm from the point where the bob is tied.
  3. Fix the bosses on the stands at points 60 cm above the bench. Suspend the bob between the two stands by tying the loose ends of the thread to the bosses at the points marked in (b) above. See below (A and B are the marked points).

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Adjust the position of one of the stands (by moving it closer to the other) So that the  distance d is 50cm. Give the bob a small displacement perpendicular to the  plane containing the two portions of the thread and then release it. Measure t1 the time for 10 oscillations Repeat the measurement and record in table below.
  2. Repeat the procedure in (d) for other values of d shown in the table and complete the table.
Distance (cm) 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90
Time t for 10 oscillations in sec                  
Periodic time T (s)                  
T4 (S4)                  
d2 (sm2)                  

 

  1. On the provided grid plot the graph of T4 ( y- axis) against d2
  2. The relationship between T and d is given by the equation

T4 = pd4 + q

Where p and q are constants. Use your graph to determine

  1. p and q (5 marks)
  2. The length I of the thread (3 marks)

 

EXPERIMENT 3

You are provided with the following

  • Metre rule
  • Retort stand, clamp and boss
  • 500ml beaker ¾ full of water
  • 100g  mass
  • 50g mass
  • Three  pieces of thread

 

Proceed as follows:

  • Balance the metre rule horizontal by suspending it from the stand and clamp with one of the threads

Record the balance point G

G = _______cm                                                                      (1 mark)

(b)             Suspend the 100g mass from the metre rule at a point such that x=5 cm from point G. With 100g mass completely immersed in water in the beaker hang the 50g mass from the metre rule and adjust its position until the system is in equilibrium as shown in the diagram below

Note the point of suspension P of the mass P.

P=_______                                                                              (1 mark)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Repeat the procedure for values of x= 5cm, 10cm, 15cm, 25 cm…….. record the values of y in the table below

NOTE: ensure that during each case the position of the thread through G does not change.

 

X (cm) Position of 50g mass Y (cm)
5    
10    
15    
20    
25    

 

(c)       (i)       On the grid provided plot a graph of y against x.                  (5 marks)

(ii)       Determine the slope of the graph                                           (3 marks)

(d)       Find the density d of the liquid given that                                         (4 marks)

Y = (0.68 -12 x 10-5)d

X           0.32

 

EXPERIMENT 4

You are provided with the following

  • A wire soldered to a metallic bar M
  • One clamp, stand  and boss
  • Two masses
  • A stopwatch or clock
  • One metre rule or half metre rule
  • Two wooden blocks

 

Procedure

  • Suspend the bar by the wire such that the length of the wire between the clamp and the bar is 20cm.

Note: ensure that the wire is tightly clamped using the pieces of wood provided and that the metal bar lies horizontally by straightening the wire.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • Place the masses on the first mark (r=2cm) on either side of the centre of the bar.

Note: That the distance between the mark is 2 cm

  • Displace the bar slightly as shown in the figure so that it performs oscillations about a vertical axis through the wire.

This may be achieved by turning the bar about the centre and then releasing it.

  • Measure and record in the table provided the time t for 10 oscillations. Determine the period T.
  • Repeat b, c and d above for other values of r shown on the table. Complete the table.

 

R(cm) 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0
R (m)            
R2 (m2)            
Time for 10 osci. (s)            
Periodic time T (s)            
T2 (S2)            

 

  • (i) Plot a graph of T2 (y- axis) against r2

(ii)       Determine the gradient and intercept of the graph.

Gradient                                                                                  (3 marks)

Intercept                                                                                  (1 mark)

(iii)      Given that the slope S = 4x2

5c

Determine the constant C                                                       (2 marks)

 

(iv)      Given that the T2 intercepts is given by 4x2/c I0 where I0 is a constant, determine the value of I0.                                                       (2 marks)

 

 

ANSWERS TO PRACTICAL QUESTIONS

EXPERIMENT 1

(a)       (i)        h = 3.5 – 6cm                                                              (1 mark)

 

X (cm) h (cm) X2 (cm2) X2/hcm
20 3.5 – 6 400 114-66.7
25 6 – 8 625 104- 78.1
30 9-11 900 100-81.8
35 13-15 1225 94.2 -81.8
40 18-20 1600 88.9-80.0
45 24-26 2025 84.4 – 77.9

(6 marks)

(iii)      – Suitable scale

– Labeling

– Plotting

– Straight line

(iv)      – Reading values from graph

– Evaluating of gradient

(v)       Correct intercept of X2/ h

 

(b)       (i)        t= 28 – 29 sec

T= 1.4 – 1.45 sec

(ii)       – Substitution

– Removal of square root

– P the subject

– Evaluation of P

EXPERIMENT 2

(a)

Distance d (cm) 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90
Time t for 10 oscillations 13.6 13.44 13.06 12.77 12.38 12.0 11.65 10.84 10.09
Periodic time(s) 1.36 1.344 1.306 1.277 1.238 1.2 1.165 1.084 1.009
T4(S4) 3.42 3.26 2.91 2.66 2.35 2.07 1.84 1.38 1.03
D2 (sm2) 2500 3025 3610 4225 4900 5625 6400 7225 8100

 

(b) Graph of T4 (y- axis) against d2

  • Axes labeled with units (1 mark)
  • 6 points correctly plotted ( 2 marks)
  • Scale consistent and accommodates values ( 1 mark)
  • Straight line passing through at least point ( 1 mark)

 

(c) q= y – intercept = 4.5s4

P = gradient ∆T4

∆d2

= 3.42 – 2.07

2500 – 5625

 

= 1.35

-3125

= 4.32 x 10-4 S4/cm2

 

EXPERIMENT 3

(a) G = 50 ± 0.5cm

(b) P = 58.6cm

X (cm) Position of 50g mass Y (cm)
5 58.6 8.6
10 67.3 17.3
15 75.8 25.8
20 84.6 84.6
25 93.1 43.1

 

(c) (i) Gradient of y against x

  • Well labeled axes with units                         ( 1 mark)
  • At least 4 points correctly  plotted               ( 1 mark)
  • Consistent scale accommodating all values ( 1 mark)
  • Straight line through plotted points              ( 1 mark)
  • Title of graph ( 1 mark)

 

(ii)             Slope = ∆Y

∆X

= 34.6 – 8.6                             = 1.73

20-5

Uses values from plotted points

 

(d)             y/x = (0.68 – 12 x 10­5)d

0.32

 

1.73 = (0.68 – 12 x 10-5)d

0.32

D= 0.8g/cm3

 

EXPERIMENT 4

R(CM) 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0
R(M) 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12
R2 (m2) 0.0004 0.0016 0.0036 0.0064 0.01 0.0144
Time for 10 osci. (s) 19.0 20.7 23.51 27.0 30.9 35.0
Periodic time 1.9 2.07 2.35 2.70 3.09 3.50
T2 (S2) 3.61 4.3 5.52 7.29 9.6 12.25

 

(b) (i)       Graph of T2 (y- axis) against r2

  • Well labeled axes with units
  • At least 5 correctly plotted points
  • Consistent scale accommodating all values
  • Straight line through plotted  points

(ii)      Gradient = 12.25 – 7.29

0.0144 – 0.0064

= 4.96

0.0008

= 620S2/m2

Intercept = 3.4 s2

N.B line should be extrapolated

(iii)     Given slope s = 4x2

5c

C= 4x (3.142)2

5 x 620

 

= 1.274 x 10-2 m2/s2

 

I0 = 3.4 x 1.274 x 10-2

4 x (3.142)2

= 1.097 x 10-2m2

 

 

 

PAST KCSE PRACTICAL PAPERS

2007 PRACTICAL PAPER (232/3)

  1. You are provided with the following

– A metre rule

– An optical pin fixed to a piece of cork

– Two retort stands, two bosses and two clamps

– Two wooden blocks

– A stop watch

– Some thread tied to a mass

 

Proceed as follows

Set up the apparatus as shown in figure 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The thread tied to the mass should be held firmly between the two blocks of wood and clamped to the upper end of the stand so that the mass hangs freely. The distance L between the point of support and the centre of the mass is 100cm. Ensure that L remains constant throughout the experiment. Adjust the lower clamp so that the optical pin touches the thread when the hanging mass is at rest.

 

(a)       Adjust the position of the lower clamp so that the pin is at the distance X= 35cm above the centre of the mass. Displace the mass slightly to one side and release it so that it swings in a plane perpendicular to the  pin and the thread hits the pin as shown in figure 2.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Measure and record in table 1 the time, t, for 20 oscillations.

(b)       Repeat the procedure in (b) for other values of X shown in table 1.

On the grid provided

Table 1

Distance x (cm) 35 40 45 50 55 60
Time t for osc  (S)            
T = T/20 = (s)            

 

(c)       Plot the graph of T (y – axis) against X                                             (5 marks)

(d)       Determine the slope S of the graph at a point X = 52 cm                 (3 marks)

(e)       Determine the constant n given that n = 52S2                                               (2 marks)

(f)        Determine the constant P given that P = ∏2/4n                                (2 marks)

 

  1. You are provided with the following

– A Voltemeter

– Two cells and a cell holder

– A switch

– A set of six resistors each of resistance 1000 W

 

Proceed as follows

Set the apparatus as shown in the circuit diagram in figure 3

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a)       (i)        Record the voltemeter reading E, when the crocodile clips are connected

together (R=0)

E = __________ volts

Open the switch and separate the crocodile clips. Indicate by ticking below, the range of the voltmeter used.

0- 3V€            0-5V €            0-15V €

(ii)       Now connect the crocodile clips across resistance R= 1000W. Close the switch and record in table 2 the voltemetre reading V. Open the switch

 

(b)       Repeat the procedure in (b) (ii) for other values of resistance R shown in the table.

Table 2

Resistance R 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
V(v)            
I  (v-1)

V

           

(c)       On the grid provided plot the graph of R (y-axis) against I/V (5 marks)

Hint: Draw your axes to include point (0, 0) half way up the page i.e the I/V axis to run across the middle of the page.

  • Determine the slope S of the graph
  • Determine the constant G given that G = S/E
  • From the graph determine

(i)        V0, the value of V when R-0                                      (1 mark)

(ii)       Rg the value of R when I/V = 0

(iii)      Determine G/R8

 

 

2008 PRACTICAL PAPER

232/3 PRACTICAL

Question 1

This questions consists of two parts A and B attempt both parts

PART A

You are provided with the following:

  • Copper wire
  • A retort stand, boss and clamp
  • An optical pin mounted on a cork
  • A stop watch
  • Wire cutters (to be shared)
  • A metre rule or half metre rule
  • Clamp the cork so that the optical pin is horizontal. Hang the copper wire from the pin by the loop as shown in figure 1. Ensure the wire is straight and the length X between the lower tip and the optical pin is 32 cm. If the length exceeds 32 cm reduce by cutting at the lower tip using the wire cutters provided.

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • Displace the lower tip of the wire slightly in a plane perpendicular to the optical pin and then release it. Measure the time t for 20 oscillations of the wire and record the value in table.

 

  • Repeat the procedure in (b) above for other values of X shown in the table. (Note that each length X is obtained by cutting off an appropriate length from the lower tip of the wire. For example to get X= 28cm cut off 4 cm from the lower end). Complete the table.
Length X (cm) 32 28 24 20 16 12
Time t for 20 oscillations (S)            
Period (T = t/20(S)            
T2 (S2)            
  • Plot a graph of T2 (y- axis) against x
  • (i) Determine the slope, S, of the graph (3 marks)

(ii) Obtain the value of k in the equation                  (2 marks)

S= 8 π

3k

PART B

You are provided with the following:

  • A cylindrical container
  • Some water
  • A stop watch
  • A metre ruler of half–metre rule
  • A boiling tube
  • Some sand
  • A rubber band

Proceed as follows:

  • Tie the rubber band round the boiling tube so that it is at a distance L= 12 cm from the bottom of the tube (see fig 21). Pour water into cylindrical container until the level is about 2.0 cm from the top of the beaker. Float the boiling tube in the water in the container. Add sand gradually into the boiling tube until the tube sinks to the 12 cm mark. See figure 2 (b).

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • Depress the boiling tube slightly and release so that is oscillates vertically without touching the sides of the container. Measure and record in table 2 the time t1, for five oscillations of the boiling tube, Repeat the procedure two more times to obtain t2, and t3 and record the values in table 2. Complete the table.

Table 2

T1 (S) T2 (S) T3 (S) Average t (S)

T= (t1 + t2 + t3)

3

T = t (S)

5

         

(3 marks)

(h)             Evaluate P=40L given that L is the length of the tube up to the rubber band in (f) and T is the value obtained in (g) above.                                             (2 marks)

P_________

Questions 2

This question consists of two parts A and B attempt both parts.

PART A

You are provided with the following:

  • A triangular glass prism
  • A piece of soft board
  • Four (4) optical pins
  • A sheet of plain paper

Proceed as follows

  • Place the plain sheet of paper on the soft board. Trace the triangular outline of the prism on the sheet of paper. Remove the prism and use a ruler to extend the three sides of the outline. See figure 3 (a).

 

 

 

 

 

 

Use a protractor to measure the refracting angle R of the prism

  • On the side AB of the triangular outline, draw a normal at a point half-way between A and B. This normal will be used for the rest of this experiment.
  • Draw a line at an angle I = 300 to the normal. Stick two pins P1 and p2 vertically on this line. See figure 3 (a)
  • Place the prism accurately on the outline. By viewing through the prism from side AC stick two other P3 and P4 vertically such that they are in line with the images of pins P1 P2. Remove the prism and the pins. Draw a line joining marks made by P3 and P4. Extended this line to meet AC. (see figure 3 (b). Measure and record in table 3 the value of angle θ.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • Repeat the procedures in (c) and (d) above for other values of I shown in table 3. Complete the table.

 

Angle of incidence I (degree) 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
Angle θ (deg)              
Angle of emergence              

 

  • (i)       On the grid provided plot the graph of the angle of emergence E (y- axis)

against the angle of incidence I                                             ( 5 marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(ii)       Use the graph to find i0 the angle of incidence at which I = E (1 mark)

(iii)      Evaluate

(I)        y = 2i0 – R

(II)       b= 2 sin i0

 

 

PART B

You are provided with the following:

  • A lens and a lens holder
  • A screen with cross-wires
  • A candle
  • A metre rule
  • Arrange the lightened candle, the lens and the screen as shown in figure 4. Adjust the position of the screen until a sharp inverted image of the candle is formed on the screen.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i)        Measure the image distance V

V= _____cm

(ii)       Determine the focal length of the lens using the formula f= uv/u+v (1 mk)

  • Now arrange the lightened candle, the screen with cross wires and the lens as shown in figure 5. Ensure that the centre of the lens, the cross-wires and the

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

candle flame lie on the same horizontal line. The candle flames should be placed close to the cross-wires for better illumination.

  • Adjust the position of the lens until a sharp image of the cross-wire is formed on the screen next to the cross-wires. (Hint you have to rotate the lens slightly about a vertical axis so that the image of the cross-wires falls on the screen next to the cross-wires and not on the cross-wires).

Measure the distanced between the lens and the screen.

D ________ cm                                                                                  (1 mark)

(ii) Evaluate:

(I)        L =      df

f-d                                                                   (1 mark)

(II)       X =      L + 1

2f                                                                     (1 mark)

 

ANSWERS TO KCSE PRACTICAL PAPERS

2007 PRACTICAL PAPER 3

  1. (c)

Table 1

Distance X (cm) 35 40 45 50 55 60
Time t for 20 osc (s) 31.5 33.3 34.5 35.4 36.2 36.6
T= t (s)

20

29.5 – 33.5 31.3 – 35.3 32.5 – 36.5 33.4 – 37.4 34.2-38.2 34.6

(d)

(a)       Slope tangent at X = 51- 53 shown                                        (1 mark)

With correct shape and direction, correct interval                (1 mark)

 

(b)       Correct substitution                                                                (1 mark)

Correct evaluation to 4 s. figures or 2 decimal places in standard form                                                                                                                  (1 mark)

(c)       Substitution of n

Correct evaluation to nearest whole number OR check 2 decimal places in std form (Decimal form)                                                        (1 mark)

 

  1. (b) (i)

E = 3.0 + 0.2 volts 2.8 – 3.2 V (2 cells)

OR       E = 1.5 + 0.1V = 1.4 – 1.6V (1 cell)

2008 PRACTICAL PAPER 3

  1. (c)

 

Length X (cm) 32 28 24 20 16 12
Time t for 20 oscillations (S) 18.50 17.40 16.10 14.60 13.30 11.20
Period (T = t/20(S) 0.925 0.870 0.808 0.738 0.665 0.560
T2 (S2) 0.856 0.757 0.652 0.544 0.442 0.314

(d) Graph

 

(e) (i) Slope = 0.54 – 0.30

20-11

 

=0.24   = 0.0267 s2

9                   cm

 

(ii) S = 2

3k              0.0267 = 2

3k

\k =

3x 0.0267

= 313. 767

Grade 7 English Free CBC Schemes of Work {Updated Version)

GRADE7SKILLSINENGLISHSCHEMESOFWORKTERM3

NAMEOFTHETEACHER                                                                     SCHOOL                                              YEAR                          TERM              III       

Week LSN strand Sub-strand SpecificLearningOutcomes KeyInquiryQuestion(s) LearningExperiences LearningResources AssessmentMethods Refl
1 1 TRADITIONALFASHION ListeningtoRespond:Views/Opinions Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)listwaysofexpressingviews/opinionsindifferentcontexts,

b)Identifywayofexpressingviews/opinionsfromtexts,

c)Acknowledgethevalueofone’sviews/opinionsasalifelongskillincommunication.

1.Howareopinionsexpressed?

2.Whyisitimportanttoexpressone’sopinion?

 

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•searchonlineandofflineforthedifferentwaysofexpressingviews/opinions,

•listentoanoralnarrativeandidentifythedifferentwaysusedtoexpressopinions/views,

 

Digitaldevice,

Recordednarratives

pictures

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.164-168

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.143-144

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  2   ListeningtoRespond:Views/Opinions Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)listwaysofexpressingviews/opinionsindifferentcontexts,

b)usedifferentexpressionsthatindicateownviews/opinionsinagiventext,

c)Acknowledgethevalueofone’sviews/opinionsasalifelongskillincommunication.

3.Howcanexpressingopinion/viewsaffectrelationships? Thelearnerisguidedto:

•ingroups,roleplaythedifferentcharactersinthenarrativeandbringoutdifferentwaysofexpressingopinions/views,

•explaintheirfeelingstowardsissuesraisedinthetricksternarrative,

•writeonachart,thewordstheyhaveusedtodescribetheirfeelings.

Digitaldevice,

Recordednarratives

pictures

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.164-168

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.143-144

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  3 Reading IntensiveReading-Comprehension Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)identifymainideasinatext,

b)usecontextualcluestoinferthemeaningofwordsinatext,

c)Appreciatetheimportanceofreadingcomprehensioninlifelonglearning.

1.Whyshouldwerecreatecharacters,placesandeventsinourminds?

2.Howcanwetellthemeaningofwordsandphrasesinatext?

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•downloadandsharetextswithmentalimagesfromthetextsanddrawconclusions,

•readapassageindividually,andidentifykeywordsinthepassage,

•inferthemeaningofwordsusingcontextualclues,

•choosedescriptivepartsofthepassageontraditionalfashionandsharethevividimagescreatedintheirmind,

Digitaldevice,

Printandonlinedictionaries

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.169-171

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.144-146

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  4   IntensiveReading-Comprehension Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)describecharacters,ideasoreventsinatext,

b)summarizeinformationfromashorttext,

c)Appreciatetheimportanceofreadingcomprehensioninlifelonglearning.

1.Whyshouldwerecreatecharacters,placesandeventsinourminds?

2.Howcanwetellthemeaningofwordsandphrasesinatext?

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•ingroups,roleplaythecharactersandeventsinthetext,

•usecontextualcluestodecipherthemeaningofwords,

•answerquestionsbasedonthepassage

•giveanappropriatetitletoastoryorpassage.

Digitaldevice,

Printandonlinedictionaries

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.169-171

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.144-146

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  5 Grammarinuse PhrasalVerbs Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)identifyphrasalverbsformedfromput,comeandgiveinagiventext,

b)definethetermphrasalverb,

c)Acknowledgetheroleofphrasalverbsincommunication.

1.Howarephrasalverbsformed?

2.Whatmeaningsareexpressedthroughphrasalverbs?

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•readatextandidentifythephrasalverbsformedfromput,comeandgivepresent,

•ingroups,searchonlineandusechartsformeaningsofthephrasalverbstheyhaveidentified,

 

Digitaldevice,

Printandonlinedictionaries

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.171-173

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.146-148

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
2 1   PhrasalVerbs Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)identifyphrasalverbsformedfromput,comeandgiveinagiventext,

b)usegivenphrasalverbscorrectlyinsentenceconstruction,

c)Acknowledgetheroleofphrasalverbsincommunication.

3.WhyshouldweusePhrasalVerbscorrectly? Thelearnerisguidedto:

•fillinblanksinatextusingthemostappropriatephrasalverb,

•searchontheinternetformoreexamplesofphrasalverbs,

•constructsentencesusingthephrasalverbsinpairs.

Digitaldevice,

Printandonlinedictionaries

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.171-173

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.146-148

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  2 Reading ClassReader:MainIdeas Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)identifythemainideasinthesectionreadinthetext,

b)discussthelessonslearntfromthetext

c)Appreciatetheroleofliteratureinfosteringcriticalthinking.

1.Whydopeoplereadstorybooks?

2.Whatistheimportanceofreadingashortstory?

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•readasectionofthetextaloudinturnsanddramatizetheevents

•discussthemainideasinthesectionsreadinthetextingroups

 

Digitaldevice,

Printandonlinedictionaries

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.173-174

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.148-150

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  3   ClassReader:MainIdeas Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)discussthelessonslearntfromthetext

b)relatethelessonslearnttoreallifeexperiences

c)Appreciatetheroleofliteratureinfosteringcriticalthinking.

1.Whydopeoplereadstorybooks?

2.Whatistheimportanceofreadingashortstory?

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•relatethelessonslearntfromthesectionreadtoreallifeexperiencesingroups

•drawachartshowingthesequenceofthemaineventsinthesectionread

•searchonlineandwatchanadapteddramatizationofthesectionread.

Digitaldevice,

Printandonlinedictionaries

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.173-174

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.148-150

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  4 Writing ThewritingProcess:Dialogues Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)outlinetheformatofadialogue

b)UsingITdevices,findmoreondialogues.

c)Acknowledgetheimportanceofthewritingprocessinacquiringgoodwritingskills.

1.Whatisthedifferencebetweenadialogueandanarrativecomposition?

 

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•searchonlineandofflineforanexampleofadialogue

•dramatizetheidentifieddialogue

•ingroups,discusstheformatofthedialoguetheyhaveidentified

•Individuallyfillinmissingwordsinasetdialogueontraditionalfashion

•Inpairs,discussthecorrectnessofthewordstheyhaveused

Digitaldevice,

Printandonlinedictionaries

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.175-177

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.150-152

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  5   ThewritingProcess:Dialogues Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)outlinetheformatofadialogue

b)applythewritingprocessinwritingadialogue

c)Acknowledgetheimportanceofthewritingprocessinacquiringgoodwritingskills.

2.Whatshouldweconsiderbeforewritingadialogue? Thelearnerisguidedto:

•individually,createaroughdraftofashortdialogueusingtheformattheyhaveidentified

•ingroups,editeachother’sdialoguetocheckforrepetition,clarity,grammar,spellingandpunctuationinpairs

•revisethedialogueindividually,

Digitaldevice,

Printandonlinedictionaries

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.175-177

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.150-152

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
3 1 LANDTRAVEL ListeningComprehension:ExtensiveListening Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)identifythekeyissuesraisedinsongsaddressinglandtravel,

b)listenattentivelytosongsonlandtravel,

C)Acknowledgetheimportanceofextensivelisteningincommunication.

1.Howcanwetellthemainmessageinasong?

 

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•listentosongsonlocalandinternationallandtravelfromaudiorecordings,

•respondtocomprehensionquestionsonkeyissuesraisedinthesong,

•pickoutkeyissuesraisedfromasongsungbytheteacherorresourcepersononlandtravel,

Digitaldevice,

Wallcharts

Playsongs

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.178-182

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.153-154

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  2   ListeningComprehension:ExtensiveListening Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)listenattentivelytosongsonlandtravel,

b)usevocabularyidentifiedfromsongsonlandtravelcorrectly,

c)Acknowledgetheimportanceofextensivelisteningincommunication.

2.Howcanwedrawmeaningsfromthewordsusedinasong?

3.Howaresongsmadeinteresting?

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•shareideasonthekeyissuesaddressedinthesongstheyhavelistenedtousingwallcharts,

•identifyvocabularyusedinsongsonlandtravelandinfertheirmeaningfromcontext,

•constructsentencesorallyusingthevocabularylearnt,

•singchoralsongsonlandtravel.

Digitaldevice,

Wallcharts

Playsongs

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.178-182

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.153-154

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  3 Reading IntensiveReading:

ComprehensionStrategies

Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)identifykeyideasfromapassage,

b)summarizekeyideasfromapassage,

c)Acknowledgetheimportanceofcomprehensionstrategiesineffectivereading.

1.Howdoyougetthemeaningofawordsfromapassage?

 

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•readselectedgradeappropriatepassagesonissuesrelatedtolandtravelsuchassafetyandsecurityfromprintandon-linesources,

•discussopinionsformedaboutthecharactersorideaspresentedinthepassage,

Digitaldevice,

Drawingpapers

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.183-184

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.154-157

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  4   IntensiveReading:

ComprehensionStrategies

Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)creatementalimagesfromtheeventsinapassage,

b)deducethemeaningofwordsfromcontext,

c)respondtofactualandinferentialquestions,correctlyfromthepassage

d)Acknowledgetheimportanceofcomprehensionstrategiesineffectivereading.

2.Whatistheimportanceofreadingapassage?

3.Whatmakespeoplewritepassages?

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•inferthemeaningofwordsbasedonhowtheyhavebeenusedinthepassage

•completeoralandwrittenexercisesusingthevocabularylearnt,

•answerfactualandinferentialquestionsfromthepassages,bothorallyandinwriting,

•Summarizekeyideaspresentedinthepassagesbyparaphrasing,

Digitaldevice,

Drawingpapers

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.183-184

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.154-157

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  5 Grammarinuse Sentences:SimpleSentences Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)Identifysimplesentencesfromvariedtexts,

b)differentiatebetweenprintandnon-printtexts,

c)Advocatetheimportanceofusingavarietyofsentencesincommunication.

1.Whatistheroleofsentencesinatext?2.Whatconstitutesasimplesentence? Thelearnerisguidedto:

•listenkeenlytoapoemorastoryonlandtravelandwritedownallthesimplesentencesthatfeatureinthetexts,

•readaprintornon-printtextonlandtravelingroupsandidentifythesimplesentences,

Digitaldevice,

recordings

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.185-186

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.157-160

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
4 1   Sentences:SimpleSentences Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)Identifysimplesentencesfromvariedtexts,

b)constructsimplesentencesonavarietyofissues,

c)Advocatetheimportanceofusingavarietyofsentencesincommunication.

3.Howdoyoudeterminewhattoincludeinasentence? Thelearnerisguidedto:

•tellachainstoryfeaturingsimplesentencesingroups,

•completeasubstitutiontablefeaturingsimplesentences,

•completeamindmaptopracticeconstructionofsimplesentences,

•writeashortdialogueusingsimplesentencesandshareitwithpeerson-lineandoff-line.

Digitaldevice,

recordings

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.185-186

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.157-160

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  2 Reading OralLiterature:PraiseSongs Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)identifythepurposeandoccasionsforwhichpraisesongsareperformed,

b)discusstherelationshipbetweenthesingerandthepersonbeingpraisedinpraisesongs,

c)Appreciatethepurposeofpraisesongsincommunication.

1.Whydowesing?2.Whatkindofpeoplearepraisedinsongs? Thelearnerisguidedto:

•listentopraisesongsfromaudiovisualsourcesorfromaresourceperson,

•identifyanddiscussthepurposeofthepraisesongstheyhavelistenedto,

 

Digitaldevice,

recordings

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.187-189

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.160-162

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  3   OralLiterature:PraiseSongs Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)performpraisesongssangintheirimmediateenvironment

b)collaboratewithpeersinperformingthepraisesongs,

c)Appreciatethepurposeofpraisesongsincommunication.

3.Howdosongsportraypeople’scharacter?4.Whatarethequalitiesofagoodsinger? Thelearnerisguidedto:

•shareideasontherelationshipbetweenthesingerandthepersonbeenpraisedinthepraisesongstheyhavelistenedto,

•identifyapraisesongsangintheirimmediateenvironmentingroups,

•presentpraisesongsingroupstotheclassandshareexperiences,

•discussthecharactertraitsofthesinger(s)asbroughtoutinthepraisesong(s).

Digitaldevice,

recordings

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.187-189

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.160-162

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  4 Writing CreativeWriting:NarrativeComposition Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)explainthemeaningofspecifiedidiomsincontext,

b)createwellwrittennarrativecompositionsusingthespecifiedidioms,c)appreciatetheroleofidiomsincreativewriting

1.Whatmakesastorymemorable?2.Whatistheimportanceofusingidiomsincommunication? Thelearnerisguidedto:

•brainstormonthereasoncreativewritersuseidiomaticexpressionsinwriting,

•explainsituationsthatcallfortheuseofthefollowingidiomaticexpressions:

obitingoffmorethanyoucanchew

oownuptosomething

ohavingalotonyourplate

ocallitaday

opieceofcake

oholdyourtongue

Digitaldevice,

Printandonlinedictionaries

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.190-192

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.163-164

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  5   CreativeWriting:NarrativeComposition Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)explainthemeaningofspecifiedidiomsincontext,

b)createwellwrittennarrativecompositionsusingthespecifiedidioms,c)appreciatetheroleofidiomsincreativewriting

1.Whatmakesastorymemorable?2.Whatistheimportanceofusingidiomsincommunication? Thelearnerisguidedto:

•confirmthemeaningoftheidiomaticexpressionsfromprintandon-linedictionaries,

•practiceusingtheidiomaticexpressionsinsentences,•plananarrativecompositioningroups,incorporatingthespecifiedidiomaticexpressions,onthethemeoflandtravel,

•writeanarrativecompositionindividually

•Peerrevieweachother’sworkandreviseasperthesuggestionsgiven.

Digitaldevice,

Printandonlinedictionarico

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
5 1 SPORTSANDOUTDOORGAMES Pronunciation:ConsonantSoundsandIntonation Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)identifywordswiththesounds/v/,/f/,/n/and/ŋ/fromatext,

b)pronouncewordswiththesounds/v/,/f/,/n/and/ŋ/insentences,

c)Appreciatetheimportanceofcorrectpronunciationandintonationinaconversation.

1.Whyshouldpeoplepronouncewordscorrectly?

2.Howcanonelearntopronouncewordscorrectly?

 

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•searchfromprintandnon-printsourcesfortonguetwisterswithsomeofthetargetsoundsandsaythemforenjoyment,

•watchavideoorlistentoarecordingorconversationonoutdoorgamesandgroupthewordsinatableaccordingtothetothefollowingtargetsounds:v/asinvery;/f/asinferry/n/asinbeenan/ŋ/asinbeing,

Digitaldevice,

Recordingdevice

Playconversations

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.193-197

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.165-167

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  2   Pronunciation:ConsonantSoundsandIntonation Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)pronouncewordswiththesounds/v/,/f/,/n/and/ŋ/insentences,

b)usecorrectintonationforyes/noandwh-questionsinvariedcontexts,

c)Appreciatetheimportanceofcorrectpronunciationandintonationinaconversation.

3.WhatkindofquestionsrequireYesorNoasananswer? Thelearnerisguidedto:

•listentoandmodelnativespeakerclipswiththetargetsoundsinwords,

•practice,ingroups,thepronunciationofwordswiththetargetandrecordthemselves,

•sharetheclipsforpeerreview,

•listentoanaudiooradramatizedconversationonoutdoorgamesinwhichYes/NoandWH-questionsareusedandpointoutwhetherarisingorfallingintonationisused,

Digitaldevice,

Recordingdevice

Playconversations

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.193-197

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.165-167

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  3 Reading StudySkills:

Summarizing

Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)identifythemainideasintexts,

b)writeasummaryofideasfromvariedtexts,

c)Appreciatetheimportanceofsummarizinginformationinagivencontext.

1.Howdoweidentifymainideasfromatext?

2.Whyisitimportanttosummarizeinformation?

 

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•brainstormonthestepstofollowwhenwritingasummaryofatext,

•inpairs,readaprintornon-printtextonvariedissuesincludingoutdoorgamesandunderlinethemainideas,

•makenotesfromtheunderlinedsentencesandusethemtomakearoughdraft,

Digitaldevice,

Varietybooks

newspapers

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.198-199

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.167-170

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  4   StudySkills:

Summarizing

Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)identifythemainideasintexts,

b)writeasummaryofideasfromvariedtexts,

c)Appreciatetheimportanceofsummarizinginformationinagivencontext.

3.Whatfactorsshouldoneconsiderwhensummarizinganevent?

4.Inwhichactivitiesorjobscansummarizingbeuseful?

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•usetheroughdrafttomakeafaircopy,

•sharethesummariesthroughchartsforpeerreview,

•checkandmakecorrectionsonthewrittensummarizedpiecesingroups,

•discussinpairsthepurposeofmakingsummaries.

Digitaldevice,

Varietybooks

newspapers

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.198-199

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.167-170

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  5 Grammarinuse Sentences:

Subject-VerbAgreement

Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)identifythesubjectandtheverbinsentences,

b)constructsentencesensuringsubject-verbagreement,

c)Affirmtheimportanceofsubject-verbagreementinsentences.

1.Whatisasubjectinasentence?

2.Whichruleshouldwefollowwhenconstructingasentence?

 

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•readtextsonvariedtopicssuchasoutdoorgamesandidentifythe,subjectandverbsinthesentences

•brainstormandmakeshortnotesontherelationshipbetweenasubjectandaverbinasentenceintermsofnumberandperson

 

Digitaldevice,

Chartsonverbagreement

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.200-201

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.170-172

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
6 1   Sentences:

Subject-VerbAgreement

Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)identifythesubjectandtheverbinsentences,

b)constructsentencesensuringsubject-verbagreement,

c)Affirmtheimportanceofsubject-verbagreementinsentences.

3.Whatisthedifferencebetweenthefirst,secondandthethirdpersons? Thelearnerisguidedto:

•readsentencesandlabelsubject-verbagreementinthem,

•makesentencesbasedonoutdoorsportsinwhichtheruleofsubjectverbagreementhasbeenapplied,

•sharethesentencesinchartsforpeerreview.

Digitaldevice,

Chartsonverbagreement

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.200-201

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.170-172

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  2 Reading Classreader:

Featuresofstyle

Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)identifyinstancesofdialogue,similesandmetaphorsinthetext,

b)usethestylesofdialogue,similesandmetaphorsinguidedcontexts,

c)Appreciatetheimportanceofstyleinaworkofart.

1.Whichstylisticfeatureshaveyoucomeacrossindifferenttexts?

 

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•searchonlineandofflineforexamplesofdialogue,similesandmetaphorsinstoriesandthemwiththerestoftheclass,

•inpairs,readtheclassreaderandidentifywithillustrationsinstancesofdialogue,similesandmetaphorsinthetext,anddisplaytheirworkontheclassnoticeboards,

Digitaldevice,

Selectedclassreaders

Artsupplies

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.202-203

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.172-175

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  3   Classreader:

Featuresofstyle

Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)identifyinstancesofdialogue,similesandmetaphorsinthetext,

b)usethestylesofdialogue,similesandmetaphorsinguidedcontexts,

c)Appreciatetheimportanceofstyleinaworkofart.

2.Howcanweconveyamessagemoreeffectively?

3.Whydoweusesimilesandmetaphors?

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•ingroups,roleplayselecteddialoguesfromtheclassreaderandrecordthemselvesforvideosharingandreview,

•makesentencesusingthesimilesandmetaphorsidentifiedfromthetext,

•discussinstancesinreallifewheredialogues,similesandmetaphorscanbeused.

Digitaldevice,

Selectedclassreaders

Artsupplies

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.202-203

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.172-175

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  4 Writing CreativeWriting:

DescriptiveWriting

(200–240words)

Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)identifyfeaturesofapersonathingoraplacethatcanbedescribed,

b)writeadescriptivecompositiononagivensubject,

c)Underscoretheimportanceofcreativewritingincommunication.

1.Howcanyoudescribeyourbestfriend?

2.Howcanyoudescribesomethingsinyourschool?

 

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•inpairs,viewvideosorpicturesofpeople,thingsorplacesandlistthefeaturesofeachthatcanbedescribedinanessay,

•searchonlineandofflineforwordsandexpressionsthatcanbeusedtodescribedifferentfeatureslikeweatheremotions,eventsandcharacters,

Digitaldevice,

Pictures

Realia

Sampleessays

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.204-206

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.175-178

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  5   CreativeWriting:

DescriptiveWriting

(200–240words)

Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)identifyfeaturesofapersonathingoraplacethatcanbedescribed,

b)writeadescriptivecompositiononagivensubject,

c)Underscoretheimportanceofcreativewritingincommunication.

3.Whatdoyouconsiderwhendescribingsomething? Thelearnerisguidedto:

•explainthedifferencebetweendescriptivewritingandotherformsofwriting,

•ingroups,theyreadsamplesofdescriptiveessaysandclassifythefeaturesthataredescribedandtheexpressionsusedinagraphicorganizerforsharing,

•createadescriptivecompositionofbetween200to240wordsonaninterestingtopiclikeoutdoorsportsanddisplayitinagalleryforpeerreviewandrevision.

Digitaldevice,

Pictures

Realia

Sampleessays

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.204-206

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.175-178

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
7 1 TOURISTSATTRACTIONSITES Listeningandspeaking-Oral

Reports:EventswithintheClassroom

Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)outlinetheorganizationofanoralreportofeventswithintheclassroom,

b)presentanoralreportoneventsthatoccurwithintheclassroom,

c)Enjoydeliveringandlisteningtooralreportsinvariouscontexts.

 

1.Whichactivitiescanyoureportaboutthathappenintheclassroom?

2.Whatmakesagoodoralreport?

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•brainstormingroupsonthecontentandorganizationofanoralreporte.g.introduction,bodyandconclusion,

•searchinpairsonlineandofflinethestepsforconductinganoralreporte.g.research,compile(write),rehearseandreport(present/deliver),

Digitaldevice,

Dictionaries

Flashcards

Manilapaper

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.207-209

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.179-181

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  2   Listeningandspeaking-Oral

Reports:EventswithintheClassroom

Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)outlinetheorganizationofanoralreportofeventswithintheclassroom,

b)presentanoralreportoneventsthatoccurwithintheclassroom,

c)Enjoydeliveringandlisteningtooralreportsinvariouscontexts.

3.Howcanyoumakeanoralreportpresentationinteresting?

 

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•roleplaymethodsofdeliveringoralreportssuchasclearpronunciation,voiceprojection,tonalvariation,useofnon-verbalcuesanduseofvisuals,

•useflashcardstopreparespeakingnotesforthereports,

•simulateingroupsanoralreportpreparationanddeliveryprocedureandvideooraudiorecordthemselves,

Digitaldevice,

Dictionaries

Flashcards

Manilapaper

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.207-209

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.179-181

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  3 Reading ReadingFluency Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)recognizetheuseoffluencystrategiesinthereadingprocess,

b)applyfluencystrategieswhilereading,

c)Hailtheroleofreadingfluencyincommunication.

 

1.Whyisitimportanttoreadfluently?

2.Whatmakesoneagoodreader?

3.Howcanyouimproveyourreadingfluency?

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•watchandlistentovideosorstudentsreadingfluentlyanddiscusswhatmakesthemgoodreaders,

•searchonlineandofflinefordifferentreadingfluencystrategiessuchaspreviewingandpredicting,skimming,scanningandignoring

unknownwordsandsharewithpeers,

Digitaldevice,

Dictionaries

Digitaldevices

Audiclips

Internetsources

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.210-212

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.181-184

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  4   ReadingFluency Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)recognizetheuseoffluencystrategiesinthereadingprocess,

b)applyfluencystrategieswhilereading,

c)Hailtheroleofreadingfluencyincommunication.

 

1.Whyisitimportanttoreadfluently?

2.Whatmakesoneagoodreader?

3.Howcanyouimproveyourreadingfluency?

 

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•inpairs,watchorlistentosamplereadingclipsandsimulatethemodelreadingastheyapplyreadingstrategies,

•practice,ingroups,timedreading,accuratereadingandreadingwithexpressiononissuesliketouristattractionsitesinKenya,

•assesspeers’readingonthebasisoftheaspectsoffluency–accuracy,speed,reading,

Digitaldevice,

Dictionaries

Digitaldevices

Audiclips

Internetsources

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.210-212

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.181-184

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  5 grammarinuse Affirmativeand

NegativeSentences

Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)differentiatebetweenaffirmativeandnegativesentencesinspokenandwrittencontexts,

b)constructaffirmativeandnegativesentencesinvariedcontexts,

c)Acknowledgetheexpressiveroleofsentencesineffectivecommunication.

 

1.Whendoweuseaffirmativestatements?

2.Whendoweusenegativestatements?

 

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•searchonlineandofflineforthedifferencesbetweenaffirmativeandnegativesentencesandsharethemwithpeers,

•roleplayadialoguewithaffirmativeandnegativesentencesandrecordthemselves,

•watch/listentoaconversationonissuesliketouristsitesinKenyaandpickoutingroupstheaffirmativeandnegativesentences,

Digitaldevice,

Dictionaries

Digitaldevices

Audiclips

Internetsources

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.213-215

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.184-186

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
8 1   Affirmativeand

NegativeSentences

Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)differentiatebetweenaffirmativeandnegativesentencesinspokenandwrittencontexts,

b)constructaffirmativeandnegativesentencesinvariedcontexts,

c)Acknowledgetheexpressiveroleofsentencesineffectivecommunication.

3.Whyisitimportanttousetherightsentencewhensayingsomething?

 

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•sortjumbledupsentencesintoaffirmativeandnegativesentences

•constructaffirmativeandnegativesentences,

•sharesentencesmadeintheformofchartsforpeerreview,

•writeashortstoryordialogueonanissueliketouristattractionsitesinKenyausingaffirmativeandnegativesentences.

Digitaldevice,

Dictionaries

Digitaldevices

Audiclips

Internetsources

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.213-215

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.184-186

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  2 Reading Poetry Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)identifythesubjectmatterofapoem

b)analyzeideasinthepoem

c)Reiteratetheroleofpoetryinpassinginformation.

1.Whywouldyouuseapoeminsteadofastorytopassinformation?

2.Whatmakesapoeminterestingtoread?

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•recitepoemsforenjoymentandinpairsoutlinethesubjectmatter,

•searchonlineandofflineforwaysofdeterminingideasinapoemsuchasstudyingthetitle,thepersona,theeventsandthechoiceofwords,

Digitaldevice,

Dictionaries

Digitaldevices

Audiclips

Internetsources

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.216-218

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.186-189

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  3   Poetry Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)identifythesubjectmatterofapoem

b)analyzeideasinthepoem

c)Reiteratetheroleofpoetryinpassinginformation.

3.Whatkindofideascanoneconveyusingapoem?

 

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•discusshowtheuseofrepetitionandotherstylescanhelpbringouttheideasinthepoem,

•ingroups,pickapoemandidentifytheideasbroughtoutandsharetheirfindingswithpeersthroughchartsorgraphicorganizersforreview,

•dramatizeapoemdisplayingideasgeneratedfromitusingplacardsandrecordtheirperformances.

Digitaldevice,

Dictionaries

Digitaldevices

Audiclips

Internetsources

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.216-218

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.186-189

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  4 Writing Functional

Writing:NoticesandPosters

Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)outlinetheformatofpresentingnoticesandposters

b)statethepartsofanoticeandposters

c)Acknowledgetheroleofnoticesandpostersindisseminatinginformation.

 

1.Whatkindofmessagesdopostersconvey?

2.Whyarenoticesimportantinthecommunity

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•collectpostersandnoticesonlineorofflinetouristattractionsitesinKenyaanddisplaytheminclass

•brainstormontheformatforpresentingofnoticesandpostersingroups

•studysamplesofanoticeandaposterpresentedinclassandlabelfeaturesofformat

Digitaldevice,

Dictionaries

Digitaldevices

Audiclips

Internetsources

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.218-220

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.190-192

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
  5   Functional

Writing:NoticesandPosters

Bytheendofthelesson,thelearnershouldbeableto:

a)outlinetheformatofpresentingnoticesandposters

b)designnoticesandpostersoncurrentissues

c)Acknowledgetheroleofnoticesandpostersindisseminatinginformation.

3.Howcanonemakeaposteroranoticeattractive?

 

Thelearnerisguidedto:

•differentiatebetweenaposterandanoticeinwriting

•discussandselectissue(s)thatcanbeaddressedbynoticesandpostersincludingmattersrelatingtotouristattractionsitesinKenya

•designanoticeandaposterontheselectedissueusingthemodelformatanddisplayforpeerreview

•keeptherevisednoticeandposterintheirportfolio.

Digitaldevice,

Dictionaries

Digitaldevices

Audiclips

Internetsources

SkillsinEnglishGrade7T.GPg.218-220

SkillsinEnglishGrade7PB.Pg.190-192

Checklist

Questions

Journal

Learnersportfolio

Writtenassessment

 
9 ENDTERMASSESSMENT/CLOSING